HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 6027 - Contract - Lubbock Building Services - Buddy Holly Center Renovations - 10_08_1998Resolution No. 6027
Item No. 32
October 8, 1998
RESOLUTION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and
directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract with Lubbock
Building Services of Lubbock, TX to install and furnish all materials and services as bid
for the Buddy Holly Center Renovations and all related documents. Said Contract is
attached hereto and incorporated in this Resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be
included in the minutes of the Council.
Passed by the City Council this
8th day of October , 1998.
L/00ALE f! , .�
..
ATTEST:
/�Xlu -) AA�l ]A
yt Mfieli, City Secre
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
Victor Kilifian,olurchasing Manager
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
William de Haas
Competition and Contracts Manager/Attorney
Wd:dk/Buddy Holly Renovations.RES
ccdocs/September 29, 1998
7
C0 D e-9 7
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
BUDDY HOLLY CENTER RENOVATIONS
BID #98184
OJ'
A� A�
/ / //
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Lubbock, Texas
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock. Texas 79457
(806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164
ADDENDUM #5
ITB #98184
BUDDY HOLLY CENTER
RENOVATIONS
ITB #98184, Addendum #5
Office of
Purchasing
MAILED TO VENDOR: September 10, 1998
CLOSE DATE: September 23, 1998 @ 2:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB).
Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not
affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Please find enclosed the revised Bid Submittal Form for bidding and the necessary clarifications.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Questions may be faxed to
or Email to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
(806) 775-2164
RShuffield@mail.ci.iubbock.tx. us
F
KAfielde
h
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID
ITB 98184 ad5.doc
Buddy Holly Center Renovation
r Addendum #5
1) In the Specifications, Section 01030—Alternates, Part 3-3.1 Alternate Descriptions:
a) Paragraph A: Omit Alternate No. 1. In addition, delete all references to the metal
enclosures around air conditioning condenser units found on the drawings and in
Specifications Division 5. These enclosures are no longer included in this
project.
b) Paragraph B: Omit Alternate No. 2. In addition, delete all references to the curbs
and landscaping found on the drawings and in Specifications Division 2. These
portions of curbs and landscaping are no longer included in this project.
There is no change to curb and landscaping previously included in the base bid.
c) Paragraph C: Omit Alternate No. 3. In addition, delete all references to the
removal and replacement of brick planter walls in the courtyard found on the
drawings and in Specifications Division 4. This work is no longer included in
this project.
d) Paragraph D: Omit Alternate No. 4. In addition, delete all references to metal
grate screens in the Buddy Holly Gallery as shown on wall section 3, Sheet Al 1.
These screens are no longer part of this project.
e) Paragraph E: Omit Alternate No. 5. In addition, delete all references to metal
fence and gates at Courtyard as noted on the Site Plan and references to handrails
in area noted on Key Floor Plan and as specified in Division 5. The -fence, gates,
and handrails are no longer part of this project.
f) Paragraph F: Omit Alternate No. 6. In addition, delete any references to slatwall
at walls and plastic laminate door panels in Lobby Shop 122 as specified in
Division 6 and Division 8, respectively. Slatwall and plastic laminate door
panels are no longer part of this project.
g) Paragraph H: Omit Alternate No. 8. In addition, delete any references to this
alternate on the Demolition Plan. Base Bid to remain as is.
h) Paragraph 1: Omit Alternate No. 9. Aluminum reveal base and polished
aluminum finish plastic laminate wainscot are to remain in the Base Bid as
is.
i) Paragraph K: Alternate No. 11. Change Alternate No. 11 to read: "Add steel
canopy structure and its roof. Base Bid to include construction of concrete
foundation as shown on the drawings." Change Note on Sheet A5 of the
drawings to read: "Alternate #11: Add steel canopy roof and steel support
structure. "
j) Paragraph L: Omit Alternate No. 12. In addition, delete references to Wall Type
22 at all locations indicated and omit all Type G light fixtures associated with
these walls. Associated wiring, conduit, and switches to remain in the Base
Bid.
k) Paragraph M: Omit Alternate No. 13. Type J light fixtures and associated
7 wiring, conduit, and switches to remain in the Base Bid.
I"'
2) Note the following change to Alternate No. 14 in the revised Bid Submittal Form.
�.� The wording of this alternate has been changed to read: Add aluminum ornament
and associated anchoring shown on Exterior Elevations and detailed on 9/A.16.
—_._.Note_ .,..that the Base Bid no longer includes this work.
�- 3) The following Alternates remain with no changes:
e a) Alternate No. 7
b) Alternate No. 10
r4) Please find enclosed the revised Bid Submittal Form.
I
PLACE:
BID SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
r- DATE:
PROJECT NUMBER: #98184 - BUDDY HOLLY CENTER RENOVATIONS
Bid of (hereinafter called Bidder)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
P The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a
i
having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related
contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the
r„ construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor,
materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents,
within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the
work required under the contract documents.
I^ MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL BASE BID: ($ )
ALTERNATE #7 (As shown on plans) Where scheduled in the Room Finish Schedule, in lieu of terrazzo tile
provide sheet vinyl floor covering as specified in Division 9 Section "Sheet Vinyl Floor
Coverings".
MATERIALS: ($ )
r SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #7(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($ )
r
0
r!
l
I-
r
{
l
i
t
ALTERNATE #10 (As shown on plans) Add loose -fill glass -fiber insulation to achieve R-30 thermal resistance for
the insulation itself over all ceilings. At existing ceilings provide baffles at recessed fixtures prior
to adding blown -in insulation. At new construction install 4 inch thick polyisocyanurate rigid
insulation in lieu of 3 inch thick.
MATERIALS: _ ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL ALTERNATE 010(ADD): ($ )
ALTERNATE #11 (As shown on plans) Steel canopy structure and its roof. Base Bid shall include construction of
concrete foundation as shown on the drawings.
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #11(ADD): ($ )
ALTERNATE #14 (As shown on plans) Add Aluminum ornament and associated anchoring shown on Exterior
Elevations and detailed on 9/A.16:
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL ALTERNATE 014(ADD): ($ )
(Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written
"Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 287 (TWO HUNDRED EIGHTY SEVEN)
consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby
further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $1500.00 (ONE THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED
DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project,
all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the
bidding.
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
Ir1*
'
r
r
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work
on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents.
�.. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
N certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company,
payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total
amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies,
and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Dollars
($ 1, which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the
event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents,
insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt
of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the
F
undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
ATTEST:
Secretary
Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
Addenda
No.
Date
Addenda
No.
Date
Addenda
No.
Date
Addenda
No.
Date
r
Authorized Signature
(Printed or Typed Name)
Company
Address
City, County
State Zip Code
Telephone:
Fax: -
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Minority Owned
Yes
No
❑
❑
4
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock. Texas 79457
(806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164
ADDENDUM #4
ITB #98184
BUDDY HOLLY CENTER
RENOVATIONS
ITB 998184, Addendum 94
Office of
Purchasing
MAILED TO VENDOR: September 9, 1998
OLD CLOSE DATE: September 9, 1998 @ 2:00 PM
NEW CLOSE DATE: September 23, 1998 @ 2:00 PM
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB).
Where any item called for In the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not
affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. The closing date has changed from September 9, 1998 @ 2:00 PM to the new closing date of
September 23, 1998 0) 2:00 PM.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to : (806) 775-2164 .
or Email to: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
THA YOU,
on hu ield
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID
i 98184ad4.doc
I
7
7
i
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock. Texas 79457
(806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164
ADDENDUM #3
ITB #98184
BUDDY HOLLY CENTER
RENOVATIONS
ITB #981 B4, Addendum #3,
Office of
Purchasing
MAILED TO VENDOR: September 2, 1998
CLOSE DATE: September 9, 1998 @ 2:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB).
Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not
affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Please find enclosed Addendum #3 from McKinney Architects.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164
or Email to: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
"KY
Ron Shuffield
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID
r
r.
(ITB 98184 ad3.doc
I
A R C H I T E C T S k N C
DATE: September 01, 1998
RE: ADDENDUM NO. 3
to the Contract Documents for the
Buddy Holly Center Renovations
This Addendum is an integral part of the Contract Documents for the above named
project dated August 3, 1998 (Drawings and Specifications). Wherein the items of
Addenda differ from the original Specifications and/or Drawings, this Addendum shall
take precedence. All other terms and conditions not specifically affected by this
Addendum will remain unchanged. Revise the Specifications and Drawings referenced
below as indicated. All provisions of the. Contract Documents shall apply to this
addendum as if they were bound -herein. The Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of this
Addendum by inserting its number in the Proposal Form.
DR&WTNG MODIRC TIONS
1. Drawing 12UA18 — Countertop Finish shall be "Plastic Laminate #6" —Formica
Black 909-58 Matte Finish.
2. Add the attached drawing, XS-1 dated 9/1/98 to the contract documents.
101 Vest Sixth Street, Suite 707 Austin. Texas 79701-2936 512 476 0201 l=aX 476 0216
MPMBER AMEPUCAN WSTI rUTF, OF ARC111TECTS
31.17
0
�uw. ♦v.v. fan..fw •r ..•.r•.w.W..•N.w . L►.•YA�.
r{ .iciYi i ( •f�•���1ll JON t i!A,'Y
Pay-flal 'Plan ai- lnler&a4wlN of''o Truo&:,,;
�.�4:.r.W_`t.I�.%.w�.wVaM r.•y..w_-.....•r'a•.!v�6.wn1W."f.r....r>1 V.n.Fur.wWM\•'..rov :w....M.V y. •.�IW M.ri�l r•.M 1..' M'MY'r +M •Mow-.sw...n..v: s..
1.)4L V&A ri i' 4 �,.. M
f6r V-1 { f.Ilftyc Li y.. a
-.
1 '
}ASTER. QUINTANILLA & ASSOCIATES, INC,
CONSULTING STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS
I x'EST SGKTfi1i1.t s �7 s $IJttG 100 a USi1N. �b'4)
1 'i•OP��_ ,,,ram �i1117-l+'917C
J
t r. Cc: l"ACAC h o r y 0.t `i r IAS5
cilirvo
PROJECT �kly *A l C1`'' 'I h,'<+i ce
CLIENT
REF, REV. AT SHEf T
tP"
11�
F
F
r
w
F
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
(806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164
ITB #98184, Addendum #2
Office of
Purchasing
ADDENDUM #2
ITB #98184
BUDDY HOLLY CENTER
RENOVATIONS
MAILED TO VENDOR:
OLD CLOSE DATE:
NEW CLOSE DATE:
August 26, 1998
September 2, 1998 @ 2:00 P.M.
September 9, 1998 @ 2:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB).
Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not
affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Please find enclosed addendum items from McKinney Architects, Inc. which shall become part of
the Contract Documents.
2. General Conditions of the Agreement; Page 7; Section 28, Contractor's Insurance. item C, shall
be changed to be not less than $500,000.
3. Please find enclosed the revised Bid Submittal Form.
4. In the Contract Documents, Time for Completion is stated to be within 287 consecutive calendar
days with Liquidated Damages at $1,500.00 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter.
Liquidated damages shall apply to each area's respective deadline for completion.
5. Plans; Drawing A13.1, Detail #18, change the note which says: "Dull chrome fin reducer strip...",
to read as follows: Base Bid shall include Roppe #173 vinyl reducer strip -return to wall @ ends of
Terrazzo Base.
6. Alternate #7 shall include Roppe #172 vinyl reducer strip -return to wall @ ends of Terrazzo
Base.
7. In the drawings, sheet E1, the note referring to refurbishing the existing fixtures. Refurbishing
includes repairing minor damage and misaligned parts of the fixtures, relamping and repainting
of the fixtures, paint color shall be provided by the architect. Additionally, repaint the poles of
the courtyard fixtures, with a color as directed by the architect.
8. In the drawings, sheet M3, furnace, coil and condensing unit F08, C08, CU08 make the following
changes: furnace, coil and condensing unit shall be removed from the existing Fine Arts Center
and relocate to the Buddy Holly Center. The unit is and will be serving an area of the Fine Arts
Building housing the staff for the New Buddy Holly Center. The contractor shall coordinate the
removal of the unit to minimize the inconvenience to the owner. Return the existing 5-ton
condensing unit indicated in the schedule to the owner after demolition.
1T8 #98184 ad2.doc
7
ITB #98184, Addendum #2-
9. In the drawings, sheet M4, make the following changes, detail 19: The duct for the automatic
control damper in the upper duct shall be 42 x 12, the fresh air duct serving F01 shall be 20 x 16,
the damper in this duct shall be located as indicated on detail 15 in lieu of that shown in detail 19
at the connection of the plenum.
10. The closing date has been changed from September 2, 1998 @ 2:00 P.M. to the new closing
date of September 9, 1998 @ 2:00 P.M.
11. All Contractors requiring an additional walk-thru of the facility may contact Gary Smith @ 775-
3078 or George Lisenbe @ 775-2200.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Questions may be faxed to
or Email to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
(806) 775-2164
RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
X
YOUP/
onSuffield
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID
ITB #98184 ad2.doc
I'
i
A R C H I T E C T S 1 N C
DATE: August 25,1998
ti RE: ADDENDUM NO.2
to the Contract Documents for the
Buddy Holly Center Renovations
This Addendurn is an integral part of the Contract Documents for the above named
project dated August 3, 1998 (Drawings and Specifications). Wherein the items of
Addenda differ from the original Specifications and/or Drawings, this Addendum shall
take precedence. All other terms and conditions not specifically affected by this
Addendum will remain unchanged. Revise the Specifications and Drawings referenced
below as indicated. All provisions of the Contract Documents shall apply to this
addendum as if they were bound herein. The Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of this
Addendum by inserting its number in the Proposal Form.
PROJECT MANUAL MODIFICATIONS
1. Section 01010 1.5.13.3 - Change "Area #1" to "Area #3."
2. Section 01030 3.1.L - Change "Type D" light fixtures to "Type G."
3. Section 01030 3.1.M - Change "Type D" light fixtures to "Type J."
4. Section 01030 - Add 3.1.N "Alternate No. 14: Omit all aluminum ornament and
associated anchoring shown on exterior elevations and detailed on 9/A16."
5. Section 06402 1.5.C.1-a - Add sentence to end of paragraph - "In lieu of labels or
certificates provide letter from manufacturer certifying that woodwork- meets
requirements of grades specified."
6. Section 06402 2.2 - OMIT THIS SECTION
7. Section 06402 2.5.A - Change paragraph to read - "Furring, Blocking, Shims, and
Hanging Strips: Softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture
content. Where blocking occurs inside cavities of fire -rated partitions provide fire-
retardent-treated lumber."
8. Section 09255 2.3.A.1 - Add sentence to end of paragraph - "20 gage at wall
assemblies that include plywood."
9. Section 09420 - Add 2.1.A.4 Fritztile Traditional Terrazzo T900 Series.
10. Add Section 10520 - Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
"Fire Extinguisher - Multi -Purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4A-60B:C, 10 lb.
nominal capacity, in enameled steel container, for Class A, Class B, and Class C
fires."
r "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets - Provide Architectural Series Model ALr2409-61Z as
t. manufactured by Larsen's Mfg. Co., or equal in all locations designated by the
abbreviation TEC' on the Floor Plan."
101 West Sixth Street, Suite 707 Austin, Texas 78701-2936 512 476 0201 FAx 476 0216
MEMBER A 61EEUCAN INSTITUTE OF ARCW CTS
"Provide Architectural Series Model AL-2409-SM as manufactured by Larsen's
Mfg. Co., or equal in all locations designated by the. abbreviation 'SFECon the
' Floor Plan."
"Fire Extinguisher Cabinet Doors - Provide Architectural Series Vertical Duo door
as manufactured by Larsen's Nlfg. Co. or equal."
DRAWING MODIFICATIONS
I . Drawing I /A2 - Change note on southernmost tree from "Alternate No. 3 - Remove
existing planter walls - Refplans for new work" to "planter removed by owner"
2. Drawing 1/A2 - Omit all references to Detail X/AXX and replace with references to
Floor Plan A3 and Site Plan Al.
3. Drawing I/A2 - Add Note: Remove Existing Concrete Slab/Paving. Refer A2-A,
4. Drawing 1/A3 - Omit new planter and reference to Alternate No. 3 on southernmost
tree.
5. Room Finish Schedule A14 - Change the base material in Corridor 104 to
Aluminum.
6. Door Schedule A14 - Change the head and jamb detail references on Door No. 4 to
22.
7. Door Schedule A14 - Change the head and jamb detail references on Door No. I 1 to
21.
8. Door Schedule A14 -'Change the head and jamb detail references on Door No. 39 to
16.
9. Sign Types A24 - Change Signage Note No. 6 to read - Two color, 1/8" thick,
scratch resistant, non -static, fire-retarder►t, washable melamine surface laminate
with a non -glare surface and phenolic core. Paint background after artwork has
been carved into surface. Basis of design - Best Sign Systems "MP Plastic."
10. Drawing 1/A24 - Omit reference to "Terrazzo 1" at the rectangular and circular
floor pattern located at the intersection of Corridor 104 and Lobby 101.
101 West Sixth Street, Suite 707 Austin, Texas 78701-2936 512 476 0201 FAx 476 0216 `
r, MEMB>;a AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS
1,
CAREK LL7 REMOVE AND RESET
EXISTING NIS70RIC 13RJCJC TO
CREATE TAS COWLIANT RAJ -P-
REFER TO DETAIL X/AXX
EXISTING WOOD FLOOR TO REMAIN
EXISTING TILE FLOOR TO REMAIN —
REf10VE ALL LODGE OR DAMAGED
CAREFULLY RETMOVE AND RESET
EXISTING 141STORIC PRICK TO
CREATE TAS COMPLIANT RAMP—
RFIFFi2 TO DETAIL XIAXX
PROTECT E>c1STING TREES
EXIST LIGHT — . —"\
STANDARD
PROTECT FROM
REMOVE E:
PLANTER W
R—ANS FM
EXISTING L
STANDARD
PROTECT F
EXISTING C
TO REMAIN
PROTEGT EXISTING TREES
DEtMOLISN EXISTING
Alternative #3 CONCRETE STEPS
—12Ftr OVF FXISTIW-7 PI ANTFR
McKftmey
BWcly Holly Center Demolition Plan
AUSSIN City of Lubbock
A R .0 i I T E C T S I N C YBYAS Capital Project #9355
101 Went sWb Strom, Sulu 707 Aubt(N Terms 7A70l-2936
1U 512 476 0201 FAX 312 476 0216
ME =AWMCANWS MMOFARCt117$M DATE 8/25198 SCALE 1/8" = 1'•0"
r
I
BID SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
PLACE:
DATE
PROJECT NUMBER: #98184 - BUDDY HOLLY CENTER RENOVATIONS
Bid of (hereinafter called Bidder)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a
having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related
contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the
construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor,
materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents,
within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the
work required under the contract documents.
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
7 TOTAL BASE BID: ($ )
7 ALTERNATE #1 Install metal enclosures around air conditioning condenser units as indicated on the drawings and
specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
PW
TOTAL ALTERNATE #1(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($_ )
r�
F ALTERNATE #2 Add curbs and landscaping at areas noted on the Site Plan as specified in Division 2 Section.
MATERIALS: ($ )
rSERVICES: ($ )
k
7
I
TOTAL ALTERNATE #2(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($ )
ALTERNATE #3 Remove existing wood and brick planter walls and add brick planter walls around trees in
Courtyard as indicated on the drawings and specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry
Assemblies".
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #3(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($ )
FALTERNATE #4
I^
r
7
Add metal grate screens at north and south windows in Buddy Holly Gallery as shown on wall
section 3, Sheet A11.
MATERIALS:
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #4 (ADD) (DEDUCT): ($ )
ALTERNATE #5 Install metal fence and gates at Courtyard as noted on the Site Plan and install handrails in area
noted on Key Floor Plan and as specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications".
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #5(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($ )
r 2
. ALTERNATE #6 Add slatwall at walls and plastic laminate door panels of Lobby Shop 122 as specified in Division
6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" and Division 8.
r
MATERIALS: ($_ )
SERVICES:
TOTAL ALTERNATE #6(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($ )
ALTERNATE #7 Where scheduled in the Room Finish Schedule, in lieu of terrazzo tile provide sheet vinyl floor
covering as specified In Division 9 Section "Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings".
MATERIALS: ($_ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #7(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($ )
ALTERNATE #8 Remove existing gypsum board ceilings over rooms so indicated on Demolition Plan and replace
r with new 5/8 inch gypsum board ceiling.
i
MATERIALS: ($_ )
SERVICES:
TOTAL ALTERNATE #8(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($ )
ALTERNATE #9 Where scheduled in the Room Finish Schedule:
1. In lieu of anodized aluminum reveal base provide 6" high paint grade wood base as indicated on
the drawings and specified in Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork".
2. In lieu of polished aluminum finish plastic laminate wainscot specified in Division 6 Section
"Interior Architectural Woodwork" provide 5/8 inch thick painted gypsum board.
MATERIALS:
SERVICES: ($ )
�. TOTAL ALTERNATE #9(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($ )
ALTERNATE #10 Add loose -fill glass -fiber insulation to achieve R-30 thermal resistance for the insulation itself
over all ceilings. At existing ceilings provide baffles at recessed fixtures prior to adding blown -in
insulation. At new construction install 4 inch thick polyisocyanurate rigid insulation in lieu of 3
inch thick.
r. MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
7 TOTAL ALTERNATE #10(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($ )
r
i
7
ALTERNATE #11 Omit steel canopy structure and its roof. Construct concrete foundation as shown on the
drawings.
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #11(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($ )
ALTERNATE #12 Omit Wall Type 22 at all locations indicated and omit all Type G light fixtures and associated
wiring, conduit, and switches.
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #12(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($ )
ALTERNATE #13 Omit all Type J light fixtures and associated wiring, conduit, and switches.
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #13(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($ )
ALTERNATE #14 Omit all Aluminum ornament and associated anchoring shown on Exterior Elevations and
detailed on 9/A.16:
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #14(ADD)(DEDUCT): ($ )
(Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written
"Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 287 (TWO HUNDRED EIGHTY SEVEN)
consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby
further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $1500.00 (ONE THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED
rDOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project,
i all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
Q,
r
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the
bidding.
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work
on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company,
payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total
amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies,
and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Dollars
($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the
event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents,
insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt
of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the
undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
Authorized Signature
(Printed or Typed Name)
Company
Address
City, County
State Zip Code
Telephone: -
Fax: -
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
ATTEST:
Secretary
Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
r
Addenda No. Date
Addenda No. Date
�^ Addenda No. Date
I Addenda No. Date
r
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Minority Owned
Yes
No
1.
❑
❑
2.
❑
❑
3.
❑
❑
4.
❑
❑
5.
❑
❑
6.
❑
❑
7.
❑
❑
8.
❑
❑
9.
❑
0
10.
❑
❑
6
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
To Be Completed by Bidder
And Attached to Bid Submittal
I, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been
reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of
Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock,
furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal.
Contractor (Signature) Contractor (Print)
7
CONTRACTOR'S NAME:
7
r
k
7
r
r
L
(Print or Type )
CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS:
Name of Agent/Broker:
Address of Agent/Broker:
City/State/Zip:
Agent/Broker Telephone Number:
Date:
NOTE TO CONTRACTOR
If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and
award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements,
please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165.
BID #98184 - BUDDY HOLLY CENTER RENOVATIONS
7
r
I
7
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock. Texas 79457
(806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164
ADDENDUM 0
ITB #98184
BUDDY HOLLY CENTER
RENOVATIONS
ITB #98184, Addendum #1
Office of
Purchasing
MAILED TO VENDOR: August 14, 1998
CLOSE DATE: September 2,1998 @ 2:00 PM
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB).
Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not
affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Please be advised of an incorrect closing date and time on the "Notice to Bidders" page. The correct
closing date is September 2. 1998 0 2:00 PM.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to : (806) 775-2164
or Email to: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
4THKYOU,
Ron Shuffield
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID
98184ad1.doc
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INVITATION TO BID
FOR
TITLE: BUDDY HOLLY CENTER RENOVATIONS
ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS
BID NUMBER: 98184
PROJECT NUMBER: 9355.9211.30000
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
INDEX
1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS
2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
3. BID SUBMITTAL — BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS
4. PAYMENT BOND
5. PERFORMANCE BOND
6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
7. CONTRACT
8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
10. SPECIFICATIONS
9
No Text
r
E NOTICE TO BIDDERS
_ BID #98184
Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the
office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00
o'clock p.m. on the 20th day of August,1998, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to
furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project:
"BUDDY HOLLY CENTER RENOVATIONS"
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the
Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud.
It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for
the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written.
The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 24th day of September, 1998, at the Municipal Building, 1625
13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or
all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance
with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract
price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter
2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
r! $25,000, Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified
check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without
recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a
guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of
award of the contract to him.
It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local
conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been
thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre -bid conference on 20th
day of August, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Purchasing Conference Room L04, Lubbock, Texas
j Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included
i in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is
specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a,
Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the
k contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this
advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to
i this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in
consideration for an award.
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and
bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more
accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775-
2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting.
1C�ITY OF LUBBOCK
Ulf
VICTOR KILVAN
PURCHASING MANAGER
Bid documents may be obtained upon request from the Purchasing Department at 1625 13th Street,
Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas 79401; Telephone (806) 775-2167/Fax (806) 775-2164.
1
7
r
a
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
4.
.!
saw
ob
i
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SCOPE OF WORK
The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to
complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the BUDDY HOLLY CENTER RENOVATIONS.
2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General
Conditions.
+� All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the
construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by
said contract documents.
r 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS
4
It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by
the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without
charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice
to Bidders.
4. BIDDER INQUIRIES
No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification
concerning this bid must be addressed to:
RON SHUFFIELD
SENIOR BUYER
CITY OF LUBBOCK
P.O. BOX 2000
LUBBOCK, TX 79457
FAX (806) 776-2164
5. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 287 (TWO HUNDRED
EIGHTY SEVEN) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of
Lubbock to the successful bidder.
The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the
City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the
contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by
the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may
direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the
time specified.
�. 6. PAYMENT
` All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the
contract documents.
r
7. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute
an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements
contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the
Contractor has been notified.
S. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will
be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve
the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until
incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve
the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods
set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to
procure a satisfactory project.
GUARANTEES
All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective
materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general
guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all
damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from
date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner
(City of Lubbock).
Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants
fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited
to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services
provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this
Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants the year 2000 calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will
not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may
require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all
the obligations contained herein.
The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub -contractor or
any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of
Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City
of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its
right pertaining to termination or default.
The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract,
and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability
which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated
in this Contract by reference.
10. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR
The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use ~
during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or
others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor.
2
11. PROTECTION OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials,
supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any
and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the
date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have
been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information:
(a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by
the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed.
(b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder.
(c) Equipment schedule.
12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article
20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials
to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a
way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or
other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the
project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the
location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve
the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by
Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by
Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense.
14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and
shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be
necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs,
and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and
replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of
barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of
acceptance of the project.
15. EXPLOSIVES
{ The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from
the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume
full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all
cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger fife
or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or
corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity.
3
Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it
shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in
proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given
sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their
property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage
resulting from his blasting operations.
16. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the
work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and
telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by
this contract is in progress.
17. INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All
policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor
shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as
hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall
be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all
operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate
policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each
and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative,
shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular
project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof
of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor.
18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included
in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in
the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further ..
directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the
wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of
general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from
compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an
inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist:
(1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service
to its citizens.
(2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is
approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor.can show he has made a diligent effort
to complete the contract within the allotted time.
Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must _
notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires
to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on
4
whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's
Representative.
In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this
contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work,
regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer
dangerous to property or life.
19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project
under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount,
not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the
work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or
Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his
classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the
copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made,
or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees
according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which
schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on
whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each
calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his
particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these
contract documents.
20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES
Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or
decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the
,- bidder without being considered.
21. PREPARATION FOR BID
The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled
in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work
contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or
typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price
written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly
authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each
member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly
authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business
address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing
agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid
shall be executed in ink.
Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed
on the outside of the envelope in the following manner:
(a) Bidder's name
(b) Bid for (description of the project).
Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no
bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
r1W
22. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
F
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the
following:
(a) Notice to Bidders.
(b) General Instructions to Bidders.
(c) Bidder's Submittal.
(d) Statutory Bond (if required).
(e) Contract Agreement.
(f) General Conditions.
(g) Special Conditions (if any).
(h) Specifications.
(i) Insurance Certificates.
0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders
If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered
incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of
Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein
in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy
the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable
investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the
bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of
Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to
satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to
complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include:
1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required.
2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified,
without delay or interference.
3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder.
4. The quality of performance of previous -contracts or services.
No Text
BID SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
PLACE: 1625 13th STREET
DATE: SEPTEMBER 23, 1998
PROJECT NUMBER: #98184 - BUDDY HOLLY CENTER RENOVATIONS
Bid of LUBBOCK BUILDING SERVICES, INC. (hereinafter called Bidder)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a BUDDY HOLLY CENTER
RENOVATIONS #98184
having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related
contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the
construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor,
materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents.
within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the
work required under the contract documents.
f.
MATERIALS: T : ~ /" c L,• �,.���:�G' �?"t 1��--a -� �( - 4 (5
rSERVICES:_�c 7L;
TOTAL BASE BID:
ALTERNATE #7 (As shown on plans) Where scheduled in the R /om Finish Schedule, in lieu of terrazzo the
i provide sheet vinyl floor covering as specified in Division 9.Section "Sheet Vinyr Floor
Coverings'.
� , �
MATERIALS: 'T �o✓ JN-i ve c (S
i
SERVICES4T�.! r /7u✓...ai �c �.. c-,��� (5 8� jy�} )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #7(A1*)(DEDUCT): (S / z OOQ )
i PM
ALTERNATE #10 (As shown on plans) Add loose -fill glass -fiber insulation to achieve R-30 thermal resistance for
the insulation itself over all ceilings. At existing ceilings provide baffles at recessed fixtures prior
.� to adding blown -in insulation. At new construction install 4 inch thick polyisocyanurate rigid
insulation in lieu of 3 inch thick.
MATERIALGitr k, +i -CL..._
.ti
SERVICES: 1i16e_, %lio.•...uj Fc &Z 4- e%.a( (S 3 .1> cc — )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #10(ADD): �zi �c l �Zcw� �•+�� S'. d- �- (S GO )
p ALTERNATE #11 (As shown on plans) Steel canopy structure and its roof. Base Bid shall include construction of
concrete foundation as shown on the drawings.
�L-
' MATERIALS: ✓ t iV C ;gip n ,�,, C�-�''�'-- ($ • % iuW )
SERVICES: OV2, )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #11(ADD): t/—_%�,T� f� ,►- c( (S ���' )
ALTERNATE #14 (As shown on plans) Add Aluminum ornament and associated anchoring shown on Exterior
Elevations and detailed on 9/A.16:
a�
MATERIALS: rw (S Gy c- )
SERVICES: e 4t
TOTAL ALTERNATE #14(ADD): ��rJ� c� %_ (S 2 /,, G'ze' CI&
(Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written
"Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 287 (TWO HUNDRED EIGHTY SEVEN)
consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby
further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $1500.00 (ONE THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED
DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project,
all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the
bidding.
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
7
...
7
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work
on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashiers check or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company,
payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total
amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies,
and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of FIVE PERCENT Dollars
($ 5% ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the
event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents,
insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt
of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the
undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be execut by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance th a Notice to Biddem--____'
u orize ignature
rRR SMITH
(Printed or Typed Name)
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
ATT T:
I etary
r" Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
Addenda No. 1 Date 8 -14 - 9 8
Addenda No. 2 Date 8-26-98
Addenda No. _ 3 Date 9-2-98
Addenda No. 4 Date A—g_c)R
Addenda No. 5 Date 9-10-98
r-
LUBBOCK BUILDING SERVICES, INC.
Company
P.O. BOX
65600-194
Address
LUBBOCK
LUBBOCK
City,
County
TEXAS
'79464
State
Zip Code
Telephone: 806 )- 798-7005
Fax: 806 - 798-8256
7
r-
r
Bond # 490075
t�Jl,�, 1NDEMNI 1 Y COI1I 011A ION
1
(a Stock Company, organized under the laws of Wisconsin)
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,
That we, Lubbock Building Services, Inc.
(hereinafter called
the "Principal"), as Principal, and the Capitol Indemnity Corporation of Madison, Wisconsin a corporation duly
organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (hereinafter called the "Surety"), as Surety,
are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock
(hereinafter called the "Obligee"), in
the sum of FIVE PERCENT OF AMOUNT BID BY PRINCIPAL------- Dollars ($ 5% of Bid ),
for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind
ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these
presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for
Buddy Holly Center Renovations Bid 0 98184
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall: accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a
Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may
be specified in the bidding or Contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful
performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution
thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds,
if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount
cm^, -;flan in nnid bid and such larder amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another
VloytWINDEMNITUORPORTION
4610 UNIVERSITY AVENUE, SUITE 1400, MADISON, WISCONSIN 53705-0900
PLEASE ADDRESS REPLY TO P.O. BOX 5900, MADISON. WI 53705-0900
PHONE (606) 231-4450 • FAX (606) 231-2029
POWER OF ATTORNEY
No:490075
Know all men by these`PresentS, Thatthia:CAPITOL INDEMNITYCORPORATION acor{�oration
of the:State of W>!Sconstrt; hav+ng +ts pnncipal offices in the City of Madisdn, Wiscons+n, does make, constitute and appoint
STACI J. GROSS, LAURA A. ESPINOZA, STEVE DEAL OR DONAL BOLEY
Ifs true and lawful AYtorriey( ) ih-fact, to inake, execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf, as surety, and as its act
and, deed, any ahO bit. bands, 6hdertakinjs 6d'.contracts a# suretyship," °provided that ;no "bond or undertaking or contract
of Suretyship exeouted under this authority shall'exceed in;Brn6unt the sum of
NOT TO: EXCEED; 4,000,0OO.00
This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following
Resolution adopted -,by the.,Board of Directors. of CAPITOL INDEMNITY, CORPORATION at a meeting duly called and
field on the nth day of May 1960-
'AESOLVEM that the f resident, and Vice -President, the Secretary or Treas[ res acting individually or otherwise, be and they hereby are granted
the.povrer and 8tlthorizatlpn to. appoitjt by;a Power of :Attorney for the purposes;i my o ::executiN and attesting bonds and undertakings; and other,
writings obligatorym the 1�atyte.ahereof, one or more resident rocs -pre i=, .assistant: secretaries and Attomey(s)-in-fact,' each ;appointee_ to have`,
7 the powers and duties usual to such offices to the business' of this company the'sionature of such officers and seal of the Company may tie affixed
to anysuch,power of.ettomey:arr,io,any certificate relating thereto'by facsimile, -and anyy:suc'h power ot:attorney or certificate::bearing such facsimile.
signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company, and'8ny Such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and
facsimile seal shalt be valid and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking or other writing obligatory in the
nature thereof to which;iflo attached Any such appointment maybe revoked, for cause or without cause, by any of said officers at anytime."
IN WITNESS WH!`'REOF, the CPITOL INDEMNITY;°CORPORATION has caused these presents to be signed by
its afficer undersigned and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed duly attested by its Secretary;ahis 1st day of June, 1993.
CAPITOL �INQEMNITY CORPORATION
Attest:
7
STATE OF WiSCON
COUNTY OF DANE'
On the 1 st'day of
:: swom, did depose and
CAPITOL INDEMNITY .
he knows the sedi: of th..
affixed by order of the 5
PO
at>
Secretary
A.D 1993, before me Oersonally came George A Fait; to
that he ::resides. in the County:. of DaneState of ` W+scc
ORATION, th2 corporatlon _described in . and which ex.:e
icoiporgt on, that the; seal affixed to said instrument, is ,si
f:Dir�ctots bf said cornoration:and that he sictned.Mis nami
d, duly elected to
I at the'. ( ty:i f Mi
k
vaHd:only if the powerof attorney number printed it1 the upper rigl
ate not binding on the company. Inquiries concerning this Dower
fn.demnity Corporation.
r
i
i
r�
_
PAYMENT BOND
ip
i.:
,a'`
1
BOND CHECK
BEST RATING —
LICENSED! TEXAS
�IN
DATE BY.,...
VO ",-INDEMNITY CORPORATION
4610 UNIVERSITY AVENUE, SUITE 1400, MADISON, WISCONSIN 53705-0900
PLEASE ADDRESS REPLY TO P.O. BOX 5900, MADISON, W1 53705-0900
PHONE (608) 231-4450 • FAX (608) 231-2029
POWER OF ATTORNEY No: 4 9 3 9j 6 C-1
these l.iosqrki t,:.th4:",i;D-APITOLIN.DEMNITYCORPORA-Ti�' 'corporation
-61.:-- ..
principal he Cht..� dil _y.-*-M:di 4 dappoint
C do
a nsIn'.1.,,1,_ es make, cotj..�, n
LAURA A. ESPINOZA, STEVE DEAL OR DONALBOT
" I. and deli-' jis:b0halti-afturOtCand-. a :its act
is granted and is signe
iard of Directors -of C9
tid0t, btnd Vice-President,:.-Seicr
Spoifi.�, by a Power of:Att&Aey: for;
bere6fone or more resId0nt--'*iq
rich
r htffioies to the busirWs§;.of 1hIs
certificate icate relating:, :,h*iretd1
any be valid and binding upon the
binding upon the Company in the
ad. Any such;
appointment ent may Op i
n an IS corporate
d' seal to bi
7,
rri unt the sum
MS4,000,0w.00
sealed by facsiml e under and by the authority of the following
L INDEMNITY..CORPORATION at a meeting dul,y.called and
j".
'y or:. .reasuror, ad.ting.jndiv'tdUAIty:'.qr otherwise, be and they hereby h b are granted
l
Mposes.only of.,executing and attesting bonds and undertakhpsand other
.-."..
ildents,.assistart'.-teicreta et..and:,Attbmey(s)-in-fac1:, ipekh �a to: have.
_OP0.1
o- r' sq. f the Company. nay 16 ff* d
n .1h signature of kh seal o e q. a ix
pa , y , "...and'a ::'$p9hp6..we.r�.;df:attorney orcertificafg�:bearino" such . facsimile
os 1i any such so . an r executed and certified by fiksihnile signatures and
ly' with respect to any bond or undertaking or other writing obligatory in the
zd, for cause, or without cause, by any of said officers,: at any t'ime.'..
duly
�ntW all min by
theSta onst 'its
STACI J. GROSS,
j UjD and lawfill
n 'd-
o. ped, any an(
f.t retyshit) exec
the �PpWer and!aQjho6
writings obligator *161
-Y
e
powers'And ':,th duiftc
to any such:..power
POO
signaturei* facsImiI(*
facsimile seal shall be
I
L
, nature thereof to which
IN WITNgs
S Pr undersio
� A e
tt.
Onthe l� 11 e G 4 day of j4irte A D .4."1 3, 1*. ote.,mefiersona y cam
sViorh, did depose and say: that h6'?.i68id` s i � th e aunhi,of Dan
6h"�Aii6 66ribbrA CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATI We.scribed in:
.,.,he.kriowsthEiseal .of.�,!th4said '.-'*td"'rporati6tLI I Affixed to said
; that c
:affix6d by order of the f ... 6f ..
eSdair.d o � Dir ie ors:. d:.
sai comoraicinan fi : d that he:
4 ... ... .....
` This power Is valid onlyf .]]Ji, t...0 pgw attorney numb"
the- company. . qutrlq, : s . i
tither �Teproc OR i
th _Joctio�i 0 i:m. . In
.1W .1 -1.1- 1�ie '-. - . , ice bf :.Wratlo
L
eo
Fait, P
by
n t
.fir to
beih%`b�-::me duly
tfi.- ... w .
.e .resident of
isi;ymprit; that
dal, that .. as so
hit it4i
Paul J.-BreNmeder, TreasurqF:.,.,.,
ia6i'. :cqrne.e.:AppoArs:jn red. Photoeopfes oarbpn-c oPies or.
y be irp . cted to the B e Nome
�N'v INDEMNITY CURPORATION
wm'1111r
4610UNIVERSITYAVENUE, SUITE 1400, MADISON. WISCONSIN 53705.0900 • (608)231-4450
PLEASE ADDRESS REPLY TO P.O. BOX 5900, MADISON. W:53705,09M
LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That Lubbock Building Services, Inc.
(Name and address of the Contractor)
14302 S. Slide Road, Lubbock, TX 79424
as Principal, hereinafter called Principal, and CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION as Surety, hereinafter called Surety,
are held and firmly bound unto
City of Lubbock, Texas
(Name and address of the Owner)
1625 13th Street, Lubbock, TX 79401
as Obligee, hereinafter called Owner, for the use and benefit of claimants as hereinbelow defined, in the amount of
Dollars (S�s(1CJ0.00 ),
(Insert a sum equal to at least one-half of the contract price
for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, Principal has by written agreement dated October 8. 199A
entered into a contract with Owner for
Buddy Holly Center Renovations Base Bid and Alternate # 10
in accordance with drawings and specifigations prepared by McKinney Architects. Inc.
101 W: 6th Street, Suite 707, Austin, Texas
(Full name and address of Architect)
which contract is by reference made a pert hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the Principal shall promptly make payment
to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and material used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the
Contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to thecon-
ditions outlined on the reverse side of this bond:
Signed and sealed this 14th day of October A.D. 199$�_
<' Lubbock Building r (SEAL)
Witness (SEAL)
t (Principal)
Title
CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION,
a Wisconsin Corporation, (Surety)
Witness BY: its (SEAL)
Donal Boley Attorney -in -Fact
(Title)
No Text
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
Lubbock Building Services, Inc.
(Name and Address of the Contractor)
14302 S. Slide Road, Lubbock, TX 79424
as Principal, hereina(ter called Contractor, and CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION as Surety, hereinafter called Surety,
are held and firmly bound unto
City of Lubbock, Texas
(Name and Address of Utc Owner)
1625 13th Street,,_luhhnck. TX 79401
as Obligce, hereinafter called Owner, in the amountof
Off MILLI01i TifU HTUU FIFTY ONE TiD7M DOLLARS AM NO/IQD--- Dollars ($1,,351.OM-QO J,
for the payment whereof Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, Contractor has by written agreement dated (1 tntipr A, icigg
entered into a contract with Owner for
Buddy Holly Center Renovations Base Bid and Alternate # in
in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by McKinney Architects, Inc.
101 W. 6th Street, Suite 707. Austin, Texas
(Full name of Architect)
which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully per-
form said contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner.
Whenever Contractor shall be, and declared by Owner to be in default under the Contract, the Owner having performed
Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly
(1) Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, or
(2) Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, and upon
determination by Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, or, if the Owner clocts, upon determination by
the Owner and the Surety jointly of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such
bidder and Owner, and make available as Work progresses (even though there should be a default or a
succession of defaults under the contract or contract of completion arranged under this paragraph) sufficient
funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the contract price; but not exceeding, including
other costa and damages for which the surety may be liable hereunder, the amount set forth in the first
paragraph hereof. The term 'balance of the contract price', as used in this paragraph, shall mean die
total amount payable by Owner to Conractor under the Contract and any amendments thereto. less the
amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor.
Any suit under this bond must be instituted before the expiration of two (2) years from the date on which final payment
under the contract falls due.
No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than the Owner named
heroin of the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of the Owner.
Signed and sealed this 14th dayof October A.D.19_M_
LuVhPck Building Services. Inc, (SEAL)
Witnes ^(SEAL)
s�
11 1/2
(Principal)
(SEAL)
(Title)
APTTOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION
a Wisconsin Corporation, (Surety)
Witness By: (SEAL)
rtr r no on.a.w...
No Text
C 0 J
k q _
! I ��L� (M1M//1DD91Y9Y8).
-M-10
0DA8T/E2
�
?ROADUCER (806) 7EGIiE
798-7979 FAX (806)798-888
utler-Carson Insurance Agency
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
505 82nd St, Suite 10
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
_ubbock, TX 79424
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
�n-,,JOHN CARSON Ext:
(
COMPANY Maryland Casuaaty Company
A
suRLubbock Building Services, Inc.
COMPANY Maryland Insurance Company
P. 0. Box 65600-194
_.__. B __. _
Northern Ins. Co. Of NewMYork��
Lubbock, TX 79464
COMPANY
C
_........._....................................................._................................_............_._........__._.........._........_............_......_.._._........_._._....._.._. _..__...._._.
COMPANY Commercial Casualty
1
D
— E au .N du ., il: § i r, a YJ t.i�ib yi < .ukA uxn ti
<aE
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE�POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. ...._-_..... __... __..... _._. _..... __...._ ......... -...... ...... _.._..._............
......... ... .. ........ ................ .................. ............Ir. ......._.._..... ..._...... ...,,.,..-..................... ...... . _............ ..... ..... ....I,......... .___.. ....
` R TYPE OF INSURANCE I POLICY NUMBER
OLIC C
PDA E (MMIDDIYY) PDATE (MM7DDIY1nN I LIMITS
GENERAL LIABILITY
GENERALAGGREGATE
S 1000000
X I COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
...............`..........._..............._-............_.........._.._._......................
PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG
_........_.............._.................
S 1000000
�
CLAIMS MADE I " I OCCUR
A EPA32131667
OWNERS 8 CONTRACTORS PROT .
PER ONAL 8 ADV INJURY
09/03/1997 09/03/1998 i- --
EACH OCCURRENCE
S 1000000
S 1000000
i
... .....
FIRE DAMAGE (Al one Tire)
..... ......
Is 500000
MED EXP (Any one person) Nj
S u 5000
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
•. COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
S
ANY AUTO
I ;ALL OWNED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
500,000
SCHEDULED AUTOS
B WAA22761986
X
(Per person)
109/03/1997 09/03/1998 ; ............. __......._....... _........ .............. ... __;
i $
.......... ...._...................
HIRED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
s......._
X NON-OWNEDAUTOS I
(Pere Cident) ...........
.............. ................... ......... ....... .._..._....
PROPERTYDAMAGE
$
GARAGE LIABILITY i
4 AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT
S
ANY AUTO
OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY.
t
_
._...... __._ ... _ _
EACH ACCIDENTI
$
AGGREGATE
$
EXCESS LIABILITY i
' EACH OCCURRENCE
S 1000000
C X ! UMBRELLA FORM UBA62535254
09/03/1997
........... _ .... ............... ....
, 09/03/1998 AGGREGATE
......... ....
$ 1,000 000
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
S
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
ER TORY LIMITS E
EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY
D THE PROPRIETOR/ I--; INCL T1044377B
09/29/1997
..
EL EACH ACCIDENT _
09/29/1998 rELDISEASE -POLICY LIMIT
$ 100000
S 500000
PARTNERSIEXECUTNE
__ _ _ _..__.
OFFICERS ARE: EXCL
j
EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE
$ 100000
OTHER
I i
i I i
I
i
i ESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATIONSNEHICLESISPECUIL ITEMS
ITY OF LUBBOCK IS SHOWN AS ADDITIONAL INSURED ON GENERAL LIABILITY AND AUTO. THERE IS ALSO A WAIVER
F SUBROGATION FOR THE CITY OF LUBBOCK ON AUTO,
GL & WORKERS COMPENSATION.
-C2TIFIGATE
.,,, jn ,i,3+x?cw.w„4Yitaws�si
�i `T ` {i[{ I 1 ° ' i, fir+ ,' { +1 , , , I , 1 <, ¢ i , ,
LE .., �k.
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,
City of Lubbock
BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY
P . 0. Box 2000
OF ANY KIND UPON THE M NY, T GEN REPRESENTATIVES.
Lubbock, TX 79457
AUTHORIZED REPRESENT IVE
V,
John Carson
F t4f ;�' + �k 'riitilE 9 T 1 rqI RI Y i I. 'pi"
(y� . ; €qpE{f-"fnpt�k".`�t € S E.°E §€(*�'.: {'"� I([�=0, ' [ I[. R�}hp I YR #' jE �.{
¢ i. € �:! � 11r€
4 m8 `�7{ j"3 ((
<
ie. € i}(E.. IS `:!: :� t,'. '.II-.'Gtfi L' !'.. If a.-'.ii'.Iii l,L x
< . t
E <-.r y7 � i f >Y �.•l
ii .� l..�ie �M E k. 1C .< .
708/20/1997 12:06 80679ee25' LUBBOCK BLDG SVCS PAGE 02
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
To 8e Completed by Appropriate insurance Agent/8roker
Prior to Award of Contract
r" 1, the undersigned Agent/6roker, certify that the insurance requirements contained In this bid document have
been reviewed by me with the below identified Contractor. If the below identified Contractor is awarded this
contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) days after being notified of such award by
contractor, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this
bid/proposal.
e�zz�-
4 i
r Agent Signature)
I,
JOHN S. CARSON
Agent (Print)
Name of Agent/Broker: BUTLER-CARSON INSURANCE AGENCY
r
Address of Agent/Broker. 4505-82ND STREET, SUITE# 10
7 City/State/Zip: LUBBOCK, TX 79424
1
Agent/8roker Telephone Number. ( 806 ) 798-7979
r 10/09/98
Date:
7j' CONTRACTOR'S NAME: LUBBOCK BUILDING SERVICES, INC.
l (Print or Type )
r" CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS: P.O. BOX 65600-194
LUBBOCK, TX 79464
CITY JOB 9 NTER AT 1801 AVENUE G,
LUBBOCK, TX
NOTE TO AGENT/BROKER
If this time requirement is not met, the City has the right to reject this blot/proposal and award the
contract to another contractor. if you have any questions concerning these requirements, please
contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806)767-2165.
r
CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST
A CONTRACTOR SHALL:
(1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on
proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements;
r'^ (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity
F prior to beginning work on the project;
(3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:
(A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental
entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing
services on the project; and
(B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on fife for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter;
(6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the
contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of
any person providing services on the project;
(7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are
required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide
coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both
English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices
shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words
or changes:
r"
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see
reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering
equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the
identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal
requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to
freport an employer's failure to provide coverage." and
(8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
(A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing
of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the
duration of the project;
(B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the
project;
(C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this
rule;
(D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the
coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during
the duration of the project;
(F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter;
(G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days
after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of
coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by
paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they
are providing services.
7
I
No Text
PM
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
C%Ph1i:7[d&1
r- THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 8`" day of October,1998, by and between the City of Lubbock,
County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock,. thereunto authorized to do so,
hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Lubbock Building Services. Inc. of the City of Lubbock. County of Lubbock
and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
r
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and
performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the
CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements
described as follows:
BID #98184 - BUDDY HOLLY CENTER RENOVATIONS - $1,351,000.00 (Base Bid and Alternate #10)
and all extra work in connection therewith, under. the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own
proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance
and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract
documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have
been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with
the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make
payment on account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County,
Texas in the year and day first above written.
-kl,n 1 1,41, J ;7
1 �
PROVED • CONTEN
• fjT P - . i
entative
APPRO ED AS TO FORM:
City Attorney
ATTEST:
�. Corporate Secretary
i
4
CITY OF LUBBOCK, E S (OWNER)
By:
MAYOR
CONTRACTOR:
2TED
K BUILDING S�VICES, INC.
NAME:._
TITLE:B.-
COMPLETE ADDRESS:
Lubbock Building Seniic&s Tnc:
P.O. Box 65600-194
Lubbock, TX 79464
fdk
Pla
-. - _- -
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
i;..
� II'
I� is
'I
r
I�
I, I
oft
oft
is
f
r
i
r
i
2.
3.
R
7.
I
F
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
OWNER
Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of
Lubbock, Texas.
CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co-
partnership or corporation, to wit LUBBOCK BUILDING SERVICES, INC. who has agreed to perform the work
embraced in this contract, or their legal representative.
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as
referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative GARY SMITH, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will
inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may
be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors
will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor
or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed
Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the
Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder
for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to
herein as the "contract" or "contract documents".
INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or
words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation
or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable,"
"Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's
Representative.
SUBCONTRACTOR
The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for
performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no
responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated
by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due
Subcontractor.
WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of
the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last
business address known to the party who gives the notice.
8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,
equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other
facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless
otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality.
The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or
work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such
recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents
has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still
may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall
accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will
check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at
Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all
work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE'
The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and
Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the
executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents.
Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the
quality or quantity of the work, nor. will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the
Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the.
Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems
said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract
documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary,
Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but
such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore.
The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades
will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless
destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be
replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense.
7
t
14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's
Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority
r., to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. The
Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work
which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work
and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the
r execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be
conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15)
calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection
r by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
71
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from
time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may
deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said
r material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall
furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the
proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and
instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and
instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications
provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or
inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's
Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any
and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall
keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory
to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions
given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate
supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance
of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor.
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the
Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any
subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
6 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and
location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be
encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the
�. work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the
f contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or
Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms
or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all
modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's
i Representative and Contractor.
r
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work
to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the
work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense.
18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work
required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform
Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, .
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or
men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's
Representative's written consent.
19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and
completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is
also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of
any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the
Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such
structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
20. SANITATION
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public
observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be
approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced.
21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor
shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at
any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any
observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to
the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject
any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of
its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative
has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without
approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for
examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at
a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or
require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to
furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons
competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated.
All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials
or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents.
If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or
consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative,
be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and
approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the
requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such
tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective,
and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
r`
z
Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by
Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such
inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance
with the requirements of the contract documents.
22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES
It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in
the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not
in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written
notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy
such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents, It is further agreed that any remedial
action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense.
23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit,
in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either
before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the
accompanying bond.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a
claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of
work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid
according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract;
otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work, In case the Owner shall make
such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in
said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual
expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned.
r
24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be
required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change,
alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered
by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative
when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of
the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the
compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following
methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced,
then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the
extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged
by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for
performance of.the extra work.
In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph
shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen,
r' timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for
I the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred,
together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age
r, 5
i
P
Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other
insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owners Representative, or by
them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be
kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's
Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the
type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the
Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be
determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership
Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for
the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent
(15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit,
overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not
embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office
must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall
be included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case
any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive
compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra
work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should
a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and
the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making
written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as
provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to the commencement
any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived.
25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the
specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that
such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these
contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in
these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a
clarification obtained before the bids are received, and If no such notice is received by the Owner's
Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands
the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance
with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to bidding
of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and
specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any
request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of
bids.
26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of
work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owners Representative may order the
Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall
comply with such order.
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the
Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give
reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress.
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY
The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an
insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the
Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable
precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable
provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment
and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in
!� Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or
municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold
harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages,
expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or
contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection
with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any
manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject
matter of this contract.
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an
r Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given
by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses,
` are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to
supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors.
28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
�., cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change.
All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and
its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance,
rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of
r payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in
conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver..
The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance
protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such
insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and
shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor,
or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance
specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or In the alternative,
shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular
project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof
of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor.
A. General Liability Insurance
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $2,000,000.00
Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include:
r Premises and Operations
Explosion & Collapse Hazard
F7
Underground Damage Hazard
Products & Completed Operations Hazard
Contractual Liability
Independent Contractors Coverage
Personal Injury
Advertising injury
B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance.
For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $2,000,000.00 Combined Single
Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $5,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit,
to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and
Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job
and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the Total Price of New
Construction (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured.
E. Umbrella Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $0.00'on all contracts with
coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability
coverages.
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance
Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00.
Definitions:
Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority
to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-
83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's
or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project.
Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the
Contractor'slperson's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental
entity.
Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor
Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has
8
r
3. undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with
the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without
limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -
operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to
provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or
r.. delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a
project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage
vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and
payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of
Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on
the project, for the duration of the project.
3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being
awarded the contract.
4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new
certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended.
The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the
governmental entity:
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all
persons providing services on the project; and
(b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project.
6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and
for one year thereafter.
7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project.
8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by
the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the
project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and
report lack of coverage.
9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services
on the project, to:
(a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts
and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas
Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
(b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate
i, of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person
Y providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project;
and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of
the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects
the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by
paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for
whom they are providing services.
10, By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the
Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will
provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the
duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance
carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance
Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative
penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.
11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the
Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor
does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the
governmental entity.
G. Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner
for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence
of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the
insurance company setting forth:
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by
such certificate.
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by
such certificate.
10
r"
! (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at
the address shown in the bid specifications.
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or
cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate.
(7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job
specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable.
(8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project.
(9) A Contractor shall:
(a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the
project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of
any coverage agreements;
(b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the
governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project;
(c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental
entity:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for
all persons providing services on the project; and
(ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter;
(I) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
-• (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project
that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current
coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other
posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type
and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and
any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be
the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional
words or changes:
rr
4
G.
P
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services
related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation
insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or
materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the
project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive
Information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your
employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to
provide coverage;" and
(h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,
to:
(i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll
amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing
services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning
work on the project;
(iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language:
"By signing this contract or providing or causing to be
provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this
contract is representing to the governmental entity that all
employees of the person signing this contract who will
provide services on the project will be covered by workers'
compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that
the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of
classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all
coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate
Insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the
commission's Division of Self-insurance Regulation.
Providing false or misleading information may subject the
Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties,
civil penalties, or other civil actions.";
(iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the
Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the
project; and '
(2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown
on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the
project;
12
29
30
31
(vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project
and for one year thereafter;
(vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on
the project; and
(viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as
required by paragraphs (I)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to
the person for whom they are providing services.
DISABLED EMPLOYEES
Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of
1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such
individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee
compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment.
PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS
OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless
against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way,
manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of
machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract
and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish
satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or
waived.
If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of
those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five
(5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain
unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a
sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such
indebtedness.
PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material
or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof.
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and
save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except
that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular
design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or
required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material
or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractorshall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers,
agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the
Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's
Representative prior to bidding.
13
32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and
regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form,
the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the
Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such
laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor
observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in
writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the
work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within
said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or
local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors
perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's
Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as
the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may
enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as
though embodied herein.
33. SUBCONTRACTING
The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this
contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required
in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as
provided by the contract documents.
34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of
beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are
essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in
this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified,
then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner
may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $1600.00 (ONE THOUSAND FIVE
HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as
herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for
substantially completing the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial
completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into
consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality.
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages
the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount
agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and
is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach.
IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS
OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT.
14
{f
k
35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall
be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as
shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution
shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this
contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that
when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may
direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the
construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized.
f., The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative,
schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the
Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts.
36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE
The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this
project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and
has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that
it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been
delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors
J employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public
enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all
justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days
of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the
r extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial,
and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided
,.• herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived.
37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein
fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such
work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in
securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for
hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except
where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in
which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such
stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.
38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length,
area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the
r-- event this contract is let on a unit price basis; then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the
specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material
to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated
,., to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they
are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing
their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are
expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and
r agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ
somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method,
payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project.
it 15
,
39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way
encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under
this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be
liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without
limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees,
against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising
from or growing out of the performance of this contract.
40. PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by
the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the
specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the
bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to
receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all
expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner
and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of
Owner's Representative.
41. PAYMENTS
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the
contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective
work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's
Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection
with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there
are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by
Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's
agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for
partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine
the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if
submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a
certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor
up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's
Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof.
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the
Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be
retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by
Owner under the terms of the contract documents.
Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to
enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work
performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said
partial payment is attributable.
16
43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
I Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31)
working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been
substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time,
if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's
Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding
the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete
r" the work within the time provided in this contract.
44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT
The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final
completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final
completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's
Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion,
Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final
completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final
completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the
obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or
warranties implied by law or otherwise.
45. CORRECTION OF WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative
on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and
Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming
to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of
other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any
such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative,
Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the
contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and
Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which
F" shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's
Representative.
46. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify
the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of:
(a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.
(c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor.
(d) Damage to another contractor.
r When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the
amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
17
E
47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor
shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's
Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception.
Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner
shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right
under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by
Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's
Representative, said objections shall be.deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed
denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed
that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor,
and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and
Owner's Representative, by Contractor.
48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after
written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the
written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety
on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be
delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no
further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required.
After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any
machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and
equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the
Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or
credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for
under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will
ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice
hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with
diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract
documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or
otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective
manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and
supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor,
machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall
be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time
become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than
the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the
Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the
sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said
Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or
(b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper
having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of
the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of
any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost
under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain
bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which
18
2,
i would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be
credited therewith.
P In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall
have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as
�.. provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract
accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to
Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be,
_ shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion.
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would
have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract,
r- or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the
Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over
to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price,
and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time
designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of
E the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the
Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided,
f however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of
such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to
the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the
r. date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net
I sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at
either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any
machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than
r the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners.
The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted
f` by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this
,I paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise
of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies
,., available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in
paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth.
49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY
The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually
performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be
liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the
project which is the subject matter of this contract.
50. BONDS
1 The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
I $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved
r Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be
in effect until such bonds are so fumished.
r-
C` 19
1
k
51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions
conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall
control.
52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the
work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual
obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the
prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to
direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work
covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's
work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and
vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or
effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's
Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation.
54. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at
the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus
materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition.
In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS
Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response,
Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same
may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in
any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the
Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the
City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a
Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in
the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project
or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts
and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least
twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and
provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If
the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5)
days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied.
In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper
performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage,
disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or
asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective
gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum
products or byproducts and/or asbestos.
20
;
sob
�rr
Oft
1 F
i
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
"
r
{
.
,I
Resolution tio. 5121
March 14, 1996
is
Item #19
I"
RESOLUTION
WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of
per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public
i works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's
Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and
WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February
12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984, and further updated b%*
Resolution No. 2502 enacted January 8. 1987; and
WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the
current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE:
} BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall he
as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made
a part hereof for all intents and purposes:
Exhibit A:
Building Construction Trades
Exhibit B:
Paving and Highway Construction
Exhibit C.
Overtime Rate
Exhibit D:
Weekend and Holiday Rate
Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem
wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and
such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law.
Passed by the City Council this 14th
! ATTEST:
Betty M. Anson. City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
I
Mary AndrYws, Managing Director of
I ( Human Resources
f APPROVED AS TO FORM:
I;
i;
i14afold Willard, Assistant City Attorney
I
I'
H W : da/ccdocs/pubworks. res
February 14. 1996
�I
ii
I�
i)
II
1
I;
i;
i!
2
rch , 1996.
YOR
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
Craft Hourly te
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
10.00
Air Conditioner Installer
11.00
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
5.50
Asbestos Worker
8.00
Asbestos Supervisor
11.00
Bricklayer
11.00
Bricklayer -Helper
6.00
Carpenter
11.00
Carpenter -Helper
6.00
Cement Finisher
7.50
Drywall Hanger
10.00
Electrician
13.00
Electrician -Helper
6.00
Equipment Operator -Heavy
8.50
Equipment Operator -Light
7.50
Floor Installer
8.50
Glazier
8.00
Insulator-Piping/Boiler
9.00
Insulator -Helper
5.50
Iron Worker
8.00
Laborer -General
5.50
Mortar Mixer
5.50
Painter
9.50
Plumber
10.50
Plumber -Helper
6.00
Roofer
8.00
Roofer -Helper
5.50
Sheet Metal Worker
8.75
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
5.50
Weider -Certified
10.00
EXHIBIT B
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft Hourly Rate
Asphalt Heaterman
6.00
Asphalt Shoveler
5.50
Concrete Finisher
7.35
Concrete Finisher -Helper
5.75
Electrician
10.50
Flagger
5.50
Form Setter
6.50
Form Setter -Helper
5.50
Laborer -General
5.50
Laborer -Utility
6.25
Mechanic
7.25
Mechanic -Helper
5.50
Power Equipment Operators
Asphalt Paving Machine
7.00
Bulldozer
7.00
Concrete Paving Machine
7.00
Front End Loader
6.50
Heavy Equipment Operator
7.00
Light Equipment Operator
6.50
Motor Grader Operator
8.50
Roller
6.00
Simper
6.50
Tractor
6.50
Truck Driver -Light
6.00
Truck Driver -Heavy
6.50
.:11: S]
Prevailing Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate.
EXHIBIT D
Prevailing Wage Rates
Weekend and Holiday Rate
The rate for weekend and holiday is 1 1/2 times base rate.
No Text
HOLLY
C'r7. NTE
A Renovation and Addition to the Former
Fort Worth & Denver South Plains Depot
CITY OF LUBBOCK
CAPITAL PROJECT #9355
18M AVENUE q Lubbock, Texas
0
PROJECT MANUAL
AND SPECIFICATIONS
August, 3 1998
mc���oanK
ARC H ITECTS INC
71L'
101oast0ahla wt 5WW7WAvwa rms71M14W
TM Su 476 0201 MX Su 476 0216
WMERVI Al MON DM=U 80FARC7 fW=
0
Table of Contents
PROJECT MANUAL
for
Buddy Holly Center
A Renovation & Addition To the Former
Fort Worth & Denver South Plains Depot
Lubbock, Texas
City of Lubbock Capital Project No. 9355
August 3,1998
SPECIFICATIONS
Item No. of Pages
DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 Summary of Work.......................................................................................................................................2
01027 Applications For Payment...........................................................................................................................3
01030
Alternates....................................................................................................................................................2
01035
Modification Procedures.............................................................................................................................2
01040
Project Coordination...................................................................................................................................3
01045
Cutting and Patching...................................................................................................................................3
01050
Field Engineering........................................................................................................................................2
01200
Project Meetings.........................................................................................................................................2
01345
Submittals..................................................................................................................................................3
01400
Quality Control Services.............................................................................................................................3
01421
Reference Standards and Definitions........................................................................................................12
01500
Temporary Facilities...................................................................................................................................5
01600
Materials and Equipment............................................................................................................................4
01631
Product Substitutions..................................................................................................................................2
01705
Project Closeout..........................................................................................................................................3
01740
Warranties and Bonds.................................................................................................................................2
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK .
02071
Building Selective Demolition....................................................................................................................3
02231
Tree Protection and Trimming....................................................................................................................2
02260
Excavation Support Systems.......................................................................................................................2
02300
Earthwork....................................................................................................................................................7
02361
Termite Control...........................................................................................................................................2
02514
Hot -Mixed Asphalt Pavement Repair
.........................................................................................................4
02760
Pavement Marking Paint.............................................................................................................................2
02770
Concrete Curb and Gutter...........................................................................................................................2
02775
Concrete Sidewalks.....................................................................................................................................2
02780
Unit Pavers .......................................... %....................................................................................................... 5
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete................................................:............................................................................13
03532 Concrete Floor Topping..............................................................................................................................2
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04720 Cast Stone....................................................................................................................................................3
04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies.........................................................................................................................16
r TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC -1
i.
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
Item No. of Pages
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120 Structural Steel........................................................................................................................................... 5
05310
Steel Deck................................................................................................................................................ 4
05400
Cold -Formed Metal Framing.................................................................................................................... 4
05500
Metal Fabrications.......................................................................................................:.............................. 8
05521
Custom Railings and Guardrails................................................................................................................ 8
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100
Rough Carpentry ........................................................................................................................................ 6
06150
Wood Decking........................................................................................................................................... 2
06200
Exterior Carpentry ..................................................................................................................................... 4
06402
Interior Architectural Woodwork.............................................................................................................. 8
DIVISIONS 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07160
Dampproofmg System............................................................................................................................... 3
07210
Building Insulation..................................................................................................................................... 3
07320
Roofing Tiles............................................................................................................................................ 3
07531
EPDM Single -Ply Membrane Roofing..................................................................................................... 4
07610
Sheet Metal Roofmg.................................................................................................................................. 4
07620
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.................................................................................................................. 4
07920
Joint Sealants.............................................................................................................................................. 9
DMSION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110
Steel Doors and Frames............................................................................................................................. 4
08211
Flush Wood Doors..................................................................................................................................... 4
08213
Custom -Fabricated Stile and Rail Wood Doors........................................................................................ 4
08335
Door Chain Grille................................................................................:...............................:...................... 2
08410
Aluminum Entrances and Storefront......................................................................................................... 7
08520
Fixed Aluminum Windows....................................................................................................................... 4
08710
Door Hardware....................................................................................................................................... 7
08800
Glass and Glazing...................................................................................................................................... 8
08830
Mirrored Glass.................................................................................:......................................................... 3
08990
All -Glass Partitions.................................................................................................................................... 3
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09220
Portland Cement Plaster............................................................................................................................. 6
09255
Gypsum Board Assemblies........................................................................................................................
9
09265
Gypsum Board Shaft -Wall Assemblies.....................................................................................................
5
09420
Terrazzo Tile..............................................................................................................................................
3
09511
Acoustical Panel Ceilings..........................................................................................................................
5
09651
Resilient Tile Flooring ................... .................................. ..........................................................................
4
09653
Resilient Wall Base and Accessories.........................................................................................................
4
09680
Carpet.........................................................................................................................................................
5
09900
Painting....................................................................................................................................................10
09931
Exterior Wood Stains.................................................................................................................................
5
09950
Wall Coverings..........................................................................................................................................
3
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10155 Toilet Compartments................................................................................................................................. 4
10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories....................................................................................................................... 3
DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT
%-" 11451 Residential Appliances ................................
..................................... 1
�` TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1
8/3/98
Buddy Holly Center
City of Lubbock CP #9355
Item
No. of Pam
11451
Residential Appliances................................................................................................................................I
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12511
Horizontal Louver Blinds...........................................................................................................................2
DIVISION 13 & 14 - NOT USED
14240
Hydraulic Elevator......................................................................................................................................7
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL WORK
15010
Basic Mechanical Requirements.................................................................................................................3
15050
Basic Mechanical Materials.......................................................................................................................9
15100
Valves..........................................................................................................................................................5
15145
Hangers and Supports.................................................................................................................................4
15170
Motors.........................................................................................................................................................2
15250
Mechanical Insulation.................................................................................................................................9
15410
Plumbing Piping..........................................................................................................................................9
15430
Plumbing Specialties...................................................................................................................................9
15440
Plumbing Fixtures.......................................................................................................................................8
15461
Electric Water Heaters................................................................................................................................5
15496
Natural Gas Piping......................................................................................................................................7
15575
Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks.............................................................................................................3
15610
Furnaces......................................................................................................................................................5
15671
Condensing Units........................................................................................................................................6
15853
Power Ventilators........................................................................................................................................6
15955
Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles.................................................................................................................3
15891
Metal Ductwork..........................................................................................................................................7
15910
Duct Accessories.........................................................................................................................................5
15975
Control Systems Equipment........................................................................................................................5
15990
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing........................................................................................ ..............12
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL WORK
16010
Basic Electrical Requirements....................................................................................................................3
16050
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.....................................................................................................3
16119
Underground Ducts and Utility Structures.................................................................................................5
16120
Conductors and Cables...............................................................................................................................4
16121
Control/Signal Transmission Media...........................................................................................................3
16130
Raceways and Boxes...................................................................................................................................6
16140
Wiring Devices...........................................................................................................................................4
16190
Supporting Devices and Hangers................................................................................................................2
16452
Grounding...................................................................................................................................................4
16470
Panelboards.................................................................................................................................................5
16475
Fuses............................................................................................................................................................3
16476
Disconnect Switches...................................................................................................................................3
16478
Transient Voltage Suppression...................................................................................................................6
16515
Interior Lighting..........................................................................................................................................5
16721
Fire Alarm Systems.....................................................................................................................................9
16915
Lighting Control Equipment..............................................................................................:........................4
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 3
i
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. The Project consists of Renovation and Additions To the Former Fort Worth and Denver South
Plains Depot in Lubbock, Texas, as shown on Contract Documents prepared by McKinney
Architects Inc, dated August 3, 1998.
r- B. The Work consists of new concrete foundations and slab, new brick veneer, CMU bearing walls,
new clay tile, metal and membrane roofing, new interior finishes and partitions, structural steel,
mechanical, electrical and plumbing systems.
r C. Performance of the work within the construction schedule requires that the site will be in use
by the Owner during the construction period.
1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have partial use of the premises
f
for construction operations. The Contractor's use of the site will be limited to those access
routes, staging and storage areas, and work areas indicated in the drawings.
1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated. Portions of the site beyond
areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed, except where
indicated. Schedule work outside of the construction fence line to minimize the length of
the construction period.
2. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available for use at all times.
Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize
space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.
B. Use of the Site: Maintain the site in an undamaged condition throughout the construction
period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
1.4 ALTERATIONS
A. General: The Drawings are based on field investigations, describe addition and alteration work
requirements for the existing facilities in a general, but not in a detailed manner. The extent of
such description shall not, in any way, be interpreted as modifying the intent that the alteration
work is to be carried out in a manner that will provide complete and usable facilities in every
area of the Work. The General Contractor and/or Subcontractor(s) is presumed to have visited
the site, become familiar with existing conditions and the alterations intended by the documents.
B. Provide temporary fencing, barriers, covers, etc. as necessary or required to protect existing
remaining facilities from factors that could be detrimental to such facilities. The General
Contractor and/or Subcontractor(s) shall also be responsible for the orderly execution of
l alterations operations, the removal of debris, and general housekeeping as required.
l C. Patching of Existing Materials shall be done with materials which match existing materials as
r to color, grade, texture, size, etc. When it is impossible to furnish matching materials, due to
17 discontinuation or other logical reasons, such situations shall be reported immediately to the
Architect. The Architect will determine what materials are to be substituted, and will so advise
the General Contractor.
r SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1
a
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.5 SEQUENCE OF WORK
A. General: The work shall be executed at such time and in such way as to cause the least
inconvenience to the Owner, and the General Contractor and Subcontractors shall give proper
consideration to the fact that all work is involved with a public site. The project is immediately
adjacent to existing surface parking and driveways, which are to remain fully operational and
occupied by the Owner at all times. The Contractor shall give the Owner adequate notice of not
less than two weeks in advance of proceeding with work in an area or areas where construction
could interfere with the Owner's activities. It is a requirement that the work be pursued in a
manner which will interrupt as little as possible the normal operations of the utilized areas. The
Contractor shall consider the rights of the Owner's Contractors and Subcontractors. Contractor
shall keep in touch with the entire operation and promptly proceed with their work.
B. The Contractor shall submit for review and approval, listing, schedule, sequence of operation
by area, and schedule of time with critical path milestone dates which support the following
completion dates:
1. Area #1 shall be complete for Owner occupancy prior to June 1st 1999.
2. Area #2 shall be complete for Owner occupancy prior to July 1st 1999.
3. Area # 1 shall be complete for Owner occupancy prior to August 1st 1999.
1.6 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate its Work with Work provided under other contracts.
Separate Contracts will include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
1. Owner's Security Contractor.
2. Owner's Asbestos Abatement Contractor.
3. Owner's Exhibit Contractor.
4. Owner's Telephone Contractor.
5. Other Owner's Contractors to determined at a latter date.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable).
END OF SECTION 01010
01010 - 2 SUMMARY OF WORK
r
i
F
8J3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMIIZARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's
Construction Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts.
2. Schedules: The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are specified
in Division 1 Section "Submittals."
1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules
and forms, including:
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
b. Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets.
c. List of subcontractors.
d. Schedule of allowances.
e. List of products.
f. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
g. Schedule of submittals.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest possible date but no later than
7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules: Where Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments,
provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of the Architect.
c. City of Lubbock Capital Project (CP) number - 9355.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a. Generic name.
b. Related Specification Section or Division.
c. Dollar value.
1) Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one -hundredth percent, adjusted to total
100 percent.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line
items.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. For each part of the Work where an Application for Payment may include materials or
equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed, provide separate line
items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage
of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. Include
requirements for insurance and bonded warehousing, if required.
6. Unit -Cost Allowances: Show the line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of
the unit cost, multiplied by the measured quantity. Estimate quantities from the best
indication in the Contract Documents.
1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner.
1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment -Application Times: Each progress -payment date is indicated in the Agreement. The
period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated
in the Agreement.
C. Payment -Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the
form for Applications for Payment.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include notarization and execution
by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will
return incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the
last day of the construction period covered by the application.
E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
the Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall be complete,
including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
a. Submit final Applications for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every
entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is
lawfully entitled to a lien.
2. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to
the Owner.
F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or
coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
3. Schedule of Values.
4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
5. Schedule of unit prices.
01027 - 2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
6. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final).
7. List of Contractor's 'staff assignments.
8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
9. Copies of building permits.
10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the
Work.
11. Report of preconstruction meeting.
12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. This application shall reflect
Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of
designated portions of the Work.
1. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application
include:
a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals.
b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.
c. Test/adjust/balance records.
d. Maintenance instructions.
e. Startup performance reports.
f. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
g. Final cleaning.
h. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety.
i. Advice on shifting insurance coverages.
j. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of
Substantial Completion.
H. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide
with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following:
1. Completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.
3. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled.
4. Assurance that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue
delay.
5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner.
6. Certified property survey.
7. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
8. Removal of temporary facilities and services.
9. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
10. Change of door locks to Owner's access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01027
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 3
7
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 01030'- ALTERNATES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates.
B. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for
certain construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or
deducted from Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either
the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems
or installation methods described in Contract Documents.
C. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to
ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the
project. Include the costs of such coordination, modifications and adjustments of related Work
in the cost of each alternate.
D. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to each
party involved, notification of the status of the Alternate. Indicate whether the Alternate has
been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete
description of negotiated modifications to the Alternate.
E. Description: An "Alternate Description" is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced therein contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve
the Work described in the Alternate.
1. Include as part of the Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the
Alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ALTERNATE DESCRIPTIONS
A. Alternate No. 1: Install metal enclosures around air conditioning condenser units as indicated
on the drawings and specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications".
B. Alternate No. 2: Add curbs and landscaping at areas noted on the Site Plan as specified in
Division 2 Section.
C. Alternate No. 3: Remove existing wood and brick planter walls and add brick planter walls
around trees in Courtyard as indicated on the drawings and specified in Division 4 Section "Unit
Masonry Assemblies".
D. Alternate No. 4: Add metal grate screens at north and south windows in Buddy Holly Gallery
as shown on wall section 3, Sheet A11.
E. Alternate No. 5: Install metal fence and gates at Courtyard as noted on the Site Plan and install
handrails in area noted on Key Floor Plan and as specified in Division 5 Section "Metal
Fabrications".
F. Alternate No. 6: Add slatwall at walls and plastic laminate door panels of Lobby Shop 122 as
specified in Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" and Division 8.
FALTERNATES 01030 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddv Hollv Center 8/3/98
G. Alternate No. 7: Where scheduled in the Room Finish Schedule, in lieu of terrazzo tile provide
sheet vinyl floor covering as specified in Division 9 Section "Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings".
H. Alternate No. 8: Remove existing gypsum board ceilings over rooms so indicated on Demolition
Plan and replace with new 5/8 inch gypsum board ceiling.
I. Alternate No. 9: Where scheduled in the Room Finish Schedule:
1. In lieu of anodized aluminum reveal base provide 6" high paint grade wood base as
indicated on the drawings and specified in Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural
Woodwork".
2. In lieu of polished aluminum finish plastic laminate wainscot specified in Division 6
Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" provide 5/8 inch thick painted gypsum board.
J. Alternate No. 10: Add loose -fill glass -fiber insulation to achieve R-30 thermal resistance for _
the insulation itself over all ceilings. At existing ceilings provide baffles at recessed fixtures
prior to adding blown -in insulation. At new construction install 4 inch thick polyisocyanurate
rigid insulation in lieu of 3 inch thick.
K. Alternate No. 11: Omit steel canopy structure and its roof. Construct concrete foundation as
shown on the drawings.
L. Alternate No. 12: Omit Wall Type 22 at all locations indicated and omit all Type D light
fixtures and associated wiring, conduit, and switches.
M. Alternate No. 13: Omit all Type D light fixtures and associated wiring, conduit, and switches.
END OF SECTION 01030
01030 - 2 ALTERNATES _
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 01035 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUNE IARY
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
C. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
D. Division 1 Section "Application for Payment" for administrative procedures governing
applications for payment.
E. Division I Section "Product Substitutions" for administrative procedures for handling requests
for substitutions made after award of the Contract.
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving an adjustment
to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, will be issued by the Architect.
1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment
to the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the Architect, with a detailed description
of the proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications, if necessary.
B. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress, or to execute the proposed change.
C. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 10 days of receipt of the proposal
request, submit to the Architect for the Owner's review an estimate of cost necessary to execute
the proposed change.
1. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with the total
amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate
quantities.
D. Indicate delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
E. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the
Contract Time.
F. Contractor -Initiated Requests for Change: When latent or other unforseen conditions require
modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for
a change to the Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.
r G. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs along with the total amount
C'
of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
H. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
I. Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposed change in the Work
requires the substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
r MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
A. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and Contractor are not in total agreement on
the terms of a Change Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change
Directive on AIA Form G714, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work,
for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change in the
Work and designate the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum
or Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary
to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Change Proposal Request, the Contractor shall prepare a
Change Order on Standard AIA Change Order form G701 for the Architect to issue in triplicate
for Owner's and Contractor's signatures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION 01035
01035 - 2 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
f SECTION 01040 - PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL.
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for Project
coordination including, but not necessarily limited to:
1. Coordination.
2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
3. General installation provisions.
4. Cleaning and protection.
B. Requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule are included in Section "Submittals".
C. Progress meetings, coordination meetings and pre -installation conferences are included in
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of these
Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations included under different Sections of the Specifications that are dependent
upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of other
components, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities in
the sequence required to obtain the best results.
2. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and
attendance at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of
their Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of schedules.
2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
3. Delivery and processing of submittals.
4. Progress meetings.
e
5. Project Close-out activities.
is
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated
in, the Work. Refer to other sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are
designated as Owner's property.
PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings:. Prepare and submit coordination Drawings where close and careful
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off -site by separate
entities, and where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for
efficient installation of different components.
1. Show the interrelationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
3. Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals."
4. Refer to Division-15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements," and Division-16 Section
"Basic Electrical Requirements" for specific coordination Drawing requirements for
mechanical and electrical installations.
B. Staff Names: Before the Notice to Proceed, submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff
assignments, including the Superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site; identify
individuals, their duties and responsibilities; list their addresses and telephone numbers.
1. Post copies of the list by each temporary telephone.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable).
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the
substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
1.. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation.
Reject damaged and defective items.
2. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit
or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents.
C. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work. Arrange joints in exposed work
to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision.
D. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best
possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as
necessary to prevent deterioration.
E. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity
of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
F. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at
standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indication
indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision.
Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Texas Accessibity Standards for
mounting heights.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage
or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
B. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of
the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without
damaging effects.
01040 - 2 PROJECT COORDINATION
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
7
r: C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
exposure during the construction period.
END OF SECTION 01040
PROJECT COORDINATION
01040 - 3
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUNEVIARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
patching individual parts of the Work.
a. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer
to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.
1.3 SUBNHTTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Where approval of procedures for cutting and patching is
required before proceeding, submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time
cutting and patching will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include the following
information, as applicable, in the proposal:
1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed and
indicate why it cannot be avoided.
2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include changes
to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's
appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.
4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that
will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out -of -service. Indicate how long
service will be disrupted.
6. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit
details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original
structure.
7. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the
Architect's right to later require complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Historical Work: Obtain Architect's approval of the cutting and patching
proposal before cutting and patching any portion of historical elements, unless explicitly
indicated in the Construction Documents. Where not explicitly indicated, refer questionable
elements to the Architect for determination of historic nature.
B. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that
would change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio.
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the
following structural elements:
a. Foundation construction.
b. Bearing and retaining walls.
i c. Structural concrete.
d. Structural steel.
110411 t
e. Lintels.
p; CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
f. Timber and primary wood framing.
g. Structural decking.
h. Stair systems.
i. Miscellaneous structural metals.
j. Exterior curtain -wall construction.
k. Equipment supports.
1. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
C. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related
components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do
not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied
spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic
qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence
of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually
match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are
unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass
that, of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to
be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take
corrective action before proceeding.
1. Before proceeding, meet at the Project Site with parties involved in cutting and patching,
including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and
conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
D. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the
building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass
them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of
other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore
surfaces to their original condition. n
01045 - 2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original Installer;
comply with the original Installer's recommendations.
1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,
not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings
when not in use.
2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side
�• into concealed surfaces.
3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw
or a diamond -core drill.
4. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching
q requires excavating and backfilling.
5. By-pass utility services, such as pipe or conduit, before cutting Where services are required
to be removed, relocated, or abandoned. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to
be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion. of pipe or conduit to
prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting.
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified
f tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained
adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
3. Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair
floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform color and
appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if
necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire
unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second
coat.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar items.. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features
before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original
condition.
END OF SECTION 01045
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 3
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
'.: SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. General: This -Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field -engineering
services including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Building layout and control during construction.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with
other construction activities.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record survey data as
required under provisions of "Submittals" and "Project Closeout" Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
i
3.1 EXANIINATION
A. Identification: The Owner will provide information which identifies existing control points and
property line locations.
B. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing
r" benchmarks, before proceeding to lay out the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks
and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction.
1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval.
Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points or requirements to relocate reference
points because of necessary changes in grades or locations.
2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points. Base replacements on the original
survey control points.
i
j C. Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data
established by survey control points.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
D. Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities
and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction.
1. Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
r^, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water -service piping.
! 3.2 PERFORMANCE
�l A. Work from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks and
markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate
each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or
recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions.
i
i
FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 18/3/98
1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels provided for
their use.
2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level, and plumb. "
B. Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey work. Make this log
available for reference.
1. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when deviations
that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for _
grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building foundations,
column grids and locations, floor levels, and control lines and levels required for mechanical and
electrical work.
E. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing structures,
utility poles, lines, services,, or other appurtenances located in or affected by construction.
Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 01050
01050 - 2 FIELD ENGINEERING
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings including
but not limited to:
1. Pre -Construction Conference.
2. Pre -Installation Conferences.
3. Coordination Meetings.
4. Progress Meetings.
B. Construction schedules are specified in another Division-1 Section.
1.3 PRE -CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Facilities Management (City of Lubbock) will schedule a pre -construction conference and
organizational meeting at the Project site or other convenient location no later than 10 days after
execution of the Agreement and prior to commencement of construction activities and issuance
of Notice To Proceed. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities, personnel assignments
and administrative procedures.
B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect and their consultants, the
Contractor and its superintendent, major subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and other
concerned parties shall each be represented at the conference by persons familiar with and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress including such topics as:
1. Purpose of the Pre -Construction Conference
2. Notice To Proceed Date.
3. Public Relations.
4. Duties of the Contractor & Owner.
5. Separate Contracts.
6. Team Organization for Construction
a. Lines of Communication
b. Chain of Communication
7. Schedule of Values.
8. List of Sub -Contractors.
9. Tentative Construction Schedule.
10. Designation of Responsible Personnel.
11. Specific Meetings.
12. Safety, First Aid, Security and Emergency Procedures.
13. Working Hours.
14. Use of the Premises.
15. Utilities.
16. Parking.
17. Critical Work Sequencing.
18. Office, Work and Storage Areas.
19. Equipment. Deliveries & Priorities.
20. Shop Drawing and Submittal Review
21. Procedures for Processing Field Decisions and Change Orders.
22. Procedures for Processing Applications for Payment.
PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
23. Testing.
24. Preparation of Record Documents.
25. Contract Close Out Procedures.
1.4 MEETINGS
A. Conduct meetings at the Project site as required to coordinate the Work.
B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner, Architect and Contractor, subcontractors,
suppliers and other entities required shall be represented at these meetings by persons familiar
with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to progress.
C. Reporting: No later than 3 days after each meeting date, distribute copies of minutes of the
meeting to each party present.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01200
01200 - 2 PROJECT MEETINGS
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. The types of submittal requirements specified in this section include shop drawings, product
data, samples and miscellaneous work -related submittals. Individual submittal requirements are
specified in applicable sections for each unit of work. Refer to other Division-1 sections and
other contract documents for requirements of administrative submittals'.
B. Submittals specified in this Section are required for all systems where submittals are specified
in individual sections, as well as materials and items which are being substituted for specified
items.
1. Substitution submittals shall comply with the requirements of the General and
Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 Sections, including this Section.
C. Definitions: Work -related submittals of this section categorized for convenience as follows:
1. Shop drawings include specially -prepared technical data for this project, including drawings,
diagrams, performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns, reports,
calculations, instructions, measurements and similar information not in standard printed
form for general application to a range of similar projects.
2. Product data include standard printed information on materials, products and systems; not
specially -prepared for this project, other than the designation of selections from among
available choices printed therein.
3. Samples include both fabricated and unfabricated physical examples of materials, products
and units of work; both as complete units and as smaller portions of units of work either
for limited visual inspection or (where indicated) for more detailed testing and analysis.
4. Miscellaneous submittals related directly to work (non -administrative) include warranties,
maintenance agreements, workmanship bonds, project photographs, copies of industry
standards, record drawings, field measurement data, operating and maintenance materials,
and similar information, devices and materials applicable to the work and not processed as
shop drawings, product data or samples.
D. Shop Drawings: Provide newly -prepared information, or reproducible sheets, with graphic
information at accurate scale (except as otherwise indicated), with name of preparer indicated
(firm name). Shop dimensions and notes which are based on field measurements. Identify
materials and products in the work shown. Indicate compliance with standards, and special
coordination requirements. Do not allow shop drawing copies without appropriate final "Action"
markings by Architect/Engineer to be used in connection with the work.
1. Submittals: Minimally, one correctable translucent reproducible print and three blue -line
prints; the reproducible and one print will be returned. Multi -copy distribution of approved
submittals shall be required for use by the Owner, Architect/Engineer and Contractor.
Transmit three blue -line prints of the final corrected submittal. The multi -copy reproduction
and distribution of submittals shall be provided by the Contractor.
E. Product Data: Collect required data into one submittal for each unit of work or system; and
mark each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to project. Include
manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application and use, compliance with
standards, application of labels and seals, notation of field measurements which have been
checked, and special coordination requirements.
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 1
F
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1. Submittals: Do not submit product data, or allow its use on the project, until compliance
with requirements of contract document has been confirmed by the General Contractor.
Submittal is for information and record, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Submittals ' for Review: Submit four sets of copies greater than the Contractor wants
returned (the Architect/Engineer will retain four, including one set for the Owner, and
return the remainder).
3. Installer's Copy: Do not proceed with installation of materials, products or systems until
final copy of applicable product data is in possession of Installer.
F. Samples: Provide units identical with final condition of proposed materials or products for the
work. Include "range" samples (not less than 3 units) where unavoidable variations must be
expected, and describe or identify variations between units of each set. Provide Full set of
optional samples where Architect's/Engineer's selection is required.
1. Quality Control Set: Maintain returned final set samples at project site, in suitable
condition and available for quality control comparisons by Architect/Engineer, and by
others.
2. Reusable Samples: Return samples which are permitted to be incorporated in the work are
so indicated in the individual work sections, and must be in undamaged condition at time
of use.
1.3 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submittal Scheduling: Where appropriate in administrative (listing of products, manufacturers,
suppliers and subcontractors, and in job progress schedule), show principal work -related
submittals and time requirements for coordination of submittal activity with related work in each
instance.
1. Listing: Prepare a separate listing, organized by related specification section number
sequence, showing principal work related submittals and their initial submittal dates as
required for coordination of the work. Submit listing within 10 days of date of
commencement of the work.
B. Coordination and Sequencing: Coordinate and processing of submittals with performance of the
work so that work will not be delayed by submittals. Coordinate and sequence different
categories of submittals for same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not
be delayed for coordination of A/E's review with another.
C. No Extension of Time will be Authorized when the Contractor fails to transmit submittals to the
Architect/Engineer sufficiently in advance of the work.
1.4 SPECIFIC -CATEGORY SUBMITTAL
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated in individual work sections, comply with requirements
specified herein for each indicated category of submittal
B. Preparation of Submittals: Before submission of Shop Drawings and Brochures, the Contractor
shall certify that each Shop Drawing or each item of equipment complies with the Contract
Documents for this project. Such certification shall be made by the Owner, A Partner, a
Corporate Officer of the Contractor, or by a person duly authorized to sign for the Contractor.
Unless so certified, Shop Drawings and/or Brochures shall be returned for resubmittal.
Certifications shall be in form of stamp impressions which state:
01300 - 2 SUBMITTALS
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
I hereby certify that this Shop Drawing and/or Brochure has been checked prior to submittal
to the Architect and that it complies in all respects, except as specifically noted, with the
requirements of the Contract Documents for this Project.
(Name of Contractor)
Signed
Name of Project:
Date
Submittal No.
C. Show Contractor's executed review and approval marking and provide a 3" x 4" blank space for
Architect's/Engineer's "Action" marking. Package Each submittal appropriately for transmittal
and handling. Submittals which are received from sources other than through Contractor's office
will be returned by A/E "without action".
D. Inspection and Test Reports: Classify each either "shop drawing" or "product data", depending
upon whether report is uniquely prepared for project or a standard publication of workmanship
control testing at point of production; process accordingly.
E. Warranties: Refer to "Products" section for specific requirements on warranties,
product/workmanship bonds, and maintenance agreements. In addition to copies desired for
Contractor's use, furnish 2 executed copies, except furnish 2 additional (confirmed) copies where
required for maintenance manuals.
F. Closeout Submittals: Refer to individual work and to Division 1 Section, "Project Closeout" for
specific requirements on submittal of closeout information, materials, tools and similar items.
G. General Distribution: Provide additional copies of submittals (not included in foregoing copy
submittal requirements) to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, governing authorities
and others as necessary for proper performance of the work. Include such additional copies in
transmittal to Architect/Engineer where required to receive "Action" marking before final
distribution. Record distributions on transmittal forms.
1.5 ACTION ON SUBMITTALS
A. Review Time:
1. Architect's Action: Where action and return is required or requested, Architect/Engineer
will review each submittal, mark with "Action", and it is the intent, where possible to return
i submittals within a minimum of 10 days of receipt. If submittal is a material substitution,
or color selection item, Architect will require a minimum of 15 days for review from date
of receipt. Where submittals must be held for coordination, or for groups of materials which
require finish and color selections, Architect will advise Contractor without delay.
PART 2 : PRODUCTS (not applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not applicable).
END OF SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3
4 ,
1
8/3/98 Buddy Holly :Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r*
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services.
B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports,
performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not
include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect.
C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with
Contract Document requirements.
D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not
production of standard products.
1. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in
the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and
tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and
installation procedures.
2. Inspections, test and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's
quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the
Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this
Section.
1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and similar quality
control services, specified in individual Specification Sections and required by governing
authorities, except where they are specifically indicated to be the Owner's responsibility, or are
provided by another identified entity; these services include those specified to be performed by
an independent agency and not by the Contractor.
1. The Contractor shall employ and pay an independent agency approved by the Owner, to
perform specified quality control services (materials testing).
2. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required inspections,
tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract
Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractor's
responsibility.
a. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's
responsibility, where required tests were performed on original construction.
3. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required
inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested.
Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel.
Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to:
a. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary
to facilitate inspections and tests.
1 b. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing
or assisting the agency in taking samples.
r
1
QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
c. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to
testing laboratories.
d. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials
mixes that require control by the testing agency.
e. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site.
B. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and similar
services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a
minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to
avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and
tests.
1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and
similar activities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test
or similar service, to the Architect, in duplicate, unless the Contractor is responsible for the
service. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report of each
inspection, test or similar service through the Contractor, in duplicate.
1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when
the authority so directs.
2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include, but
not be limited to:
a. Date of issue.
b. Project title and number.
c. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency.
d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
f. Designation of the Work and test method.
g. Identification of product and Specification Section.
h. Complete inspection or test data.
i. Test results and an interpretations of test results.
j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample -taking and testing.
k. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work complies
with Contract Document requirements.
1. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
m. Recommendations on retesting.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including
independent testing laboratories, which are prequalified as complying with "Recommended
Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the ' American Council of
Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be
performed.
1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized
by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the State in which the Project is located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).
01400 - 2 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
r
is
8/3/98 Buddy. Holly Center City, of Lubbock CP #9355
r-
f
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample -taking and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including
deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Document
r' requirements for "Cutting and Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired
construction.
r C. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility,
ty, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.
END OF SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400 - 3
t
1
8/3I98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 01421 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
r" PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division l Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
` B. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the
Drawings; or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar requirements in
the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used
r.
to help the user locate the reference. Location is not limited.
C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved,"
"required," and "permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and
similar phrases.
D. "Approved": The term "approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the
!" Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and
responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
E. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders
�^ issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within
i" the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish The term "fumish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for
unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project site including the actual
unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying,
working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended
use.
I. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as
an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, who performs a particular construction
activity including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required
to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.
1. The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having successfully
completed a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being
familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Trades: Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities
must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,
such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively
to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.
J. "Project site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either
exclusively or in conjunction with others performing work as part of the Project. The extent of
the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description
of the land on which the Project is to be built.
r K. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific
inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to
r
interpret results of those inspections or tests.
R
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01421 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION
A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on
the Construction Specifications Institute's 16-division format and "MasterFormat" numbering
system.
B. Specification Content: These Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language
and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents
is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied,
but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words shall be
interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context
of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At
certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe
responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so
noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied
directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part
of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with 2 or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,
comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are
different but apparently equal to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly
with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within
reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are
minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer
uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project must be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the
Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source and make them available
on request.
E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently
abbreviated. The following abbreviations" and acronyms, as referenced in the Contract
Documents, mean the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are
believed, but are not assured, to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
01421 -2 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
r"
a
8/3/98 Buddy holly Center . City of Lubbock CP #9355
AA Aluminum Association
900 19th St., NW, Suite 300
Washington, DC 20006 (202) 862-5100
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Assoc.
,.. 1540 E. Dundee Road, Suite 310
Palatine, IL 60067 (708) 202-1350
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
444 North Capitol St., Suite 249
Washington, DC 20001 (202) 624-5800
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
P.O. Box 12215
One Davis Dr.
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709-2215 (919) 549-8141
ACY American Concrete Institute
P.O. Box 19150
Detroit, MI 48219 (313) 532-2600
ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories
1629 K St., NW
Washington, DC 20006 (202) 887-5872
ADC Air Diffusion Council
11 South LaSalle St., Suite 1400
Chicago, IL 60603 (312) 201-0101
AGA American Gas Assoc.
1515 Wilson Blvd.
Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 841-8400
AHA American Hardboard Assoc.
1210 W. Northwest Highway
Palatine, IL 60067 (708) 934-8800
ARAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
20 N. Wacker Dr., Suite 1500
Chicago, IL 60606 (312) 984-5800
AIA The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20006 (202) 626-7300
AIA American Insurance Assoc.
t` 1130 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 1000
Washington, DC 20036 (202) 828-7100
r.. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
One East Wacker Dr., Suite 3100
Chicago, IL 60601-2001 (312) 670-2400
r
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01421 3
f
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98 `
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
1101 17th St., NW
Washington, DC 20036-4700 (202) 452-7100
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
7012 S. Revere Pkwy, Suite 140 ..
Englewood, CO 80112 (303) 792-9559
ALI Associated Laboratories, Inc.
c/o HOH Chemicals
500 S. Vermont St.
Palatine, IL 60067 (708) 358-7400
ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee
P.O. Box 210
Germantown, MD 20875 (301) 972-1700
AMCA Air Movement and Control Assoc.
30 W. University Dr.
Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893 (708) 394-0150 "
ANSI American National Standards Institute
11 West 42nd St., 13th Floor New York, NY 10036 (212) 642-4900
APA APA-The Engineered Wood Association
(Formerly American Plywood Assoc.)
P.O. Box 11700
Tacoma, WA 98411 (206) 565-6600
ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
4301 Fairfax Dr., Suite 425
Arlington, VA 22203 (703) 524-8800
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Assoc.
6000 Executive Dr., Suite 201
Rockville, MD 20852-3803 (301) 231-9050
ASA Acoustical Society of America
500 Sunnyside Blvd.
Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 576-2360
ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council
1627 K St., NW, Suite 1000
Washington, DC 20006-1707 (202) 452-1500
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
345 East 47th St.
New York, NY 10017-2398 (800) 548-2723
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle, NE
Atlanta, GA 30329-2305 (800) 527-4723 ..
01421 4 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City, of Lubbock CP #9355
r"
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
345 East 47th St.
r* New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7722
ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers
3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., Suite 210
Westlake Village, CA 91362 (805) 495-7120
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
100 Barr Harbor Dr.
West Conshohocken, PA 19428 (610) 832-9585
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
P.O. Box 1550
13924 Braddock Rd., No. 100
Centerville, VA 22020 (703) 222-1100
AWPA American Wood Preservers' Assoc.
P.O. Box 286
Woodstock, MD 21163-0286 (410) 465-3169
AWS American Welding Society
550 LeJeune Rd., NW
Miami, FL 33126 (305) 443-9353
AWWA American Water Works Assoc.
6666 W. Quincy Ave.
Denver, CO 80235 (303) 794-7711
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Assoc.
355 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor
New York, NY 10017-6603 (212) 661-4261
BIFMA The Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association
• 2680 Horizon Dr., SE, Suite Al
Grand Rapids, MI 49546-7500 (616) 285-3963
CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers Assoc.
1422 Euclid Ave., Suite 402
.. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-0711
CCC Carpet Cushion Council
P.O. Box 546
Riverside, CT 06878 (203) 637-1312
CISCA Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Assoc.
579 W. North Ave., Suite 301
Elmhurst, IL 60126 (708) 833-1919
CRI Carpet and Rug Institute
P.O. Box 2048
Dalton, GA 30722-2048 (706) 278-0232
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01421 - 5
f
C.
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 N. Plum Grove Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 (708) 517-1200
CTIOA Ceramic Tile Institute of America
12061 West Jefferson Blvd.
Culver City, CA 90230 (310) 574-7800
DHI Door and Hardware Institute
14170 Newbrook Dr.
Chantilly, VA 22021-2223 (703) 222-2010
DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Assoc.
245 Riverchase Parkway East, Suite O
Birmingham, AL 35244 (205) 988-9870
DLPA Decorative Laminate Products Assoc.
13924 Braddock Rd.
Centreville, VA 22020 (800) 684-3572
EIA Electronic Industries Assoc.
2001 Pennsylvania Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20006-1813 (202) 457-4900 --
EIMA EIFS Industry Manufacturers Assoc.
2759 State Road 580, Suite 112 _
Clearwater, FL 34621 (813) 726-6477
ETL ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc.
c/o Inchcape Testing Services
P.O. Box 2040
3933 Route 11, Industrial Park
Cortland, NY 13045 (800) 345-3851
(607) 753-6711
FCICA Floor Covering Installation Contractors Assoc.
(Formerly Floor Covering Installation Board)
P.O. Box 948
Dalton, GA 30722-0948 (706) 226-5488
FM Factory Mutual
1151 Boston -Providence Turnpike
P.O. Box 9102 _
Norwood, MA 02062 (617) 762-4300
GA Gypsum Association
810 First St., NE, Suite 510
Washington, DC 20002 (202) 289-5440
GANA Glass Association of North America —
3310 SW Harrison St.
Topeka, KS 66611-2279 (913) 266-7013
r
01421 - 6 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
t HEI Heat Exchange Institute
c/o Thomas Associates, Inc.
1300 Sumner Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-7333
HI Hydronics Institute
P.O. Box 218
35 Russo Place
Berkeley Heights, NJ 07922 (908) 464-8200
HMA Hardwood Manufacturers Assoc.
400 Penn Center Blvd.
Pittsburgh, PA 15235 (412) 829-0770
HPVA Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Assoc.
1825 Michael Farraday Dr.
P.O. Box 2789
Reston, VA 22090-0789 (703) 435-2900
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
P.O. Box 440
South Yarmouth, MA 02664 (508) 394-4424
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
345 E. 47th St.
New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7900
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
120 Wall St., Floor 17
New York, NY 100054001 (212) 248-5000
IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council
c/o ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc.
P.O. Box 2040
Route 11, Industrial Park
Cortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711
ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America
Stone City Bank Building, Suite 400
Bedford, IN 47421 (812) 275-4426 '
` LGSI Light Gage Structural Institute
r P.O. Box 866301
Plano, TX 75086-6301 (214) 618-3977
1
MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America
1385 Piccard Dr.
Rockville, MD 20850-4329 (301) 869-5800
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Assoc.
60 Revere Dr., Suite 500
Northbrook, IL 60062 (708) 480-9138
.., REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01421 - 7
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 813/98
MIA Masonry Institute of America
2550 Beverly Blvd.
Los Angeles, CA 90057 (213) 388-0472
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
11 South LaSalle St., Suite 1400
Chicago, IL 60603 (312) 201-0101
NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Assoc.
44 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 310
Alexandria, VA 22314 (703) 684-0084
NBHA National Builders Hardware Assoc.
(Now DHI)
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Assoc.
2302 Horse Pen Rd.
Herndon, VA 22071-3499 (703) 713-1900
NEC National Electrical Code (Available from NFPA)
NECA National Electrical Contractors Assoc.
3 Bethesda Metro Center, Suite 1100 —
Bethesda, MD 20814-5372 (301) 657-3110
NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc.
185 Bridge Plaza, North
Fort Lee, NJ 07024 (201) 944-3211
NELMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Assoc.
272 Tuttle Rd.
P.O. Box 87A
Cumberland Center, ME 04021 (207) 829-6901 _
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Assoc.
2101 L St., NW, Suite 300
Washington, DC 20037 (202) 457-8400
NFPA National Fire Protection Assoc.
One Batterymarch Park
P.O. Box 9101
Quincy, MA 02269-9101 (800) 344-3555
(617) 770-3000 _
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Assoc.
P.O. Box 34518
Memphis, TN 3 8184-0518 (901) 377-1818
NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority
103-4400 Dominion St. —
Burnaby, BC V5G 4G3
CANADA (604) 451-7323
01421 - 8 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
t NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Assoc.
P.O. Box 3009
C Memphis, TN 38173-0009 (901) 526-5016
NPA National Particleboard Assoc.
18928 Premiere Ct.
Gaithersburg, MD 20879-1569 (301) 670-0604
NPCA National Paint and Coatings Assoc.
1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20005 (202) 462-6272
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Assoc.
O'Hare International Center
10255 W. Higgins Rd., Suite 600
Rosemont, IL 60018-5607 (708) 299-9070
NSSEA National School Supply and Equipment Assoc.
8300 Colesville Rd., No. 250
Silver Spring, MD 20910 (301) 495-0240
NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Assoc.
1400 E. Touhy Ave., #G54
F Des Plaines, IL 60018 (800) 223-2301
(708) 299-5200
PATMI Power Actuated Tool Manufacturers' Institute, Inc.
1000 Fairgrounds Rd., Suite 200
St. Charles, MO 63301 (314) 947-6610
PCA Portland Cement Assoc.
5420 Old Orchard Rd.
Skokie, IL 60077-1083 (708) 966-6200
PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
c/o Sol Baker
1106 W. 77th St., South Dr.
Indianapolis, IN 46260 (317) 251-6970
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute
966 Hungerford Dr., Suite 12-B
Rockville, MD 20850 (301) 340-8580
RMA Rubber Manufacturers Assoc.
1400 K St., NW
Washington, DC 20005 (202) 682-4800
SDI Steel Deck Institute
P.O. Box 9506
Canton, OH 44711 (216) 493-7886
SDI Steel Door Institute
30200 Detroit Rd.
Cleveland, OH 44145-1967 (216) 889-0010
R
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01421 - 9
i
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council
c/o ETL Testing Laboratories
U.S. Route 11, Industrial Park
P.O. Box 2040
Cortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711
SHLMA Southern Hardwood Lumber Manufacturers Assoc.
(Now HMA)
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Assoc.
401 N. Michigan Ave.
Chicago, IL 60611 (312) 644-6610
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Assoc.
4201 Lafayette Center Dr.
P.O. Box 221230
Chantilly, VA 22022-1230 (703) 803-2980
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
4709 Scenic Highway
Pensacola, FL 32504-9094 (904) 434-2611
SSIUS Specialty Steel Industry of the United States
3050 K St., NW
Washington, DC 20007 (202) 342-8630
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
4516 Henry St.
Pittsburgh, PA 15213 (412) 687-1113
SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Assoc.
1806 Johns Dr.
Glenview, IL 60025-1657 (798) 729-7972
TCA Tile Council of America
511 Westinghouse Rd.
Pendleton, SC 29670 (803) 646-4021
UL Underwriters Laboratories
333 Pfingsten Rd.
Northbrook, IL 60062-2096 (708) 272-8800
UNI Uni-Bel PVC Pipe Assoc.
2655 Villa Creek Dr., Suite 155
Dallas, TX 75234 (214) 243-3902
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
P.O. Box 23145
Portland, OR 97281 (503) 639-0651
WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Assoc.
P.O. Box 25278
Portland, OR 97225 (503) 292-9288
01421 - 10 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
r`
r
i
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute
1101 Connecticut Ave. NW, Suite 700
r- Washington, DC 20036-4303 (202) 429-5125
` WWPA Western Wood Products Assoc.
Yeon Building
522 SW 5th Ave.
Portland, OR 97204-2122 (503) 224-3930
F. Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of Federal Government standards- or
specification -producing agencies are often abbreviated. The following abbreviations and
acronyms referenced in the Contract Documents indicate names of standards- or specification -
producing agencies of the Federal Government. Names and addresses are subject to change and
are believed, but are not assured, to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract
I Documents.
t'
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
(Available from the Government Printing Office)
` 732 N. Capitol St., NW
Washington, DC 20401 (202) 512-0000
r (Material is usually published first in the "Federal Register.")
CS Commercial Standard
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402 (202) 512-0000
DOC Department of Commerce
14th St. and Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20230 (202) 482-2000
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460 (202) 260-2090
FS Federal Specification Unit
(Available from GSA)
470 East L'Enfant Plaza, SW, Suite 8100
Washington, DC 20407 (202) 755-0325
GSA General Services Administration
F St. and 18th St., NW
Washington, DC 20405 (202) 708-5082
MIL Military Standardization Documents
(U.S. Department of Defense)
Defense Printing Service
700 Robbins Ave., Building 4D
Philadelphia, PA 19111 (215) 697-2179
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
Building 101, #A1134
Rte. I-270 and Quince Orchard Rd.
Gaithersburg, MD 20899 (301) 975-2000
t OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
f (U.S. Department of Labor)
200 Constitution Ave., NW
!"` Washington, DC 20210 (202) 219-5000
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01421 - 11
6
f ,
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PS Product Standard of NBS
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402 (202) 512-0000
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.6 GOVERNING REGULATIONS AND AUTHORITIES
A. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the following regulations and retain at the Project site
to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need:
1. Uniform Building Code, 1997 Edition.
2. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA).
3. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01421
01421 - 12 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFMTIONS
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center. City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
i Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Definitions: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section,
as extensions of provisions in the General Conditions and other Contract Documents. These
requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is
intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required, and no omission from this
section will be recognized as an indication by Architect or Engineer that such temporary activity
is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance with requirements of the
Contract Documents. Provisions of this section are applicable to, but not by way of limitation,
utility services, construction facilities, security -protection provisions, and support facilities.
p• B. This Section specifies requirements for temporary services and facilities, including utilities,
construction and support facilities, security and protection.
C. Temporary utilities required include but are not limited to:
f P �' q
1. Telephone service - for Contractor use only.
2. Water for construction.
3. Wastewater management.
4. Electric power.
D. Owner Responsibilities: It shall be the Owner's responsibility to allow the Contractor to connect
to and use its water, power and sewer utilities. The Owner shall pay all consumption costs
related to the Contractor's use of these utilities for construction purposes during the construction
phase provided that these costs are reasonable.
E. Contractor's Responsibilities: The Contractor shall with the assistance of the Owner locate
existing utilities and coordinate connections to and/or extension of these utilities as required for
use in and around the construction site. All materials and/or equipment costs related to the
extensions of these services for use by the Contractor during construction activities shall be the
Contractor's responsibility.
F. Temporary construction and support facilities required include but are not limited to:
1. Storage sheds as required.
2. Temporary heat.
3. Portable sanitary facilities; Contractor must provide all portable toilets, and drinking water.
4. Temporary enclosures.
5. Hoists; may be needed for roof work.
6. Temporary Project bulletin boards and identification signs.
7. Solid waste disposal services.
G. Security and protection facilities required include but are not limited to:
1. Barricades, warning signs, lights.
2. Temporary enclosure fence for the construction area, staging and storage areas.
3. Environmental protection.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 1
i
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the
service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in performance of the work. Maintain, expand
as required and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of
the Work. Do not remove until services or facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by the
authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
1. With the establishment of the job progress schedule, establish a schedule for the
implementation and termination of service for each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible
time, and when acceptable to the Owner and Architect/Engineer, change over from the use
of temporary utility service to the use of the permanent service, to enable removal of the
temporary utility and to eliminate possible interference with completion of the Work.
B. Conditions of Use: Operate temporary services and facilities in a safe and efficient manner. Do
not overload temporary services or facilities, and do not permit them to interfere with the
progress of the Work. Do not allow unsanitary conditions, public nuisances or hazardous
conditions to develop or persist on the site.
1. Temporary Utilities: Do not permit flooding or the contamination of water sources.
2. Temporary Construction and Support Facilities: Maintain temporary facilities in such a
manner as to prevent discomfort to users. Take necessary fire prevention measures.
Maintain temporary support facilities in a sanitary manner so as to avoid health problems
and other deleterious effects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES
A. The types of services required include, but not by way of limitation, water, sewerage, electrical
power and telephones. Comply with service companies' recommendations on materials and
methods or engage service companies to install services. Locate and relocate services (as
necessary) to minimize interference with construction operations.
B. Potable Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. Provide temporary
lines for all water (if required), to the work and make arrangements with the Owner's utility as
required by the utility.
C. Discharge of Wastes: The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of local, state
and federal laws regarding the discharge of wastes into sewers and waterways. Special caution
shall be exercised to prevent the discharge of wastes which contain oil, tar, asphalt, roofing
compound, kerosene, gasoline, paint, mud, cement, lime or other materials which could degrade
the quality of the receiving watercourse. The Contractor shall construct and maintain oil
interceptors, settling basins, or other effective pollution countermeasures.
D. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and
distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction
period. Include meters, transformers, overload protected disconnects, automatic ground -fault
interrupters and main distribution switch gear.
1. Except where overhead service must be used, install electric power service underground.
2. Electrical Energy: All electrical energy for the project shall be furnished and paid for by
the Contractor.
3. Provide service with ground -fault circuit interrupter feature, activated from each circuit for
20-amp or less rating.
01500 - 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
f
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
i"
3.2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
A. The types of temporary construction facilities required include, but not by way of limitation,
water distribution, drainage, dewatering equipment, enclosure of work, heat, ventilation,
d
electrical power distribution, lighting, hoisting facilities, stairs, ladders, and roads. Provide
facilities required to perform construction operations properly and adequately.
B. Access Provisions: Provide ramps, stairs, ladders and similar temporary access elements as
E reasonably required to perform the work and facilitate its inspection during installation. Comply
with reasonable requests of governing authorities performing inspections. When permanent stairs
are available for access during construction, cover finished surfaces with sufficient protection
j to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.3 SECURITY/PROTECTION PROVISIONS
A. The types of temporary security and protection provisions required include, but not by way of
jlimitation, fire protection, barricades, warning signs/lights, site enclosure fence, building
enclosure/lockup, personnel security program (theft prevention), environmental protection, and
similar provision intended to minimize property loses, personal injuries and claims for damages
at project site.
B. Fire Extinguishers: Provide types, sizes, numbers and locations as would be reasonably effective
in extinguishing fires during early stages, by personnel at project site. Provide Type A
extinguishers at locations of low -potential for either electrical or grease -oil -flammable liquids
fires; provide Type ABC dry chemical extinguishers at other locations; comply with
d,.., recommendation of NFPA No. 10. Post warning and quick -instructions at each extinguisher
location, and instruct personnel at project site, at time of their first arrival, on proper use of
extinguishers and other available facilities at project site. Post local fire department call number
on each telephone instrument at project site.
Ar C. Building Enclosure and Lockup: Secure the construction access to the building against
` unauthorized entrance at times when personnel are not working. Provide secure temporary
enclosures at locations of possible entry, with locked entrances.
t
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use
of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial
Completion, or longer as requested by the Architect.
B. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities,
r.. install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against
reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for
Portable Fire Extinguishers," and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction,
Alterations and Demolition Operations."
1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not
less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire -safe locations.
3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection
facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in
hazardous fire exposure areas.
4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and
similar sources of fire ignition.
C. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for
erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning
signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where
appropriate and needed provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
r-
�,., TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 3
t
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
D. Enclosure Fence: When excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance
gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose the entire site or the portion determined sufficient to
accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs and
other animals from easily entering the site, except by the entrance gates.
E. Covered Walkway: Where necessary to protect the public, students and Owner's employees,
erect a structurally adequate protective covered walkway for passage of persons. Coordinate
with entrance gates, other facilities and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Construct using scaffold or shoring framing, waterproofed wood plank overhead decking,
protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and
well- drained walkways and similar provisions for protection and safe passage. Extend the
backwall beyond the structure to complete the enclosure fence. Paint and maintain in a
manner acceptable to the Owner and Architect.
3.5 STORAGE OF FUELS
A. Storage of motor fuels will not be allowed on the site.
3.6 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES
A. The types of temporary support facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, storage
sheds, sanitary facilities, first aid facilities, bulletin board, clocks, thermometer, clean-up
facilities, solid waste disposal service and similar miscellaneous general services, all as may be
reasonably required for proficient performance of the Work and accommodation of personnel
at the site including Owner's and Architect/Engineer's personnel. Discontinue and remove
temporary support facilities, and make incidental similar use of permanent work of the project,
only when and in a manner authorized by Architect/Engineer; and, if not otherwise indicated,
immediately before time of Substantial Completion. Locate temporary support facilities for
convenience of users, and for minimum interference with construction activities.
B. Scaffolding, Temporary Supports, Etc.: 'Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide
at his own cost and risk all scaffolding, temporary supports, tools, apparatus, hoists, derricks,
etc. necessary for the performance of his work. The scaffolding, temporary supports, etc. shall
be so constructed as to afford safety and protection to both craftsmen and their work and to the
work of other contractors. All such activities required for the installation of work shall be
included in this Contract and the General Contractor must assume all responsibility for this work
and repair in a suitable manner any damage caused by improper supports or failure of shoring
in any respect.
C. Temporary equipment shall be installed in such a manner that the finish work will not be
damaged by smoke, falling mortar, concrete or other causes. Location and arrangement of
temporary equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Owner's Construction Inspector.
D. Contractor's Storage: The General Contractor and his Subcontractors shall provide on the
premises at locations approved by the Owner, suitable substantial watertight storage sheds for
the storage of tools and all materials which would be damaged by the weather; shall maintain
same in good condition and shall remove same when directed. All storage sheds shall be of
sufficient size to hold the materials required and shall have floors raised at least 6" above the
ground on heavy joists or sleepers.
E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide toilet facilities of type acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
adequate (at all stages of construction) for use of personnel at project site. Provide separate
facilities for male and female personnel when"both sexes are working (in any capacity) at project
site.
F. Removal of Temporary Facilities: When any temporary facility is no longer needed for the
proper conduct with the Work, Contractor shall completely remove it from the Project and shall
repair or replace any material, equipment or finished surface damaged in doing so.
01500 - 4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
G. Off -Site Storage: In the event the Contractor elects to store materials at an off -site location, he
shall abide by the following conditions:
1. Insurance Coverage is adequate not only to cover materials while in storage, but also in
transit from the off -site storage areas to project site. Copies of duly authenticated
Certificates of Insurance, made out to insure the Owner, must be filed with the Owner's
representative.
2. Inspection by Owner's representatives is allowed at any time. The Owner's Inspectors must
be satisfied with the security, control, maintenance and preservation measures.
3. Materials for this project are physically separated and marked for the project in a sectioned
off area.
4. Only materials which have been approved through the submittal process are to be stored
in the area.
5. Owner reserves the right to reject materials at any time prior to final acceptance of the
completed Contract if they do not meet Drawings and Specifications.
6. With each monthly payment estimate, the Contractor shall submit a report to the
Architect/Engineer listing the quantities and values of materials already paid for still stored
in the off -site location supported by warehouse records, receipts and invoices.
7. The procedure will have no effect on other provisions in the Contract.
8. Upon request, warehouse records, receipts and invoices shall be made available to Owner's
representatives for the purpose of verifying the quantities and their disposition.
9. In the event of Contract termination, or default by Contractor, the items in off -site storage
upon which payment has been made will be turned over to the Owner or Owner's agents.
10. The full provisions of PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS on this project shall
cover the materials off -site in every respect as though they were stored on the project site.
A letter from the bonding company accepting liability for off -site stored materials shall be
submitted to the Owner by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 5
e
8/3/98 _. Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
`RrMII)l F, 1-05 E1 t'4 /
A. I This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's
selection of products for use in the Project.
B. The Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals are included under
Section "Submittals."
C. Standards: Refer to Section "Definitions and Standards" for applicability of industry standards_
to products specified.
D. Administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the
Contract are included under Section "Product Substitutions."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in
the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories,"
and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well recognized meanings in the
construction industry.
1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the
Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms
"material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
a. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name, including
make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product
!~ literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents.
b. "Foreign Products", as distinguished from "domestic products," are items substantially
manufactured (50 percent or more of value) outside of the United States and its
r^ possessions; or produced or supplied by entities substantially owned (more than 50
percent) by persons who are not citizens of nor living within the United States and its
possessions.
2. "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined
or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.
3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated,
r- that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product List Schedule: Prepare a schedule showing products specified in a tabular form
�^^ acceptable to the Architect. Include generic names of products required. Include the
manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed.
1. Coordinate the product list schedule with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the
r Schedule of Submittals.
2. Initial Submittal: Prior to commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of an initial
product list schedule. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known
r' variations from Contract requirements.
3. Completed Schedule: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3
copies of the completed product list schedule. Provide a written explanation for omissions
r of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 1
i
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
4. Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to the Contractor within 2 weeks
of receipt of the completed product list schedule. No response within this time period
constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products, but does not constitute a waiver
of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. The Architect's
response will include the following:
a. A list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of reasons for
this action.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a
single source.
1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not or cannot produce a
quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the
Architect for a determination of the most important product qualities before proceeding.
Qualities may include attributes relating to visual appearance, strength, durability, or
compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources that
produce products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possible.
B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or
more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products
previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
C. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint
manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which
will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.
1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where
required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous.
2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service -connected
or power -operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is
inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information
and other essential operating data:
a. Name of product and manufacturer.
b. Model and serial number.
c. Capacity.
d. Speed.
e. Ratings.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,
using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft.
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding
of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other
packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking,
protecting and installing.
4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents, and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of
quantity or counting of units.
6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger
the supporting construction.
01600 - 2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center Citv of Lubbock CP #9355
i
7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a
weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain
temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that
are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices
and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect.
2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been
produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
B. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and
governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing product
selection include the following:
1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer is
named and no "or equal' statement is made, provide the product indicated. No substitutions
will be permitted.
2. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or manufacturers
are named and no "or equal" statement is made, provide one of the products indicated. No
substitutions will be permitted.
a. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or
equal," or "or approved equal" comply with the Contract Document provisions
concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
3. Non -Proprietary Specifications: When the Specifications list products or manufacturers that
are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use
of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies
with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning
"substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or
assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade
name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise
complies with Contract requirements.
5. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with
performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are
recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall
performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific
application.
a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or
by the manufacturer's certification of performance.
6. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications only require
compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies
with the standards, codes or regulations specified.
7. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
-- a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and
also complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the
Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in
another product category, or for noncompliance with specified requirements.
e
l
r MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 3
i
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
8. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as selected
from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase, select a
product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect
will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in
the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned
with other Work.
1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 01600
01600 - 4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT —
rK
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center Citv of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 01631 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for
substitutions made after award of the Contract.
B. The Contractor's Construction" Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals are included under
Section "Submittals."
C. Standards: Refer to Section "Definitions and Standards" for applicability of industry standards
to products specified.
D. Procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products and product options
are included under Section "Materials and Equipment."
E. The Substitution Request Form consisting of two pages follows this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms
used in the Contract Documents.
B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of
construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the
Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered
substitutions:
1. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award
of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to
requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.
2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect.
3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents.
4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders
issued by governing authorities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received within
15 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 15 days after
commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect.
1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration.
2. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request.
Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete
documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the
following information, as appropriate:
a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and
r" installation procedures.
b. Samples, where applicable or requested.
c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those
r of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight,
durability, performance and visual effect.
d. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate
Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 1
d
C
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction
Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the
effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.
f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum.
g. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal -to or better in
every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will
perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of
rights to additional payment or time, that may subsequently become necessary because
of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.
Architect's Action: Within two weeks of receipt of the request for substitution, the
Architect will request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of
the request. Within 3 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of the
additional information or documentation, which ever is later, the Architect will notify the
Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of
a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product
specified by name.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the
Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the
Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance
with these requirements.
1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required.
2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents.
3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted.
4. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract
Documents.
5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract
Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as
a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.
6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a
governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.
7. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation
or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may
be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional
compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other
construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations.
8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is
compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will
overcome the incompatibility.
9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials,
and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.
10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the
Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution
provide the required warranty.
B. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or
Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents does
not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01631
01631 -2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
a
8/3/98 Buddy Hblly -Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r� '
SECTION 01705 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Definitions: Closeout is hereby defined to include general requirements near end of Contract
Time, in preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract,
occupancy by Owner and similar actions evidencing completion of the work. Specific
requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of Division 2 through 16.
Time of closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion", and therefore may be either a
single time period of entire work or a series of time periods for individual parts of the work
which have been certified as substantially complete at different dates. That time variation (if
any) shall be applicable to other provisions of this section.
t 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. General: Prior to requesting Architect's field observation for certification of substantial
completion (for either entire work or portions thereof), complete the following and list known
exceptions in request:
1. In progress payment request, coincident with or first following date claimed, show either
100% completion for portion of work claimed as "substantially complete", or list incomplete
items and value of incompletion.
2. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these contract documents.
r 3. Submit statement showing accounting changes to Contract Sum.
B. Observation Procedures: After completion of the Contractor's own final punchlist items and
upon receipt of Contractor's request, Architect/Engineer will either proceed with observation or
advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Observation of sight apparent deficiencies will
be sufficient to cancel the observation. Following the successful initial observation,
Architect/Engineer will either prepare certificate of substantial completion, or advise Contractor
of work which must be performed prior to issuance of certificate; and repeat observation when
requested and assured that work has been substantially completed. Results of completed
observation will form initial "punch -list" for final acceptance.
1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. General: 'Prior to requesting Architect's final observation for certification of final acceptance
and final payment, as required by General Conditions, complete the following and list known
r- exceptions (if any) in request:
B. Waiver by Owner The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the
Owner except those arising from:
ell
1. Unsettled liens,
k 2. Faulty or defective work appearance after Substantial Completion,
3. Failure of work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or
�- 4. Terms of any special warranties required by the Contract Documents. Waiver of Contractor
- The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor
except those previously made in writing and identified by the Contractor as unsettled at the
time of the final Application for Payment.
5. Submit final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not
previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and
completed operations where required.
^ 6. Submit updated final statement, accounting for additional (final) changes to Contract Sum.
,., PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01705 - 1
,
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
7. Submit certified copy of Architect's final punch -list of itemized work to be completed or
corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance,
endorsed and dated by Architect.
8. Submit consent of surety.
9. Submit final liquidated damages settlement statement, if applicable, acceptable to Owner.
10. Revise and submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
C. ' Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final
certifications and similar documents.
D. Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner's full and unrestricted use of the work and access
to services and utilities, including (where required) occupancy permits, operating certificates, and
similar releases.
E. Submit maintenance manuals, damage or settlement survey, and similar final record information.
F. Obtain receipt for delivery of extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to Owner.
Provide copies of receipt to Architect.
G. Complete final cleaning up requirements, including touch-up painting of maned surfaces.
H. Reobservation Procedures: Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that the work has been
completed, including punch -list items resulting from earlier observations, and excepting
incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstances, Architect together with Owner's
Representative will reobserve the work. Upon completion of reobservation, Architect will either
prepare certificate of final acceptance or advise Contractor of work not completed or obligations
not fulfilled as required for final acceptance.
I. If additional reobservations are required by the Architect, for final acceptable, the Contractor
shall reimburse the Architect for their time required to complete the reobservations on an hourly
basis. The hourly rate shall be as determined by the Architect.
J. Maintenance Manuals: Organize maintenance -and -operating manual information into two
complete sets of manageable size, and bind into individual binders properly identified and
indexed (thumb -tabbed). Bind each manual of each set in a heavy-duty 2", 3-ring vinyl -covered
binder, and include pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark identification on both
front and spine of each binder.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. General Operating/Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of work requiring
continuing maintenance or operation, to meet with Owner's personnel, at project site, to provide
basic instructions needed for proper operation and maintenance of entire work.
1. Include instructions for manufacturer's representatives where installers are not expert in the
required procedures. Review maintenance manuals, cleaning and similar procedures and
facilities.
2. Review maintenance and operations in relation with applicable warranties, agreements to
maintain, bonds and similar continuing commitments.
01705 - 2 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
8/3/98 Buddy_Ho11y Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Special cleaning for specific units of work is specified in sections of Division 2
through 16. General cleaning during progress of work is specified in General Conditions and
as temporary services in "Temporary Facilities" section of this Division. Provide final cleaning
of the work, at time indicated, consisting of cleaning each surface or unit of work to normal
"clean" conditions except for first-class building cleaning and maintenance programs. The
following are examples, but not by way of limitation, of cleaning levels required:
1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.
2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished
condition, removing substances which are noticeable as vision -obscuring materials. Replace
broken glass and damaged transparent materials.
3. Clean exposed hard -surfaced finishes, to a dirt -free condition, free of dust, stains, films and
similar noticeable distracting substances.
4. Clean construction areas of litter and foreign substances. Sweep or vacuum to a broom -
clean condition; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits.
B. Compliances: Comply with safety standards and governing regulations for cleaning operations.
1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work have become
Owner's property, dispose of these to Owner's best advantage as directed.
END OF SECTION 01705
PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01705 - 3
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center_ City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
SECTION 01740 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and
bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on
products and special warranties.
1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of
workmanship and materials.
2. General closeout requirements are included in Section "Project Closeout."
3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are
specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions-2 through -
16.
4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are
specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties
do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor
does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special
warranties with the Contractor.
1.3 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and
replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed
and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected
by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated
warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or
rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract
Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work
regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its
anticipated useful service life.
D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties,
and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law,
r nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce
such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
l 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit
j selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
E. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty,
certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until
evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do
�^ so.
r
C
r WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 - 1
E
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion.
If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for
warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion
of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect.
1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner,
by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly
executed warranties to the Architect within fifteen days of completion of that designated
portion of the Work.
B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a
subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate
terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the
Owner through the Architect for approval prior to final execution.
1. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions-2 through -16 for specific content requirements,
and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties.
C. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered
loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2"
by I V paper.
1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product
or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone
number of the installer.
2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES AND BONDS, the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor.
3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide
additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required
manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01740
01740 - 2 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
k'
f
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
i SECTION 02071 - BUILDING SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of selective demolition work is indicated on drawings.
B. Types of Selective Demolition Work:
1. Portions of building structure indicated on drawings and as required to accommodate new
construction including concrete foundation, interior finishes, interior fi-aming, doors,
roofing, exterior walls, stone veneer, flooring, electrical devices, light fixtures, grilles and
registers.
2. Removal of items for reuse as indicated.
3. Removal and protection of existing fixtures and equipment items as indicated.
4. Removal of existing flooring, structural elements, roofing and mechanical and electrical
items are to be performed by trades skilled in that activity.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Patching is included within the respective sections of specifications, including removal of
materials for re -use and incorporated into remodeling or new construction.
2. Relocation of pipes, conduits, ducts, other mechanical and electrical work are specified by
respective trades.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide the following required submittals in accordance with the requirements of Division 1
Section "Submittals," and General and Supplementary Terms and Conditions for Construction
Contracts and Special Conditions of the Contract.
B. Schedule: Submit schedule indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for
selective demolition work to Owner's Representative for review prior to commencement of
work.
1. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress
of Owner's on -site activities.
2. Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of existing building.
C. Photographs of existing conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements
that might be misconstrued as damage related to removal operations. File with Owner's
Representative prior to start of work.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Historic Building: The Contractor shall exercise special care to protect from damage all historic
building elements to remain.
B. Occupancy: Owner will be continuously occupying areas of the building immediately adjacent
to areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in manner that. will
minimize need for disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours
advance notice to Owner of demolition activities which will severely impact Owner's normal
operations.
C. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or
rstructures to be demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of commencement of contract will be maintained by Owner
insofar as practicable.
r BUILDING SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02071 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
D. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvable value to
Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from
site as they are removed.
1. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
E. Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to protect
Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work.
1. Provide protective measures as required to provide' free and safe passage of Owner's
personnel and general public to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement,
or collapse of structure or element to be demolished, and adjacent facilities or work to
remain.
4. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed
during demolition operations.
5. Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary.
6. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of
existing construction on exterior surfaces, and installation of new construction to insure that
no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building.
7. Remove protection at completion of work.
F. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work at no cost
to Owner.
G. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1. Do not close, block or otherwise obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities
without written permission from the Owner.
H. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted.
I. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable
materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of
hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices
during flame -cutting operations. Obtain Owner's written permission prior to flame cutting in,
on, or near the historic building.
J. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect
against damage during demolition operations.
1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied facilities, except when authorized in
writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Fire water mains and hydrants cannot be used
without the Owner's permission. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing
utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities.
K. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods
to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with
governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice,
flooding, and pollution.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).
02071 -2 BUILDING SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
! PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be
performed. Photograph existing conditions to structure surfaces, equipment or to surrounding
properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition work; file
with Owner's Representative prior to starting work.
3.2 DEMOLITION
A. Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to
complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing
regulations.
B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements which conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the
conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt
of directive from Owner's Representative rearrange selective demolition. schedule as necessary
to continue overall job progress without delay.
C. Demolition of Concrete Slab/Foundation: Sawcut into manageable sections for removal.
Chipping is allowed where required, but no hoe -ram or other vibration producing activity except
where concrete is totally independent of existing structures to remain.
3.3 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building
site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site.
1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with
applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection
against exposure or environmental pollution.
2. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site.
3.4 CLEAN-UP AND REPAIR
A. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from
site. Remove protection and leave interior areas broom clean.
B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return structures and surfaces to remain
to condition existing prior to commencement of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent
construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work.
END OF SECTION 02071
7
7 BUILDING SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02071 - 3
s
a
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
w
SECTION 02231 - TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the protection and trimming of trees that interfere with, or are affected by,
execution of the Work, whether temporary or new construction.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Work" for limits placed on Contractor's use of the site.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
C. Certification: From a qualified arborist that trees indicated to remain have been protected during
construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated
and repaired when damaged.
D. Maintenance Recommendations: From a qualified arborist for care and protection of trees
affected by construction during and after completing the Work.
1.4 QUALITY. ASSURANCE
A. Tree Service Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed
tree protection and trimming work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign
l an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site on a full-time basis during execution of the
Work.
B. Arborist Qualifications: An arborist certified by the International Society of Arboriculture or
licensed in the jurisdiction where Project is located.
C. Tree Pruning Standards: Comply with ANSI A300, "Trees, Shrubs, and Other Woody Plant
Maintenance --Standard Practices," unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1. Before starting tree protection and trimming, meet with representatives of authorities having
jurisdiction, Owner, Architect, consultants, and other concerned entities. Review tree
protection and trimming procedures and responsibilities. Notify participants at least three
working days before convening conference. Record discussions and agreements and furnish
a copy to each participant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Fertile, friable, surface soil, containing natural loam and complying with
"ASTM D 5268. Provide topsoil that is free of stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any
dimension and free of other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. Obtain topsoil
only from well -drained sites where soil occurs in depth of 4 inches (100 mm) or more; do not
r' obtain from bogs or marshes.
TREE PROTECTION AND TRHVBIING 02231 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Chain Link Fence: Metallic -coated steel chain link fence fabric, 0.120-inch- diameter wire size;
48 inches high, minimum; line posts, 1.9 inches in diameter; terminal and corner posts, 2-3/8
inches in diameter; top rail, 1-5/8 inches in diameter; bottom tension wire, 0.177 inch in
diameter; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Fencing: Install temporary fencing located outside the drip line of trees to protect
remaining vegetation from construction damage.
1. Install chain link fence according to ASTM F 567 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Protect tree root systems from damage due to noxious materials caused by runoff or spillage
while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from flooding,
eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.
C. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within the drip line of
remaining trees. Do not permit vehicles or foot traffic within the drip line; prevent soil
compaction over root systems.
D. Do not allow fires under or adjacent to remaining trees or other plants.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Do not excavate within drip line of trees, except as required to repair/replace planting wall. All
excavation in the drip line shall be by hand - do not cut roots larger than 2 inches in diameter.
Consult the.Architect if such roots are encountered. Proceed as directed by the Architect.
3.3 REGRADING
A. Grade Lowering: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope
grade beyond drip line of trees. Maintain existing grades within drip line of trees.
B. Minor Fill: Where existing grade is 6 inches (150 mm) or less below elevation of finish grade,
fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required fmish
elevations.
3.4 TREE PRUNING
A. The Owner will perform pruning operations.
3.5 TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat damaged
trunks, limbs, and roots according to written instructions of the qualified arborist.
B. Remove and replace dead and damaged trees that the qualified arborist determines to be
incapable of restoring to a normal growth pattern.
1. Provide new trees of 6-inch caliper size and of a species selected by Architect when trees
more than 6 inches in caliper size, measured 12 inches (300 mm) above grade, are required
to be replaced.
C. Aerate surface soil, compacted during construction, 10 feet beyond drip line and no closer than
36 inches to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch- diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches deep at 24 inches
o.c. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augered soil and sand.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Burning is not permitted.
B. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, pruned elements and excess chips
from Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02231
02231 - 2 TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 02260 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Shoring and bracing necessary to protect existing buildings, streets, walkways, utilities, and
other improvements and excavation against loss of ground or caving embankments.
2. Maintenance of shoring and bracing.
3. Removal of shoring and bracing, as required.
4. Trench box shield.
B. Types of shoring and bracing systems include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel H-section (soldier) piles.
2. Timber lagging.
3. Steel sheet piles.
C. Building excavation is specified in another Division 2 Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Layout drawings for excavation support system and other data prepared by, or under the
supervision of, a qualified professional engineer, bearing an engineer's seal. System design and
calculations must be acceptable to local authorities having jurisdiction. Acceptance by the
Owner does not relieve responsibility of an adequate design.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction
where Project is located, and experienced in providing successful engineering services for
excavation support systems similar in extent required for this Project.
B. Supervision: Engage and assign supervision of excavation support system to a qualified
professional engineer foundation consultant.
1. Submit name of engaged consultant and qualifying technical experience.
C. Regulations: Comply with codes and ordinances of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
System must comply with OSHA Trench Safety Program.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Before starting work, verify governing dimensions and elevations. Verify condition of adjoining
properties. Take photographs to record any existing settlement or cracking of structures,
pavements, and other improvements. Prepare a list of such damages, verified by dated
photographs, and signed by Contractor and others conducting investigation.
B. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing qualified professional engineer,
establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks
and record existing elevations.
C. During excavation, resurvey benchmarks weekly, maintaining accurate log of surveyed elevations
for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations occur
or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident.
l
r EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 02260 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.6 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Protect existing active sewer, water, gas, electricity and other utility services and structures.
B. . Notify the Owner and service utility companies having jurisdiction. Comply with requirements
of governing authorities and agencies for protection, relocation, removal, and discontinuing of
services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide adequate shoring and bracing materials which will support loads imposed.
Materials need not be new, but should be in serviceable condition.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).
C. Steel Sheet Piles: ASTM A 328 (ASTM A 328M).
D. Timber Lagging: Any species, rough -cut, mixed hardwood, nominal 3 inches (75 mm) thick,
unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SHORING
A. Wherever shoring is required, locate the system to clear permanent construction and to permit
forming and finishing of concrete surfaces. Provide shoring system adequately anchored and
braced to resist earth and hydrostatic pressures.
B. Shoring systems retaining earth on which the support or stability of existing structures is
dependent must be left in place at completion of work.
3.2 BRACING
A. Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If
necessary to move a brace, install new bracing prior to removal of original brace.
B. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work, except
as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
C. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames.
D. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until permanent
construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.
E. Remove sheeting, shoring, and bracing in stages to avoid disturbance to underlying soils and
damage to structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.
F. Repair or replace, as acceptable to Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced through
installation or removal of shoring and bracing work at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 02260
02260 2 EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS _
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
i
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUM[M[ARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on -grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
4. Base course for asphalt paving.
5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
6. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines.
7. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits
for buried utility structures.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for a schedule of unit prices.
2. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."
3. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, and
protecting trees to remain.
4. Division 2 Section "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during
construction.
5. Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming" for protecting and trimming trees to
remain.
6. Division 2 Section 'Excavation Support and Protection."
7. Division 2 Section "Landscaping" for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil
for lawns and plantings.
8. Division 15 and 16 Sections for excavating and backfilling buried mechanical and electrical
utilities and buried utility structures.
I 1.3 UNIT PRICES
A. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved materials.
l 1.4 DEFINITIONS
l A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
r- 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect.
r. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in
either length or width.
EARTHWORK 02300 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial
work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
G. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and
boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that when tested by an independent
geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard penetration
resistance of 100 blows/2 inches.
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the
ground surface.
I. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or
layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk.
J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill
or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities include on -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Each type of plastic warning tape.
B. Samples: For the following:
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on -site or borrow soil material proposed
for fill and backfill.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on -site or borrow soil
material proposed for fill and backfill.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
3. Contact utility -locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM,
or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Backfill: Satisfactory soil materials.
02300 - 2 EARTHWORK
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
D. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D`2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve
and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
E. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and
r" not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
F. Engineered Fill: Reference general notes on structural drawings.
G. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and
not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
H. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse -aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.
I. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali -resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously
inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:
B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali -resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches wide and 4
mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a
protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up
to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate
in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from
excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
3.3 EXPLOSIVES
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 BuddyHolly Center 8/3/98
3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of
surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and
rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch.
Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete
formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate
by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required
lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades.
3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of
pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: As indicated.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support
of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels
of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade.
1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple -
duct conduit units, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an
undisturbed subgrade.
2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to
support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand
backfill.
3. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of
excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.
D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect.
02300 - 4 EARTHWORK ,.`
8/3/98 Buddy Holly. Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation
of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by
Architect.
3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials
without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.11 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing,
and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings,
r+" and bodies of conduits.
B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings; fill with
concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
C. Provide 4-inch-thick, concrete -base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below
i surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a
minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase.
D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch, to a
? height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides
and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of
utility system.
E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
I.
F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is
removed.
G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.13 FILL
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and
deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.
{r
i.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 5
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy'Holly Center 1 8/3/98
B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use structural fill.
4. Under building slabs, use structural fill.
3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Refer to Structural Notes on the drawings for moisture content requirements for the building pad
subgrade and structural fill.
3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand -operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according
to ASTM D 698:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches
of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent.
3.16 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations
indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus i inch.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. .
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C.. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a
10-foot straightedge.
3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. Install separation fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions,
overlapping sides and ends.
B. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows:
1. Place base course material over subbase.
2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557.
3. Shape subbase and base to required .crown elevations and cross -slope grades.
02300 6 EARTHWORK
r■�
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place materials
in a single layer.
5. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in
equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when
compacted.
3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing
agency to perform field quality -control testing.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at
the following locations and frequencies:
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer,
at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case
fewer than three tests.
D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.19 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and
recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK 02300 - 7
P
i
t
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUNUM"Y
A. This Section includes soil treatment for termite control prior to construction of the wood deck.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
a
o' Sections.
B. Product data application instructions.
{.. C. Certification that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
regulations for termiticides.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations for work, including preparation of substrate and application.
B. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing
authorities for application of soil treatment solution.
C. Use only termiticides which bear a Federal registration number of the EPA and are approved
by local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations
r, are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations.
B. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during
inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant
Pak manufacturer.
C. Do not disturb existing construction during performance of this Work.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Furnish written warranty certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent
� ty: ty fy� g PP �
infestation of subterranean termites and, that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during
warranty period, Contractor shall re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite
r* infestation.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION
A. General: Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide for dilution with water, specially formulated
to prevent termites infestation. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. Provide a solution
consisting of one of following chemical elements.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Chloropyrifos:
a. Dursban TC; Dow Chemical Co.
E,
TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2. Permathrin:
a. Dragnet FT, FMC Corp.
b. Torpedo, ICI Americas, Inc.
3. Cypermethrine:
a. Prevail FT, FMC Corp.
b. Demon, ICI Americas, Inc.
4. Isofenphose:
a. Pryfon, Mobay Corp.
C. Dilute with water to concentration level recommended by manufacturer.
D. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if also acceptable to Owner's
Representative and approved for intended application by jurisdictional authorities. Use only soil
treatment solutions which are not harmful to plants.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of treatment
on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted
areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placement of compacted
fill under slabs, if recommended by toxicant manufacturer.
B. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows:
1. Under new raised wood deck structures, using the following rates of application:
a. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. to soil in critical areas under slab,
including entire inside perimeter inside of foundation walls, along both sides of interior
partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and
around interior column footers.
b. Apply one gallon of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. as an overall treatment under slab
and attached slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of
chemical solution to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent
material.
c. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of trench, for each foot of depth
from grade to footing, along outside edge of building. Dig a trench 6" to 8" wide
along outside of foundation to a depth of not less than 12". Punch holes to top of
footing at not more than 12" o.c. and apply chemical solution. Mix chemical solution
with the soil as it is being replaced in trench.
C. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been
applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction.
D. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading,
or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION 02361
02361 - 2 TERMITE CONTROL
8
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 02514 - HOT -MIXED ASPHALT PAVING REPAIR
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies repair of parking lot hot -mixed asphalt paving including subbase and base
replacement and repair as required at each repair location.
B. Compacting of replaced subbase and base is included in this Section.
C. Saw -cutting of edges of existing pavement is specified herein.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Material Certificates signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying that each material
item complies with or exceeds specified requirements.
1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Apply prime and tack coats when ambient temperature is above 50° F and
when temperature has not been below 35° F for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do
not apply when base is wet or contains an excess of moisture.
B. Place hot -mixed asphalt surface course when atmospheric temperature is above 400 F and when
base is dry. Base course may be placed when air temperature is above 30' F and rising.
C. Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Use locally available materials and gradations that exhibit a satisfactory record of
previous installations.
B. Coarse Aggregate: Sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, complying with ASTM D
692-88.
C. Fine Aggregate: Sharp -edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, properly cured blast
furnace slag, gravel, or combinations thereof, complying with ASTM D 1073.
D. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity -graded material; ASTM D 946 for penetration-
u
graded material.
HOT -MIXED ASPHALT PAVING REPAIR 02514 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
E. Prime Coat: Cut -back asphalt type, ASTM D 2027; MC-30, MC-70 or MC-250.
F. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt; ASTM D 977. '
2.2 ASPHALT -AGGREGATE MIXTURE
A. Provide plant -mixed, hot -laid asphalt -aggregate mixture complying with ASTM D 3515 and as
recommended by local paving authorities to suit project conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION —
A. Erect barricades to protect each paving repair area from traffic until repairs at the repair area are
complete. Remove barricade at each repair area immediately after surface course has cooled and
can support traffic.
3.2 REMOVAL AND SUBBASE REPAIR
A. tit-each4,epair4ocation-establish-the-area-of-repairby-marking-a-rectangle onrth-e-p-av-ern-ent-with
Pe -center of -the visibledeterioration as"the-center of the repair area. The repair area.dimensionm
4are_1"-e_twice-the-width-and-iength_of the visible deteriorate�.
B. At each repair location, remove surface course and deteriorated subbase to a depth 2 inches
deeper than where the subbase material encountered is dry.
C.. Remove existing surface course and subbase using power pavement cutting saws along the
perimeter of each repair area.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediatelybefore applying
prime coat.
B. Proof-roll/compact prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring
additional compaction. _
C. Prime Coat: Apply at rate of 0.20 to 0.50 gallons per sq. yd., over compacted subgrade. Apply
material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Cure and dry as long as necessary to attain —
penetration and evaporation of volatile.
D. Tack Coat: Apply to contact surfaces of adjacent existing asphalt or Portland cement concrete. _
Distribute at rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gallons per sq. yd. of surface.
E. Allow to dry until at proper condition to receive paving.
F. Exercise care in applying bituminous materials to avoid smearing of adjoining concrete surfaces.
Remove and clean damaged surfaces.
02514 - 2 HOT -MIXED ASPHALT PAVING REPAIR
r 8/3/9_ Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
3.4 REPLACING SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. At each repair area place subbase course material on dry preexisting subbase material. Place
base course material over subbases to pavements. Compact subbase and base material in small
repair areas and perimeter of larger repair areas using hand -operated powered metal plate
tampers. Compact larger areas using appropriate size rollers.
1. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM D 4254 relative density.
2. Shape subbase and base of each repair are to the elevation necessary for surface course to
be flush with adjacent pavement.
3. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 4 inches or less, place materials
in a single layer.
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 4 inches, place materials in
equal layers, with no layer more than 4 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when
compacted.
5. Place base and subbase material uniformly over the full area of each repair area.
3.5 PLACING MIX
A. General: Place hot -mixed asphalt mixture on prepared surface, spread, and strike off. Spread
mixture at minimum temperature of 225 deg F. Place areas inaccessible to equipment by hand.
Place each course to adjacent grade, cross-section, so that compacted thickness will be flush with
adjacent pavement surface.
B. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, to ensure continuous bond between
adjoining work. Construct joints to have same texture, density, and smoothness as adjacent
sections of hot -mixed asphalt course. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.
3.6 ROLLING
A. General: Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive displacement.
B. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to
rollers.
C. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of
joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced areas by
loosening and filling, if required, with hot material.
D. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Continue
second rolling until mixture has been evenly compacted.
E. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller
marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained 95 percent
laboratory density.
F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled
and hardened.
G. Remove barricades after surface course has cooled enough not to become marked by traffic.
HOT -MIXED ASPHALT PAVING REPAIR 02514 - 3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Testing in -place hot -mixed asphalt courses for compliance with requirements for
thickness and surface smoothness will be done by Owner's testing laboratory. Repair or remove
and replace unacceptable paving repairs as directed by Architect.
B. Thickness: In -place compacted thickness tested in accordance with ASTM D 3549 will not be
acceptable if exceeding following allowable variations:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
2. Surface Course: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
C. Surface Smoothness: Test finished surface of each hot -mixed asphalt course for smoothness, --
using 10 feet straightedge applied parallel with and at right angles to centerline of paved area.
Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding the following tolerances for smoothness:
1. Base Course Surface: 1/4 inch.
2. Wearing Course Surface: 3/16 inch.
D. Check surface areas at repair location.
END OF SECTION 02511
02514 - 4 HOT -MIXED ASPHALT PAVING REPAIR
1.
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 02760 - PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This item shall consist of the installation of paint pavement marking. The lines and markings
shall be white.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
A. Functional Requirements
1. All materials required to meet Federal, ASTM or SDHPT specifications must meet the
specification as shown.
ASTM Designation: D 476, Type II
Federal Spec. TT-P-463A, Type I (March 3, 1961)
National Bureau of Standards -- Chromatic Standard No. Sch. 30
Federal Spec. TT-P-403a
Federal MIL-C-429C, Type I (March 6, 1969)
ASTM D 362
ASTM D 740 (Reapproved 1974)
ASTM D 600
SDHPT Test Method Tex-806-13
SDHPT Test Method Tex-811-B
SDHPT Test Method Tex-814-13
2. The paint shall be homogenous, well ground to a uniform and smooth consistency and shall
not skin nor settle badly nor cake, liver, thicken, curdle, or gel in the container.
3. The paint, when applied to a bituminous pavement surface under normal field conditions
at the required rate of .015 inch wet film thickness, shall have a maximum "no pickup"
drying time of 15 minutes to prevent displacement or discoloration under traffic.
4. y In preparation of the paint, the pigments shall be dispersed in the vehicle by appropriate
methods so that a fineness reading of not less than 4 is obtained with a Hegman grind
gauge.
5. Consistency viscosity as determined by the Stromer Viscosimeter at 25 C shall be from 85
to 100 K.U.
6. A thin film of paint spread on a glass plate and allowed to dry thoroughly shall not darken
or show any discoloration when subjected to ultraviolet rays for a period of 5 minutes.
B. Material Requirements
1. Raw Materials
a. The exact brands and types of raw materials used in the wet standards are listed for
the purpose of facilitating the selection of parallel materials equal, not only in quality
and composition but also in physical and chemical behavior after aging in the finished
product.
b. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to utilize materials that not only meet
the individual raw material specification, but that also produce a coating that meets the
specific formula requirements.
c. Materials required to meet Federal and ASTM specifications must meet the
specification as indicated.
2. Pigments (submit samples and product data for Owner's approval):
a. White
b. Medium Chrome Yellow
c. Red
PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT 02760 - 1
1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. The pavement surface to receive the pavement markings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt,
organic growth, or other material that will prevent adhesion of the paint to the roadway surface.
B. Paint markings on the roadway that are not in alignment or sequence as indicated shall be totally
and completely removed by any effective method approved by the Engineer, except that grinding
will not be permitted.
C. Paint shall be applied at a rate such that one gallon shall cover 85-115 square feet of surface.
(This rate yields a wet film thickness from 15 to 20 mils).
D. Beads shall be applied to the paint markings at a uniform rate sufficient to achieve the
retroreflective characteristics specified when observed conforming to SDHPT Test Method Tex-
828-B. All markings placed shall have uniform and distinctive retroreflective characteristics.
Under no circumstances shall the bead application rate be less than 6 pounds of beads per gallon
of paint applied to the road surface. All traffic markings are reflectorized paint.
E. Applied markings shall be protected from traffic until they have dried sufficiently so as not to
be damaged or tracked.
F. New asphalt shall be allowed to cure for 30 days minimum prior to pavement marking paint
application. The Contractor shall be responsible for any discoloration of the applied paint, due
to such things as product quality, asphalt distillates, contamination, etc. Any discoloration
arising within the warranty period shall be cause for removal and re -application of the paint at
no additional cost the Owner.
G. Allowable line width Tolerance:
Widths up to 4" plus or minus 1/16 inch.
4" up to 8" plus or minus 1/8 inch.
8" and Larger plus or minus 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION 02760
02760 - 2 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 02770 - CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER
r PART 1-GENERAL
t 1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This item shall consist of Portland cement concrete curb and gutter and curb with reinforcing
steel, constructed on an approved subgrade and base in accordance with this specification and
in conformity with the lines, grades, sections, and details on the plans.
r PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE
f.. A. All concrete shall conform to the requirements Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete and have
a compressive strength at 28 days of 3000 psi.
2.2 REINFORCING STEEL
A. All reinforcing steel shall be Deformed Billet Steel, Grade 60 and shall be sized as shown on
the plans details.
2.3 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. The material used for expansion joint filler shall conform to either of the following:
B. Preformed Bituminous Fiber Material formed from cane or other suitable fibers of a cellular
nature securely bound together and uniformly impregnated with a suitable asphaltic binder and
meeting the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler
for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction, ASTM Designation D-1751.
C. Boards obtained from Redwood or Cypress timber of sound heartwood, free from sapwood,
knots, clustered birds eye, checks and splits. Occasional sound or hollow birds eye, when not
in clusters, will be permitted provided the board is free from any other defects that will impair
its usefulness as a joint filler.
2.4 MEMBRANE CURING COMPOUND
A. Membrane curing compound shall be as specified in Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMING AND PLACING
A. Subgrade for this construction shall be excavated to the required depth and width including a
minimum of 12 inches beyond the curb, unless a greater width is shown on the plans, to
construct the work to grade and dimension. A minimum of four (4) inches of flexible base shall
be spread, wetted, and thoroughly compacted. If dry, the base shall be sprinkled with water
lightly before concrete is deposited thereon. Forms shall be of metal or well -seasoned wood.
The length of the forms shall be not less than 10 feet. Flexible or curved forms shall be used
for curves of 100' radius or less. Wood forms for straight sections shall be not less than two
inches in thickness.
B. Forms shall be clean, straight and free from warp. All forms shall be securely staked to line and
grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. The inside forms shall
be oiled with a light form oil.
C. The reinforcing steel shall be placed in position as shown on the typical section. Care shall be
exercised to keep all steel in its proper location.
�.► CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER 02770 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
D. Expansion joint material,one-half inch in thickness, shall be provided at intervals not to exceed
forty feet, and at curve PC's and PT's and at areas as directed by the Architect/Engineer, and
shall extend the full width and depth of the concrete. Control shall be made 3/4 inches deep at
twenty foot intervals. All joints shall be perpendicular and at right angles to the curb.
E. For curb and gutter construction, two (2) round smooth dowel bars one-half (1/2) of an inch in
diameter and 24 inches in length shall be installed at each expansion joint. One twelve (12) inch
end of each dowel shall be thoroughly coated with hot oil asphalt or red lead, so that is will not
bond to the concrete; approved types of slip joints may be used in lieu of coating ends of
dowels. The dowels shall be placed on the vertical centerline three (3) inches from the top and
bottom.
F. Concrete shall be placed in the forms, rodded and tamped to exclude all air and honeycomb.
Not more than one hour after the concrete has been placed, a thin coating not more than 1/2 inch
nor less than 1/4 inch thick, of finish mortar, composed of one part Portland cement to two parts
fine aggregate, shall be worked into the exposed faces of the curb and gutter by means of a
"mule". After the concrete has become sufficiently set, the exposed edges shall be rounded by
the use of an edging tool to the radii indicated on the plans. The entire exposed surface of curb
and gutter shall be floated to a uniform smooth surface then finished with a camel hair brush
to a gritty texture. It is not permissible to plaster curb where forms have stayed on overnight.
The forms shall remain in place a minimum of 24 hours unless approved otherwise by the
Architect/Engineer. After removal of the forms, any minor honeycombed surfaces shall be
plastered with a mortar mix as described above. Excessively honeycombed curb and gutter, as
determined by the Architect/Engineer, shall be completely removed and replaced when directed
at the Contractor's expense.
G: Immediately after finishing the curb, it shall be protected by a membrane -compound curing
agent.
H. After a minimum of 3 days curing and before placing the second course base, curb shall be
backfilled to the full height of the concrete, tamped and sloped as shown on the plans. The top
four (4) inches of backfill shall be of clean top soil, free of stones and debris.
END OF SECTION 02770
02770 - 2 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 02775 - CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This item shall consist of concrete sidewalks composed of Portland cement concrete, constructed
as herein specified on an approved subgrade, in conformity to the lines, grades and details shown
on the plans or as established by the Architect .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE
r A. All concrete shall conform to the provisions of Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete, have a
minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,000 psi, and not less than 5 sacks cement per cubic
yard.
r 2.2 REINFORCING STEEL
a
1 A. Reinforcement shall be 6" x 6" - 10 gauge welded wire fabric, or No. 3 (3/8") round bars, placed
not more than eighteen (18) inches on center in both directions unless otherwise indicated on
r the plans.
2.3 FORMS
0
A. Forms shall be of metal or well -seasoned wood not less than two (2) inches in thickness, of a
section satisfactory to the Owner; clean, straight, free of warp, and of a depth equal to the
thickness of the finished work.
2.4 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Expansion joint filler shall be redwood boards of sound heartwood construction grade. Where
the new construction abuts existing sidewalks or driveways, an expansion joint 3/4" thick shall
be provided.
2.5 MEMBRANE CURING COMPOUND
A. All membrane curing compound shall be as specified in Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. The subgrade shall be excavated and shaped to the lines, grades and cross section shown on the
plans, or as directed by the Owner, and shall be thoroughly compacted. A two (2) inch sand
cushion shall be spread, wetted thoroughly, tamped and leveled. The sand cushion shall be moist
at the time the concrete is placed.
B. If the subgrade is undercut by more than 4 inches, or the natural ground is below "top of
subgrade" by more than 4 inches, then an approved backfill material shall be provided and
compacted with a mechanical tamper. Hand tamping will not be permitted.
3.2 FORMS
A. Before concrete is placed, all forms shall be thoroughly oiled with a light form oil. All forms
shall be staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of
concrete.
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 02775 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
3.3 REINFORCEMENT
A. All reinforcement shall be placed equidistant from the top and bottom of the concrete. Care shall
be exercised to keep all steel in its proper position during the depositing of concrete. Splices in
wire fabric shall overlap sufficiently to allow two pairs of transverse wires to be tied together
and no splice of less than six inches will be permitted. Splices in the No. 3 bars shall have a
minimum lap of twelve (12) inches.
3.4 EXPANSION JOINTS AND CONTRACTION JOINTS
A. Expansion joint material shall be placed vertically and shall extend the full depth of the concrete.
Similar expansion material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through the
sidewalk. Maximum spacing of expansion joints shall be 40 feet or adjacent to buildings and
structures or as directed by the Engineer or detailed on the plans. Contraction (Control) joints
shall be spaced at 4 foot on center or as shown on the plans. Normal dimensions of the control
groove shall be 1/4 inch wide and 1/4 depth of the sidewalk thickness All joints shall be 90
degrees to the centerline of the sidewalk.
3.5 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Concrete shall be placed in the forms and spaced, tamped and thoroughly compacted until it
entirely covers the surface and has 'a monolithic finish. The top surface shall be floated and
troweled to a uniform smooth surface, then finish with a camel hair brush to a gritty, non -slip
texture. The outer edges and joints shall be rounded with approved tools to the radii shown on
the plans, if not indicated, round at 1/4 inch radius.
B. Immediately after finishing, the surface shall be protected by a membrane compound curing
agent.
C. Apply TAS compliant texture at all concrete ramps and sloping walks required to textured by
Texas Accessibility Standards.
D. Backfilling and grading of the slopes adjacent to completed sidewalk shall be done in a manner
acceptable to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 02775
02775 2 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS _
r�•
is
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
d SECTION 02780 - UNIT PAVERS
G;
PART 1 = GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUNDLA RY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Removing and reinstalling existing historic brick pavers set on concrete slab.
2. Loose laid 24" x 24" precast concrete stepping pavers (white) on aggregate.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for compacted subgrade and subbase course, if any, under
unit pavers.
2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Membrane Waterproofing" for waterproofing and protection
board under plaza deck pavers.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit paving
with elastomeric sealants.
1.3 SUBNHTTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for the following:
1. Each type of paver.
2. Mortar and grout materials.
C. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color samples of grout showing the
full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of unit paver installation.
Submit custom grout samples that match existing historic grout appearance.
D. Samples for verification in full-size units of each new unit paver indicated; in sets for each
color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these
characteristics.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed unit paver
installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain each color, type, and variety of unit pavers, joint
materials, and setting materials from a single' source with resources to provide products and
materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soilage or
contamination from earth and other materials.
UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1. Wrap pavers in plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust marks from
steel strapping.
B. Protect grout and mortar materials from deterioration by moisture and temperature. Store in a
dry location or in waterproof containers. Keep containers tightly closed. Protect liquid
components from freezing.
C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent deterioration by corrosion and
accumulation of dirt.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold -Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or
frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work
damaged by frost or freezing.
B. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Cold -Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work against freezing when atmospheric
temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and falling. Heat materials to provide mortar and grout
temperatures between 40 deg F (4 deg C) and 120 deg F (49 deg Q. Provide the following
protection,for completed portions of work for 24 hours after installation when the mean
daily air temperature is as indicated: below 40 deg F (4 deg C), cover with weather -
resistant membrane; below 25 deg F (4 deg C), cover with insulating blankets; below 20
deg F (-7 deg C), provide enclosure and temporary heat to maintain temperature above 32
deg F (0 deg Q.
2. Hot -Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of setting beds and grout. Provide artificial shade
and windbreaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates
with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and above.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Design is based on 24" x 24" x 2" thick precast concrete white pavers.
2. Product of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, may be submitted for approval:
a. Licensee of Symrah Licensing Inc. that markets unit pavers in Project location.
b. Licensee of Uni-Group U.S.A. that markets unit pavers in Project location.
c. Capitol Ornamental Concrete Specialties, Inc.
d. Hanover Architectural Products, Inc.
e. Hastings Pavement Co., Inc.
f. Nicolock.
g. Oldcastle Architectural Products.
h. Sunny Brook Pressed Concrete Co.
i. Wassau Tile, Inc.; Terra -Paving Div.
3. Latex -Portland Cement Mortars and Grouts:
a. American Olean Tile Co.
b. Boiardi Products Corp.
c. Bostik.
d. Custom Building Products.
e. DAP Inc.
f. Laticrete International, Inc.
g. Mapei Corp.
h. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
02780 - 2' UNIT PAVERS .-
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
i. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
j. Syracuse Adhesives.
2.2 COLORS AND TEXTURES
A. Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed unit paver surfaces
and joints complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and textures for
materials and products of type indicated.
2. Provide Architect's selection of custom color grout to match existing grout color.
2.3 UNIT PAVERS
A. Concrete Pavers: Solid, loose -laid, made from normal -weight aggregates in sizes and shapes
indicated.
B. Job -Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -
Place Concrete" for normal -weight, air -entrained, ready -mixed concrete with minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).
C. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' instructions relative to mix
proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing times, and other
procedures needed to produce setting -bed and joint materials of uniform quality and with
optimum performance characteristics. Discard mortars and grout when they have reached their
initial set.
B. Cement -Paste Slush Coat: Mix slush coat to a consistency similar to that of thick cream and
consisting of either neat cement and water or cement, sand and water.
1. For latex -modified Portland cement setting -bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part
or all of water per directions of latex additive manufacture.
C. Portland Cement/Lime Setting -Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification.
D. Latex -Modified Portland Cement Setting -Bed Mortar: Proportion and mix Portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive for setting bed to comply with directions of latex additive
manufacturer and as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready
to receive pavers.
E. Latex -Modified Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Proportion and mix Portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive for slurry bond coat to comply with directions of latex additive
manufacturer.
F. Latex -Modified Portland Cement Grout: Add latex additive to dry grout mix in proportion and
concentration recommended by latex additive manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit pavers.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing installation,
with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations. Examine areas
where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces as well as
horizontal waterproofing. Do not proceed with installation until protection is in place.
UNIT PAVERS 02780 3
r,
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing and
sealing compounds, form oil and laitance.
C. Proof -roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional
compaction. Do not proceed with installation of unit pavers until deficient subgrades have been
corrected and are ready to receive subbase for unit pavers. Subbase shall be 1-1/4" thick.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be
visible or cause staining in finished work.
B. Cut unit pavers with motor -driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units
without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
C. Joint Pattern: Butt joint.
D. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16" unit -to -unit offset from flush (lippage) except when using the
"lugged" pavers, nor 1/8" in 24 inches and 1/4" in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for
finished surface of paving.
E. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant -filled joints at locations and of widths
indicated. Provide cork joint filler as backing for sealant -filled joints where indicated. Install
cork joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Division
7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide butt setting on 1" sand bed (after compaction). Sand to be swept
in joints, with variations in joints not exceeding plus or minus 1/16" (1.5mm) except when using
the "lugged" pavers.
G. Fill joints as soon as possible after placing pavers.
3.4 AGGREGATE SETTING -BED PAVER APPLICATIONS (LOOSE LAID)
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 laboratory density.
B. Place aggregate base over compacted subgrade. Provide compacted thickness indicated.
Compact base to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density and screed to depth
required to allow setting of pavers.
C. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches, taking care that moisture
content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted.
D. Treat leveling base with soil sterilizer to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
E. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch and a maximum of 1/8 inch, being careful
not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer
bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch with
pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers.
F. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low -amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to
5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with
vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions:
1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed
to rain.
2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36 inches
of the laying face. Cover open layers with nonstaining plastic sheets overlapped 48 inches
on each side of the laying face to protect it from rain.
02780 - 4 UNIT PAVERS
r..
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
f - G. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate
pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight
surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.
H. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.
I. Repeat joint -filling process 30 days later.
3.5 MORTARED APPLICATIONS
A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply cement -paste slush coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes prior to
placing setting bed. Limit area of slush coat to avoid its drying out prior to placing setting bed.
Do not exceed 1/16-inch thickness for cement slush coat.
C. Apply mortar setting bed over cement -paste slush coat immediately after latter has been applied.
Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate
setting of pavers to finished grade indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amunt of mortar setting bed that can be covered with pavers prior to
initial set. Cut back, bevel edge, remove, and discard setting -bed materials that has reached
initial set prior to placing pavers.
1. Place reinforcing wire fabric over membrane protection course, lapped at joints by at least
one full mesh and supported so that the mesh becomes embedded in the middle of setting
bed. Do not butt edges against vertical surfaces.
E. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately prior to placing pavers on green
or wet setting bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch thick slurry bond coat to bed or to back of each
paver with a flat trowel.
F. Tap and beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed
and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single operation
prior to initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb pavers for purposes
of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
G. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide nominal joint width of 3/8 inch (10 mm) with variations not
exceeding plus or minus (1/ 16 inch (1.5 mm).
H. Space Joint Widths: Provide nominal joint width indicated with variations not exceeding plus
or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
I. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into joints, taking
care not to smear grout on adjoining pavers and other surfaces. After initial set of grout, finish
joints by tooling to produce a slightly concave polished joint, free from drying cracks.
J. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven (7) days except as otherwise
recommended by latex additive manufacturer.
3.6 REPAIR, POINTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged
or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units
and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment to eliminate evidence of
replacement.
B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with mortar or
grout. Point -up joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared
for application of sealant.
C. Cleaning: Remove excess sand from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.
D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer that ensures
that unit paver work is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 02780
,. UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 5
i.:
�-► 8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design,
placement procedures, and finishes.
B. Cast -in -place concrete includes the following:
1. Foundations and footings.
2. Slabs -on -grade.
3. Equipment pads and bases.
4. Site sidewalks.
5. Other items indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming
accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry -
shake finish materials, and others as requested by Engineer.
C. Shop drawings for reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP-66 (88), "ACI Detailing Manual,"
showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete
reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.
D. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.
E. Materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Engineer.
Materials certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each
material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from
admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards,
except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings."
2. ACI 318, 'Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice."
B. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing laboratory acceptable to Owner to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of
work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed work, shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
F
r CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1
l
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PART 2 = PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, or other acceptable panel -type materials, to
provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to
minimize number of joints.
B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of
350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOC) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect
concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold -drawn steel.
C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,
and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire -bar -type supports _
complying with CRSI specifications.
1. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material
will not support chair legs.
2. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms,
provide supports with legs that are plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel
protected (CRSI, Class 2).
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
1. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer.
B. Fly Ash: Fly ash and source shall conform to the requirements of the State of Texas
Department of Highways and Public Transportation Specification D-9-8900, "Fly Ash."
C. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a
single source for exposed concrete.
1. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances
that cause spalling.
2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but are shown to produce concrete of
adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when
acceptable to Engineer.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Admixtures, General: Admixtures for concrete shall not contain not more than 1.0 percent _
calcium chloride by weight of cement. Admixtures must be compatible when mixed together.
F. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Chemtard, ChemMasters Corp.
b.. PSI N, Cormix.
c. Eucon WR-75, Euclid Chemical Co.
d. WRDA, W.R. Grace & Co.
e. Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc. _
f. Metco W.R., Metalcrete Industries.
03300 - 2 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE _
r
r
p
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center : City of Lubbock CP #9355
g. Prokrete-N, Prokrete Industries.
h. Plastocrete 161, Sika Corp.
G. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Super P, Anti -Hydro Co., Inc.
b. Cormix 200, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
a Eucon 37, Euclid Chemical Co.
d. WRDA 19 or Daracem, W.R. Grace & Co.
e. Rheobuild, Master Builders, Inc.
f. Superslump, Metalcrete Industries.
g. PSPL, Prokrete Industries.
h. Sikament 300, Sika Corp.
H. Water -Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Q-Set, Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co.
b. Lubricon NCA, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
c. Accelguard 80, Euclid Chemical Co.
d. Daraset, W.R. Grace & Co.
e. Pozzutec 20, Master Builders, Inc.
f. Accel-Set, Metalcrete Industries.
I. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. PSI-R Plus, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
b. Eucon Retarder 75, Euclid Chemical Co.
c. Daratard-17, W.R. Grace & Co.
d. Pozzolith R, Master Builders, Inc.
e. Protard, Prokrete Industries.
f. Plastiment, Sika Corporation.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: Liquid -type membrane- forming curing
compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
A-H 3 Way Sealer, Anti -Hydro Co., Inc.
b.
Spartan -Cote, The Burke Co.
Conspec #1, Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co.
c.
4
d.
Sealco 309, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
e.
Day -Chem Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp.
f.
Eucocure, Euclid Chemical Co.
g.
Horn Clear Seal, A.C. Horn, Inc.
h.
L&M Cure R, L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
i.
Masterkure, Master Builders, Inc.
j.
CS-309, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
k.
Seal N Kure, Metalcrete Industries.
I.
Kure-N-Seal, Sonneborn-Chemrex.
m.
Stontop CS2, Stonhard, Inc.
r.. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film -forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab
surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Aquafilm, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
b. Eucobar, Euclid Chemical Co.
c. E-Con, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
d. Confilm, Master Builders, Inc.
e. Waterhold, Metalcrete Industries.
C. Underlayment Compound: Free -flowing, self -leveling, pumpable, cement -based compound for
applications from one inch thick to feathered edges.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. K-15, Ardex, Inc.
b. Self -Leveling Wear Topping, W.R. Bonsal.
c. Conflow, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
d. Corlevel, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
e. LevelLayer H, Dayton Superior Corp.
f. Flo -Top, Euclid Chemical Co.
g. Levelex, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
h. Underlayment 110, Master Builders, Inc.
i. Stoncrete ULI, Stonhard, Inc.
j. Concrete Top, Symons Corp.
k. Thoro Underlayment Self -Leveling, Thoro System Products.
D. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: --
a. Polyvinyl Acetate (Interior Only):
1) Superior Concrete Bonder, Dayton Superior Corp.
2) Euco Weld, Euclid Chemical Co.
3) Weld -Crete, Larsen Products Corp.
4) Everweld, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
5) Herculox, Metalcrete Industries.
6) Ready Bond, Symons Corp.
b. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene:
1) Acrylic Bondcrete, The Burke Co.
2) Strongbond, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
3) Day -Chem Ad Bond, Dayton Superior Corp.
4) SBR Latex, Euclid Chemical Co.
5) Daraweld C, W.R. Grace & Co.
6) Hornweld, A.C. Horn, Inc.
7) Everbond, L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. —
8) Acryl-Set, Master Builders Inc.
9) Intralok, W.R. Meadows, Inc.,
10) Sonocrete, Sonnebom-Chemrex.
11) Stonlock LB2, Stonhard, Inc. -
12) Strong Bond, Symons Corp.
03300 - 4 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE _
r 8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
I.
E. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component material suitable for use on dry or damp
surfaces. Provide material "Type," "Grade," and "Class" to suit project requirements.
l 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
l incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Burke Epoxy M.V., The Burke Co.
b. Spec -Bond 100, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
i c. Resi-Bond (J-58), Dayton Superior.
d. Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620, Euclid Chemical Co.
e. Epoxtite Binder 2390, A.C. Horn, Inc.
f. Epabond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
g. Concresive Standard Liquid, Master Builders, Inc.
r h. Rezi-Weld 1000, W.R. Meadows, Inca
i. Metco Hi -Mod, Sika Corp.
j. Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod, Sika Corp.
k. Stonset LV5, Stonhard, Inc.
i
1. R-600 Series, Symons Corp.
2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
F
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or
field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an
independent testing facility acceptable to Owner for preparing and reporting proposed mix
designs.
1. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing.
2. For non -architectural exposed concrete applications, fly ash may be used as a substitute for
cement: 20% by volume of cement replacement minimum, 25% by volume maximum.
B. Submit written reports to Engineer of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15
days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have
been reviewed by Engineer.
C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on
drawings and schedules:
1. 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement
as follows:
1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches.
2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 5 inches.
3. Concrete containing high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not more than
8 inches after adding admixture to site -verified 2-to-3-inch slump concrete.
4. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches.
2.6 ADMIXTURES
A. Use water -reducing admixture or high -range water -reducing admixture (Superplasticizer) in
concrete as required for placement and workability.
B. Use accelerating admixture as required in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below
50"F(10-Q.
C. Use high -range water -reducing admixture as, required in pumped concrete, and concrete with
water/cement ratios below 0.50.
D. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control in strict compliance with manufacturer's
directions.
CAST -I -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.
When air temperature is between 85° F (30° C) and 90° F (32° C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1'/z hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90° F (32°
C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
2.8 ADJUSTMENT TO CONCRETE MIXES
A. Contractor is responsible for ensuring that concrete is placed in such a manner that it meets the
project and specification requirements. Therefore, mix design adjustments may be necessary
when characteristics of materials, placement requirements, job conditions, weather, test results,
or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Engineer. Laboratory test data for revised mix
design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Engineer before using in work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor retarders with placement of forms and
reinforcing steel.
3.2 FORMS
A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral,
static and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities
complying with the following ACI 347 hints:
1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view. —
2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.
B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment,
location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, --
sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds,
bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected
materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent
cement paste from leaking.
C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.
Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom
forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy
removal.
D. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, .using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer
strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
E. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of _
other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades
providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
F. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete.
Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten
forms and bracing before concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain
proper alignment. _
3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing
Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as --
specified.
03300 - 6 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE _
a'
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City, of Lubbock CP #9355
1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder during reinforcement placement and
concreting operations.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or
destroy bond with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Engineer.
D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space,
and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete
r" placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed
concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one
full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps
in either direction.
3.4 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate
so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Engineer.
B. Provide keyways at least 1'/z inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between
walls and footings. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs.
C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints except as otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides
of strip placements.
D. Roughen or use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh
concrete.
E. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs -on -ground at points of
contact between slabs -on -ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation
walls, grade beams, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Division 7 Sections of these specifications.
F. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct contraction joints in slabs -on -ground
to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by 1/4 slab depth or inserts
1/4 inch wide by 1/4 of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Form contraction joints by saw cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing as may be safely
done without dislodging aggregate.
2. If joint pattern not shown; -provide joints not exceeding 15 feet in either direction and
located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third
bays).
3. Joint sealant material is specified in Division 7 Sections of these specifications.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
other work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings,
diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.
B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain
required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips using strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds.
3.6 PREPARING FORM SURFACES
A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form -coating
r compound before reinforcement is placed.
t.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with
in -place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance
with manufacturer's instructions.
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing
steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their
work.
B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete," and as specified.
C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on
concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.
D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24
inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of
several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand- _
spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete
in accordance with ACI 309.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine.
Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer.
Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each
insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete _
embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.
E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within
limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section.
1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or
darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to
beginning finishing operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement.
F. Cold -Weather Placing: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete
work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions,
or low temperatures.
G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 400 F (40 C), uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than
500 F (10' C) and not more than 800 F (27' C) at point of placement. _
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
H. Hot -Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality
and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as specified. _
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement
below 90' F (32' C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.
Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
03300 - 8 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE _
i
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel
temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in
concrete.
3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed.
4. Use water -reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity,
or other adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to Architect.
3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough Form Finish: Provide a rough -formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed
to view in the finish Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface
having texture imparted by form -facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired
and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped
r-� off.
B. Smooth Form Finish: Provide a smooth -formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to
view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material
applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or
other similar system. This is an as -cast concrete surface obtained with selected form -facing
material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and
patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed.
C. Smooth -Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth -rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which
' have received smooth -formed finish treatment not later than one day after form removal.
�., 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform
color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the
rubbing process.
r.. D. Grout -Cleaned Finish: Provide grout -cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces that have
received smooth form finish treatment.
1. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and a 50:50 mixture
r of acrylic or styrene butadiene-based bonding admixture and water to consistency of thick
paint. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by
t trial patches, so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.
2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill small holes.
Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray
for at least 36 hours after rubbing.
E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across
adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
39 MONOLITHIC SLAB FIMSHES
A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping
or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious
finish flooring material, and where indicated.
1. After placing slabs, finish surfaces to tolerances of (FF) 15 (floor flatness) and (FL) of 13
(floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains
where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms,
or rakes.
B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other
finishes as hereinafter specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic
waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo; and as otherwise indicated.
F
F. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready
for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has
disappeared, when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven
floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand -floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of Ff 18 (floor flatness)
and FL 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Cut down high spots
and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat
surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slab
surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin
film -finish coating system.
1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final
troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface.
Consolidate concrete surface by final hand -troweling operation, free of trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F. 20 (floor flatness)
- FL 17 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Grind smooth surface
defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin -set
mortar, apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow by slightly scarifying the —
surface with a fine broom.
E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and
ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber -
bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with
Architect before application.
3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other
trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place,
and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other
miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as
shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct
elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines
and equipment.
3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot —
temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before
and during finishing operations with an evaporation -control material. Apply in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and
troweling.
B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and
finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.
C. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist curing,
by moisture -retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as specified.
03300 - 10 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE —
r
r 8/3/98 Buddy Holly'. Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
I; D. Provide moisture curing by following methods:
1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
2. Use continuous water -fog spray.
3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with
water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete
rsurfaces and edges, with 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
i E. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows:
PO, 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest
practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape
or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
r F. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as
follows:
1. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing
operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared).
Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with
manufacturer's directions. Recoat areassubjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after
initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish
materials applied directly to concrete.
G. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,
supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for full curing
period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified
above, as applicable.
H. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat
surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method.
1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture -retaining cover,
unless otherwise directed.
3.12 SHORES AND SUPPORTS
I A. General: Comply with ACI 347 for shoring.
l 3.13 REMOVING FORMS
A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns,
and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 500 F
` (10° C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be
r damaged by form -removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are
maintained.
B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural
elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained at least 75
percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive
strength of in -place concrete by testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location
or members.
C. Form -facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical
supports have been arranged to permit removal of form -facing material without loosening or
disturbing shores and supports.
3.14 REUSING FORMS
A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new
form -coating compound as specified for new formwork.
r.. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 11
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove
fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do
not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect.
3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately
after removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect.
B. Mix dry -pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2%s parts fine aggregate passing
a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.
1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over i/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by
tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch.
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with
water, and brush -coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching
mortar before bonding compound has dried.
2. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement
so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at
inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching.
Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects
cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and
texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other
projections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. --
Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry -pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in
place with bonding agent.
1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the
durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness
and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and —
high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and
smoothness by using a template having required slope.
1. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects that affect durability of concrete. —
Surface defects, as such, include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width,
spalling, popouts, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14
days.
3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface
finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching compound. Finish —
repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may
be used when acceptable to Architect.
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to
sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of
same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent
finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
E. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter by dry -pack method. —
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose
particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Place dry -pack
before bonding compound has dried. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match --
adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
03300 - 12 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE —
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
F. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Engineer for method and procedure, using
specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.
r G. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Engineer.
3.16 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
rA. General: Employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit test reports.
l B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete shall include the
following, as directed by Architect.
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
` a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type
of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.
r b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight
concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each
day's pour of each type of air -entrained concrete.
r-� c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40°
F (4° C) and below, when 80' F (270 C) and above, and each time a set of
compression test specimens is made.
d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each
1 compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for
1 laboratory -cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required.
e. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each mix
exceeding 5 cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 100 cu. yds. more than the first 100
cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days,
two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing
if required.
2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of
concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if
fewer than 5 are used.
3. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., Architect may
waive strength test if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.
4. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory -
cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting
and curing the in -place concrete.
5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no
t individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500
psi.
r C. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready -Mix Producer,
and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain
the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing
service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and
type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
E. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test
results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in
the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy
r of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
t:
END OF SECTION 03300
�.. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City, of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 03532 - CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes concrete floor toppings applied over previously placed base slabs.
B. Types of concrete floor toppings include:
1. Standard aggregate toppings.
i 1.3 REFERENCES
A. Comply with requirements of Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete" and as herein specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish product data, samples, laboratory test reports, and materials certificates as specified in
r Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEMENT AND AGGREGATES
r
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III.
B. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, and as follows:
1. Fine aggregate, consisting of sand or crushed stone screenings, clean, hard, free of
deleterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:
a. 3/8 inch (9.5 mm): 100 percent
b. No. 4 (4.8 mm): 95-100 percent
c. No. 8 (2.4 mm): 80-90 percent
d. No. 16 (1.2 mm): 50-75 percent
e. No. 30 (600 micrometers): 30-50 percent
f. No. 50 (300 micrometers): 10-20 percent
g. No. 100 (150 micrometers): 2-5 percent
... C. Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, 6 x 6 - W2.1 x W2.1 welded steel wire fabric.
2.2 TOPPING MIX
A. Standard Topping: Design mix to produce topping material with the following characteristics:
r1. Compressive strength: 3500 psi (24 MPa) at 28 days.
2. Slump: 8 inches (200 mm) maximum at point of placement for concrete containing high -
range water -reducing admixture (super -plasticizer) and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum for
other concrete.
3. Maximum W/C ratio: 0.51.
2.3 MIXING
A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.
1. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water
introduced.
2. When air temperature is between 85' F (30' C) and 90° F (32' C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1% hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 900 F (320
C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
r CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - 1
r
e
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES
A. Topping Applied to Hardened Concrete: Remove dirt, loose material, oil, grease, paint, or other
contaminants, leaving a clean surface.
1. Protect waterproofing membrane at locations where concrete topping is to placed on
waterproofing membrane.
B. For reinforced toppings, provide necessary chairs or supports, and maintain position of
reinforcing mesh as shown on drawings.
C. Joints: Mark locations of joints in base slab so that joints in top course will be placed directly
over them.
3.2 PLACING AND FINISHING
A. Float Finish: Spread topping mixture evenly over prepared base to the required elevation and
strike off. Use highway straightedge, bull float, or darby to level surface. After the topping has
stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation, and water sheen has disappeared, float the surface
at least twice to a uniform sandy texture. Restraighten where necessary with highway
straightedge. The surface shall achieve an F/F of 20 and F/L of 17 tolerance when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M). Uniformly slope surface to drains.
B. Where joints are required, construct to match and coincide with joints in base slab. Provide
other joints as shown.
C. Trowel Finish: After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using power driven trowels.
Continue troweling until surface is ready to receive final troweling. Begin final troweling when
a ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface.
D. Continue final trowel operation to produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in
texture and appearance, and achieving, an F/F of 25 and F/L of 20 tolerance when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M).
E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete topping at balconies and —'
elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with stiff
fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
3.3 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Cure and protect topping applications and finishes as specified in Section "Cast -In -Place
Concrete."
3.4 PERFORNIANCES
A. Failure of concrete topping to bond to substrate (as evidenced by a hollow sound when tapped),
or disintegration or other failure of topping to perform as a floor finish, will be considered
failure of materials and workmanship. Repair or replace toppings in areas of such failures, as .—
directed.
END OF SECTION 03532
03532 2 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 04720 - CAST STONE
■' PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
.. A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cast stone exterior wall bands.
2. Cast stone exterior wall caps.
r 3. Cast stone exterior window sills.
B. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for exterior masonry veneer.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
(� A. Cast Stone: Architectural precast concrete building units intended to simulate natural cut stone.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for cast stone units.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include
dimensions; details of reinforcement and anchorages, if any; and indication of finished faces.
4
1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors.
C. Samples: Provide two sets of three samples for each color and texture of cast stone required,
10 inches square in size for determining custom colors.
D. Full -Size Samples: For each type of cast stone unit required. Make available for Architect's
review at Project site before installing cast stone.
1. Approved Samples may be installed in the Work.
E. Qualification Data: For fims and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
r- demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1. Include copies of material test reports for completed projects, indicating compliance of cast
stone with ASTM C 1364.
F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
�- for compliance of cast stone with requirements indicated.
P 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing cast stone units similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well
as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units.
B. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets.
1. Lift with wide -belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move
cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports.
F
r CAST STONE 04720 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers.
Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers
to prevent condensation.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate production and delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to minimize the need
for on -site storage and to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Provide cast stone units as manufactured by:
1. Architectural Cast Stone Corp.
2. Classic Cast Stone of Dallas, Inc.
3. Dallas Cast Stone Co., Inc.
4. Stone Legends Div., C.S.C.S., Inc.
5. United Cast Stone.
2.2 CAST STONE UNITS
A. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364. --
1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing
according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364.
B. Reinforce units as indicated and as required by ASTM C 1364. Use galvanized reinforcement
when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of material.
C. Fabricate units with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on all
exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces at least 1:12, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs.
3. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cure and finish units as follows:
1. Yard cure units until the sum of the mean daily temperatures for each day equals or —
exceeds 350 deg F.
E. Color and Texture: Provide units in colors as indicated on the drawings; if not indicated, match
existing limestone on historic building. -�
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M,
and hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123.
B. Dowels: Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 615/A 615M, 1/2-
inch diameter, and hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAAHNATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cast stone.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cast stone window sill units to comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Concrete
Masonry Units" for installing cast stone units.
04720 2 CAST STONE
8/3/98
Buddy Holly tenter City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
F
B.
Drench units with clear water just before setting.
C.
Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors
r'
and ties into mortar joints as units are set.
1. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar.
2. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set.
r
C D.
Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch.
Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.
�— E.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Provide expansion, control, and pressure -relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated or
1••
15'-0" o.c. maximum spacing.
.
1. Sealing joints is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
2. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more.
r.. B.
Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch
j
maximum.
C.
Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or one-
fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
D.
Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16-inch difference
between planes of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved
Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.
r B.
Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with
other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
F
END OF SECTION 04720
CAST STONE 04720 - 3
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
i. '; SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concrete unit masonry (CMU), including load -bearing, reinforced CMU back-up behind
brick veneer; load -bearing reinforced CMU interior walls; and non -load -bearing CMU
interior walls.
2. Clay unit masonry in the form of brick exterior veneer cavity walls.
3. Glazed clay masonry units 8" x 8" x 3 5/8", with prefinished corners.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for exposed sheet metal flashing installed
in masonry.
C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following:
1. Steel lintels in unit masonry are specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
2. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry are specified in Division 6 Section
"Rough Carpentry."
3. Reglets in masonry joints for metal flashings are speified in Division 7 Section "Flashing
and Sheet Metal."
4. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings are speified in Division 8 Section "Steel
Doors and Frames."
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
rA. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f m):
l 1. For clay unit masonry: As follows:
a. f m = 2500 psi.
2. For concrete unit masonry: As follows:
a. f m = 1900 psi.
l 1.4 SUBMITTALS
l A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product
indicated.
r" C. Shop Drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry
reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcing" showing
bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement.
D. Samples for verification purposes of the following:
1. Full size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing full range of
exposed color, texture, and dimensions to be expected in completed construction.
I a. Include size variation data verifying that actual range of sizes for brick falls within
l ASTM C 216 dimension tolerances for brick where modular dimensioning is indicated.
r, UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 1
1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2. Colored masonry mortar samples for each color required showing the full range of colors
expected in the finished construction. Label samples to indicate type and amount of colorant
used.
3. Accessories embedded in the masonry.
E. Material certificates for the following signed manufacturer and Contractor certifying that each
material complies with requirements.
1. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout including name of
manuracturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery.
2. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.
3. Each type and size of joint reinforcement.
4. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
F. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory emplyed and paid by
Contractor indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following
proposed masonry mateirals with requirements indicated:
1. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.
2. Masonry units. .
G. Cold -weather construction procedures evidencing compliance with requirements specified in
referenced unit masonry standard.
H. Hot -weather construction procedures evidencing compliance with requirements specified in
referenced unit masonry standard.
I. Qualificaion data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names,
addressess, telephone numbers, names of Architects and Owners, and other information
specified.
J. Results from tests and inspections performed by Owner's representatives will be reported
promptly and in writng to Architect and Contractor.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 "Specifications for Masonry
Structures," except as otherwise indicated.
1. Revise ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 to exclude Sections 1.4 and 1.7; Parts 2.1.2, 3.1.2, and 4.1.2;
and Articles 1.5.1.2, 1.5.1.3, 2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.2, and 2.3.3.9 and to modify Article 2.1.1.4 by
deleting requirement for installing vent pipes and conduits built into masonry.
B. Inspecting Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for employment in performing tests and
inspection specified in this Section, an independent testing laboratory must demonstrate to
Architect's staisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory -submitted criteria conforming to
ASTM C 1093, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing
indicated without delaying the progress of the Work.
C. Preconstruction Testing: Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing .._
laboratory to perform the following preconstruction testing indicated as well as other inspecting
and testing services required by referenced unit masonry standard or indicated herein for source
and field quality control:
1. Clay unit masonry tests: For each different clay masonry unit indicated, units will be tested
per ASTM C 67.
2. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each different concrete masonry unit indicated, units will
be tested for strength, absorption and moisture content per ASTM C 140.
3. Grout compressive strength will be tested per ASTM C 1019.
04810 - 2 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
D. Fire Performance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which
are identical to those of assemblies whose fire endurance has been determined by testing in
compliance with ASTM E 119 by a recognized testing and inspecting organization or by another
means, as acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. Where 4 hour rated concrete masonry walls
are indicated, provide B4 certified concrete masonry units.
E. Single Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform
texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from
one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually
related surfaces.
F. Single Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component
and from one source and producer for each aggregate.
G. Field Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of masonry work, erect sample wall panels
to further verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-ups to comply with the following
requirements using materials indicated for final unit of Work:
1. Locate mock-ups on site in locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Build mock-ups for the following types of masonry in sizes of approximately 6' long by
4' high by full thickness, including face and back-up wythes as well as accessories.
3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be
erected.
4. Protect mock-ups from the elements with weather resistant membrane.
5. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as standard for
judging completed masonry construction.
a. Accepted mock-ups in undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion may
become part of completed unit of Work. Remove unacceptable mock-ups prior to
Substantial Completion.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comploy with requirements of
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.
B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion and
other causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air-dried condition.
C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in dry location.
D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover top of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work
is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
2. Where on wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold
cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at
least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 3
C
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings
spread on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes from mortar droppings.
D. Cold Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard for cold -weather
construction and the following:
1 Do not lay masonry units which are wet or frozen.
2. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions.
E. Hot -Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements specifed in this Section
applicable to each material indicated.
2.2 CLAY MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Comply with following requirements applicable to each form of brick required:
1. Provide special molded shapes where indicated and as follows:
a. For applications requiring brick of form, color, texture and size on exposed surfaces
that cannot be produced by sawing standard brick sizes.
2. Provide units without cores or frogs and with all exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills,
caps, and similar applications that expose brick surfaces that otherwise would be concealed
from view.
B. Face Brick Standard: ASTM C 216, and as follows:
1. Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units of grade and mimimum average net
area compressive strength indicated below:
a. Grade SW.
b. 5000 psi.
2. Type FBS (for general use in exposed masonry requiring wider variations in size and color
ranges than Type FBX).
3. Size: Provide bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions within the tolerances
specified in ASTM C 216:
a. Modular: 3-5/8 inches (89 to 92 mm) thick by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 7-7-5/8
inches (190 to 194 mm) long.
4. Application: As indicated.
5. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or equal:
a. Acme Brick PEP 13 or 41 rough modular as selected by the Owner. _
C. Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C 62, and as follows:
1. Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units of grade and minimum average net
area compressive strength indicated below:
a. Grade SW.
b. 5500 psi.
04810 - 4' UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
F
8/3/98 Buddy:HollyTCenter City of Lubbock CP #9355
2. Size: Provide bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions within the tolerances
specified in ASTM C 216:
l a. Match sizes specified for face brick.
3. Application: Use where brick is indicated for concealed locations.
2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete
masonry unit required.
1. Provide special shapes where indicated and as follows:
a. For lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special
conditions.
b. Square -edged units for outside corners, except all exposed outside comers inside the
building shall be bullnose.
2. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated below for size
that are manufactured to specified face dimensions within tolerances specified in the
applicable referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry units.
a. Concrete Masonry Units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8 inch less than
nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings. .
\. 3. Provide Type I, moisture -controlled units.
4. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Hollow Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, Grade N and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive
r+ strength indicated below:
a. 1900 psi.
2. Weight Classification: Medium weight.
r' 3. Where special coursing patterns are indicated, provide units with exposed faces matching
` color, texture and pattern indicated.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
X A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar
color.
rB. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate with 100
r, percent passing the No. 16 sieve.
1. Colored Mortar Aggregates: Ground marble, granite or other sound stone, as required to
match Architect's sample.
D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
• E. Colored Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded
for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in masonry
mortars.
F. Water: Clean and potable.
G. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Colored Mortar Pigments:
a. "True Tone Mortar Colors"; Davis Colors, A Subsidiary of Rockwood Industries, Inc.
b. "SGS Mortar Colors", Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 5
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2.5 REINFORCING STEEL
A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry
standard and this article.
B. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows:
1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615.
2. Grade 60.
2.6 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Provide joint reinforcement complying with requirements of ASTM A 951 and this
article, formed from the following:
1. Galvanized carbon steel wire to ASTM A 153, Class B-2. _
B. Description: Welded wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross
rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units, and
complying with requirements indicated below:
1. Wire diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1875 inch typically.
2. For multi-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:
a. Ladder design with perpindicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c.
b. Number of Side Rods for Multiwythe Concrete Masonry: One side rod for each face
shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches in nominal width plus one side rod
for each wythe of masonry 4 inches or less in nominal width.
3. Tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box -type cross ties spaced not more
than 16 inches o.c.; with side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of backup
wythe and ties extended to engage the outer wythe by at least 1-1/2 inches.
4. Use units with adjustable 2-piece rectangular ties where horizontal joints of facing wythe
do not align with those of backup and where indicated.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. AA Wire Products Co.
2. Dur-O-Wall, Inc.
r
3. Heckman Building Products, Inc.
4. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
5. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America.
6. National Wire Products Corp. ti
2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements
for metal and size of referenced unit masonry standard and of this article.
B. Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, coating class as required by referenced unit
masonry standard for application indicated.
1. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 (commercial quality) cold -rolled carbon steel sheet, hop -
dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525, Class B2 (for unit lengths over
15 inches) and Class B3 (for unit lengths under 15 inches), for sheet metal ties and anchors.
1. Thickness of Steel Sheet Galvanized After Fabrication: Uncoated thickness of steel sheet
hot -dip galvanizedafter fabrication:
a. 0.0747 inch (14 gage).
04810 - 6 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
71
8/3/98 Buddy Holly: Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
a
D. Galvanized Heavy -Thickness Steel Sheet: ASTM A 635 (commercial quality) hot -rolled carbon
steel sheet hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525, Class B3, for rigid
anchors fabricated from steel sheet or strip with a thickness of 0.180 inch and greater.
E. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36, hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123 or ASTM
A 153, Class B3, as applicable to size and form indicated.
F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. AA Wire Products Co.
2. Dur-O-Wall, Inc.
3. Heckman Building Products, Inc.
4. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
5. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America.
6. National Wire Products Corp.
7. Southern Construction Products, Inc.
2.8 BENT WIRE TIES
A. Individual units prefabricated from bent wire to comply with requirements indicated below:
B. Tie Shape for Hollow Masonry Units Laid with Cells Vertical: Rectangular with closed ends and
not less than 4 inches wide.
C. Type for Masonry Where Coursing Between Wythes Align: Unit ties bent from one piece of
wire.
D. Type for Masonry Where Coursing Between Wythes Does Not Align: Adjustble ties composed
of two parts, one with pintles, the other with eyes, maximum misalignment 1-1/4 inches.
2.9 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL
FRAMEWORK
A. General: Two-piece assemblies as described below allowing vertical or horizontal differential
movement between wall and framework parallel to plane of wall, but resisting tension and
cmpression forces perpindicular to wall.
B. For anchorage to steel framework, provide manufacturer's standard with crimped 1/4-inch-
diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel triangular -shaped wire tie section sized to
extend within 1 inch of masonry face and as follows:
1. Wire Diameter: 0.25 inch.
2.10 RIGID ANCHORS
A. Provide straps of form and length indicated, fabricated from metal strips of following width and
thickness.
1. 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Unit Type Masonry Inserts in Concrete: Cast iron malleable iron inserts of type and size
indicated.
B. Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots, with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from
0.0336-inch (22 gage) sheet metal
C. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts
and, where indicated, flat washers; hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class S;
of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations:
1. Headed bolts.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 7
k
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2.12 POSTINSTALLED ANCHORS
A. Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within
factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing laboratory.
1. Type: Expansion anchors.
2. Corrosion Protection: Stainless steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM
F 594, Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 for bolts and nuts; alloy 304 or 316 for anchor.
3. For cast -in -place and postinstalled anchors in concrete: Capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 6 times loads imposed by masonry.
4. For postinstalled anchors in grouted concrete masonry units: Capability to sustain, without
failure, load equal to 6 times loads imposed by masonry.
2.13 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified
in Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" and below:
1. Copper: 10-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0135 inch thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq.
ft. weight or 0.0216 inch thick elsewhere.
2. Fabricate through -wall metal flashings embedded in masonry as follows:
a. With ribs formed in sawtooth pattern at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to
provide a three-way integral mortar bond and weep -hole drainage.
3. Fabricate metal expansion joint strips from sheet metal indicated above, formed to shape
indicated.
4. Application: Use where flashing is fully or partly concealed in masonry wall and where
metal flashing is indicated.
B. Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing of type indicated below:
C. Asphalt -Coated Copper Flashing: Manufacturer's standard product consisting of sheet copper of
weight per sq. ft. indicated below:
1. Weight: 7 oz.
2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
D. Vinyl Sheet Flashing: Flexible sheet flashings especially formulated from virgin polyvinyl
chloride with plasticizers and other modifiers to remain flexible and waterproof in concealed
masonry applications, black in color and of thickness indicated below:
1. Thickness: 56 mils.
2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
E. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashing: As specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing and \
Sheet Metal."
F. Adhesive for Flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use
indicated.
G. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Metal Flashing:
a. "Cheney Flashing (Sawtooth)," Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.
b. "Keystone Three -Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing," Keystone Flashing Co.
2. Asphalt -Coated Copper Flashing:
a. "Cop -A -Cote," Afco Products Inc.
b. "Type ACC -Asphalt Bituminous Coated," Phoenix Building Products.
c. "Coated Copper Flashing," Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. "Copperseal," York Manufacturing, Inc. --
04810 8' UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES _
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
`• 2.14 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Nonmetallic Expansion Joint Strips: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type
I} 2 (closed cell), Class A (cellular rubber and rubber -like materials with specific resistance to
petroleum base oils), Grade 1 (compression -deflection range of 2-5 psi), compressible up to 35
percent, of widthand thickness indicated, formulated form the following material:
r 1. Neoprene.
B. Premolded Control Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash
block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
1. Styrene-Butadiene Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation 2AA-805.
C. Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type
I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Weep Holes: Provide the following:
1. Plastic Tubing: Medium density polyethylene, 3/8-inch outside diameter by 4-inches long.
E. Cavity Drainage Material: Full cavity width thick, free -draining mesh; made from polyethylene
strands shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings.
1. Cavity Drainage Material:
a. Mortar Break; Advanced Building Products, Inc.
b. CavClear Masonry Mat; CavClear.
c. Mortar Net; Mortar Net USA, Ltd.
t
t : d. Mortar Stop; Polytite Manufacturing Corp.
2.15 INSULATION
A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid cellular polystyrene thermal insulation with closed
cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an
extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV; in manufacturer's standard lengths
and widths; thicknesses as indicated.
B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation borad manufacturer for application indicated.
2.16 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2 cup dry measure) and
laundry detergent (1/2 cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water.
2.17 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air- entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, anti -freeze compounds or other admixtures, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of
Mortar required, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement -lime.
2. For masonry below grade and in contact with earth, and where indicated, use type indicated
below:
a. Type S.
3. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use type indicated below:
a. Type S.
r, UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 9
p
e
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
4. For exterior, above -grade loadbearing and nonloadbearing walls and parapet walls; and for
other applications where another type is not indicated, use type indicated below:
a. Type S.
C. Colored Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce
color required.
D. Colored Aggregate Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by use of colored aggregates in
combination with selected cementitious materials.
1. Mix to match Architect's sample.
E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 and referenced unit masonry standard.
Provide grout with minimum compressive 28 day strength of 3,000 psi; 8 inch slump.
2.18 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested by qualified
independent testing laboratory per ASTM C 67 except 5 bricks will be selected at random for
each 100,000 units or fraction thereof.
B. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry unit
indicated, units will be tested by qualified independent testing laboratory for strength, absorption,
and moisture content per ASTM C 140.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXANIINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit
masonry.
B. Examine rough -in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior
to installation.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements indicated applicable to
each type of installation included in Project.
B. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of
nominal thickness indicated.
C. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other
Section of the Specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess
and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses.
D. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation
of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening.
E. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units
as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units
without cutting where possible.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with construction tolerances of referenced unit masonry standard.
04810 10 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
r 8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
i
t 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths
and for accurate locating of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use
of less -than -half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations.
B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced
and coordinated with other construction.
C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not
use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
1. For reinforced concrete masonry use one-half running bond with vertical joint in each
course centered on units in courses above and below.
2. Stack bond where indicated.
3. For exterior face brick use one-third running bond as field coursing and soldier coursing
and other accent coursing as indicated on drawings.
D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less
than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with
less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2 unit length for one-half running
bond or 113 unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set
masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly (if required), and remove loose masonry units and
mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
F. Built -In Work: As construction progresses, build -in items specified under this and other Section
of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer
of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
3. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 inches) under bearing
plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and
pilasters, and where adjacent cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
3. For starting course where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas
under cells.
B. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to be concealed or to be covered by other materials, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.6 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY
A. Use structural bonding system indicated on Drawings.
B. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners, unless otherwise
shown.
1. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement at corners using prefabricated "L"
units, in addition to masonry bonding.
C. Intersection and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at
juncture, provide same type and space as follows:
1. Provide individual metal ties.
2. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement using prefabricated "T" units.
:t
�. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES O4810 11
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center . 8/3/98
3.7 CAVITIES/AIR SPACES
A. Keep cavities/air spaces clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction.
Strike joints facing cavities/air spaces flush.
B. Tie exterior wythe to back-up with individual metal ties. Stagger alternate courses.
C. Tie exterior wythe to back-up with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing.
3.8 CAVITY WALL INSULATION
A. On units of plastic board insulation, install small pads of adhesive spaced approximately V-0"
o.c. both ways on inside face. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining
obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside
wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.
1. Fill all cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and
masonry.
3.9 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal
side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of
walls, 1/2" elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6".
B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections.
Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets,
column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.
3.10 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to
comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1" in width between masonry and structural member,
unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints
and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24" o.c. vertically and 36" o.c horizontally.
3.11 ANCHORING SINGLE-WYTHE MASONRY
A. Anchor single wythe masonry veneer to concrete and concrete masonry bakcup with masonry
veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:
1. Fasten each anchor section to concrete with dovetail adjustable anchors spacing ties 8
inches on center vertically and 6 feet on center maximum horizontally.
2. At concrete masonry backup embed tie section in grouted cells of concrete masonry using
special shaped ties. Provide not less than 2-inch air space between back of masonry veneer
wythe and face of backup.
3. Locate anchor section relative to course in which tie section is embedded to allow
maximum vertical differential movement of tie up and down.
4. Space anchors as indicated but not more than 8" o.c. vertically and 72" o.c. horizontally
with not less than one anchor for each 4 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors
within V-0" of openings.
3.12 MOVEMENT (CONTROL AND EXPANSION) JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build in related
items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless
provisions are made to prevent in -plane restraint of wall or partition movement.
04810 - 12 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
1. Fit bond breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of block units on one side of control
joint. Fill the resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces.
2. Install preformed control joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install special shapes designed for control joints. Install bond breaker strips at joint. Keep
head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joints.
C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows:
1. Build -in joint fillers where indicated.
2. Form open joint of width indicated but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and
backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." Maintain joint free and clear of
mortar.
D. Build in horizontal pressure relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by inserting non-
metallic compressible joint filler of width required to permit installation of sealant and backer
rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
1. Locate horizontal pressure relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer
and attached to structure behind masonry veneer.
3.13 LINTELS
A. Install galvanized steel lintels where indicated, and as detailed. Provide bond breaker on steel
lintels where through -wall flashing is not present.
B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1'-0" for brick size
units and 2'-0" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
Provide precast or formed -in -place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and
installation. Temporarily support formed -in -place lintels.
1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintel units with
reinforcement bars placed as shown filled with coarse grout.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.14 FLASBINGANTEP HOLES
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry work at shelf angles, lintels,
ledges and other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated.
B. Prepare masonry surfaces so that they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture
flashing. Place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive/sealant/tape as recommended by manufacturer before
covering with mortar.
C. Install flashings as follows:
1. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry each end.
Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe,
turned up a minimum of 4 inches, and through the inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the
fW interior face of the wall in exposed work. Where interior surface of inner wythe is
+, concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through. the inner wythe and turn up
approximately 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
2. At heads and sills extend flashing as specified above unless otherwise indicated but turn up
ends not less than 2 inches to form a pan.
3. Install flashing in masonry veneer walls as specified above but carry flashing up face of
backup at least 8 inches.
4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashings by over -lapping ribs not less than 1-1/2"
or as recommended by flashing manufacturer and seal lap with elastomeric sealant
complying with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for application indicated.
5. Turn down sheet metal flashings %< inch at exterior face of masonry to form drip.
P" UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 13
F
E
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
6. Cut off laminated flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is
completed.
D. Install weep holes in the head joints of exterior wythes of the first course of masonry
immediately above embedded flashings.
1. Form weep holes with plastic tubing specified in Part 2 of this Section.
2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c.
3. In uninsulated cavities/air spaces place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course
but not less than 2 inches immediately above flashing embedded in the wall, as masonry
construction progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage.
4. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities.
E. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work where shown to be built into
masonry work.
3.15 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
A. General: Install reinforced unit masonry to comply with requirements of referenced unit masonry _
standard.
B. Temporary Formwork: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements
during construction.
1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently
tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie and support forms to maintain
position and shape during costruction and curing of reinforced masonry.
C. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength
to resist grout pressure.
D. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently
to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during
construction.
E. Reinforced Unit Masonry Grouting: --
1. Use "Fine Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling spaces less than 4" in one or both horizontal
directions.
2. Use "Coarse Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling 4" spaces or larger in both horizontal --
directions.
3. Grouting Technique: At the Contractor's option, use either low- lift or high -lift grouting
techniques subject to requirements which follow.
4. Low -Lift Grouting:
a. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in. in vertical cores to
be grouted. _
b. Place vertical reinforcement, prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of
maximum pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals
not exceeding 192.bars diameters nor 10 ft.
c. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not excess 5' height or if bond beam occurs
below 5' height stop pour at course below bond beam.
d. Pour grout using chute or container with spout. Rod or vibrate grout during placing.
Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. --
Terminate grout pours 1-1/2" below top course of pour.
e. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1-1/2" below bond beam course. Place
horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at comers and intersections as shown. Place
grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam.
04810 - 14 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
i 5. High -Lift Grouting:
a. Do not use high -lift grouting technique for grouting of CMU unless minimum cavity
dimension and area is 3" and 10 sq. in., respectively.
b. Provide cleanout holes in first course at all vertical cells which are to be filled with
grout.
c. Use units with one face shell removed and provide temporary supports for units above,
or use header units with concrete brick supports, or cut openings in one face shell.
d. Construct masonry to full height of maximum grout pour specified, prior to placing
grout.
e. Limit grout lifts to a maximum height of 5' and grout pour to a maximum height of
24', for single wythe hollow concrete masonry walls, unless otherwise indicated.
f. Place vertical reinforcement before grouting. Place before or after laying masonry
units, as required by job conditions. Tie vertical reinforcement to dowels at base of
masonry where shown and thread CMU over or around reinforcement. Support
vertical reinforcement at intervals not exceeding 192 bars diameters nor 10'.
g. Where individual bars are placed after laying masonry, place wire loops extending into
cells as masonry is laid and loosen before mortar sets. After insertion of reinforcement
bar, pull loops and bar to proper position and tie free ends.
h. Where reinforcement is prefabricated into cage units before placing, fabricate units
with vertical reinforcement bars and lateral ties of size and spacing indicated.
F. Place horizontal beam reinforcement as the masonry units are laid.
1. Embed lateral tie reinforcement in mortar joints where indicated. Place as masonry units
are laid, at vertical spacing shown.
2. Where lateral ties are shown in contact with vertical reinforcement bars, embed additional
lateral tie reinforcement in mortar joints. Place as shown, or if not shown, provide as
required to prevent grout blowout or rupture of CMU face shells, but provide not less than
No. 2 bars or 8-gage wire ties spaced 16" o.c. for members with 20" or less side
dimensions, and 8 o.c. for members with side dimensions exceeding 20".
G. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust,
dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces.
Clean reinforcement and adjust to proper position. Clean top surface of structural members
supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes
and brace closures to resist grout pressures.
1. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient
strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores
and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations.
2. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are acceptable to the
Engineer/Architect.
3. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more
than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed
5'. Allow not less than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given pour.
Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation.
4. Place grout in lintels or beams over openings in one continuous pour.
5. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam course
to within 1" of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry.
6. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend
reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1-1/2" of top
course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place
reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are
required.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 15
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Frequency: Tests and evaluations listed in this article will be performed during
construction for each 5,000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
1. Grout compressive strength will be sampled and tested per ASTM C 1019.
B. Evaluation of Quality Control Tests: In absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, masonry will be considered satisfactory if results from construction quality control
tests comply with minimum requirements indicated.
3.17 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise
damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints including corners, openings and adjacent work
to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants.
C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes
or chisels. _
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning
of masonry. --
3. Protect non -masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid
strippable masking agent, polyethylene film or waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing thoroughly with cleat water.
5. Clean brick by means of bucket and brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA
"Technical Note No. 20 Revised" using the following masonry cleaner:
a. Job -mixed detergent solution.
D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer,
which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial _
Completion.
END OF SECTION 04810
04810 - 16 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
8/3/98 Buddy Holly: Center. City of Lubbock CP #9355
r,
' r
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
i PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
!� Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUNEVIARY
A. This Section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on drawings
including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of members, typical
connections, and types of steel required.
1. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
"Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings.
2. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications are specified elsewhere in Division 5.
3. Refer to Division 3 for anchor bolt installation in concrete, Division 4 for anchor bolt
installation in masonry.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for following products.
Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications (including
specified standards).
1. High -strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers.
a. Include Direct Tension Indicators if used.
2. Structural steel primer paint.
3. Shrinkage -resistant grout.
C. Shop drawings prepared under supervision of a licensed Structural Engineer, including complete
details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures, and
diagrams. Shop drawings shall be in compliance with AISC guidelines.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds
by standard AWS symbols and show size, length, and type of each weld.
2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other
anchorages to be installed as work of other sections.
D. Test reports conducted on shop- and field -bolted and welded connections. Include data on
type(s) of tests conducted and test results.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise indicated:
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges."
a. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following
sentence:
1) "This approval constitutes the owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the
design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the
fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings."
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -1
6
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," including "Commentary."
3. "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325" approved by the Research Council
on Structural Connections.
4. American Welding Society (AWS) 131.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling
and Bars for Structural Use."
B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in
accordance with AWS "Qualification" requirements.
1. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS —
qualification tests.
2. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.
B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete
or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work.
C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged
materials from erosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and
relubricate before use.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to
members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as
directed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view, use only ,
materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding,
or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and applying surface finishes. _
B. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
C. Hot -Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated.
E. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low -carbon steel bolts and
nuts.
1. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections.
F. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and
hardened washers, as follows:
1. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers, complying with
ASTM A 325.
a. Where indicated as galvanized, provide units that are zinc coated, either mechanically --
deposited complying with ASTM B 695, Class 50, or hot -dip galvanized complying
with ASTM A 153.
G. Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, type as required.
H. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code.
I. Structural Steel Primer Paint: SSPC - Paint 2; red rust -inhibitive alkyd.
05120 - 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL
8/3/98 Buddy Holly'.Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
4 J. Nonmetallic Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining
product containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents,
plasticizing and water -reducing agents, complying with CE-CRD-C621; and having a minimum
compressive strength at 28 days of 6000 psi.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. 100 Non -Shrink Grout (Non -Metallic); Conspec, Inc.
b. Supreme Grout; Cormix, Inc.
c. Sure Grip Grout; Dayton Superior.
d. Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Co.
e. Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
f. Masterflow 713; Master Builders.
g. Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows.
h. Propak; Protex Industries, Inc.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to
greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC
Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members
where indicated.
1. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery
sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.
2. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of
finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of
markings, burrs, and other defects.
B. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated.
C. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated.
1. Provide high -strength threaded fasteners for all bolted connections, except where unfinished
bolts are indicated.
2. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only bolted connections of secondary framing
members to primary members (including purlins, girts, and other framing members taking
only nominal stresses) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection.
D. High -Strength Bolted Construction: Install high -strength threaded fasteners in accordance with
AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325."
E. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
F. Steel Wall Framing: Select members that are true and straight for fabrication of steel wall
framing. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall
framing.
G. Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel framing. Weld exposed joints
continuously and grind smooth. Plug -weld steel bar stops to frames, except where shown
removable. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk, cross -recessed head machine
screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
H. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel
framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop
drawings.
I. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other
work.
J. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame -cut holes or enlarge
holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
t
r STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3.
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
K. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints in steel shelf angles when part of structural steel
frame; locate at vertical brick expansion joints as indicated on drawings.
2.3 SHOP PAINTING
A. General: Shop -paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be
embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel that is partially exposed on exposed
portions and initial 2 inches of embedded areas only.
1. Use lead free primer.
2. Do not paint surfaces to be welded or high -strength bolted with friction -type connections.
3. Do not paint surfaces scheduled to receive sprayed -on fireproofing.
4. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change
color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted.
Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Clean steel in
accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:
1 SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning."
C. Painting: 'Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 —
mils. Use painting methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed
surfaces.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL _.
A. General: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill, shop,
and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve
Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance
with specified requirements.
1. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not comply.
B. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar
conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without
causing delay in the work.
1. Promptly notify Owner's Representative whenever design of members and connections for
any portion of structure are not clearly indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Surveys: Employ a licensed land surveyor for accurate erection of structural steel. Check
elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar '-
devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Owner's Representative. Do
not proceed with erection until corrections have been made or until compensating adjustments
to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Owner's Representative. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with
connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and
connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide --
temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds.
C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to
effectively complete work. - --
05120 - 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL
8/3/98 Buddy Holly .Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
D. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -
reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and
bearing plates.
1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or
other adjusting devices.
2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not
remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate
prior to packing with grout.
3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids
remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.
4. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and
adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently
fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before
assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and
alignment.
F. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances.
G. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings.
H. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary
structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under
stress, as acceptable to Owner's Representative. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared
appearance when permitted.
I. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop
painting.
Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high -
strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports.
B. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests, state in each report whether test specimens
comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom.
C. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or
produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
D. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment.
E. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory test reports have
indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's
expense, as necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work and to show compliance
of corrected work.
r
F. Field -Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications.
1. For Direct Tension Indicators, comply with requirements of ASTM F 959. Verify that gaps
are less than gaps specified in Table 2.
G. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows:
1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations
of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies.
2. Perform visual inspection of all welds.
r+ END OF SECTION 05120
E
�..� STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5
t
r
Y
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel roof deck.
2. Noncomposite steel form deck.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete" for concrete fill and reinforcing steel.
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing openings with miscellaneous steel
shapes.
3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for touchup and repair painting of deck.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of deck, accessory, and product specified.
C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels,
pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of steel deck certifying that their products comply
with specified requirements.
E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements
specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
! 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed steel deck similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency -submitted criteria
conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct
the testing indicated without delaying the Work.
C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding
Code --Steel" and AWS D 1.3 "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
rprocesses involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
D. FM Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by Factory Mutual and listed in Factory Mutual
"Approval Guide" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 90 windstorm ratings.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
j` handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof
covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
STEEL DECK 05310 - 1
r
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center l 8/3/98
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Buildings Co.
2. ASC Pacific Inc.
3. Bowman Metal Deck Armco, Inc.
4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
5. Epic Metals Corp.
6. Marlyn Steel Products, Inc.
7. Robertson A United Dominion Co.
8. Roof Deck, Inc.
9. United Steel Deck, Inc.
10. Verco Manufacturing Co.
11. Vulcraft Div. of Nucor Corp.
12. Walker Div. of Butler Manufacturing Co.
13. Wheeling Corrugating Co., Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp.
2.2 ROOF DECK
A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels without top -flange stiffening grooves conforming to SDI
Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck" and the following:
1. Prime -Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, Grade C, shop primed as follows:
a. Shop Primer: Grey or white baked -on, lead- and chromate -free rust -inhibitive primer,
conforming to the performance requirements of Fed. Spec. TT-P-664.
2. Deck Profile: Type IR, intermediate rib.
3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
4. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 0.0295 inch (0.75 mm).
5. Span Condition: Triple span or more.
6. Side Joints: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.
2.3 FORM DECK
A. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed -steel sheet noncomposite form deck panels
conforming to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel
Form Deck," the minimum section properties indicated, and the following:
1. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, Grade E, G 60 zinc coated according to
ASTM A 525.
2. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 0.0239 inch.
4. Span Condition: Triple span or more.
5. Side Joints: Overlapped.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide accessory materials for steel deck that comply with requirements indicated and
recommendations of the steel deck manufacturer.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion -resistant, low -velocity, powder -
actuated or pneumatically driven carbon steel fasteners; or self -drilling, self -threading screws.
C. Side Lap Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion -resistant, hexagonal washer head; self -
drilling, carbon steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
D. Rib Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber.
05310 2 STEEL DECK _
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly. Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
E. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, 0.0359-inch- (0.91-mm-) thick minimum
ridge and valley plates, finish strips, and reinforcing channels, of same material as roof deck.
F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material
and thickness as deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Weld Washers: Manufacturer's standard uncoated -steel sheet weld washers, shaped to fit deck
rib, 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm) thick with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter prepunched hole,
where recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
,., A. Examine supporting framing and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel deck.
3.2 PREPARATION
r A. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary of SDI
17 Publication No. 28, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this Section.
} B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels when required to meet deflection
limitations.
r
C. Place deck panels on supporting framing and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
f and bearing on supporting framing before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or
contract side lap interlocks.
D. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
` continuity of decking, and support of other work.
E. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
F 3.4 ROOF DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members as indicated in the Structural Notes.
B. Side Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between
supports, as indicated in the Structural Notes.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting framing with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:
r.o 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum.
D. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover plates,
end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's recommendations.
Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
3.5 FLOOR DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten floor deck panels to steel supporting members as indicated in the Structural Notes.
" B. Side Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between
supports, as indicated in the Structural Notes.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting framing with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches, with end joints as follows:
` 1. End Joints: Lapped.
d
STEEL DECK 05310 - 3
I'
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will _
perform field quality -control testing.
B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. -
D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of convected work with specified
requirements.
3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Touchup Painting: Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on both _
surfaces of installed deck panels.
1. Touch up painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces.
2. Where shop -painted surfaces are exposed in-service, apply touchup paint to blend into
adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure steel decking is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. _
END OF SECTION 05310
05310 - 4 STEEL DECK
.O
y`F
E
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r -
SECTION 05400 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUNEY ARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel joists.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for gypsum board and nonload-bearing
metal -stud framing and ceiling -suspension assemblies.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AISI "Specifications": Calculate structural characteristics of cold -formed metal framing
according to AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members"
and the following:
1. Center for Cold -Formed Steel Structures (CCFSS) Technical Bulletin, Vol. 2, No. 1,
February 1993 "AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections."
B. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate and erect cold -formed metal framing with the
following minimum physical and structural properties:
1. Physical and Structural Properties: As indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of cold -formed metal framing, accessory, and product specified.
C. Shop drawings showing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold -formed metal
framing, fabrication, fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show
reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging,
splices, accessories, connection details, and attachments to other units of Work.
D. Mill certificates signed by manufacturers of cold -formed metal framing certifying that their
products comply with requirements, including uncoated steel thickness, yield strength, tensile
strength, total elongation, and galvanized -coating thickness.
1. In lieu of mill certificates, submit test reports from a qualified independent testing agency
evidencing compliance with requirements.
E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements
specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
G. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance with
requirements of the following based on comprehensive testing:
1. Expansion anchors.
2. Mechanical fasteners.
COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed cold -formed metal
framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding
Code --Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect cold -formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during
delivery, storage, and handling.
B. Store cold -formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid
condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold -
formed metal framing that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp.
2. Angeles Metal Systems.
3. Clark -Cincinnati, Inc.
4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
5. Dale Industries, Inc.
6. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
7. Super Stud Building Products, Inc.
8. Unimast, Inc.
9. United States Steel
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, zinc coated according to ASTM A 525, and as follows:
1. Coating Designation: G 90.
2. Grade: Grade D, 50,000 psi minimum yield strength, 12 percent elongation.
2.3 JOIST FRAMING
A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, unpunched, of web depths indicated,
with lipped flanges, and complying with the following:
1. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated on the drawings..
2. Flange Width: As indicated on the drawings.
B. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, unpunched, of web depths
indicated, with straight flanges, and complying with the following:
1. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated on the drawings.
2. Flange Width: As indicated on the drawings.
2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel -framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members,
with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi.
05400 - 2 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise
indicated, as follows:
1. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
2. Web stiffeners.
3. Joist hangers and end closures.
4. Reinforcement plates.
2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ' ASTM A 36, zinc coated by the hot -dip process according to
ASTM A 123.
B. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 5 times the design load, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant coated, self -drilling, self -threading steel drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low -profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a
minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements,
including installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cold -formed metal
framing. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold -formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B. Install cold -formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the
requirements of this Section.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
2. Fasten cold -formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with
fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality
of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold -framed metal framing
manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3
exposed screw threads.
C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track
or tension members.
D. Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until framing is permanently stabilized.
E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold -formed metal framing.
Independently frame both sides of joints.
F. Fasten reinforcement plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard
r" punched openings.
COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
G. Erection Tolerances: Install cold -formed metal framing to a maximum allowable tolerance
variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing
or other finishing materials.
3.3 JOIST INSTALLATION
A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to
supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated or as recommended by the
manufacturer.
B. Install joists bearing on supporting flaming, level, straight, and plumb, adjust to final position,
brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.
1. Install joists over supporting framing with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches.
2. Reinforce ends of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, steel -
stud sections, or as otherwise recommended by manufacturer.
C. Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and as follows:
1. Joist Spacing: As indicated.
D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or
another combination of connected joists where indicated.
E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located
directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or by
other method recommended by joist manufacturer.
F. Install bridging at each end of joists and at intervals indicated. Fasten bridging at each joist
intersection as follows:
1. Bridging: Flat, steel -sheet straps of width and thickness indicated, fastened to bottom
flange of joists.
G. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip
angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and
stable joist -framing assembly.
3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold -formed metal framing with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer to ensure that cold -formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05400
05400 4 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING —
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following metal fabrications:
1. Rough hardware.
2. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
3. Loose steel lintels.
4. Steel enclosure at AC condensing unit (Alternate No. 1).
5. Steel grate screens at North & South windows of Buddy Holly Gallery (Alternate No. 4).
6. Steel tube fence and gates at Courtyard (Alternate No. 5).
7. Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following:
a.. Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other sections.
r 8. Miscellaneous steel trim.
9. Shelf and relieving angles.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural steel framing system components.
2. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Handrails and Railings."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products and
grout.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include
plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation
under other sections.
1. Where installed metal fabrications are indicated to comply with certain design loadings,
include structural computations, material properties, and other information needed for
structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
who was responsible for their preparation.
D. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
i A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar
I, to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units
without causing delay in the Work.
B. ' Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in this section by
same firm that fabricated them.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal
fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded
�., easurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delay of Work.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work,
provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface
blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those
permitted by reference standards for stretcher -leveled sheet.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
C. Steel Bars for Gratings: ASTM A 569 or ASTM A 36.
D. Wire Rod for Grating Cross Bars: ASTM A 510.
E. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows:
1. Cold -Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, grade as indicated below:
a. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required for design loading.
2. Hot -Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
a. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hot -dip galvanized
coating per ASTM A 53.
F. Uncoated Structural Steel Sheet: Product type (manufacturing method), quality, and grade, as
follows:
1. Cold -Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, grade as follows:
a. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading.
G. Uncoated Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, product type (method of manufacture) as follows:
1. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366.
H. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Quality as follows:
1. Commercial Quality: ASTM A 526, G90 coating designation unless otherwise indicated.
I. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:
1. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
3. Type F, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight, type,
and grade required by structural loads.
J. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.
K. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron,
ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot -dip
galvanized per ASTM A 153.
L. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for the metal
alloy to be welded.
2.2 GROUT AND 'ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD- C"621. Provide grout specifically recommended
by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section.
B. Erosion -Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory -prepackaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic _
controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable
anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion
from water exposure without need for protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and is
recommended for exterior use by manufacturer.
05500 - 2 METAL FABRICATIONS _
r
i
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
in the Work include but are not limited to the following:
r 1. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grouts:
a. "Bonsai Construction Grout"; W. R. Bonsal Co.
b. "Diamond -Crete Grout"; Concrete Service Materials Co.
c. "Euco N-S Grout"; Euclid Chemical Co.
d. "Kemset"; Chem -Masters Corp.
e. "Crystex"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
f. "Masterflow 713"; Master Builders.
g. "Sealtight 588 Grout"; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
h. "Sonogrout"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc.
i. "Stoncrete NMI"; Stonhard, Inc.
j. "Five Star Grout"; U. S. Grout Corp.
k. "Vibropruf #I V; Lambert Corp.
2. Erosion -Resistant Anchoring Cement:
a. "Super Por-Rok"; Minwax Construction Products Division.
2.3 FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide zinc -coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select
fasteners for the type, grade, and class required.
B.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A.
C.
Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.
D.
Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.
r
E.
Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111.
`
F.
Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
G.
Drilled -In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VII
(anchors, expansion), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts
complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5.
r--
H.
Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required.
I.
Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.
2.4 PAINT
A.
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free,
universal modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion,
for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and for capability to provide a sound
foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure complying with performance
requirements of FS TT-P-645.
B.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized
r
steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with
4.
DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.
C.
Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 except containing
no asbestos fibers.
l
t
D.
Zinc Chromate Primer: FS TT-P-645.
�.-
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than
that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated
or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of
materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.
r
E
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges.
C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent
buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design
calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime
sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 100° F (55.5° C).
D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form
bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
G. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat -head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.
J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly
and coordinated installation.
K. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
2.6 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other
miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for
anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock
rough hardware items are specified in Division 6 sections.
B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable -iron washers for
heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.
2.7 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings
and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. _
B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
C. Size loose lintels for equal bearing of one inch per foot of clear span but not less than 8 inches
bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated.
05500 - 4 METAL FABRICATIONS
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated or which are not a part
of structural steel framework, as required to complete work.
B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent other
t construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and
steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap
units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into
masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
a. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and provide minimum
t anchor units in the form of steel straps 1'/4 inches wide x '/4 inch x 8 inches long.
G
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in the following locations:
r
1. Exterior locations.
2. Interior locations where indicated.
r '
2.9 NUSCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate
` units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and
smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings,
r and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.
B. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in the following locations:
1. Exterior locations.
2. Interior locations where indicated.
2.10 SHELF AND RELIEVING ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf and relieving angles for unit masonry other than exterior stone veneer from steel
angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide slotted holes to
receive 3/4 inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and not more than 24 inches
o.c.,. unless otherwise indicated.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support shelf/relieving angles from back-up
masonry and concrete. Align expansion joints in angles with indicated expansion joints in cavity
•- wall exterior wythe.
C. Galvanize shelf angles to be installed on exterior concrete framing.
D. Furnish wedge -type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, for attachment of shelf angles to
cast -in -place concrete.
2.11 STEEL ENCLOSURE AT AC CONDENSER (ALTERNATE NO. 1)
A. Fabricate steel enclosure of galvanized steel angle frame, tube steel posts and manufactured
galvanized steel bar grating.
B. Bar Grating: Welded steel gratings complying with NAAMM M 3G 531, "Metal Bar Grating
Manual for Steel, Stainless Steel, and Aluminum Gratings and Stair Treads."
1. Grating Mark W-15-4 (1 x 1/8) STEEL: 1-by-1/8-inch bearing bars at 15/16 inch o.c., and
crossbars at 4 inches o.c.
C. Form all connections of full fillet welds. Cap all hollow tube members with 3/16 inch thick
steel cap with full fillet welds. Galvanize after fabrication.
... METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 5
4:
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2.12 STEEL GRATE SCREEN AT NORTH & SOUTH WINDOWS OF BUDDY HOLLY
GALLERY (ALTERNATE NO. 4)
A. Fabricate steel enclosure of painted steel angle frame and manufactured painted steel bar grating.
B. Bar Grating: Welded steel gratings complying with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating
Manual for Steel, Stainless Steel, and Aluminum Gratings and Stair Treads."
1. Grating Mark W-154 (1 x 1/8) STEEL: 1-by-1/8-inch bearing bars at 15116 inch o.c., and
crossbars at 4 inches o.c.
C. Form all connections of full fillet welds.
2.13 METAL FENCE AND GATES AT COURTYARD (ALTERNATE NO. 5)
A. Deliver fabricated steel fence and gate to jobsite galvanized after fabrication and with factory -
applied rust inhibitive primer compatible with zinc coated metal paint system specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting".
B. Posts: Galvanized steel tubes size as indicated on the drawings.
C. Intermediate Verticals: Galvanized steel tubes sized as indicated on the drawings.
D. Horizontals: Galvanized steel bars full fillet welded to posts and and intermediate verticals.
E. Form all connections of full fillet welds. Cap all hollow tube members with 3/16 inch thick.
steel cap with full fillet welds. Galvanize after fabrication.
2.14 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and
designations of finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.15 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc -coating by the hot -dip process
compliance with the following requirements:
1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made
of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and
heavier.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated .below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental
exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Interiors (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning:
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized
finish or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PAI "Paint Application Specification No. V for
shop painting. —
1. Stripe paint all edges, corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and
directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and
miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry
construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
B. Center nosings on tread widths with noses flush with riser faces and tread surfaces.
05500 - 6 METAL FABRICATIONS
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
C. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect sleeves from water
and concrete entry.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in -place construction; include threaded fasteners
rfor concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other
connectors as required.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of
r miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from
established lines and levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete
masonry or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
i Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized
after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
r E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in convecting welding work, and the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint or
zinc chromate primer.
3.3 SETTING LOOSE PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond -reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.
B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the bearing
members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges
or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with
grout.
1. Use nonmetallic nonshrink grout, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
` A. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
r,,, METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 7
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Hollv Center 8/3/98
B. Touch -Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section
"Painting" of these specifications.
C. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
05500 8 METAL FABRICATIONS
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 05521 - CUSTOM RAILINGS AND GUARDRAILS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
., A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Custom fabricated steel tube guardrails with aluminum handrails.
1.3 DEF*ITIONS
A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing -related terms apply to this Section.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: In engineering handrail and railing systems to withstand structural loads indicated,
determine allowable design working stresses of materials based on the following:
1. Cold -Formed Structural Steel: AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel
r" Structural Members."
B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and install
handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural
r performance based on the following:
s
1. Testing performed according to ASTM E 894 and E 935.
r- C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum
change (range) in ambient temperature in engineering, fabricating, and installing handrails and
railing systems to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components and
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on actual surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
° and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
r 1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
r B. Product data for mechanically connected handrails and railing systems, each kind of fitting,
l grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railing systems including
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.
Include structural engineer's seal on shop drawings relative to structural capabilities of railings
components.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of short sections of railing or flat sheet metal samples
showing available mechanical finishes.
E. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components
indicated below that are of the same thickness and metal indicated for final unit of Work.
Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full
range of variations expected.
l:
CUSTOM RAILINGS AND GUARDRAILS 05521 - 1
i:'
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1. 6-inch- (150-mm-) long sections of each distinctly different linear railing member including
handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.
2. Fittings and brackets.
3. Assembled sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail,
post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections. Sample need
not be full height.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project
names, addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified.
G. Test reports from an independent testing agency evidencing compliance of handrails and railing
systems with ASTM E 985.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and material
from a single manufacturer.
B. Mockups: Prior to installing railings, construct mockups for each form of railing system and
finish required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
1. Place mockups on site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Architect.
2. Place mockups on site in the location indicated. Provide mockups consisting of 2 posts,
top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components that are full height and not less than
24 inches (600 mm) in length.
3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
6. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
a. Accepted mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion
may become part of the completed Work.
1.7 STORAGE
A. Store handrails and railing systems inside a well -ventilated area, away from uncured concrete
and masonry and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and
humidity.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where handrails and railing systems are indicated to fit to other
construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements
before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails as follows:
1. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily by any
means not satisfying structural performance requirements.
2. Mount handrails on gypsum board assemblies only where reinforced to receive anchors and
where the location of concealed reinforcements has been clearly marked for benefit of
Installer.
05521 2 CUSTOM RAILINGS AND GUARDRAILS
r�
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
74
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. General: Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit.
Exposed -to -view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or
other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
B. Steel and Iron: Provide steel and iron in the form indicated, complying with the following
requirements:
r., 1. Steel Tube Railing System:
a. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36.
b. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510.
.. c. Steel Tubing: Cold -formed complying with ASTM A 500, Grade A; or hot -formed
complying with ASTM A 501.
d. Finish: Galvanized to ASTM A 123 and shop primed for field painting specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting".
C. Aluminum Handrail:
1. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5/T52.
2. Manufacturer: Provide #1130 aluminum rail as manufactured by Julius Blum & Company,
Inc.
D. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Malleable iron castings to astm A 47, Grade 32510 galvanized
+^ and shop primed for field painting specified in Division 9 Section "Painting".
2.2 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS
Poo A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as
recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and
�. compatibility in fabricated items.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the type, grade, and
class required to produce connections that are suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loadings..
1. Use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc
coating.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of same basic metal as the
fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible
with materials joined.
l . Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and their attachment to
other work, except where otherwise indicated.
2. Provide Phillips flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cast -in -Place and Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from
corrosion -resistant materials, capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified,
independent testing agency.
1. Cast -in -place anchors.
2. Chemical anchors.
3. Expansion anchors.
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers to comply with applicable requirements of Division 9 Section
"Painting."
CUSTOM RAILINGS .AND GUARDRAILS 05521 3
r
Y
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd
primer, selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish
paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats
despite prolonged exposure, complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664.
C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc -dust, zinc -oxide primer formulated for priming zinc -
coated steel and compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, complying with SSPC-Paint 5.
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized
steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, complying with
DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except
containing no asbestos fibers.
2.4 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
B. Erosion -Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory -packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic
controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable
anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion
from water exposure without need for protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and is
recommended for exterior use by manufacturer.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grouts:
a. B-6 Construction Grout; W.R. Bonsal Co.
b. Diamond -Crete Grout; Concrete Service Materials Co.
c. Supreme; Cormix Construction Chemicals.
d. Sure -grip High Performance Grout; Dayton Superior Corp.
e. Euco N-S Grout; Euclid Chemical Co.
f. Five Star Grout; Five Star Products.
g. Vibropruf #11; Lambert Corp.
h. Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
i. Masterflow 928 and 713; Master Builders Technologies, Inc.
j. Sealtight 588 Grout; W.R. Meadows, Inc.
k. Sonogrout 14; Sonneborn Building Products--ChemRex, Inc.
1. Kemset; The Spray -Cure Company.
2. Erosion -Resistant Anchoring Cement:
a. Bonsal Anchor Cement; W.R. Bonsal Co.
b. Super Por-Rok; Minwax Construction Products Division.
c. Thorogrip; Thoro Systems Products.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for
design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of hollow
members, post spacings, and anchorage, but,not less than those required to support structural
loads.
B. Assemble handrails and railing systems in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections
that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
05521 - 4 CUSTOM RAILINGS AND GUARDRAILS
PW
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
C. Form changes in direction of members as follows:
1. As detailed.
D. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railing systems for connection of members by
welding. For connections made during fabrication, weld corners and seams continuously to
comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no
roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
E. Nonwelded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railing systems by connecting members as
indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where this
represents manufacturer's standard splicing method.
F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets as
detailed, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing system members
to other construction.
G. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices to connect handrails and railing systems to concrete
or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by
handrails and railing systems. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
H. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges.
1. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent -metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
J. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.
K. Provide weepholes, or another means to evacuate entrapped water, in hollow sections of railing
members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources.
L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.
N. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers, of thickness and size indicated or required to support
structural loads of handrails, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes
to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses to produce adequate bearing to
prevent bracket rotation and overstressing substrate.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering prior to shipment.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and they are assembled or installed
to minimize contrast.
D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
handrails and railing systems.
CUSTOM RAILINGS AND GUARDRAILS 05521 - 5
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating
0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Galvanized Finish: Hot -dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized to comply with
applicable standard listed below:
1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing iron and steel products made from rolled, pressed, and forged
steel shapes, castings, plates, bars, and strips.
B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain
as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
C. For galvanized handrails and railing systems, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners,
sleeves, and other ferrous components.
D. For nongalvanized steel handrails and railing systems, provide nongalvanized ferrous metal
fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except provide galvanized anchors where embedded in
exterior masonry and concrete construction.
E. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil,
flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.
F. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface -preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed railings:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning."
G. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of handrails and railing components, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1"
for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or
masonry.
1. Stripe paint all edges, comers, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing
anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete as masonry construction. Coordinate
delivery of such items to Project site.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
handrails and railing systems. Set handrails and railing systems accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. —
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that have been
coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting. --
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 12 feet (2 min in 1 m).
05521 - 6 CUSTOM RAILINGS AND GUARDRAILS
r
r
I
F
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
3. Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake
of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 114 inch in 12 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no
roughness shows after finishing, and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
D. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting
joints. Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by design loadings.
E. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing handrails and railing systems and for properly transferring loads to in -place
construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical joints for permanently connecting railing components.
Locate exposed fasteners in least conspicuous locations. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking
screws with plastic filler, cement colored to match finish of handrails and railing systems.
B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components
by welding. Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent contact, or use fittings designed
for this purpose.
C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not further apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip joint internal sleeve extending 2
inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side; fasten internal sleeve securely to one side; locate
joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post.
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Unless detailed otherwise, anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type
as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1. Weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
B. Install removable railing sections where indicated in slip -fit metal sockets cast into concrete.
Accurately locate sockets to match post spacing.
3.5 ANCHORING RAIL ENDS
A. Unless detailed otherwise, anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with flanges connected
to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with postinstalled anchors and bolts.
B. Anchor rail ends to metal surfaces with rectangular flanges.
1. Weld flanges to rail ends.
3.6 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS
A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with 1'/z-inch
clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.
B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
C. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings'to building construction as follows:
1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.
2. For concrete and solid anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shield and either concealed
hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable.
3. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts with square heads.
I
CUSTOM RAILINGS AND GUARDRAILS 05521 - 7
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
4. For steel -framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or
concealed anchors using self -tapping screws of size and type required to support structural
loads.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material.
B. For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of handrails and railing systems from damage during construction period with
temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings
at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no evidence remains
of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make
required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
.END OF SECTION 05521
05521 - 8 CUSTOM RAILINGS AND GUARDRAILS ._
4
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUAIMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking.
3. Wood furring.
4. Backing panels.
5. Sheathing.
6. Subflooring.
7. Underlayment.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork specially
fabricated for this Project.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
rA.
Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally
not exposed.
1.4 SUBNHTTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
`
Specification Sections.
r
B.
Product data for the following products:
+�
1. Underlayment.
2. Gypsum sheathing.
C.
Material certificates for dimensional lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
o;
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use as well as design values approved by
the Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee.
D.
Wood treatment data as follows including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for
handling, storing, installation, and finishing of treated material:
1. For each type of preservative treated wood product include certification by treating plant
stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative
retained, and compliance with applicable standards.
2. For water -borne treated products include statement that moisture content of treated materials
was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site.
3. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather
and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels;
provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including
polyethylene and similar materials.
1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between
each bundle to provide air circulation.
I
FROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood
Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by
American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSO) Board of Review.
B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with
lumber grades and species include the following:
1. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
2. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory -marked with grade stamp of inspection
agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency,
grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1. For exposed lumber. furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece;
or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by
inspection agency.
D. Nominal and actual sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual
sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. Where actual sizes are
specified they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing
and shipment for sizes of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or less in thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide light framing 2 to 4 inches nominal width
provide the following grade and species:
1. "Standard" grade.
2. Southern Pine graded under SPIB rules.
2.3 BOARDS
A. Exposed Boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the following:
1. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum, "S-DRY" or KD-19.
2. Species and Grade: Southern pine, C Finish per SPIB rules.
3. Where painted finish is indicated, provide "No. 1 Boards" per SPIB rules, or "No. 2
Common Boards & Better" per WWPA rules.
B. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber of 19
percent maximum moisture content (S-DRY or KD-19) and of following species and grade:
1. Southern Pine "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB rules, or any species graded "Construction Boards"
or "No. 3 Common" per WCLIB or WWPA rules.
C. Board Sizes: Provide sizes indicated or, if not indicated (for sheathing, subflooring and similar
uses), provide 1 by 8 inch nominal (19 by 184 mm actual) size boards.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including rooftop
equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds,
stripping, and similar members.
B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes
shown.
06100 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY _
r
i
8/3/9$ Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
C. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood
P P
preservative treatment.
D. Grade: "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB rules.
2.5 CONSTRUCTION PANELS, GENERAL
A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and
Industrial Plywood" for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured under
PS 1 provisions, with APA PRP-108. Plywood containing formaldahyde will not be allowed
for use on this project.
B. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory- marked with APA trademark
evidencing compliance with grade requirements.
2.6 CONCEALED PERFORMANCE -RATED CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. General: Where construction panels are indicated for the following concealed types of
applications, provide APA Performance -Rated Panels complying with requirements designated
under each application for grade designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge
detail (where applicable), and thickness.
B. ' Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: APA-rated Sturd-I-Floor.
1. Exposure Durability Classification: Exterior.
2. Span Rating: As required to suit joist spacing indicated.
3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. ,
4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face.
C. Subflooring: APA-rated sheathing.
1. Exposure Durability Classification: Exterior.
D. Wall Sheathing: APA RATED SHEATHING.
1. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR.
2. Span Rating: As required to suit stud spacing indicated.
E. Roof Sheathing: APA RATED SHEATHING.
1. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR.
2. Foil faced on interior side for reflectivity.
3. Span Rating: As required to suit rafter spacing indicated; minimum thickness of 5/8"
required for nail pull-out to comply with windload requirements.
F. Nailable Substrate Below Clay Tile Roof: APA RATED SHEATHING.
1. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR.
2. Span Rating: As required to suit support spacing indicated; minimum thickness of 5/8"
" required for nail pull-out to comply with windload requirements.
2.7 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING
A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide plywood
panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED EXPOSURE 1, in thickness indicated, or,
if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch.
2.8 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR UNDERLAYMENT
A. General: Over smooth subfloors, provide underlayment not less than 1/4 inch thick. Over board
or uneven subfloors, provide underlayment not less than 11/32 inch thick.
B. Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: For underlayment under 19/32 inch thick,
provide plywood panels with fully sanded face and as follows:
1. Grade: APA B-C Underlayment Exterior.
r-
r ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3
E
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
C. Plywood Underlayment for Ceramic Tile: Provide APA-rated, Underlayment grade, exterior
plywood, 5/8 inch thick, for ceramic tile set in epoxy mortar.
D. Plywood Underlayment for Carpet: For underlayment under 19/32 inch thick, provide plywood
panels with fully sanded face and as follows:
Grade: APA Underlayment Exposure 1.
2.9 FIBROUS -FELTED BOARD
A. Hardboard Underlayment: ANSI/AHA A135.4, Class 4 (Service), Surface S 1 S; with back side
sanded to produce boards with uniform thickness of 0.215 or 0.200 inch, as standard with
manufacturer, plus or minus 0.005 inch.
2.10 FASTENERS
A. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this
article for material and manufacture.
1. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
2. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272.
3. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1.
4. Lag Bolts: ANSI B 18.2.1. (ANSI B 18.2.3.8M)
5. Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 hex
nuts and where indicated, flat washers.
6. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI Type
304 stainless steel.
2.11 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. General: Provide metal framing anchors ,of type, size, metal, and finish indicated that comply
with requirements specified including the following:
1. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products for which manufacturer publishes allowable
design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent
testing laboratory.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Steel sheet zinc -coated by hot -dip process on continuous lines prior to
fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525, G60 (ASTM A 525M, Z180) Coating Designation and
with ASTM A 446 (ASTM A 446M), Grade A (structural quality); ASTM A 526 (ASTM
A 526M) (commercial quality); or ASTM A 527 (ASTM A 527M) (lock -forming quality); as
standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated.
1. Use galvanized steel framing anchors for rough carpentry exposed to weather, in ground
contact, or in area of high relative humidity, and where indicated.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill Sealer Gaskets: Glass fiber resilient insulation fabricated in strip form for use as a sill
sealer; 1 inch (25 (mm)) nominal thickness compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated; in rolls of 50 feet (15
m) or 100 feet (30 m) in length.
2.13 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. Pressure -treat above -ground items with water -borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25
lb/cu. ft. (4.0 kg/cu. m). For interior uses, after treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a
maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items
and the following:
06100 - 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY
I'
C
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
B. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment,
coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after
drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and
that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint
arrangement.
B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut
and fitted.
C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate
location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other
construction.
D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated.
E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select
�.. fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view
or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners
without splitting of wood; predrill as required.
r., 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS
A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for
screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true
line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush
with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry
work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
{ 3.3 WOOD FURRING
A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finished work.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Install 1 by 3 inch nominal (19 by 63 mm actual) furring
at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c., horizontally and vertically. Select furring for freedom from knots
capable of producing bent -over nails and resulting damage to paneling.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Drywall: Install 1 by 2 inch nominal (19 by 38 mm actual) size
furring at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., vertically.
D. Suspended Furring: Install suspended furring members of size and spacing indicated, including
hangers and attachment devices. Level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3000
mm), except 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3000 mm) for thick -coat plaster work.
3.4 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with N.F.P.A. "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Install framing members of size and spacing indicated.
r. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 5
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
C. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with the following: .
1. National Evaluation Report No. NER-272 for pneumatic or mechanical driven staples, P-
Nails, and allied fasteners.
2. Published requirements of manufacturer of metal framing anchors.
3. "Table No. H -Recommended Nailing Schedule" of the Uniform Building Code.
D. Firestop concealed spaces of wood framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at the
ceiling line of the top story. Where firestops are not automatically provided by the framing
system used, use closely fitted wood blocks of 2 inch nominal (38 mm actual) thickness lumber
of the same width as framing members.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form'No. E30, "APA
Design/Construction Guide - Residential & Commercial," for types of construction panels and
applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Sheathing: Nail to framing.
2. Underlayment: Nail to sleepers in concrete slab, if utilized.
3. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail to supports.
END OF SECTION 06100
06100 - 6 ROUGH CARPENTRY
w,
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 06150 - WOOD DECKING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid -wood roof decking.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: 24 inches long, showing the range of variation to be expected in appearance of wood
decking.
B. Wood -Treatment Certificates: Signed by wood treater certifying that treatment processes comply
with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed wood decking
installation similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Decking Standard: Comply with AITC 112, "Standard for Tongue -and -Groove Heavy Timber
Roof Decking."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Schedule delivery of wood decking to avoid extended on -site storage and to avoid delaying the
Work.
B. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with
applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include
the following:
1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
3. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
4. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
C. Grade Stamps: Provide wood decking with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of
inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading
agency, species, grade, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. Apply grade stamp to
surfaces that will not be exposed to view.
D. Preservative Treatment: Pressure treat solid wood decking with waterbome solution to comply
with AWPA C2 for aboveground use.
1. After treatment, redry wood to 19 percent maximum moisture content.
2. Use preservative solution without water repellents or other substances that might interfere
with application of indicated finishes.
3. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium.
WOOD DECKING 06150 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2.2 SOLID WOOD DECKING
A. Decking Species: Alaska cedar.
B. Decking Grade: Commercial Decking.
C. Moisture Content: Provide wood decking with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time
of dressing D. Pattern and Dressing: Tongue and groove, edge vee 1 side, surfaced 2 sides.
E. Fasteners: Provide fastener size and type complying with decking standard for thickness of deck
used.
1. Use hot -dip galvanized nails and spikes.
2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication: Where pressure treatment of decking is indicated, complete cutting, trimming,
surfacing, and sanding before treatment.
B. Fabricate decking in lengths for 2-span continuous lay-up.
C. Predrill decking for lateral spiking to adjacent units to comply with referenced decking standard. ~
D. Seal Coat: After fabricating and surfacing decking, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer. ,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install solid wood decking to comply with referenced decking standard and with end joints
located according to lay-up indicated. Apply joint sealant between decking and supports and
between tongues and grooves at outside wall supports.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged decking if
repairs are not approved by Architect.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Provide temporary waterproof covering to protect exposed decking before applying roofing.
END OF SECTION 06150
06150 - 2 WOOD DECKING
8/3/98 Buddy H611y Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 06200 - EXTERIOR CARPENTRY
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior standing and running trim.
2. Exterior stairs and porch.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not
exposed to view.
2. Division 6 Section "Wood Decking" for roof deck at exterior canopy.
3. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not specified
in this Section.
4. Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming and back priming of finish carpentry.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of factory -fabricated product and process specified, including details
of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, textures, and
colors.
C. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for
handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material:
1. For each type of preservative -treated wood product include certification by treating plant
stating type of preservative solution and process used, net amount of preservative retained,
and compliance with applicable standards.
2. For water -borne -treated products include statement that moisture content of treated materials
was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed finish carpentry
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather
and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for
air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing exterior finish carpentry only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's
recommendations and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be
applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
EXTERIOR CARPENTRY 06200 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," for
lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber
Standards Committee Board of Review.
B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include
the following:
1. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association.
2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SCMA - Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association.
5. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection
agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency,
grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing,and mill.
1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each
piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by
inspection agency.
D. Softwood Plywood: Comply with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and
Industrial Plywood."
2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Comply with AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9
(plywood) and the following for items indicated to receive pressure preservative treatment.
Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved
by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Pressure -impregnate woodwork with preservative chemicals
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed
through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to
distinguish treated material from untreated material.
a. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.
2. Pressure -treat aboveground items with preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu.
ft. (4 kg/cu. m). Kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and
15 percent, respectively.
3. Pressure -treat on -ground, or in -ground, items with preservatives to a minimum retention of
0.60 lb/cu. ft. (4 kg/cu. m). Kiln -dry lumber to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15
percent, respectively.
2.3 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Lumber Trim: Provide finished lumber and moldings complying with the following
requirements including those of the grading agency listed with species:
1. Species: Western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
a. Grade: Clear Heart.
b. Grade: B.
2. Texture: Surfaced (smooth).
3. Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear): Solid lumber stock.
4. Lumber for Painted Finish: Glued -up lumber or solid lumber stock.
06200 - 2 EXTERIOR CARPENTRY
i
8/3/98 Buddy Holy Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
6
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails of the following materials, in sufficient
length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into substrate, unless otherwise
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Hot -dip galvanized steel, ring shank, cement coated.
B. Glue: Phenolic -resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use.
C. Flashing: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"
for flashing materials installed in finish carpentry.
D. Sealants: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials
required for sealing siding work.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and
manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry on relative humidity
conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
1. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in
finished work:
a. Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches.
2. Ease edges of lumber to 1/8-inch radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXANUNATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
r A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation, for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by
manufacturer.
' C. Prime and backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with
requirements for surface preparation and application in Division 9 Section "Painting."
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where required for alignment.
C► 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and level.
Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush
installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.
4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and
r running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate
exposed surfaces of trim and rails.
EXTERIOR CARPENTRY 06200 - 3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
C. Finish according to specified requirements.
D. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of finish carpentry.
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths
of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 min) long, except where
necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and
miter at corners to produce tight -fitting joints with full -surface contact throughout length of joint.
Use scarf joints for end -to -end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness
across joints, if required.
1. Match color and grain pattern across joints.
2. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry
work and fill holes.
3. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to
weather.
3.5 STAIR AND PORCH INSTALLATION
A. . General: Comply with Texas Accessiblity Standards for wood porch, treads and riser surfaces
and installation tolerances, gaps between boards and fastener permanent recess.
B. Treads and Risers: Secure treads and risers by gluing and nailing to rough carriages. House
treads and risers into wall stringers, glue, and wedge into place.
1. Concealed Stringers: Miter risers and stringers. Extend tread over stringers and finish with
radiused edge matching radius of nosing edge of tread.
C. Fastening Methods: Install galvanized cement -coated flat -head countersunk screws recessed 1/8
inch below surface of porch and treads.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual
defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory -applied finishes
to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage
or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 06200
06200 - 4 EXTERIOR CARPENTRY
t.
8/3/98 Buddy holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r -
SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
.. and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
;., A. This Section includes the following:
1. Standing and running trim.
2. Cabinets, laminate clad.
Wk 3. Polished aluminum plastic laminate panel wainscots.
4. Plastic laminate countertops.
5. "Slatwall" paneling.
6. Cabinet hardware.
r, B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for fiuring, blocking, and other carpentry work that
is not exposed to view.
r 2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for doors specified by reference to architectural
woodwork standards.
3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
` A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood finning, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction prior to woodwork
^ installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
„ A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product and process specified in this section and incorporated into
items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
C. Fire -retardant treatment data for material impregnated by pressure process to reduce
combustibility. Include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with
requirements.
D. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
rr— 1. Show details full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging striips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcing specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap
dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork.
E. Samples for initial selection purposes of the following in form of manufacturer's color charts
consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns
available for each type of material indicated.
1. Shop -applied opaque finishes.
2. Plastic laminates.
F. Samples for verification purposes of the following:
1. Laminate -clad panel products, 8 inches, by 10 inches for each type, color, pattern, and
r,, surface finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core.
1
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2. Corner pieces as follows:
a. Cabinet front frame joints between stiles and rail as well as exposed end pieces, 18
inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep.
b. Miter joints for standing trim.
3. Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit of each type and finish.
G. Product certificates signed by woodwork manufacturer certifying that products comply with
specified requirements.
H. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names,
addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced ' in successfully producing architectural
woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to
produce required units without causing delay in the Work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Arrangefor interior architectural woodwork installation by a firm that
can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type
and quality to those required for this project.
C. Quality Standard:
1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural
Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes,
and other requirements.
a. Provide AWI Certification Labels or Certificates of Compliance indicating that
woodwork meets requirements of grades specified.
2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the Quality Standard
as well as additional requirements beyond those of the Quality Standard. Comply with such
selections and requirements in addition to the Quality Standard.
D. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide materials with the following fire -test -response
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM test method indicated
below by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify fire -retardant -treated material with appropriate markings
of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be
concealed from view after installation.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Not exceeding values indicated below, tested per ASTM
E 84 for standard time period (10 minutes).
a. Flame Spread: 75.
b. Smoke Developed: 450.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Not exceeding values indicated below, tested per ASTM
E 84 for 30 minutes with no evidence of significant combustion. In addition, the flame
front shall not progress more than 10ys feet beyond the center line of the burner at any time
during the test.
a. Flame Spread: 25.
b. Smoke Developed: 450.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and
deterioration.
06402 - 2 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
4
V ,
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
' B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could
damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork
must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental
conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet -
work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check
actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing
woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
r PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI woodworking standard
r" for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are
part of woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards, that apply to product
characteristics indicated:
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4
2. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
4. Softwood Plywood: PS 1.
5. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.
B. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with requirements of NPA 9.
C. "Slatwall" Panels: PazPanels with plastic laminate surface and black PVC plastic inserts for
each slot as manufactured by Paz Systems, Inc. (Alternate No. 6).
D. Fiberboard: Medium -density fiberboard made without formaldehyde and complying with ANSI
A208.2.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Medite H by Medite Corp.
E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 made with phenol -formaldehyde resins.
F. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
high pressure decorative laminates which may be incorporated in the work include but are
not limited to the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. Laminart.
c. Nevamar Corp.
d. Pioneer Plastics Corp.
e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div.
f. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.
G. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 3
t
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2.2 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire -retardant chemical formulations
indicated by a pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to
produce products with fire -test -response characteristics specified.
B. Fire -Retardant Chemicals: Use chemical formulations specified that do not bleed through or
otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated
material from untreated material.
1. Low -Hygroscopic Formulation: Interior Type A per AWPA C20.
2. Mill lumber after treatment, within limits set for wood removal that does not affect listed
fire performance characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and
inspecting agency.
3. Kiln -dry material before and after treatment to levels required for untreated material.
4. Discard treated material that does not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking
standard. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, discolored, or otherwise damaged or
defective material.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
in the work include but are not limited to the following:
1. Low -Hygroscopic Formulation (Type A):
a. D-Blaze; J.H. Baxter Co.
b. D-Blaze; Chemical Specialties, Inc.
c. Pyro-guard; Continental Wood Preservers, Inc.
d. Dricon; Hickson Corp.
e. Pyro-guard; Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.
D. Fire -Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from
softwood particles and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to
achieve products identical to those tested for flame spread of 25 or less and for smoke developed
of 25 or less per ASTM E 84 by UL, Warnock Hersey, or other testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less and 45-lb/cu. ft (720-kg/cu. m) density, comply with ANSI
A208.1 for Grade M-2 except that minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi (11
MPa); modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi (2000 MPa); internal bond, 80 psi (550 kPa);
and screw -holding capacity on face and edge, 250 lbf (1100 N) and 225 lbf (1000 N)
respectively.
2. For 13/1, to 1 %< inches thick and 44-lb/cu. ft (705-kg/cu. m) density, comply with ANSI
A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture,
1300 psi (9 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi (1700 MPa); linear expansion, 0.50
percent; and screw -holding capacity on face and edge, 250 lbf (1100 N) and 175 lb (780
N) respectively.
3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by Duraflake
Div.; Willamette Industries, Inc.
E. Fire -Retardant Fiberboard: Medium -density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2,
made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time
of panel manufacture to achieve products identical to those tested for flame spread of 25 or less
and for smoke developed of 200 or less per ASTM E 84 by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Medite FR by Medite Corp.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." .
06402 - 4 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
r
i
a
8/3/98 Buddy _Holly'Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
B. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA
numbers or referenced to this standard.
C. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA
A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.
1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626.
D. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.9.
2.4 CABINET HARDWARE
A. Cabinet Hardware: Provide hardware and accessories indicated.
1. Finishes on exposed hardware: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.18.
a. Satin chromium plated: 626.
2. Concealed hardware: Manufacturer's standard finish, complying with applicable
requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.9.
3. Hinges: Self -closing butt hinges, 3- or 5-knuckle wraparound style to suit conditions, with
minimum of 3 screws into back of door, 2 screws into frame or case.
4. Pulls: Standard wire style, 3-1/2-inch centers by 5/16-inch diameter, with escutcheons.
5. Catches: Heavy duty magnetic, 5-pound pull.
6. Drawer slides: Side -mounted, 75-pound capacity, full extension, with nylon ball -bearing
rollers; positive pull-out stop, self -closing, lift -out feature.
7. Cabinet -mounted adjustable shelf supports: Recess -mounted, nickel -plated steel standards
with horizontal slots, full height of cabinet, with adjustable shelf support clips for each shelf
indicated.
8. Wall -mounted shelf supports: Surface -mounted standards with vertical slots, clear anodized
aluminum, length as indicated, with shelf brackets for each shelf indicated.
B. Hardware Quantities:
1. Hinges: Two per door up to 36 inches high; three per door over 36 inches high.
2. Pulls: One per door, drawer.
3. Catches: 2 per door.
4. Drawer slides, side mounted: Two per drawer.
2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire -retardant -treated softwood lumber, kiln
dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME
B 18.6.1 for applicable requirements.
C. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finishrequired for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105
for applicable requirements.
D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous metal for hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior
walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion
bolt device for drilled -in -place anchors.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality
standard and of the following grade:
1. Grade: Custom.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5
is
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture
content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication
and in installation areas.
C. Sand fire -retardant -treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated
for the following:
1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid -wood (lumber) members and rails: '/16 inch.
E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment
to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Trial fit assemblies at the fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed
after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of
assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved shop drawings before
disassembling for shipment.
F. Shop -cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts
and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-
resistant coating.
2.7 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300..
1. Grade: Custom.
B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide flat members, except
for members with ends exposed in finished work.
C. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare
for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
D. Wood Species: Any closed -grain hardwood.
2.8 LAMINATE CLAD CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate -clad cabinets. —
1. Grade: Custom.
B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
1. Reveal Dimension: 1/8 inch.
C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High pressure decorative laminate complying with
the following requirements:
1. Colors: Refer to Schedule of Finishes and List of Finishes.
2. Horizontal Surfaces Other than Tops: GP-50, 0.050-inch nominal thickness.
3. Vertical Surfaces: GP-50, 0.050-inch nominal thickness.
4. Edges: GP-50, 0.050-inch nominal thickness.
D. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade GP-28.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood lumber, shop finished.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative overlay.
E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
06402 - 6 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
a. Match color, pattern, and finish indicated by reference to laminate manufacturer's
standard designations for this these characteristics.
F. Provide dust panels of/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers
except where located directly under tops.
2.9 POLISHED ALUMINUM PLASTIC LAMINATE PANEL WAINSCOT (OMIT AT
ALTERNATE NO. 9)
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Sections 200 and 500 requirements for paneling.
1. Grade: Premium.
B. High pressure decorative laminate shall comply with the following:
1. Grade: GP-50, 0.050-inch nominal thickness.
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in polished
aluminum finish.
3. Panel Material: 2 ply with MDF core.
r 2.10 COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops.
1. Grade: Custom.
B. Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate complying with the following:
f
1. Grade: GP-50, 0.050-inch nominal thickness.
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and
textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
a. Match color, pattern, and finish indicated by reference to manufacturer's' standard
designations for these characteristics.
3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
4. Core Material: Exterior -grade plywood.
r� 2.11 SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
1 A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500 unless otherwise indicated.
1. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed
surfaces of woodwork, including backs of trim, cabinets and the underside of countertops.
Concealed surfaces of plastic laminate -clad woodwork do not require backpriming when
surfaced with plastic laminate or thermoset decorative overlay.
C. Sealing: Apply manufacturer's standard sealer to protect wood from moisture during shipment
and storage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installing.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified
in Part 2 of this section for type of woodwork involved.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 7
i
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with
concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level (including
tops).
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish
at cuts.
D. Fire -Retardant -Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire- retardant -treated wood to comply
with recommendations of chemical treatment manufacturer including those for adhesives where
are used to install woodwork.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to
grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as
required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are
required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork.
F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 36 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related
members. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth,
and finish same as wood base, if finished.
1. Install standing and running trim with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 inches variation from a
straight line.
G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as
indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than Mt inch in 96 inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and
visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory -applied finishes to _
restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 06402
;
06402 - 8 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
r
t
y
�. 8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center_ City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 07160 - DAMPPROOFING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of each type of dampproofing work is indicated on drawings.
B. Apply cold -applied asphalt emulsion dampproofing specified in this section at the following
locations:
1. On exterior wall back-up materials such as concrete masonry units and gypsum sheathing
behind face brick at locations indicated on the drawings.
C. Apply trowel applied flashing at concrete slab under brick veneer extending 8" up CMU behind
rick veneer backup.
D. Similar work used as exposed finish is excluded by definition and, if required, is specified as
waterproofing, vapor retarder, roofing, flooring, special coating or other appropriate category.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: For each type of work, obtain primary materials from single manufacturer, to greatest
extent possible. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary
materials.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm which has specialized for not less than three years in installation
of types of dampproofing required for project and which is acceptable to manufacturer of
i primary materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
f` A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions, and
recommendations for each dampproofing material required. Include data substantiating that
materials comply with specified requirements.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing work only after substrate construction and penetrating
work have been completed.
B. Weather: Proceed with dampproofing work only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BITUAIINOUS DAMPPROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide bituminous dampproofing materials which comply with the following
requirements, or provide other similar products which are certified in writing by manufacturer
of primary dampproofing materials to be superior in performance for application indicated.
B. Cold -Applied Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing:
1. Asphalt Emulsion: Manufacturer's 'standard asphalt and water emulsion coating,
recommended for below -grade exterior and for above -grade interior applications to either
damp (green) or dry substrates, compounded to penetrate substrate and build to moisture -
resistant coating. .
2. Provide semi-fibrated type semi -mastic asbestos -free emulsion; ASTM D 1227, Type III
or IV, except containing non -asbestos fibrous reinforcement and filler materials.
r
DAMPPROOFING SYSTEM 07160 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
asphalt emulsion products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Celotex Corporation.
2. Certainteed Corporation.
3. Genstar Roofing Products Company. _
4. J. & P. Petroleum Products, Inc.
5. Karnak Chemical Corporation.
6. Koppers Company, Inc.
7.. Lunday Thagard Company, Inc.
8. Manville Building Products Corp. -
9. Sonneborne Bldg. Products/Rexnord Chemical Products Inc.
10. Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc.
11. Tremco Company.
D. Reinforced -Asphalt Sprayed Dampproofing:
1. General: Manufacturer's standard 2-component product, consisting of spray -grade cold
bituminous compound and chopped glass fiber, produced and recommended specifically for
dampproofing and waterproofing applications, intended for mixing at spray nozzle during
installation.
E. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Glass Fiber Mat: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven fabric of continuous filament or jack-
straw filament/yarn pattern of glass fiber, impregnated and bound together with type of
organic/synthetic binder which is compatible with type of bituminous compound indicated
to be reinforced, weighing 1.0 to 1.5 lbs. per 100 sq. ft., 36" wide rolls. _
F. Bituminous Grout: ASTM D 147.
G. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 491, asphalt base, except provide coal -tar base where specifically
recommended by manufacturer of bituminous dampproofing materials.
2.2 TROWEL APPLIED FLASHING MATERIALS _
A. General: Provide single -component modified polyurethane flashing materials which comply with
the following requirements:
1. Single -Component Modified Polyurethane: Single -component, bitumen -modified
polyurethane complying with performance and physical requirements of ASTM C 836 and
with manufacturer's printed physical requirements as certified by a qualified independent
testing agency.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. QSC-525; Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.
b. HLM 5000; ChemRex Inc., Sonneborn Building Products Div.
c. Neogard 7403/7405; Jones -Blair, Neogard Div.
d. Vulkem 201; Mameco International, Inc.
e. Miraseal; Nicolon/Mirafi Group.
f. Elasto-Deck B.T.; Pacific Polymers, Inc.
g. Duramem H-500N-500; Pecora Corporation.
h. Tremproof 60; Tremco.
3. Sealant: One -part nonsag urethane sealant as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
07160 - 2 DAMPPROOFING SYSTEM
is
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center_ City of Lubbock CP #9355
f'
PART 3 - EXECUTION
... 3.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations
of prime materials manufacturer.
B. Install cant strips and similar accessories as shown and as recommended by prime materials
manufacturer even though not shown.
C. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers (if any) as recommended by prime materials
manufacturer, with particular attention at construction joints.
D. Prime substrate as recommended by prime materials manufacturer.
E. Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog drains
and conductors. Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of work, by masking or
otherwise protecting adjoining work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements
are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or
provisions to ensure satisfactory performances of work.
B. Cold -Applied Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing Installation:
1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, and whether or not indicated on drawings, apply
cold -applied asphalt emulsion dampproofing to the following surfaces:
a. Spray, brush, or roll apply cold -applied asphalt emulsion dampproofing to the entire
exterior facing surface of CMU and concrete back-up behind masonry veneer.
b. At all joints in sheathing back-up material and joints between sheathing and other
materials (including flashings) behind masonry veneer, apply two coats of cold -applied
asphalt emulsion dampproofing in 6-inch wide strips. Before first coat thickens, embed
glass fiber mat reinforcement in first coat.
2. Bituminous Cant Strips: Install 2 x 2 (or size appropriate with conditions) cant strip of
bituminous grout and reinforcement at base of vertical dampproofing where it meets
horizontal surface.
3. Extend vertical dampproofing down walls from top of cavity to top of footing, extend over
top of flashing and turn down minimum of 6" over face of flashing. Extend 6" onto
intersecting walls, and flashings but do not extend onto surfaces which will be exposed to
view when project is completed.
4. Apply coat of semi-fibrated, semi -mastic, asphalt emulsion dampproofing materials, by
brushing, rolling or spraying at rate of 5.0 gal. per 100 sq. ft., to produce uniform, dry film
thickness of not less than 30 mils.
3.3 FLASHING APPLICATION
A. Apply flashing according to manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate when recommended by manufacturer and at manufacturer's
recommended rate.
C. Mix materials according to manufacturer's instructions.
D. Apply flashing, according to manufacturer's recommendations, by spray, roller, notched
squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate.
E. Apply one or more coats to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with an
average dry film thickness of 60 mils and a minimum dry film thickness of 50 mils at any point.
F. Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m).
END OF SECTION 07160
�= DAMPPROOFING SYSTEM
k
07160 - 3
�I
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
<) SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Rigid foam insulation board located under new clay tile roofing.
2. Loose -fill building insulation (Alternate No. 10).
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for rigid insulation board installed in masonry cavity
behind brick veneer and split face block veneer.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for thermal insulation and sound
attenuation insulation installed in interior partitions."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of insulation materials are designated
by "r-values" they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-values). Thermal
conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick.
Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two
exposed faces required to cause on BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean
temperatures indicated.
B. Thermal Resistance: Where thermal resistance properties of insulating materials are designated
by "R-values," they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductance (C-value). Thermal
conductance is the rate of heat flow through a material of thickness indicated. Thermal
resistances (R-values) are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two
exposed faces required to cause on BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean
temperatures indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of insulation product specified.
C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing
laboratory evidencing compliance of insulation products with requirements including r-values
(aged values for plastic foam insulations), fire performance characteristics, perm ratings, water
absorption ratings, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
D. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction that evidence compliance of plastic foam insulations with building code in
effect for Project.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated
fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated
below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
Pak 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Single -Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation
from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. --
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation.
B. Glass -fiber loose -fill insulation shall be delivered in bags with coverage rates clearly identified
as indicated in ASTM C 764. —'
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation:
a. Apache Products Co.
b. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
- c. Celotex Corp. (The).
d. GAF Materials Corp.
e. NRG Barriers, Inc.
2. Glass -Fiber Loose Fill Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.'
d. ' Schuller International, Inc.
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths and lengths.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate thermal insulation with core
formed by using HCFCs as blowing agents to comply with ASTM C 1289, classified by facer
type as follows:
1. Facer Type: Type II, felt or glass -fiber mat on both major surfaces.
C. Glass -Fiber Loose -Fill Insulation: Glass fibers processed to comply with ASTM C 764 for Type
1 (for pneumatic application); maximum flame-spread/smoke-developed indices of 5 and 5.
2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended
use.
B. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance
provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening insulation to substrate.
07210 - 2 BUILDING INSULATION
e
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance wtih requirements of
the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other
conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation
of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removal of
projections which might puncture vapor retarders.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If
printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult
manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with
installation of insulation.
B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere
with placement.
C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to
make up total thickness.
3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized
for fastening specified board -type roof insulation to deck type indicated. Install subsequent
layers of insulation in the same manner using fasteners long enough to penetrate supporting
substrate at a rate recommended by insulation manufacturer.
B. Place glass -fiber loose -fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, by machine
blowing to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as
indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively.
1. Place glass -fiber loose -fill insulation to achieve the R value required in Alternate described
in Division 1 Section "Alternates" in accordance with the thickness stated by the
manufacturer in the packaging labels.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where
insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent
construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3
1
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 07320 - ROOFING TILES
l PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
,.4 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
r and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
F
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section specifies the removal of the existing roof tiles, wood nailers, felt underlayment,
inspection and repair of roof deck; installation of new felt underlayment, new wood nailers and
installation of new roofing tiles; and felt underlayment as needed to provide a complete
installation. This Section also specifies providing new roofing tiles and underlayment on new
construction.
B. Related Sections: Sheet copper standing seam roofing is specified in another Division 7 Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Refer to Article "ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS" for
qualified manufacturers.
B. Existing Tile: Inspection of the existing tile is required. A representative sample will be shown
at the Pre -Bid Walk -Through inspection as to what will be acceptable. New tile shall match
existing historic tile remaining.
1.4 SUBNIITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit technical product data, installation instructions and recommendations from
tile manufacturer, including data that materials comply with requirements.
B. Samples: Submit full range of samples for color and texture selection.. After selection, submit
2 full-size roofing tiles for verification of each color/style/texture selected.
C. Maintenance Stock: 2% of each type/color/texture of roofing tile used in the work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened, labeled bundles or containers.
B. Store materials to avoid water damage, and store rolled goods on end. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for job -site storage and protection.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Substrate: Proceed with roofing tile work only after substrate construction and penetrating work
have been completed.
B. Weather Conditions: Proceed with roofing tile work only when weather conditions are in
compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and when substrate is completely dry.
1.7 SPECIFIED PRODUCT WARRANTY
A. Provide roofing tile manufacturer's warranty on installed work, agreeing to pay for repair or
replacement of defective roofing tiles as necessary to eliminate leaks. Period of warranty is 10
years from date of substantial completion.
1.8 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide minimum of 2% of installed new quantity of each type/color/ texture roofing tile used
in the work. Provide in unopened clearly labeled bundles or containers.
ROOFING TILES 07320 - 1
i
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLAY TILES
A. Type of Tiles: Barrel design clay tile units matching existing in size, configuration, texture and
color. The existing tile is slightly varigated in color, slight variations within the same variation
range as the existing tile will be acceptable.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Gladding, McBean & Co.
2. Ludowici-Celadon Co. —
3. M.C.A.-Maruhachi Ceramics
4. Raleigh, Inc.
C. Fastening system includes one-piece specially designed fastener system incorporating wind lock and nail in a single -piece fastener.
D. Underlayment: Provide W.R. Grace & Co. "Ice and Water Shield" or "F-210 Self -Adhesive
Underlayment" manufactured by NEI over nailable substrate specified in Division 6 Section
"Rough Carpentry."
E. Furring Strips: Pressure preservative treated softwood lumber specified in Division 6 Section
"Rough Carpentry."
F. Flashing: Copper complying with ASTM B 370, cold -rolled, 16 oz. (0.0216 inch thick) as
specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal."
G. Asphalt Plastic Cement: Fibrated asphalt cement complying with ASTM D 2822, designed for
trowel application.
H. Hip and Ridge Roofing tiles: Manufacturer's standard factory pre-cut units to match roofing _
tiles.
I. Concealed Screws (Not in contact with "tile screw"): Hot -dip galvanized 11 or 12-gage, sharp -
pointed, conventional roofing screws designed for securing through sheathing into metal deck,
minimum %" diameter head.
J. Mortar Mix: By volume mix one part Portland cement, one part lime, six parts sand, and
approximately 3 lbs. Davis No. 117 Spanish Red color per sack of cement. Use the same brand
of materials throughout. Retempering of mortar is not allowed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine substrate and conditions under which roofing tile work is to be performed and must
notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with shingling work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
A. Clean substrate of any projections and substances detrimental to shingling work. Cover
knotholes or other minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with roofing nails.
B. Coordinate installation of roofing tiles with flashing and other adjoining work to ensure proper
sequencing. Do not install roofing tiles until all vent stacks and other penetrations through
roofing have been installed and are securely fastened against movement.
C. Do not allow any decking to remain exposed overnight without a weatherproof cover. Maintain
an adequate quantity of material for temporary cover for the duration of the removal -installation �-
period.
07320 - 2 ROOFING TILES
t
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
` 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with instructions and recommendations of roofing file manufacturer, except
to extent more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Underlayment: Lace at valleys and cap flash with membrane over and around clips at ridges
PW or any protuberance in roof deck. Apply membrane smooth, straight and flat, and maintained
without puncture except penetrating tile nails.
C. Roofing tiles: Install starter strip of water shedding underlayment; fasten roofing tiles in pattern,
weather exposure and type of "tile nail" per roofing rile as recommended by manufacturer. Use
i horizontal and vertical chalk lines to ensure straight coursing.
1. Where work meets existing roofing tile work, match coursing so that no offsets occur. Lay
tile in a uniform blend of the various colors mingled together to form a uniform consistent
blend.
D. At junctures of eaves, gutter, valley hips and ridges cement tile with cement mortar matching
clay tiles in color. Cement hip and ridge caps solid in place.
E. Flashing and Edge Protection: Install metal flashing and edge protection as indicated, or as
needed for a watertight installation.
END OF SECTION 07320
ROOFING TILES 07320 - 3
zo-
r�
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 07531 - EPDM SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOIZNG
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
i Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
i
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes EPDM single -ply membrane roofing systems.
B. Types of EPDM roofing systems specified in this section utilizing single ply membrane roofing
membranes include the following:
1. Totally adhered system.
C. Roof insulation related to single ply membrane roofing is specified in this section.
D. Similar membranes concealed by a wearing surface are excluded by definition and, if required,
are specified elsewhere in Division 7 as waterproofing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
I Specification Sections.
B. Product Data, installation instructions and general recommendations from manufacturers of single
ply membrane roofing system materials, for types of roofing required. Include data
t' substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
C. Shop Drawings Showing roof configuration, sheet layout, seam locations, colors (as applicable),
details at perimeter, and special conditions.
1. Indicate layout of tapered insulation materials.
r- 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Obtain primary single ply membrane roofing from a single manufacturer.
Provide secondary materials as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
B. Installer: A firm with not less than 3 years of successful experience in installation of roofing
systems similar to those required for this project and which is acceptable to or licensed by
manufacturer of primary roofing materials.
C. Pre -Roofing Conference: Prior to installation of roofing and associated work, meet at project
site, or other mutually agreed location, with Installer, roofing sheet manufacturer, installers of
related work, and other entities concerned with roofing performance, including (where
r applicable) Owner's insurer, test agencies, governing authorities, Architect, and Owner. Record
discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each participant. Provide at least 72 hours
advance notice to participants prior to convening pre -roofing conference.
r-- D. UL Listing: Provide labeled materials which have been tested and listed by UL in "Building
Materials Directory" for application indicated, with "Class A" rated materials/system for roof
slopes shown.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather: Proceed with roofing work when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit
work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and warranty
Ir+ requirements.
B. Substrate Conditions: Do not begin roofing installation until substrates have been inspected and
are determined to be in satisfactory condition.
i
EPDM SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07531 - 1
p
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Roofing Subcontractor shall be responsible for all sheet metal and flashing work in conjunction
with the roofing and is to furnish to the Owner a written Limited Warranty insuring the Owner
for a period of two (2) years from date of final acceptance by the Owner, using Midwest
Roofing Contractors' Association, Inc. form.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit executed copy of single ply membrane manufacturer's
"Limited Service Warranty" agreement including flashing endorsement, signed by an authorized
representative of manufacturer. Provide form that was published with product literature as of _
date of Contract Documents, for the following period of time:
1. 10 years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide products which are recommended " by manufacturers to be fully
compatible with indicated substrates, or provide separation materials as required to eliminate
contact between incompatible materials. Provide single ply membrane roofing system
compatible with existing system.
2.2 EPDM MEMBRANE
A. General: Ethylene propylene diene monomers formed into uniform, single ply, complying with
ASTM D 4637, Type 1.
1. Class SR, Reinforced.
2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.
3. Exposed Face Color: Black.
B. Flashing: 60 mil self -curing EPDM flashing. _
C. Membrane Field Adhesive: Manufacturer's contact adhesive formulated to withstand minimum
60-psf uplift force.
D. Joint Adhesive:
1. For cured EPDM: Manufacturer's standard contact splice adhesive tape.
2. For uncured EPDM: Manufacturer's splice contact adhesive.
E. Provide products by one of the following manufacturers or an acceptable substitute:
1. Carlisle Syntex Systems.
2. Firestone Building Products Co.
3. Manville Building Materials Corp.
4. Mule -Hide Products Co., Inc.
F. Walkway Protection: Manufacturer's standard prefabricated EPDM 30 inch x 30 inch x 0.30
inch thick pavers designed specifically for protection of exposed single ply membrane.
G. Slip Sheet: Type recommended by manufacturer of membrane material for protection of
membrane from incompatible substrates.
2.3 INSULATING MATERIALS ...
A. General: Provide insulating materials to comply with requirements indicated for materials and
compliance with referenced standards; in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths and lengths.
07531 - 2 EPDM SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
e,
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center._ City of Lubbock CP #9355
i�1. Provide tapered boards where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate with taper of 1/4-
inch per foot, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate thermal insulation with core
' formed by using HCFCs as blowing agents to comply with ASTM C 1289, classified by facer
type as follows:
Ij 1. Facer Type: Type III, perlite insulation board, ASTM C 728, 3/4 inch thick on top surface
and a felt or glass -fiber mat on the bottom.
2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with sheet roofing material.
B. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance
provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to
roofing system manufacturer.
C. Mechanical Anchors: Corrosion -resistant type as recommended by insulation manufacturer for
deck type, and complying with fire and insurance uplift rating requirements.
1. Provide system tested an approved for I-90 wind uplift rating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
A. General: Comply with manufacturers' instructions for preparation of substrate to receive single
ply membrane system.
r., 1. Verify that penetrations, expansion joints, and blocking are in place and secured and that
roof drains are properly clamped into position.
B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roof membrane system work.
Remove sharp projections.
C. Install flashings and accessory items as shown, and as recommended by manufacturer even
` though not shown.
D. Prevent compounds from entering and clogging drains and conductors, and from spilling or
i migrating onto surfaces of other work.
3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION
pA. General: Layout insulation board pattern including wood nailers in accordance with roof
f membrane manufacturer's recommendation. Extend insulation full thickness in two layers, or in
multiple layers over entire surface to be insulated, as indicated on drawings cutting and fitting
tightly around obstructions. Form cant strips, crickets, saddles, and tapered areas with additional
material as shown and as required for proper drainage of membrane.
1. Stagger joints in one direction for each course. For multiple layers, stagger joints in both
directions between courses with no gaps to form a complete thermal envelope.
B. Do not install more insulation each day than can be covered with membrane before end of day
and before start of inclement weather.
C. Secure roof insulation to substrate with mechanical anchors of type and spacing indicated; but
in no case provide less than one anchor per 4 square feet of surface area, or less anchorage than
required by FM "Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28".
3.3 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
` A. Install EPDM sheet over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions. Unroll sheet and allow to relax for a minimum of 30 minutes.
B. Start installation of sheet in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.
EPDM SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07531 - 3
6
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
C. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required
by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. All surfaces to receive EPDM shall be solvent cleaned and made free of contaminants and
thoroughly dry before applying primer. Prime all surfaces with primer recommended gy EPDM
manufacturer.
E. The adhesive is contact type. Coat both surfaces to be bonded with adhesive at rate
recommended. Thoroughly coat with no voids and do not attempt to bond surfaces until the
adhesive has dried sufficiently. Check dryness; press fingertips on adhesive surface. If any
adhesive comes off on fingertips, do not attempt bonding; continue drying and testing. Check
entire surface to make sure no wet sheens still appear. Do not allow to overdry, at time of
bonding, adhsive should have a tack to it even though it will not come off on fingers. If
adhesive has dried too much, another application of adhesive will be required.
F. Bond EPDM to EPDM with manufacturer's splicing tape.
G. Mold uncured EPDM flashing to configuration of its substrate avoiding wrinkles, air pockets and
fish mouths. Stitch all edges to assure weathertightness.
H. If manufacturer recommends, roll entire surface of EPDM to assure tight bond.
I. Mechanically or adhesively fasten sheet securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.
J. Apply roofing sheet with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
K. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing
sheet in place with clamping ring.
L. Install adhered EPDM sheet and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing.
3.4 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to
substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.5 PROTECTION OF ROOFING
A. Upon completion of roofing (including associated work), institute appropriate procedures for
surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction period. At end of
construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger
roofing, make a final inspection of roofing and prepare a written report to Owner, describing
nature and extent of deterioration or damage found.
B. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at time of final inspection
to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and in
accordance with requirements of specified warranty.
END OF SECTION 07531
07531 4 EPDM SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
i
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 07610 - SKEET METAL ROOFING
a
PART 1-GENERAL
' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY'
�r A. This Section includes the following:
1. Double lock standing -seam metal roofing.
2. Downspouts, leaders and scuppers.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and decking.
2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing not part of roofing and
other sheet metal work.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Install sheet metal roofing capable of withstanding normal thermal movement, wind loading,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or
infiltration of water into the building interior.
+" 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details for forming, joining, and securing metal roofing, and for pattern
of seams. Show expansion joint details and waterproof connections to adjoining work and at
obstructions and penetrations.
C. Samples for Verification: 12-inch-square specimens of metal roofing material with specified
finishes applied. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample
sets of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Obtain all sheet metal for! roofing, trim, expansion cleats and flashing from a
single manufacturer.
B. Industry Standard: Unless otherwise shown or specified, comply with the Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors National Association's (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown.
C. Wind -Uplift Resistance: Provide roof assemblies that meet requirements of UL 580 for Class 90
wind -uplift resistance.
P-- 1.6 PRE -ROOFING CONFERENCE
A. One week prior to pre -roofing conference a metal roofing mock-up shall be made.
B. Prior to installation of the sheet metal roofing and associated work, meet at the project site with
the Installer, the installer of each component of associated work, the installers of deck substrate
construction to receive roofing work, the installers of other work in and around roofing which
r must follow the roofing work, the Architect and other representatives directly concerned with
performance of the work including (where applicable) product manufacturers and governing
authorities. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to the roofing work, including
but not necessarily limited to the following:
1064
f6a SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1. Review project requirements and review contractor's proposed outline of installation
procedure.
2. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed.
3. Review contractor's work sequence, removing existing roofing, sealing roof against leaks
at the close of each day, protection of insulation and installation of new roof.
4. Review availability of materials, tradesmen, equipment and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
C. Contractor is to notify Architect of any change in approved installation procedure for sheet metal
roofing and related flashing and procedure or lag time between procedural phases. Do not
continue with installation until approved by Architect.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver metal coils, panels, and other roofing materials so they will not be damaged or --
deformed. Package roofing materials for protection against transportation damage.
B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting roofing materials to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight
and ventilated covering. Store metal roof coils and panels to ensure dryness. Do not store coils
or panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Architectural Roofing and Siding, Inc.
2. Modern Metal Systems, Inc.
3. Overly Manufacturing Co.
4. Revere Copper Products, Inc.
5. Vincent Metals.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold -rolled copper sheet, H00 temper, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Standing Seam Roof Sheets Weight: 16 oz./sq. ft.
2. Fascias, Counter Flashings, and Wall Flashings Weight: 20 oz./sq. ft.
3. Continuous Hook Strips or Retainer Strips Weight: Same weight as the component they
retain.
B. Fasteners, nails, rivets, screws and bolts shall be hard copper, brass or bronze.
1. Nails for wood shall be flathead, barbed, wire slating nails, not less than 1 inch 12 gauge.
2. Screws and bolts shall have round heads.
3. Expansion shields shall be lead sleeves.
C. Solder: Comply with ASTM B 32 composition 50% tin and 50% lead.
D. Flux: Rosin, muriatic acid neutralized with zinc or an acceptable substitute.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Slip Sheet: 5-lb. rosin sized building paper.
B. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1, asphalt saturated felt, non -perforated, 15 lb. type.
07610 - 2 SHEET METAL ROOFING
417,
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
2.4 SHOP FABRICATED UNITS
A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop -fabricate work to the greatest extent possible. Comply with
details shown and with applicable SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other
recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather -resistant performance with
expansion provision for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or
deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrate. Comply with material manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal without
excessive oil -canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed
edges folded back to form hems.
�j B. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams with flat -lock and solder.
C. Soldering: All soldering shall be done slowly with well -heated metal to heat sheet thoroughly
and to sweat solder completely through full width of seam. Ample solder shall be used and
seam shall show at least one full inch of evenly flowed solder. A liberal amount of flux shall
be brushed into seams.
D. Separations: Avoid the use of metals that will come into contact with the copper roofing and
flashing that will cause galvanic action. To prevent contact with any existing dissimilar metals,
place a strip of sheet lead between the two metals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
indicated for conditions affecting performance of sheet metal roofing. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Coordinate metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks,
parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL ROOF
A. Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a strip of sheet
lead between dissimilar metals.
B. Install layer of building paper lapping joints 2 inches minimum. Over building paper install slip
sheets lapping joints a minimum of 2 inches. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage, where
possible, to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under metal roofing.
C. Standing seam roofing shall consist of 16 ounce sheets with 1 inch high double lock seams at
15 inches o.c. t 1 inch to accommodate standard metal width.
D. Cleat anchors standing seams shall be fabricated from 16 ounce sheets, 2 inches wide by 3
inches long, spaced not over 12 inches o.c. Secure one end with two nails and fold back over
nail heads. Lock free end of cleat into seam.
E. At eaves, each pan shall be hooked over previously placed 20 ounce cold rolled copper edge
strip. Edge strips shall be formed from sheets not more than 10'-0" long. Ends of each length
shall lap one inch. Edge shall extend up on roof under copper roofing at least 4 inches and be
secured with nails spaced 3 inches apart.
F. Counterflashing shall be fabricated with 20 ounce sheets and shall be placed over pans base
flashing and lap base flashing a minimum of 3 inches. Stagger nail counter flashing with nails
not over 3 inches apart.
G. All soldering shall be done slowly with well heated coppers to heat sheet through slowly and
to sweat copper completely through width of seam.
'r SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 3
i
k
City of Lubbock CP_#9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
H. The following referenced details are from SMACNA's Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Fourth
Edition, 1987.
1. Standing Seam: Detail 1 or 2 on Plate 120.
2. Edge Detail: Detail 4 on Plate 121.
3. Valley Detail: Detail 10 on Plage 122.
4. Transverse Seams: Low Pitch "A" of Detail 3 on Plate 121. —
I. Ridge and Hip Seams: On opposing slopes, stagger standing seams by 4 inches. Starting 6
inches from ridge, fold seam down flat and double lock edges of opposing slope pans together.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B. Should stains or damage to any wall surface result from work under this Section, the —
responsibility of securing a perfectly clean repair of these stains is to be that of the subcontractor
doing the work.
C. Remove all tools, cans, buckets and other foreign material from roof. _
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure metal roofing is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial '—
Completion.
END OF SECTION 07610 --
r-
07610 -.4 SHEET METAL ROOFING
rr
fj
8/3/98 Buddy Holly "Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 07620 - SKEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories:
1. Roof -drainage systems.
2. Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fasciae.
3. Metal flashing.
4. Reglets.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Sections for through -wall flashing and other integral masonry flashings specified
as part of masonry work.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants.
3. Division 7 Roofing Sections for flashing and roofing accessories installed integral with
roofing membrane as part of roofing -system work.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.
B. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with recommendations of FM Loss
Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the following wind zone:
1. Wind Zone 2: Wind pressures of 31 to 45 psf.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specifications Sections.
B. Product data, Flashing, Sheet Metal, and Accessories: Manufacturer's technical product data,
installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and
fabricated product.
C. Samples of the following flashing, sheet metal, and accessory items:
1. 12" long samples of factory -fabricated products exposed as finished work. Provide
complete with specified factory finish.
D. Shop Drawings showing layout, methods of joining, profiles, and anchorage details, including
major counter-flashings, trim/fascia units, gutters, downspouts, scuppers and expansion joint
systems; layouts at 1/4" scale, details at 3" scale. Submit in cooperation with shop drawing
submittal required by Division 7 Section "Built -Up Asphalt Roofing" where the work of this
Section is adjacent to, or installed with roofing work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing
and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with
a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Mockups: Prior to installing sheet metal flashing and trim, construct mockups indicated to
` verify selectionsmade under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as
qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements,
using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
.� SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1
City of Lubbock CP_#9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1. Locate mockups on -site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Architect.
2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
3. Construct mockups for gutters and downspouts.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion
may become part of the completed Work.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of
each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection
of materials and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Zinc -Coated Steel (Where Indicated On the Drawings): Commercial quality with 0.20% copper,
ASTM A 526 except ASTM A 527 for lock -forming, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized
where indicated for painting; 0.0359-inch thick (20 gage) except as otherwise indicated.
B. Copper: ASTM B 370; temper 1100, cold rolled except where temper 060 is required for
forming; not less than 16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick), unless otherwise indicated.
_C____Aluminum:.-Alloy-and-temper-recommended-by_aluminum-producer-and-finisher-for--type-of-=
.and-finish-indicated--and-{with-not-less-than-the-strength-and-durability --of-alloy-and-temper-
designated-below;
1--Anodized-Aluminum-Sheet. ABTM-B 209, 5003_-ff14; withaninimum thicknessvf 0.050
-inch-. -----
D. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167, Type 304, soft annealed, with No. 2D finish, except
provide full temper at gutters and downspouts with No. 4 finish; minimum 0.0187 inch thick,
unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder: 50 - 50 tin/lead solder (ASTM B 32), with rosin flux.
F. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, used with an acid flux of type
recommended by stainless -steel sheet manufacturer; use a noncorrosive rosin flux over tinned
surfaces.
G. Stainless -Steel Welding Rods: Type recommended by stainless -steel sheet manufacturer for type
of metal sheets furnished.
H. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or, other non- corrosive metal as recommended
by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. V
I. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494 or SSPC - Paint 12, solvent type bituminous mastic, `
nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15- mil dry film thickness per coat.
J. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, non- drying, nonmigrating sealant.
K. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of
components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers
L. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part noncorrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by
metal manufacturer for exterior/interior non-moving joints including riveted joints.
M. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather-resistant
seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet.
07620 - 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
r�
i
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
N. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-1b. rosin -sized building paper.
O. Polyethylene Underlayment: Minimum 6-mil carbonated polyethylene film resistant to decay
ri
when tested in accordance with ASTM E154.
P. Reglets: Metal units of type and profile indicated, compatible with flashing indicated,
noncorrosive.
Q. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory
units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed,
noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance.
R. Sealant: One -Part Nonsaf Urethane $e4lant, type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M, A,
and, as applicable to join substrates indicate
,
2.2 FABRICATED UNITS
A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop -fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with
requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Fabricate for waterproof and
weather -resistant performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to
permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form. work to fit substrates.
Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material.
Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil -canning, buckling and tool marks, true to
line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
B. Gutters: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Stainless Steel (All Gutters Except Where Galvanized Steel Is Indicated): 0.0156 inch
thick.
C. Downspouts: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Stainless Steel (All Downspouts Except Where Galvanized Steel Is Indicated): 0.0156 inch
thick.
2. Galvanized Steel (Where Indicated): 0.0217 inch thick.
D. Downspouts Shoes: Provide 60 inch tall units as follows:
1. Type/DS8 by McKinley Iron Works, Inc.
2. Type E by Neenah Foundry Company.
3. Series 4924, Pattern B25D by Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc.
E. Exposed Trim, Gravel Stops, and Fasciae: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft.
2. Stainless Steel (All Downspouts Except Where Copper Is Indicated): 0.0156 inch thick.
F. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft.
G. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
f" A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations, and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Anchor units of
work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units;
conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work
with laps, joints and seams which will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.
l
B. Underlayment: Where stainless steel or aluminum is to be installed directly on cementitious or
wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene
underlayment.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 3
R
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
C. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of urethane sealant where required for waterproof
performance.
D. Install surface mounted reglets to receive counter -flashing in manner and by methods indicated.
E. Install counter -flashing in reglets, either by snap -in seal arrangement, or by wedging in place
for anchorage and filling reglets with urethane sealant, as indicated and depending on degree of
sealant exposure.
F. Install elastic flashing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where required,
provide for movement at joints by forming loops or bellows in width of flashing. Locate cover
or filler strips at joints to facilitate complete drainage of water from flashing. Seam adjacent
flashing sheets with adhesive, seal and anchor edges in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
G. Nail flanges of expansion joint units to curb nailers, at maximum spacing of 6". Fabricate seams
at joints between units with minimum 3" overlap, to form a continuous waterproof system.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances which might cause corrosion of metal or
deterioration of finishes.
B. Protection: Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and
protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction, to ensure that work will be
without damage or deterioration, other than natural weathering, at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 07620
07620 - 4 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of each form and type of joint sealant is indicated on drawings and schedules.
B. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below.
a. Joints between different materials.
b. Perimeter joints between frames of exterior doors and windows and adjacent materials.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Joints where concrete abuts vertical surfaces.
b. Joints between different materials.
c. Other joints as indicated.
3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior partitions.
e. Joints on underside of steel beams and joists.
f. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and
windows.
g. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
h. Other joints as indicated.
4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast -in -place concrete slabs.
b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
r.. c. Other joints as indicated.
e
C. Sealants for glazing purposes are specified in Division-8 Section "Glazing."
D. Sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum drywall partitions to reduce sound transmission
characteristics is specified in Division-9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies."
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES
r., A. Provide joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight
and airtight continuous seals.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
�^ A. Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required, including instructions
for joint preparation and joint sealant application.
B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of
strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to
view.
C. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint
sealant samples in 1/2 inch wide joints formed between two 6 inch long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
- JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1
1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
D. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with
specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
E. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that
materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility
and adhesion with joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results
relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed to obtain adhesion.
F. Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated, evidencing compliance with
requirements specified.
G. Preconstruction field test reports indicating which products and joint preparation methods
demonstrated acceptable adhesion to joint substrates.
H. Joint Sealant Schedule: Submit contractor's joint sealant schedule indicating type of sealant and
installation locations.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a
single manufacturer for each different product required.
B. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of all materials that will
contact or affect joint sealers to joint sealant manufacturers for compatibility and adhesion
testing, as indicated below:
1. Use test methods standard with manufacturer to determine if priming and other specific
joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants
to joint substrates.
2. Submit not less than 3 pieces of ,each type of material, including joint substrates, shims,
joint sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress
of the Work.
4. Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain joint sealant
manufacturer's written recommendations for corrective measures, including use of specially
formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required when joint . sealant manufacturer is able to submit joint
preparation data required above which is acceptable to Architect and is based on previous
testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates
and other materials matching those submitted.
C. Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealant based on tests
conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product formulations within
a 24-month period preceding date of Contractor's submittal of test results to Architect.
l . Test elastomeric sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM
C 920. Include test results for hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion under
cyclic movement (per ASTM C 719), low -temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at
100 percent strain, effects of heat aging, and effects of accelerated weathering.
D. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants
to the following selected building joints as indicated below for further verification of colors
selected from sample submittals and to represent completed work for qualities of appearance,
materials, and application:
1. Joints in field -constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other sections which are _
indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this section.
2. Retain mock-ups during construction as standard for judging completed construction.
07920 - 2 JOINT , SEALANTS
8/3/98 Buddy Ho11y Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
i
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing
about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life,
curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following
conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturers.
2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths
are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants
capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric
sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including
those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.
B. One -Part Nonacid -Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; Uses NT, M, G, A,
and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
C. One -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M,
A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
D. One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and,
r" as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide; intended for
4 sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates and subject to in-service exposure to conditions
of high humidity and temperature extremes. Apply in toilet room, showers and janitor closet.
E. One -Part Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type S, Grade P, Class 25, and complying with
the following requirements for Uses:
1. Uses T, M and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
r F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. One -Part Nonacid -Curing Silicone Sealant:
r a. "Chem -Calk N-Cure 2000"; Bostik Construction Products Div.
1 b. "Silpruf SCS 2000'; General Electric Co.
c. "864"; Pecora Corp.
d. "Spectrum 2"; Tremco, Inc.
e. "Dow Corning 795' ; Dow Coming Corp.
r JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
f. "Rhodorsil 70"; Rhone-Poulenc Inc.
g. "Omniseal"; Sonnebom Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products Inc.
h. "Gesil N SCS 2600"; General Electric Co.
2. One -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT:
a. "Chem -Calk 900"; Bostik Construction Products Div.
b. "Chem -Calk 2639"; Bostik Construction Products Div.
c. "Vulkem 116"; Mameco International, Inc.
d. "Vulkem 921 "; Mameco International, Inc.
e. "Dynatrol I"; Pecora Corp. —
f. "Permapol RC-1 "; Products Research & Chemical Corp.
g. "Sikaflex-la"; Sika Corp.
h. "Sikaflex-15LM"; Sika Corp.
i. "Sonolastic NP 1 "; Sonnebom Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products
Inc.
j. "Dymonic"; Tremco Inc.
3. One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant:
a. "Dow Corning 786"; Dow Corning Corp.
b. "SCS 1702 Sanitary"; General Electric Co.
c. "863 #345 White"; Pecora Corp.
d. "Rhodorsil 6B White"; Rhone-Poulenc Inc.
e. "Proglaze White"; Tremco Corp.
f. "OmniPlus"; Sonnebom Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products Inc.
4. One -Part Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T:
a. "Chem -Calk 950"; Bostik Construction Products Div. --
b. "Vulkem 45' Mameco International, Inc.
c. "NR-201 Urexpan"; Pecora Corp.
d. "Sonolastic SL-V; Sonnebom Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products Inc.
2.3 SOLVENT -RELEASE -CURING JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing, acrylic
teipolymer sealant complying with ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O; except for selected test properties which are
revised as follows:
1. Heat -aged hardness: 40-50.
2. Weight loss: 15 percent.
3. Max. cyclic movement capability: plus or minus 12-1/2 percent.
B. Butyl Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent- release -curing, polymerized
butyl sealant complying with FS TT-S-001657 for Type I and formulated with minimum of 75
percent solids to be nonstaining, paintable, and have a tack -free time of 24 hours. or less.
C. Pigmented Small Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, solvent- release -curing, pigmented,
synthetic rubber sealant formulated for sealing joints 3/16" or smaller in width.
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Acrylic Sealant:
a. "60+Unicrylic"; Pecora Corp. -
b. "PTI 738"; Protective Treatments Inc. _
c. "PTI 767"; Protective Treatments Inc.
d. "Mono"; Tremco Inc.
07920 - 4 JOINT SEALANTS _
r►�
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
2. Butyl Sealant:
a. "Chem -Calk 300"; Bostik Construction Products Div.
b. "BC-158"; Pecora Corp.
c. "PTI 757'; Protective Treatments Inc.
d. "Tremco Butyl Sealant"; Tremco Inc.
3. Pigmented Small Joint Sealant:
a. PTI 200 , Protective Treatments, Inc.
b. "Tremco Seam Sealant"; Tremco Inc.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, one part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, acrylic -
emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, formulated to be paintable and recommended
for exposed applications on interior and on protected exterior locations involving joint movement
of not more than plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. "Chem -Calk 600"; Bostik Construction Products Div.
2. "AC-20"; Pecora Corp.
3. "Sonolac"; Sonneborn Building Products Div.; Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc.
4. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834"; Tremco Inc.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound.
B. Butyl-Polyisobutylene Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, solvent- :release -curing, butyl-
polyisobutylene sealant complying with AAMA 809.2, recommended for concealed joints.
C. Butyl-Polyisobutylene Tape Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, solvent -free, butyl-
polyisobutylene tape sealant with a solids content of 100 percent; complying with AAMA
804.1; formulated to be nonstaining, paintable, and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous
surfaces; packaged on rolls with a release paper on one side; with or without reinforcement
thread to prevent stretch.
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Acoustical Sealants for Concealed Joints:
a. "BA-98"; Pecora Corp.
b. "Tremco Acoustical Sealant'; Tremco Inc.
2. Butyl-Polyisobutylene Sealant:
a. "PTI 404' ; Protective Treatments, Inc.
3. Butyl-Polyisobutylene Tape Sealant:
a. "Extru-Seal Tape"; Pecora Corp.
b. "Shim -Seal Tape Pecora Corp.
c. "PTI 606"; Protective Treatments, Inc.
d. "Tremco 440 Tape"; Tremco Inc.
2.6 COMPRESSION SEALS
r A. Preformed Foam Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, impregnated
open -cell foam sealant manufactured from high -density urethane foam impregnated with a
nondrying, water repellant agent; factory -produced in precompressed sizes and in roll or stick
form to fit joint widths indicated and to develop a watertight and airtight seal when compressed
to the degree specified by manufacturer; and complying with the following requirements:
.. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1. Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew -resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, compatible
with joint substrates and other joint sealants.
2. Impregnating Agent: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Density: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Backing: Coated on one face with release agent serving as bond breaker for primary joint
sealant.
5. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. "Emseal"; Emseal Corp.
b. "Emseal Greyflex"; Emseal Corp.
c. "Polytite R"; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. "Polytite Standard"; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.
e. "Will -Seal 150"; Wil-Seal Construction Foams Div., Illbruck.
f. "Will -Seal 250"; Wil-Seal Construction Foams Div., Illbruck.
g. "York -Seal 100"; York Manufacturing, Inca
h. "York -Seal 200"; York Manufacturing, Inc.
B. Preformed Hollow Neoprene Gasket: Manufacturer's standard preformed polychloroprene
elastomeric joint seal of the open -cell compression type complying with ASTM D 2628 and with
requirements indicated for size, profile and cross -sectional design.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
preformed hollow neoprene gaskets which may be incorporated in the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following:
a. The D.S. Brown Co.
b. Watson -Bowman & Acme Corp.
2.7 JOINT SEALANTS FOR PAVING
A. One -Part Jet -Fuel -Resistant Cold -Applied Urethane Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, pourable,
coal -tar modified urethane formulation complying with performance requirements of FS SS-S-
200, Type H.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. "Vulkem 200"; Mameco International, Inc.
2. "Sonomeric CT V; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products Inc.
2.8 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications _
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips
of flexible, nongassing plastic foam of material indicated below; nonabsorbent to water and gas; ^'
and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance.
1. Either open -cell polyurethane foam or closed -cell polyethylene foam, unless otherwise
indicated, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer, for cold -applied sealants only.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures
down to -26 deg F (-15 deg Q. Provide products with low compression set and of size and
shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum
sealant performance.
D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid,inflexible joint filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-
adhesive tape where applicable.
07920 - 6 JOINT SEALANTS
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion
of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant -substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are
acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful
to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise
have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance.
C. Masking Tape: Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to
surfaces adjacent to joints.
D. Accessory Materials for Sealants: Provide forming, joint fillers, packing and other accessory
materials required for installation of sealants as applicable to installation conditions indicated.
2.10 JOINT FILLERS FOR CONCRETE PAVING
A. Provide Sponge Rubber Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752 for Type
I.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
*" requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint
f " sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturers and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; old joint sealants;
t-" oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellants; water; surface dirt; and frost.
2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint
substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning
operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile; and other nonporous
surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave
residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant
manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas
of joint sealant bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable
to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for
use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.
t:
r JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 7
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
C. Solvent -Release -Curing Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with requirements of ASTM C
804 for use of solvent -release -curing sealants.
D. Latex Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 790 for use of latex
sealants.
E. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for
use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and
conditions indicated.
F. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following
requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and
at position required to produce the cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.,
c. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and
replace with dry material.
2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers, compression seals, or back of
joints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure.
3. Install compressible seals serving as sealant backings to comply with requirements indicated
above for joint fillers.
G. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly
contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint
configuration, and providing uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths
which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
H. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to
eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove
excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 6A in ASTM C 962, unless otherwise
indicated.
I. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after
removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, and to comply with
sealant manufacturer's directions for installation methods, materials, and tools which produce
seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient
temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to
sealant in conformance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations.
J. Installation of Preformed Hollow Neoprene Gaskets: Install gaskets, with minimum number of
end joints, in joint recesses with edges free of spalls and sides straight and parallel, both within —
tolerances specified by gasket manufacturer. Apply manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
joint substrates immediately prior to installing gaskets. For straight sections provide gaskets in
continuous lengths; where changes in direction occur, adhesively splice gasket together to
provide watertight joint. Recess gasket below adjoining joint surfaces by 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which
joints occur.
07920 - 8 JOINT SEALANTS .-
8/3/98 Buddy Holly :Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealant installations with repaired areas
indistinguishable from original work.
3.6 SCHEDULE OF SEALANTS
A. Use One -Part Nonacid -Curing Silicone Sealant at all joints in non -porous exterior materials
except horizontal surfaces where foot or vehicle traffic is expected.
B. Use One -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant at all exterior joints in porous and semi -porous materials
except horizontal surfaces where foot or vehicle traffic is expected and where noted on the
drawings.
C. Use One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant in ceramic tile joints and as sealant/adhesive
used to set plumbing fixtures.
D. Use One -Part Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T in exterior traffic surfaces (pavement, walks,
decks, entry courts, etc.).
E. Use Acrylic Solvent -Release Sealant in exterior joints where indicated and where recommended
by manufacturer.
F. Use Butyl Sealant in exterior joints to receive field applied paint.
G. Use Pigmented Small Joint Sealant within aluminum window, storefront and entrance systems
during field fabrication/installation.
H. Use Acrylic Emulsion Sealant in interior joints in surfaces to receive field applied paint.
I. Use Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints in gypsum drywall partitions and furring which will
not be visible when partitions or furring are completed.
J. Use Buty-Poluisobutylene Sealant in concealed joints and joints to seal air tight exterior walls.
K. Use Buty-Poluisobutylene Tape Sealant in exposed joints in non -porous surfaces to receive field
applied paint.
L. Use Preformed Foamed Sealant in joints indicated.
M. Use Preformed Hollow Neoprene Gasket where indicated.
N. Use One -Part Jet -Fuel -Resistant Silicone Sealant in joints in asphaltic concrete paving.
O. Use Plastic Foam Joint Fillers in joints to control sealant depth as recommended by the
manufacturer of the sealant for the specific joint configuration and application.
P. Use Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers in joints to control sealant depth as recommended by the
manufacturer of the sealant for the specific joint configuration and application.
Q. Use Bond -Breaker Tape in joints as recommended by the sealant manufacturer of the sealant
used.
R. Use Sponge Rubber Joint Filler in joints in concrete paving and pavers to control sealant depth
as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant for the specific joint configuration and
application.
END OF SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 9
F
I
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAIIIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of steel doors and frames is indicated and scheduled on drawings.
1. Drawing and Scheduling Designations: This section applies to doors and frames referenced
on the drawings and schedules using the terms "Hollow Metal Door", "Hollow Metal
Frame", "Steel Door" and "Steel Frame".
B. Finish hardware is specified elsewhere in Division-8.
C. Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry construction is specified in Division 4.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications:
Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100) and as herein specified.
B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire -rated door assemblies are indicated or required,
provide fire -rated door and frame assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 "Standard for Fire
Doors and Windows", and have been tested, listed, and labeled in accordance with ASTM E 152
"Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies" by a nationally recognized independent
testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Temperature Rise Rating: At stairwell enclosures, provide doors which have Temperature
Rise Rating of 450 deg.F (232 deg.C) maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply
with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include
details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of
construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and
details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
r' 1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and
openings as those on contract drawings.
2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job
storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory -finished doors.
B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided
refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise,
remove and replace damaged items as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood
blocking. Avoid use of non -vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity
chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4"
spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
r., STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering steel
doors and flames which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Ceco Corp.
2. Copco Door Co.
3. Curries Mfg., Inc.
4. Deansteel, Mfg., Inc.
5. Fenestra Corp.
6. Mesker Industries, Inc.
7. Pioneer Bldrs. Products Corp./Div. CORE Industries, Inc.
8. Tex -Steel Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled,
complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568.
B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and _
ASTM A 568.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with
ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gage galvanized sheet steel.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot -dip galvanize items to
be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
F. Shop Applied Paint:
1. Primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or baking, suitable as a base for
specified finish paints.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp
or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify
work that cannot be permanently factory -assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly
at project site. Comply with SDI-100 requirements as follows:
1. Interior Doors: SDI-100, Type II, heavy-duty, Style 2, minimum 18-gage faces; and where
indicated Type FG per SDI-106.
2. Exterior Doors: SDI-100, Type III, extra heavy-duty, Style 2, minimum 16-gage faces; and _
where indicated, Type FG per SDI-106.
B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from
only cold -rolled steel.
C. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from
either cold -rolled or hot- rolled steel (at fabricator's option).
D. Fabricate exterior doors, panels and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom
edges of exterior doors as integral part of construction or by addition of minimum 16-gage
inverted steel channels.
E. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for
exposed screws and bolts.
08110 - 2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES _
;
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
F. Thermal -Rated (Insulating) Assemblies:
1. At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors which have been
fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with
ASTM C 236.
a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal -rated assemblies with U factor of 0.24
Btu/(hr x ft sq x °F) or better.
G. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish
hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by
hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications
for door and frame preparation for hardware.
H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
surface -applied finish hardware may be done at project site.
I. Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance
with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and Hardware
Institute.
J. Shop Painting:
1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized
surfaces.
2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before
application of paint.
3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface
ready to receive finish paint.
2.4 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
A. Provide metal doors of types and styles indicated on drawings or schedules.
B. Coordinate steel doors with aluminum curtainwall work as required to assure proper installation.
2.5 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
A. Provide metal frames for doors of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules.
Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 16-gage cold -
rolled furniture steel.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered and welded corners.
2. Form exterior frames of hot -dip galvanized steel.
B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike
jambs of single -swing frames and 2 silencers on heads of double -swing frames.
C. Plaster Guards: Provide 26-gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back
of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation
and to close off interior of openings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install standard sheet doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop
drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified.
F
�.. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For
Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated.
1. Except for frames located at in -place concrete or masonry and at drywall installations, place
frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in
position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall
construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth
and undamaged.
2. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels.
3. At in -place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction _
with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.
4. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Std. No. 80.
5. In metal stud partitions, install 4 wall anchors in hinge jamb, and 3 wall anchors in strike
jamb; two at top hinge level of hinge jamb, and one each at hinge and strike levels. In '-
steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws.
C. Door Installation:
1. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100.
2. Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Prime Coat Touch -Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas
of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer.
B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and --
frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION 08110
08110 4 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
rr'
a
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r,
r SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid core wood -faced doors.
2. Shop priming of doors which are to receive finish specified elsewhere.
3. Prefitting by manufacturer.
4. Premachining by manufacturer.
5. Glazing stops and preparation of flush doors to receive glazing; glazing specified elsewhere.
B. Related Sections:
1. Architectural woodwork: Division 6.
2. Metal door frames: Elsewhere in Division 8.
3. Door hardware: Elsewhere in Division 8.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification
Program; Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI); 1988.
L B. ASTM E 152-81a -- Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1981.
r. C. How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install and Maintain Wood Doors; National Wood Window and
Door Association (NWWDA); undated.
D. NFPA 80 -- Standard for Fire Doors and Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1990.
r 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit detailed technical information for each distinct product specified in this
section.
rB. Shop Drawings: Prepare and submit shop drawings showing all relevant information, including:
1. Dimensions and location of each product specified.
2. Elevation for each distinct door configuration.
3. Construction details for each distinct product type.
► 4. Dimensions and location of blocking for hardware.
5. Fire ratings.
C. Samples: Submit samples for the following:
1. Door construction: Show faces, edges, and core; minimum size 6 inches by 6 inches.
r 2. Glazing stops: For each type and finish, provide minimum 5-inch-long sample.
D. Certification: Submit AWI "Architectural Quality Certification Program" Inspection Service
` Report; on -site inspection is not required.
E. Preinstallation Report: Submit report indicating compliance with examination requirements
specified in "Part 3."
4 .
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Flush Doors: Conform to the following, hereinafter referred to as referenced standard(s):
` l . "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification
Program," including Section 1300, "Architectural Flush Doors," Architectural Woodwork
r Institute (AWI).
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 1
r
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Fire -Rated Doors:
1. Provide doors which are precise duplicates of doors tested as part of fire -rated assemblies
in accordance with requirements of ASTM E 152.
2. Acceptable testing and inspection agencies:
a. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
C. Manufacturer: Member of AWI.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products as required to prevent damage or deterioration. Conform to —
manufacturer's recommendations, requirements of referenced standard, and recommendations of
NWWDA I.S.1, Appendix, "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors."
B. Clearly label each door with opening number where door will be installed. Use removable,
temporary labels or mark on door surface which will be concealed from view after installation.
1. Coordinate door identification with shop drawing designations.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not deliver or install products of this section before building's
design temperature and humidity levels have been achieved and will be maintained at those
levels. —
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer guaranteeing
to correct failures in products which occur within the warranty period indicated below, without
reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owne may have under
the contract documents. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship; stile, rail, or core
show -through (telegraphing); and warp (including bow, cup, and twist). Convection may include —
repair or replacement. Correct failures which occur within the following warranty period(s) after
substantial completion:
1. Solid core wood -faced interior doors: Life of original installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD DOORS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Rated Doors:
1. Construction: Conform to testing agency requirements for indicated fire rating.
2. Fire rated doors with 45-minute or greater rating: Provide the following:
a. Edges: Laminated edge (stile) designed for use with mortise hinges and appropriate
for indicated fire resistance rating.
b. Pairs of fire rated doors: Provide steel astragals and steel meeting edges.
3. Labels: Permanently affixed to hinge stile.
2.2 SOLID CORE WOOD -FACED DOORS —
A. General:
1. Grade: AWI Custom.
B. Solid Core Wood -Faced Door - Non- Fire Rated:
1. Application: All opaque painted wood doors except fire rated doors.
2. Interior door, non -rated.
3. Faces: Veneer for opaque paint.
a. Species: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Finish: Factory sealed and primed for field painting.
5. Construction: 5 ply or 7 ply.
08211 -2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS _
8/3/98
Buddy H611y :Center -. City of Lubbock CP #9355
6. Core: Solid block, with blocks and edges g lued.
7. Prime -painted metal stops.
C.
Solid Core Wood -Faced Door - 20 Minute Rated:
1. Interior door, 20-minute labeled fire door.
2. Faces: Same as specified for previous door type.
3. Core: Solid block, with blocks and edges glued.
D.
Solid Core Wood -Faced Door - 90 Minute Rated:
1. Interior 1'/s hour labeled fire door.
2. Faces: Same as specified for previous door type.
3. Core: Manufacturer's standard core for label requirements.
E.
Manufacturers:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
r
b. Buell Door Company.
c. Doors, Inc.
d. Eggers Industries.
Fenestra Corporation.
e.
L
f. GlenMar Door Manufacturing Company.
g. Graham Manufacturing Corporation.
h. Ipik Door Company, Inc.
i. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
j. Vancouver Door, Inc.
r-
k. VT Industries, Inc.
1. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A.
Stops for Glazing and Louvers:
1. For fire rated doors: Cold -rolled sheet steel of gage approved by testing agency for
installation in fire -rated doors indicated.
r
2. Prime -painted steel: Shop prime to receive finish specified elsewhere.
2.4 FABRICATION
A.
Doors: Fabricate to provide consistent clearances as indicated.
r
t
1. Hinge and lock edges: Provide 1/8-inch standard bevel at edges, unless standard bevel
would not precisely match hardware bevel; provide proper bevel for hardware.
2. Make neat mortises and cutouts for door hardware indicated.
3. Prefitting: Fabricate and trim doors to size at factory to coordinate with frame shop
}
drawings and floor finishes as indicated in the finish schedule.
4. Premachining: Make all mortises and cutouts required for hardware at the factory to
j r
conform to approved hardware schedule, hardware templates, and door frame shop
drawings.
B.
Fixed Panels: Provide panels of same quality, construction, and appearance as adjacent doors,
�.
as follows:
1. Grain and pattern matching: Conform to requirements of referenced standard for matching
of faces between doors and panels.
r.
2. Transom panels: Mark top edge of transom panel to ensure correct orientation in opening.
a. Rabbeted transom panels: Increase thickness of head rail in door and bottom rail in
transom by depth of rabbet.
C.
Openings: Cut, trim, and seal openings in doors at the factory.
-
f
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
D. Doors to Receive Finish Specified Elsewhere: Coordinate shop priming with requirements for
field -applied finishes; prime doors at factory using appropriate products; apply stain, first coat
of paint system, or other sealing product as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect door frames and doors before beginning door installation.
1. Verify that frames are properly installed and aligned and are capable of providing trouble —
free support for doors throughout range of door swing.
2. Do not install damaged or defective doors.
B. Submit written report describing examination that has been performed and any conditions not
conforming to requirements. -`
C. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before installing products of this section. Commencement of
installation indicates acceptance of conditions. _
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware Installation: Elsewhere in Division 8.
B. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures and requirements of —
referenced standard.
1. Fire -rated doors: Comply with NFPA 80 requirements.
C. Prefit Doors: Minimize field fitting to those procedures which are necessary to complete work
unfinished during factory prefitting and to provide trouble free operation.
D. Fitting of Doors: _
1. Accurately align and fit doors for trouble free operation throughout range of door swing.
E. Clearances:
1. Clearance between door edge and head: 1/8 inch.
2. Clearance between door edge and jamb: 1/8 inch.
3. Clearance between door bottom edge and top surface of threshold: 1/4 inch.
4. Clearance between door bottom edge and floor covering surface or finish (where threshold _
is not indicated): 1/8 inch.
5. Clearance between meeting edges at pairs of doors: 1/8 inch.
F. Field -Applied Finishes: Requirements are specified in Division 9. —
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors for proper operation; coordinate with hardware adjustment; replace doors which
cannot be properly adjusted. B. Restore door finishes damaged during installation, in a manner which results in the door showing
no evidence of the restoration. If refinished door cannot be made to match other doors,
refinished door must be replaced at the contractor's expense. —
C. Protect installed work.
END OF SECTION 08211
08211 - 4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
t
C
f
8/3/98 Buddy Holly :Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
6
SECTION 08213 - CUSTOM -FABRICATED STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Custom exterior sliding stile and rail wood doors with plank panels and glass panels and
metal grilles.
2. Custom interior swinging stile and rail wood doors with glass panels.
3. Factory finishing stile and rail wood doors with plank panels.
4. Factory fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide sliding custom stile and rail wood doors capable of complying with
performance requirements indicated based on testing manufacturer's doors representative of those
specified, complying with NWWDA I.S. 3 for test sizes.
B. Structural Performance: Provide sliding custom stile and rail wood doors capable of
withstanding wind loads determined as follows, based on passing NW'WDA I.S. 3, Uniform
Load Structural Test:
l 1. Basic Wind Speed: As indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m)
above grade. Determine wind loads and resulting design pressures applicable to Project
according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures":
Section 6.4.2, "Analytic Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade as indicated
on Drawings.
C. Air Infiltration: Not more than the following leakage at an inward test pressure of 6.24 lbf/sq.
4.
ft. (300 Pa) when tested according to NWWDA I.S. 3, Air Infiltration Test:
1. 0.37 cfin/sq. ft. (6.76 cu. m/h x sq. m) of overall frame area.
D. Operating Force: Not more than 25 lbf to begin motion, nor more than 12.5 lbf to sustain
motion, when tested according to NWWDA I.S. 3, Operating Force Test.
E. Forced -Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Level 10 requirements when tested
according to ASTM F 842.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
�- A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of construction and glazing.
1. Include factory -finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
j' construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and
jj moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
r" 2. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for
faces of factory -finished doors with opaque finish. Show the full range of colors available for
opaque finishes.
E D. Samples for Verification: Corner sections of doors approximately 8 by 10 inches showing
edges, faces, joinery, and material qualities of typical stile, rail, molding, and panel for each
species and door type.
r. CUSTOM -FABRICATED STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08213 - 1
t
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory -finished doors.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by door manufacturers certifying that the products furnished
comply with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain custom stile and rail wood doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard:
1. NWWDA Quality Standard: NWWDA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail
Doors."
a. Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with
NWWDA I.S.6.
2. AWI Quality Standard: AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade of
door, construction, finish, and other requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. _
1. Individually package doors in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic
sheeting.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and
relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas
during the remainder of the construction period to comply with requirements of the referenced '-
quality standard for Project's geographical location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS --
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: _
1. Custom Stile and Rail Doors of Special Design and Construction:
a. Artistic Doors and Windows. _..
b. Dimension Millworks.
C. ENJO Doors and Windows.
d. Karona, Inc.
e. Maiman Company (The).
f. Pinecrest.
g. Woodtech Trading Company.
2.2 CUSTOM STILE AND RAIL DOORS _
A. Construction, General: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Grade of Doors for Opaque Finish: Premium. --
2. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Species indicated in schedule, plain sawed/sliced.
3. Panel Construction for Opaquw Finish: Shaped, edge -glued, clear -lumber panel faces glued
to both sides of a wood -based panel product.
08213 - 2 CUSTOM -FABRICATED STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
i
8/3/98 Buddy Holly .Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
B. Exterior Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Stile and Rail Widths: As indicated.
2. Molding Profile: As indicated.
3. Panel Thickness: As indicated.
4. Panel Design: As indicated.
C.
Interior Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Stile and Rail Widths: As indicated.
2. Molding Profile: As indicated.
3. Panel Thickness: As indicated.
4. Panel Design: As indicated.
D.
Compression -Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for
permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when
sliding door is closed.
E.
1. Weather -Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials.
Sliding -Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven -pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene,
or nylon pile and resin -impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702 as indicated
r1.
in the hardware schedule.
Provide weather stripping with integral, barrier fin or fins of semirigid, polypropylene sheet
or polypropylene -coated material.
2.3 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project site fitting.
B.
Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances
and bevels, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold
is shown or scheduled, provide 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold.
L
l
2. Bevel doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with
DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-
W series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
D. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water repellent to comply with
NWWDA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing.
2.4 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE
A. General:' Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel,
or other corrosion -resistant material compatible with door materials as indicated in the hardware
schedule; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock sliding wood -framed
glass doors. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals.
�- 1. Materials: Provide solid brass or bronze; extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum; solid white
metal with special coating finish; or nonmagnetic stainless steel.
2. Roller Assemblies: Provide movable panels with not less than two sets of adjustable,
r, tandem ball -bearing rollers made of the following:
t a. Roller Material: Manufacturer's standard steel or nylon.
7 CUSTOM -FABRICATED STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08213 - 3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
3. Threshold and Sill Cap/Track: Provide extruded -aluminum threshold and track of
thickness, dimensions, and profile indicated; designed to comply with performance
requirements indicated and to drain to the exterior; with manufacturer's standard —
neutral/natural finish.
4. Door Pulls: As indicated in the hardware schedule.
5. Locks: Provide manufacturer's standard pull and single -point keyless locking device on
each movable panel, lockable from the inside only. Adjust locking device to allow
unobstructed movement of the panel across adjacent panel in the direction indicated.
6. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING —
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory finishing.
B. Finish wood doors at factory. C. Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining effect,
and sheen.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance requirements comparable to AWI
System OP-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Effect: Filled finish.
4. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C. Factory -Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required
at Project site. —
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08213
08213 -4 CUSTOM -FABRICATED STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
r;
41'
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 08335 - DOOR CHAIN GRILLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of door chain grilles is shown on drawings.
1. Provide complete manual operating chain grille assemblies including chain curtains, guides,
hardware, installation accessories and devices required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide each door chain grille as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including
hardware, accessories, mounting and installation components.
1. Provide door chain grille units by one manufacturer for entire project.
B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete
or built into masonry for installation of door chain grille units. Provide setting drawings,
templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery
with other work to avoid delay.
1. See concrete and masonry sections of these specifications for installation of inserts and
anchorage devices.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, roughing -in diagrams, and installation
instructions for each type and size of door chain grille. Include operating instructions and
maintenance data.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and installations which are not
fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturers product data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis of Design: Provide 1000 Series Linksguard Closure as manufactured by R-O-M
r
Corporation or, subject to compliance with requirements, Architect approved equal door chain
grilles.
2.2 FEATURES
A.
Polyester coating on all exposed surfaces.
B.
Aluminum I -Beam Track.
C.
Mount within opening or behind opening.
r
D.
Guides: Aluminum channel.
�.,
E.
Weight: 1.5 pounds per square foot.
F.
Extra -heavy duty chain material.
G.
Chain grille stores at one door jamb when not in use.
H.
Lever handle locking assembly..
�. DOOR CHAIN GRILLE 08335 - 1
R
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install chain grilles assemblies complete with necessary hardware, in accordance with final shop
drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as specified herein.
B. Upon completion of installation including work by other trades, lubricate, test and adjust chain
grille assembly to operate easily, free from warp, twist or distortion.
END OF SECTION 08335
08335 - 2 DOOR CHAIN GRILLE
T
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum entrance and storefront work:
1. Exterior entrance doors.
2. Sidelights.
3. Frames for entrances.
4. Storefront -type framing system.
5. Finish hardware.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and storefront, including entrances specified
to be factory glazed, are included in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
2. Lock cylinders are included in Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware."
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that comply with performance
characteristics specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding stock
assemblies according to test methods indicated.
B. Thermal Movement: Design the aluminum entrance and storefront framing systems to provide
for expansion and contraction of the component materials. Entrance doors shall function
normally over the specified temperature range.
1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal surface temperature range of 180' F
(1000 C) without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural elements,
damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, stress on glass, or other detrimental
effects.
C. Design Requirements: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems that comply with
structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated.
1. Wind Loads: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies capable of withstanding
wind pressures of 30 psf inward and 30 psf outward acting normal to the plane of the wall.
D. Structural Performance: Conduct tests for structural performance in accordance with
ASTM E 330. At the conclusion of the tests there shall be no glass breakage or permanent
damage to fasteners, anchors, hardware or actuating mechanism. Framing members shall have
l no permanent deformation in excess of 0.2 percent of their clear span.
1. Deflection Normal to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressure required to measure deflection
L of framing members normal to the plane of the wall shall be equivalent to the wind load
l specified above. Deflection shall not exceed 1/360 of the clear span, when subjected to
uniform load deflection test.
2. Deflection Parallel to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressures required to measure deflection
parallel to the plane of the wall shall be equal to 1.5 times the wind pressures specified
above. Deflection of any member carrying its full dead load shall not exceed an amount
�- that will reduce glass bite below 75 percent of the design dimension and shall not reduce
the edge clearance between the member and the fixed panel, glass or other fixed member
above to less than 1/8 inch. The clearance between the member and an operable door or
window shall be at least 1/16 inch.
7 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddv Holly Center 8/3/98
E. Air Infiltration: Provide framing systems with an air infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 CFM
per sq. ft. of fixed area (excluding operable door edges) when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 283 at an inward test pressure differential of 1.57 psf.
F. Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no uncontrolled water penetration (excluding
operable door edges) as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331
at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 lbf per sq. ft.
G. Thermal Transmittance: Provide framing systems that have an overall U-value of not more than
0.65 BTU/(hr. x sq. ft. x deg. F) at 15 mph exterior wind velocity when tested in accordance
with AAMA 1503.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
1. Product data for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including:
a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods.
b. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories.
c. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.
2. Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including:
a. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work.
b. Elevations at 1/4-inch scale.
C. Detail sections of typical composite members.
d. Anchors and reinforcement.
e. Hardware mounting heights.
f. Provisions for expansion and contraction.
g. Glazing details.
3. Hardware Schedule: Submit complete hardware schedule organized into sets based on
hardware specified. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure
proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish. Include item name, name of the
manufacturer and complete designations of every item required for each door opening.
4. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit pairs of samples of each specified color and
finish on 12-inch-long sections of extrusions or formed shapes. Where normal color
variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme
limits of color variations.
5. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the right to require additional
samples, that show fabrication techniques and workmanship, and design of hardware and
accessories.
6. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory
showing that aluminum entrance and storefront systems have been tested in accordance with
specified test procedures and comply with performance characteristics indicated.
L5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installations of
aluminum storefront and entrances similar in design and extent to those required for the project
and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems produced by
a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project
and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum entrance and storefront systems from one source
and from a single manufacturer.
08410 - 2 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
I
8/3/98 Buddy Holly .Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
D. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and dimensional requirements of
aluminum entrance and storefront work are based on manufacturer's products as indicated in
folowing article "MANUFACTURERS." Aluminum entrance and storefront by other
manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and
do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality
is on the proposer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original protective
packaging,
B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or concrete.
Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to
permit circulation of air.
1. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or
permanent damage.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show
recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delay of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Provide Tri-Fab 451 System as manufctured by Kawneer Company, Inc., or
equal systems by one of the manufacturers listed below.
1. Alenco, Division of Redman Industries, Inc.
2. Arrowall Co., Inc.
3. Capitol Windows.
4. Kawneer Company, Inc.
5. Marmet Corporation.
6. Peerless Products, Inc.
I E2.2 MATERIALS
.
A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength,
corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum
7 extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars,
rods and wire.
B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with ASTM A 36 for
structural shapes, plates'and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570
for hot rolled sheet and strip.
C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section of these
specifications.
D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other
material warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum
L components, hardware, anchors and other components.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw -anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125
inches thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive
screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed -in splined grommet nuts.
' 2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of hardware. For
application of hardware, use Phillips flat -head machine screws that match the finish of
II member or hardware being fastened.
it r
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead -soft stainless steel, or 0.026-inch-
thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility
with other components.
F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high -strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements;
where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot -dip galvanized
steel complying with ASTM A 123.
G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hot -dip galvanized steel
inserts complying with ASTM A 123.
H. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible
weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC
complying with ASTM D 2287.
I. Sliding Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weatherstripping of wool,
polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing, complying
with AAMA 701.2.
2.3 HARDWARE
A. General: Refer to hardware section of Division-8 for requirements for hardware items other than
those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer.
B. Provide manufacturer's heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for
operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended
by manufacturer for service required, finished to match door.
1. Hinges: Comply with ANSI A156.1, Grade 1; provide 3 for doors 87 inches and less in
height, 4 for doors over 87 inches high.
a. Hinges: 4 1/2" x 4" ball bearing template butts.
2. Concealed Overhead Closers: Provide LCN-5010 with hold -open and delayed action to
meet ADA requirements, complying with ANSI A156.4, grade 2. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for size of closer, depending on door size, exposure to
weather and anticipated frequency of use. Include the following:
a. Selective hold open.
3. Door Stop: Provide floor or wall mounted door stop, as appropriate, with integral rubber
bumper; comply with ANSI A156.16, Grade 1.
4. Door Pulls (Door Nos. 1, 2 & 9): As indicated on the drawings.
5. Panic Hardware (Except Door Nos. 1, 2 & 9): Provide Dor-O-Matic 1490 concealed -rod
type panic device, complying with UL 305, with latch releasing mechanism recessed into
crossrail of doors and actuated by a push panel.
6. Flushbolts: Provide flush bolts complying with ANSI A 156.16, for inactive leaves of pairs
of doors. Provide flushbolts at top and bottom of doors.
7. Thresholds: Provide Kawneer No. 69-139 extruded aluminum threshold of size and design
indicated in mill finish, complete with anchors and clips.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront and entrance framing systems fabricated from
extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include subframes and other
reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush glazing storefront from the exterior
on all sides without projecting stops. Shop -fabricate and preassemble frame components where
possible. Provide storefront frame sections without exposed seams.
1. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive resilient
elastomeric glazing. Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece. Make provisions to drain
moisture accumulation to the exterior.
08410 - 4 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
III
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
F
1. B. Stile -and -Rail Type Entrance Doors and Sidelights: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated
with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie -rods or j-bolts.
1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly
of stiles and rails. Provide snap -on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops
anchored for nonremoval.
a. Wide stile (5-inch nominal width).
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and
thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile requirements
are indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum
dimensions required, to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work.
B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work
to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only
as necessary for shipment and installation.
1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of
metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for
hardware prior to application of finishes.
2. Do not drill and tap for surface -mounted hardware items until time of installation at project
site.
3. Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible.
C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld
spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish.
1. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize
distortion and discoloration on the finished surface.
D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance
requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.
E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a
nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings
containing lead.
11
F.
Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting
members.
G.
Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
H.
Weatherstripping: Provide compression weatherstripping against fixed stops. At other edges,
provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge.
r
2.6 FINISHES
A.
General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual' for recommendations relative to
application and designations of finishes.
B.
Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
C.
Finish aluminum entrance and storefront to match aluminum window components. Refer to
"'w
"Aluminum Windows" Section for finish requirements.
D.
Aluminum Finishes:
1. Finish: Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular
as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural
Class I, electrolytically deposited clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with
AAMA 606.1 or AAMA 608.1.
+i
a. Color: Clear.
t
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 5
City_ of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements
indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of aluminum
entrances and storefronts. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the
installation.
1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation.
B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or
panels. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades
indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
C. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront to comply with the following
tolerances:
1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length or 1/4 inch in any total
length.
2. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment between two identical
members abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/16 inch.
3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements shall not
exceed 1/8 inch.
4. Offset at Corners: The maximum out -of -plane offset of framing at corners shall not exceed
1/32 inch.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials.
1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication.
2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum.
3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with alkali
resistant coating.
4. Paint wood and similar absorptive material in contact with aluminum and exposed to the
elements or otherwise subject to wetting, with two coats of aluminum house paint. Seal
joints between the materials with sealant.
E. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or
gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division
7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets.
F. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other panels
indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for
weathertight closure.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid
damage to coatings.
B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the "Glass and
Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds,
dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces.
08410 - 6 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
e
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Institute protective measures required throughout the. remainder of the construction period to
ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other
than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 7
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
Pon
i SECTION 08520 - FIXED ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior Applications: Fixed window units.
2. Other Work Included: Sealants around perimeters of windows.
B. Related Sections:
a
1. Glazing: Elsewhere in Division 8.
2. Sealants: Division 7.
1.3 REFERENCES
A.
AA DAF-45 -- Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; Aluminum Association; 1980.
B.
AAMA 605.2-92 -- Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers
Association; 1992.
lr
C.
AAMA 803.3-92 -- Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Narrow Joint Seam Sealer;
l
American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1992.
D.
ASTM A 123-89a -- Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 1989.
E.
ASTM B 633-85 -- Standard Specification for Electro-deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel; 1985.
.
F.
ASTM B 766-86 -- Standard Specification for Electro-deposited Coatings of Cadmium; 1986.
1.4 PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS
r"
A.
General: Provide window assemblies which will perform as indicated without failure or
deterioration.
1. Failure includes the following:
r
a. Excessive deflection.
b. Excessive water leakage.
c. Excessive air infiltration.
d. Failure of perimeter sealant.
f
e. Failure of glazing.
2. Wind Loads for Exterior Window Units: Use the following loads as base design value at
C
10 feet above ground level and adjust as specified in 1997 Edition of Uniform Building
Code, City of Lubbock, Exposure Class B.3
a. Inward: 25 psf.
b. Outward: 20 psf.
c. Within 10 feet of any vertical corner: 50 psf outward.
d. Within 10 feet of any parapet: 25 psf inward and outward.
B.
Performance Requirements: As specified in ANSI/AAMA 101, for window type, grade, and
class indicated.
C.
Thermal Performance Required: Thermally broken construction.
FIXED ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 1
i'
4
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.5 SUBNIITTAL5
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and data on fabrication methods, finishing, and
accessories, and installation and handling recommendations.
B. Certification by manufacturer that products comply with requirements of contract documents.
C. Shop Drawings: Show information not conveyed by product data, and the following:
1. Elevations.
2. Cross -sections of all typical members.
3. Anchors.
4. Accessories.
5. Glazing methods.
6. Sealants.
D. Samples for Verification of Finishes: Submit 12-inch long finished samples of extrusions.
E. Warranty.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide windows bearing AAMA Certification labels showing compliance with testing specified.
B. Test Methods - Exterior Units:
1. Test sequence is optional, except that air infiltration .test shall precede water resistance test.
2. Test each size of each type of window.
C. Test Units: Fabricated in accordance with requirements of contract documents, fully assembled,
and glazed.
1. Minimum size: As specified in ANSI/AAMA 101.
D. Air, Water Penetration and Structural Test Methods: As specified in ANSI/AAMA 101.
E. Component Structural Test Methods: As specified in ANSI/AAMA 101.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS`
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements of window openings prior to fabrication.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the contractor, installer, and manufacturer,
guaranteeing to correct failures in window units which occur within 1 year after substantial
completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which owner
may have under the contract documents. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship,
failure to perform as specified, and failure and deterioration of materials and finishes in excess
of that which would be expected under normal weather and wear.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WINDOWS - GENERAL
A. Windows - General: Frame members of extruded aluminum, complete with all accessories, sub -
frames, mullions, sills, and other components indicated or required; complying with
ANSI/AAMA 101.
1. See drawings for sizes, profiles, and arrangement of members.
2. Products which have minor differences will be accepted when, in the architect's judgment,
such differences do' not detract from design concept or performance.
08520 2 FIXED ALUMINUM WINDOWS _
1�
8/3/98
Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
B.
Window Design:
L Where glazing stops are indicated, design for interior reglazing without removal or
r
dismantling of frames.
2. Design so water entering from outside is drained to exterior.
3. Where insulating glass is used, provide positive drainage to eliminate water standing in
glazing channels.
C.
Window Components: Designed or selected by manufacturer for strength required and
compatibility with other materials.
D.
Thermally Broken Construction: Provide frame members with concealed, structural, load -
bearing, low thermal conductance material separating exterior metal members from interior metal
members. Limit bridging thermal gap with fasteners to a minimum.
r
E.
Glazing Stops: Aluminum to match windows, snapped on.
2.2 FIXED WINDOWS
A.
Manufacturers:
t;
1. Provide products complying with requirements of contract documents and made by one of
the following manufacturers:
a. Acorn Building Components, Inc.
b. Alenco Division/Redman Building Products, Inc.
c. EFCO Corporation.
d. Graham Architectural Products Corporation.
e. Kawneer Company, Inc.
f. Milcor Division/Apogee Wausau Group.
g. Modu-Line Windows, Inc.
h. International Window, Inc.
i. TRACO.
j. Wausau Metals Corporation.
T
k. Winco Window Company.
B.
Exterior Fixed Windows:
1. The design is based on Series 2500 Thermal Commercial Fixed Flush -Face 2" Windows
as manufactured by EFCO.
2. Glazing method: Resilient gaskets glazed, inside removable snap -on stops.
3. Grade: F-C60.
4. Finish: Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular
as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural
Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAM.A 607.1.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper appropriate for the use and finish, providing corrosion
resistance, and as required for strength.
1. Finish of All Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Natural anodized finish - NAAMM AA-
M12C22A41, Class I (mechanical finish, non-specular as fabricated; chemical etch, medium
matte; minimum thickness 0.7 mil) clear anodic coating.
B. Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners.
1. Anchor fasteners: Same as anchors.
2. Other fasteners: Noncorrosive and corrosion -resistant material that is compatible with
materials being fastened.
• FDCED ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 3
c
a
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
C. Concealed Anchors (one of the following):
1. Aluminum, or
2. Steel, hot -dip zinc coated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123.
D. Glass: Provide 1 inch thick insulating units and ''/4 inch thick monolithic units specified
elsewhere in Division 8.
E. Sealants: Use only nonhardening, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating materials.
1. For nonworking, metal -to -metal joints within window units: Small joint sealant conforming
to 803.3, as described in AAMA 800.
2. For joints between other window components: Suitable for application.
3. For joints between window units and other building components: Provide products
specified in Division 7.
4. For glazing: Provide products specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing".
F. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive
coating.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Windows Indicated as "Preglazed": Install glazing in factory or shop.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings before installation. Do not install windows if any detrimental conditions
exist.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF WINDOWS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Install windows plumb and level, true and square.
C. Support properly and securely anchor.
D. Separate aluminum from dissimilar metals and coat dissimilar metals that are in drainage
cavities, using one of the materials specified. Stainless steel, zinc, cadmium, and small areas
of white bronze are not considered dissimilar metals.
E. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of
the materials specified. _
F. Install joint sealers between sill members and the surface below, as indicated.
G. Install joint sealers between frame perimeter and adjacent work, as indicated.
H. Coordinate with wall -flashing installation and make flashing attachments to window jambs, head,
and sill as shown on the drawings.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 for installation of joint sealers.
END OF SECTION 08520
e
08520 4 FIXED ALUMINUM WINDOWS
1,
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
t
SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Everything necessary for and incidental to the execution and completion of all finish hardware
work, as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
B. Finish hardware is hereby defined to include all items known commercially as "Builder's
Hardware" as required for "Man Door" (swinging, sliding or i-folding), including special purpose
type doors as may be listed herein.
C. Extent of finish hardware required is indicated on drawings and in schedules.
D. Types of finish hardware required include the following:
1. Hinges
2. Pivots
3. Lock cylinders and keys
4. Lock and latch sets
5. Bolts
6. Exit devices
7. Push/pull units
8. Closers
9. Overhead holders
10. Miscellaneous door control devices
11. Door trim units
12. Protection plates
13. Weatherstripping for exterior doors
14. Sliding door hardware
15. Pocket door hardware
16. Automatic drop seals (door bottoms)
17. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors
18. Thresholds
E. Silencers included integral with hollow metal frames specified with door frames in Division 8.
F. Weatherstripping included integral with hollow metal frames are specified with door frames
elsewhere in Division 8.
G. Thresholds for aluminum entrance doors are specified with entrance doors in Division 8.
H. Expansion joints acting as thresholds are specified in Division 5.
I. Automatic Door Operators are specified elsewhere in Division 8.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Subcontract the furnishing of finish hardware only to a recognized builders hardware supplier
who has been furnishing hardware for a period of not less than five years and who has in his
full time employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant to supervise the execution of this
Section. Consultant shall be available at all reasonable times, during the course of the work, for
project consultaion with the Operator.
B. Fire -Related Openings: Provide hardware for fire -related openings in compliance with NFPA
Standard 80.
r�
1
�, DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -'1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
C. Accessibility for the Physically Handicapped: Special hardware requirements knurling, slow
acting closers, or other barrier free opening requirements shall be provided as indicated by the
hardware schedule.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Builders Hardware Manufactures Association (BHMA): 1301-80 Materials and Finishes.
B. Federal Specifications (FS): FFH-111C-74 Hardware, Builders, Shelf and Miscellaneous.
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80-81 Fire Doors and Windows.
D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A117.1-80 specifications for making buildings
and facilities accessible to and/or usable by handicapped people.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED HARDWARE
A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type
of finish hardware is indicated in the Finish Hardware Data Sheet and Hardware Schedule at the
end of this section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the
following:
1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: One or more manufacturers are listed for each
hardware type required. Provide either the product designated, or, where more than one
manufacturer is listed, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers which
comply with requirements including those specified elsewhere in this section.
2. ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this section or in schedules to define quality
or function are derived from the following standards. Provide products complying with
these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this section.
a. Materials & Finishes: ANSI A156.18 (BHMA 1301)
2.2 PRODUCTS
A. Hinges: Provide hinges with knuckle design of type and grade listed. Hinges shall have holes
in the bottom plug to facilitate pin removal and shall be the product of Hager Hinge Co., The
Stanley Work, or McKinney Mfg. Co.
1. Provide two hinges for doors 60 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each
additional 30 inches of height or fraction thereof.
2. Furnish non -removable pins (NRP) as scheduled.
3.' Unless otherwise specified, hinges for doors through 36 inches wide shall be 4%2 inch x 4'/2
inches. Hinges for doors over 36 inches wide shall be 5 inches x 4'/z inches. Doors wider
than 36 inches may use 4 hinges as scheduled. Hinges for labeled doors shall comply with
the requirements of NFPA 80.
B. Locks:
1. Finish Hardware Manufacturers: Yale, Sargent OB, Schlage 43A, Corbin 863, and Best
conforming to specification requirements are acceptable.
C. Panic Devices (Exit Devices): Panic devices shall be the product of Sargent & Company or Von
Duprin, grade and function as listed.
D. Door Closers:
1. Manufacturers: Sargent, Norton, or LCN conforming to specification requirements.
2. Do not install closers on the outside of exterior doors or on the corridor side of room doors.
Wherever it is necessary to install a closer on the side of a door away from the butts, a
parallel arm closer mounted in conjuction with overhead door stops and sized one size
higher than for a non -parallel arm closer.
08710 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE
Z
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
E. Door Position Switches: Provide door position switches as scheduled and manufactured by R.R.
Brink Locking Systems, Locknetics, or equal.
F. Grip Door Pull and Flush Cup Pull: As scheduled and manufactured by R.R. Brink, Hager, or
+ equal.
G. Door Holders: As scheduled and manufactured by Glynn Johnson.
H. Push Plates, Pull Plates and Kickplates: As scheduled and conforming to specification
requirements manufactured by Rockwood, Hager, Quality Hardware Co., Trimco and Cipco.
I. Door Stops: As scheduled and conforming to specification requirements as manufactured by
Pemko, Hager, Zero, National Guard Products.
J. Silencers: Provide gray live rubber silencers equal to Glynn Johnson GJ64, Hager, or equal for
hollow metal frames. Provide 3 per single leaf door and two per double leaf door.
K. Keying: Supplier shall meet with Operator to review keying requirements and obtain final
instructions.
1. Provide the e systems required master, grand master, great type ( y q grand master).
Nomenclature and layout shall be consistent with DHI "Keying Procdures, Systems and
Nomenclature."
-` 2. Provide 3 change keys for each change code (stamp with key change number), five master
j keys per set, five grand master keys per set.
3. Provide 6 sets of Pin-Head-Torx wrenches to Operator.
•"' L. Fasteners:
1. Provide Pin-Head-Torx screws for all exposed hardware.
2. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when the door is closed.
f 2.3 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent
possible, and except as otherwise indicated. Reduce differences in color and textures as much
as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for
individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items to
the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set (or push-pull units if no latch -lock
sets) for color and texture.
B. Provide finishes which match those established by BHMA. For all exposed metal finishes
provide BHMA 626 Brushed Chrome, or its equivalent, if base metal is not brass or bronze.
C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than
specified for the applicable units of hardware by referenced standards.
D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze and
aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish
designations to indicate "no lacquer".
E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed
in ANSI A156.18 "Materials & Finishes Standard", including coordination with the traditional
U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware
for Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute.
DOOR HARDWARE - 08710 - 3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Install each hardware. item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into
surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage
and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the
Division-9 sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed
on the substrate.
C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate
as necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory -prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl -rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or
function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly
as intended for the application made.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is ,made more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to
acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such
space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of
hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment.
D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware
finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.
E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the acceptance of hardware
in each area, the Installer, accompanied by the representative of the latch and lock manufacturer,
shall return to the project and re -adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of
doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions
to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due
to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current
and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.
3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. List of Manufacturers:
Manufacturer Hardware Item Symbol
Stanley
Corbin/Russwin
Von Duprin
Dorma Door Controls
LCN
Quality Hardware
Nat'l Guard Prods.
Glynn Johnson
Dor-O-Matic
Lawrence Brothers
Soss Invisible Hinges
H.B. Ives
Trimco
Butts
STA
Locks, Latches, Cylinders
CR
Panic Devices, Power Transfers, Keypads, Electric Strikes
VD
Electric Hold Open
DOR
Closers
LCN
Kickplates, Stops, Push, Pulls, Armor/Kick Plates
QUA
Threshold, Seals
NGP
Automatic flushbolts, OH stops, dust strikes, silencers
GJ
Power Door Operators
DOM
Folding hardware, pocket frames
LAW
Concealed hinges
SOS
Pulls, catches
IVE
Coordinators
TRI
08710 - 4 DOOR HARDWARE
8/3/98 Buddy Hollv Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
B. Hardware Sets:
AW-1
Doors 1, 2, 9, 21, 26
Each to have:
2 Cylinders 1000-114 CR
Note: Balance of hardware by door supplier.
HW-2
Door 3
Each to have:
1 Pocket Frame
PF619
LAW
2 Flush Pulls
227B
IVE
1 Edge Pull
230B
IVE
HW-3
Doors 4, 6, 7, 11, 14, 15, 16, 17, 19,
20, 24, 36, 39, 41
Each to have:
3 Butts
CB1900 - 4 1/2 x 4 1/2
STA
1 Lockset
ML2255 - REGIS - CLS - WBS
CR
1 Closer
P4041 - TB
LCN
1 Electric Hold Open (4,6,7)
EM504 - 24V
DOR
1 Stop
431ES
QUA
1 Set Seals
5050 - BN
NGP
HW-4
Doors 8, 10, 28, 30, 32
Each to have:
6 Butts
CB 1900 - 4 1/2 x 4 1/2
STA
2 Flushbolts
1358
QUA
1 Dust Strike
1226
QUA
1 Lockset
ML2267 - REGIS - CLS - WBS
CR
1 Dummy Lever
ML2270 - REGIS - CLS - WBS
CR
2 Overhead Stops
GJ450F - TB
GJ
2 Armor Plates
36 x 2" LDW - 16 gage
QUA
4 Silencers
GJ64
GJ
HW-5
Door 31
Each to have:
10 Butts
CB1961 - NRP - 4 1/2 x 4 1/2
STA
2 Flushbolts
1358
QUA
1 Lockset
ML2267 - REGIS - CLS - WBS
CR
2 Overhead Holders
GJ70M - TB
GJ
1 Threshold
425
NGP
2 Sweeps
102V
NGP
1 Set Seals
5050 - BN
NGP
1 Rain Drip
16A + 4"
NGP
r-a DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 5
f
i
City of Lubbock CP #9355_ Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
HW-6
Door 13
Each to have:
3 Butts
CB1900 - 4 1/2 x 4 1/2
STA
1 Latchset
ML2210 - REGIS - CLS - WBS
CR
1 Stop ,
431ES
QUA
3 Silencers
GJ64
GJ
HW-7
Door 18
Each to have:
3 Butts
CB1900 - 4 1/2 x 4 1/2
STA
1 Lockset
ML2251 - REGIS - CLS - WBS
CR
1 Stop
431ES
QUA
3 Silencers
GJ64
GJ
HW-8
--
Doors 22, 23
Each to have:
3 Butts
CB 1900 - 4 1/2 x 4 1/2
STA —
1 Latchset
ML2210 - REGIS - CLS - WBS
CR
1 Closer
P4041 - TB
LCN
1 Stop
W302T
QUA _
1 Set Seals
5050 - BN
NGP
HW-9
Door 25
..
Each to have:
8 Butts
Reuse existing
1 Panic
EL9927L-F
VD
1 Panic
EL9927EO-F
VD
1 Cylinder
3000-200
CR
1 Key Switch
KS920
VD
1 Cylinder
3000-114
CR —'
1 Auto Opener
SR Swing - 60"
DOM
2 Push Buttons
1204-900
DOM
1 Power Supply
PS872
VD
2 Power Transfers
EPT2
VD
2 Stop
433ES
QUA
1 Set Seals
5050 - BN
NGP
1 Set Astragal
115NA
NGP
HW-10
Doors 29, 37
Each to have:
4 Butts
CB1961 - NRP - 4 1/2 x 4 1/2
STA
1 Exit Device
99EO
VD
1 Alarm Kit
99ALK
VD
1 Cylinder
3000-114 ,
CR
1 Closer
P4041CUSH - TB
LCN
1 Threshold
425
NGP
1 Sweep
102V
NGP
1 Set Seals
5050 - BN
NGP `
1 Rain Drip
16A + 4"
NGP
08710 - 6 DOOR HARDWARE
I
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
HW-11
Doors 33, 34
Each to have:
1 PC Track
301 - 16'
4 Carriers
32LB
12 Side Tracks
1-301
3 Lock Brackets
1L301
2 End Brackets
2-301L/2-301R
2 Door Holders
66
1 Roller
92
1 Hasp
SC930 - 6"
1 Padlock
PL5000
2 PC Sweeps (Sides)
D620A
1 PC Sweep (Top)
D620A
1 PC Sweep (Bottom)
D608A
HW-12
Doors 35
Each to have:
4 Butts
CB 1900 - 4 1 /2 x 4 1 /2
2 Automatic Bolts
FB41P
1 Dust Strike
DP 1
1 Latchset
ML2210 - REGIS - CLS - WBS
2 Closer
P4041 - TB
1 Coordinator
T3092
1 Set Seals
5050 - BN
2 Piece Astragal
115NA
HW-13
Door 40
Each to have:
1 Automatic Opener SR Swing - 60"
2 Push Buttons 1204-900
Note: Reuse existing hardware.
Note: For operation of openers, unlock deadlock and release flushbolts.
HW-14
Door 12
Each to have:
3 Butts
1 Lockset
1 Overhead Holder
1 Threshold
1 Sweep
f
1 Set Seals
1 Rain Drip
0*
HW-15
Doors 38
Each to have:
3 Concealed Hinges
2 Catches
1 Deadlock
t
CB1961 -NRP-4 1/2x41/2
ML2257 - REGIS - CLS - WBS
GJ70M - TB
425
102V
5050 - BN
16A + 4"
Soss 218
327A
DL4013
END OF SECTION 08710
LAW
LAW
LAW
LAW
LAW
LAW
LAW
LAW
CR
NGP
NGP
NGP
STA
GJ
GJ
CR
LCN
TRI
NGP
NGP
DOM
DOM
STA
CR
GJ
NGP
NGP
NGP
NGP
SOS
IVE
CR
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 7
k
C"
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
i"
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of glazing work is indicated on drawings and schedules.
B. Types of work in this section include glazing for:
1. Window units, fixed.
2. Storefront construction.
3. Entrances and other doors.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal
movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss
or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration
of glazing materials and other defects in the work.
1. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature range
of 120 deg.F (67 deg.C) and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass
framing members of 180 deg.F (100 deg.C).
2. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal due to other causes
than breakage which results in intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or
fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coating, if any, resulting from seal failure,
and any other visual evidence of seal failure or performance.
3. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as the development of manufacturing defects
including peeling, cracking or other indications of deterioration in metallic coating due to
normal conditions of use.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and fabricated
1 glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions.
B. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, 12" square samples of each type of glass indicated
except for clear single pane units, and 12" long samples of each color required (except black)
for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two
strips of material representative of adjoining framing system in color.
C. Certificate: Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glazing materials
furnished for project comply with requirements.
1. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's
permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality
control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing
laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: Submit statement from sealant manufacturer indicating
that glazing materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and
interpreting test results relative to material performance, including recommendations for primers
and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.
GLAZING 08800 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association
(FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are
indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glazing terms not otherwise defined in
this section or other referenced standards.
B. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having
jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing
requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category 11 materials.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with
certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either
on spacers or at least one component pane of units with appropriate certification label of
inspecting and testing organization indicated below:
Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
D. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and
performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind
and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source
for each type and class required.
E. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of all glass, gaskets,
glazing accessories, and glass framing members proposed for use in contact with, or proximity
of, glazing sealants, to sealant manufacturer for compatibility and adhesion testing in accordance
with sealant manufacturer's standard testing methods and the following requirements:
1. Submit not less than 9 pieces of each type and finish of glass framing member and of each
type, class, kind, condition, and form (monolithic, insulating units) of glass for adhesion
testing and one sample of substrates (gaskets, setting blocks and spacers) for compatibility
testing.
2. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress
of the Work.
3. Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain sealant
manufacturer's written recommendations for corrective measure, including use of specially
formulated primers.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer's
directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glazing materials
from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to --
sun, and from other causes.
1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, avoid hermetic
seal ruptures by complying with insulating glass fabricator's recommendations for venting
and sealing.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when
joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may
have under the Contract Documents.
08800 2 GLAZING
8/3/98 Buddy Holly -Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
B. Manufacturer's Special Project Warranty on Coated Glass Products: Provide written warranty
signed by manufacturer of coated glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight
allowed project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for those
coated glass units which develop manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are defined as
peeling, cracking or deterioration in metallic coating due to normal conditions and not due to
handling or installation or cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published
instructions.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years after date of substantial
completion.
C. Manufacturer's Special Project Warranty on Insulating Glass: Provide written warranty signed
by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight
allowed project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for those
insulating glass units developing manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are defined as
failure or hermetic seal of air space (beyond that due to glass breakage) as evidenced by
intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal
glass coatings, if any, and other visual indications of seal failure or performance; provided the
manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting and maintaining units have been
complied with during the warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of
substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following:
1. Manufacturers of Clear and Tinted Float Glass:
a.
AFG Industries, Inc.
b.
Ford Glass Division.
c.
Guardian Industries Corp.
d.
LOF Glass, Inc.
e.
PPG Industries, Inc.
f.
Saint-Gobain/Euroglass.
2. Manufacturers of Heat -Treated Glass:
a. AFG Industries, Inc.
b. Cardinal IG.
c. Environmental Glass Products.
d. Falconer Glass Industries.
e.. Ford Glass Division.
f. Guardian Industries Corp.
g. Hordis Brothers, Inc.
h. LOF Glass, Inc.
i. PPG Industries, Inc.
j. Saint-Gobain/Euroglass.
k. Spectrum Glass Prod. Div., H. H. Robertson Co.
1. Viracon, Inc.
3. Manufacturers of Insulating Glass:
a. Advanced Coating Technology.
b. AFG Industries, Inc.
c. Cardinal IG.
d. Environmental Glass Products. .
F.: GLAZING 08800 - 3
i,
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
e. Falconer Glass Industries.
f. Ford Glass Division.
g. Guardian Industries Corp.
h. Hordis Brothers, Inc.
i. Independent Insulating Glass.
j. PPG Industries, Inc.
k. Spectrum Glass Prod. Div., H. H. Robertson Co.
1. Viracon, Inc.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Primary Glass Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1036 requirements, including those indicated
by reference to type, class, quality, and, if applicable, form, finish, mesh and pattern.
B. Heat -Treated Glass Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1048 requirements, including those
indicated by reference to kind, condition, type, quality, class, and, if applicable, form, finish, and
pattern.
C. Clear Float Glass: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select).
D. Tinted Float Glass: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light
reducing), Quality q3 (glazing select).
1. Color: Bronze tint.
E. Tempered Patterned Glass: Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type
II (patterned glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q8 (glazing), Form 3 (patterned), Finish fl
(patterned one side), of pattern indicated below:
1. Pattern' pl (frosted).
F. Uncoated Clear Heat -Treated Float Glass: Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent
glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below.
1. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.
G. Uncoated Tinted Heat -Treated Float Glass: Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent
glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing), Quality q3 (glazing select), with
tint color and performance characteristics for 1/4" thick glass matching those indicated for non -
heat -treated tinted ,float glass; kind as indicated below:
1. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.
2.3 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. General: Organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space
and complying with ASTM E 774 for performance classification indicated.
1. Provide heat -treated panes of kind and at locations indicated or, if not indicated, provide
heat -strengthened panes where recommended by manufacturer for application indicated and
tempered where indicated or where safety glass is designated or required.
a. U-values indicated are expressed in the number of Btu's per hour per sq. ft. per degree
F difference.
2. Performance Classification per ASTM E 774: Class A.
3. Thickness of Each Pane: 1 /4".
4. Air Space Thickness: 1/2".
5. Sealing System: Manufacturer's standard.
6. Spacer Material: Manufacturer's standard metal.
7. Dessicant: Manufacturer's standard; either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both.
8. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.
08800 - 4 GLAZING
r
,., 8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
` 9. Building Exterior Vision Glass:
f'
L
a. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide Sungate Low-E 500 (2) Clear
Insulating Vision glass units as manufactured by PPG with the following performance
features:
1) Coated Surface: 2
2) Shading Coefficient: 0.70
3) Winter U-value: 0.35
4) Summer U-value: 0.38
5) Visual Effect: 74% visible transmittance, 16% outdoor reflectance, clear.
b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Energy Advantage Low-E Insulating
Vision glass units as manufactured by LOF with the following performance features:
1) Coated Surface: 3
2) Shading Coefficient: 0.81
3) Winter U-value: 0.35
4) Summer U-value: 0.38
5) Visual Effect: 73% transmittance, 17% outdoor reflectance, clear.
2.4 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PREFORMED GLAZING TAPES
A. General: Provide products of type indicated and complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other
materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of
insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and
service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection
of glazing sealants and tapes which have performance characteristics suitable for
applications indicated and conditions at time of installation.
3. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing,
elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920
requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses.
4. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as
selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
B. One -Part Non -Acid -Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Type S; Grade NS, Class 25; Uses NT,
G, A, and, as applicable to uses indicated, O; and complying with the following requirements
for modulus and additional joint movement capability.
1. Low Modulus: Tensile strength of 45 psi or less at 100 percent elongation when tested per
ASTM D 412 after 14 days at 77 deg.F (20 deg.C) and 50 percent relative humidity.
2. Additional capability, when tested per ASTM C 719 for adhesion and cohesion under
maximum cyclic movement, to withstand the following percentage increase and decrease
of joint width, as measured at time of application, and remain in compliance with other
requirements of ASTM C 920.
a. 40 percent.
C. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard solvent -free
butyl-polyisobutylene formulation with a solids content of 100 percent; complying with AAMA
A 804.1; in extruded tape form; non -staining and non -migrating in contact with nonporous
surfaces; packaged on rolls with a release paper on one side; with or without continuous spacer
rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape and glass for application indicated.
D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, glazing sealants which may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
GLAZING 08800 5
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1. One -Part Non -Acid Curing Low -Modulus Silicone Glazing Sealant:
a. "Chem -Calk 1000"; Bostik Construction Products Div.
b. "Dow Corning 790' ; Dow Corning Corp.
c. "864"; Pecora Corp.
d. "Omniseal"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products Inc.
e. "Spectrum V; Tremco, Inc.
2. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape Without Spacer Rod:
a. "Chem -Tape 40"; Bostik Construction Products Div.
b. "Extru-Seal"; Pecora Corp.
c. "PTI 303" Glazing Tape; Protective Treatments, Inc.
d. "Tremco 440 Tape"; Tremco Inc.
3. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape With Spacer Rod:
a. "Chem -Tape 60"; Bostik Construction Products Div.
b. "Shim -Seal"; Pecora Corp.
c. "PTI 303" Shim Tape; Protective Treatments, Inc.
d. "Pre -shimmed Tremco 440 Tape"; Tremco Inc.
2.5 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated
below, complying with ASTM C 864, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight
seal:
1 Neoprene.
2. EPDM.
3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.
4. Any material indicated above.
B. Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gaskets: Extruded or molded . closed cell, integral -skinned
neoprene of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal; complying with ASTM
C 509, Type II; black.
C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Manufacturers of Preformed Gaskets:
a. D. S. Brown Co.
b. Maloney Precision Products Co.
c. Tremco,
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted
in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing
sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.
D. Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required for
compatibility with glazing sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass and
sealant manufacturers for application indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing
sealant, of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side -walking) of glass.
F. Compressible Filler Rods: Closed -cell or waterproof -jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or
plastic foam, flexible and resilient, with 5-10 psi compression strength for 25 percent deflection.
08800 - 6 GLAZING
r-
8/3/98 Buddy: Holly, Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
PART 3 -EXECUTION
,.. 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with manufacturing and
installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners; for presence and
functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum required face or edge clearances; and for
effective sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazier's written report listing conditions detrimental to
performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal
surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of
sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are
indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards.
B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for necessary bite on
glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation.
C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in rotating
glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use
suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar.
Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge which would occur in vicinity of
setting blocks so that these are located at top of opening. Remove from project and dispose of
glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass
and impairs performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
proconstruction sealant -substrate testing.
3.4 GLAZING
A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width from each
corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6" from corner, unless otherwise required.
Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use.
B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances,
for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except where gaskets or glazing
tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers
on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly
less than final compressed thickness of tape.
C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except where
otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer.
D. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics.
E. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by sealant and
glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems and from
adhering to joints back surface as well as to control depth of sealant for optimum performance,
unless otherwise indicated.
F. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
r GLAZING 08800 - 7
I:
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98 .
G. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass. Install
pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and
moisture pockets.
H. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket
on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when
installation is subjected to movement.
I. Miter cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended by gasket
manufacturer to prevent pull away at corners; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant
recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed streamers
attached to framing and held away from .glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass.
Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build-up of dirt,
scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of residue,
remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways
during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended
to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by method
recommended by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08800
08800 - 8 GLAZING
r
2
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
SECTION 08830 - MIRRORED GLASS
r
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Float glass mirrors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified including description of materials and process
used to produce mirrored glass, including source of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer,
and quality control provisions.
C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of mirrored glass certifying That their products and
edge sealers comply with specified requirements.
D. Mirror mastic glass coating compatibility test reports from organic protective coating
manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic has been tested for compatibility and adhesion with
organic protective coating. Include organic coating manufacturers' interpretation of test results
relative to performance and recommendations for use of mastics with organic protective coating.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association
(FGMA) "Glazing Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to
this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section
or referenced standards.
B. Mirror Manufacturers' Document: Comply with recommendations of National Association of
Mirror Manufacturers (NAMM) in its publication "MIRRORS, Handle with Extreme Care, Tips
for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."
C. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide products obtained from one source for each type of
mirror indicated.
D. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Glass Coating Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products
to manufacturer of protective organic coating for testing by coating manufacturer's standard test
method to determine compatibility of adhesive with mirrored glass coating.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrored glass;
avoid deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied
coatings. Store indoors, protected from moisture including condensation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with mirrored glass installation until ambient
conditions of temperature and humidity will- be continuously maintained at values near those
indicated for final occupancy.
MIRRORED GLASS 08830 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Binswanger Mirror Products
2. Carolina Mirror Corp.
3. Falconer Glass Industries, Inc.
4. Lenoir Mirror Co.
5. Texas Mirror, Inc.
6. Virginia Mirror Co., Inc.
2.2 GLASS FOR MIRROR PRODUCTION
A. Primary Glass: Float glass complying with ASTM C 1036 requirements for Type I (transparent,
flat) and for class and quality indicated below:
1. Clear Float Glass: Quality q2 (mirror), Class 1 (clear).
2.3 MIRRORED GLASS PRODUCTION AND FABRICATION
A. Glass Coating: Coat second surface of glass with successive layers of chemically deposited _
silver, electrically or chemically deposited copper, and manufacturer's standard protective
organic coating to produce coating system that complies with FS DD-M-00411, except with salt -
spray test period extended to 300 hours and undercutting, discolorations, blackening, and silver
impairment at mirror edges not greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
1. Copper. Substitute: In place of electrically or chemically deposited copper layer provide
material equivalent in performance to copper.
B. Mirror Sizes: After application of glass coating, cut mirrored glass to final sizes and in the
following nominal glass thickness:
1. Thickness: 6 mm.
C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Provide forms of edge treatment indicated below, with edges sealed
after treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating:
1. Flat polished edge.
2. Perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70 - 90 Shore A hardness.
B. Edge Sealer: A coating that has proven to be compatible with glass coating and approved by
mirrored glass manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirror edges.
C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrors by spot
application, certified as compatible with glass coating by organic protective coating manufacturer
and approved by mirror manufacturer:
D. Mirror Hardware: Extruded aluminum mirror hardware, of size and profile indicated, in
manufacturer's standard finish, complying with description below:
1. Clear polished finish.
E. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in
finished color and texture.
F. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for installation of mirror hardware. Provide
toothed or lead -shield expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Provide galvanized
or cadmium -coated anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and
where indicated.
08830 -2 MIRRORED GLASS
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
` PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING
A. General: Install mirrors to comply with printed directions of mirror manufacturer, and with
referenced FGMA standard and NAMM document. Mount mirrors in place to avoid distorting
reflected images and provide space for air circulation between back of mirror and face of
mounting surface.
B. Mastic Spot Installation System: Install mirrors with mastic as follows:
1. Identify and examine surfaces over which mirror is to be mounted. Comply with
manufacturer's printed installation directions for preparation of mounting surfaces including
coating surfaces with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.
2. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved by manufacturers of mirror and
backing material
3. Apply mastic in spots to comply with mastic manufacturer's printed directions for coverage
and to allow air circulation between back of mirror and face of mounting surface.
4. After mastic is applied, align mirror and press into place while maintaining a minimum air
space of 3/16 inch (5 mm) between back of mirror and mounting surface.
5. For wall -mounted mirrors install permanent means of support at bottom and top edges with
bottom support designed to withstand mirror weight and top support to prevent mirror from
coming away from wall along top edges.
a. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners
installed with anchors or inserts as applicable.
b. For continuous bottom supports, provide 1/8 x 4-inch (3 x 100-mm) setting blocks at
quarter points. For channels or other continuous supports in which water could be
trapped, provide two 1/4-inch (6-mm) diameter weeps drilled between setting blocks.
c. For wall application provide clips along top of mirror.
3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect mirrored glass from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.
B. Do not permit edges of mirror to be exposed to standing water.
C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirror from being exposed to moisture from
condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
D. Wash mirrors not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish
f date for Substantial Completion. Wash glass by methods recommended in NAMM document
and by mirrored glass manufacturer. Use water or glass cleaners free from substances capable
of damaging mirror edges or glass coating.
END OF SECTION 08830
`^ MIRRORED GLASS 08830 - 3
I
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
9
SECTION 08990 - ALL -GLASS PARTITITIONS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY'
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior all -glass, two-sided glazed partitions.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of sealants at perimeter of partitions.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard all -glass partition system that complies with
performance requirements specified as demonstrated by prior testing of the manufacturers
corresponding stock systems according to test methods indicated. Provide certification of tests'
results indicating conformance of manufacturer's standard system to following requirements.
1. Design Pressure: For purposes of the following tests, the design wind pressure is 5 psf.
2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install the all -glass partitions to
withstand a, lateral uniform load of 5 psf in either direction, normal to the plane of the wall,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, with no material failures or permanent
deformation of structural members.
a. Structural test pressure shall be equal to 150 percent of the acting design lateral
uniform load.
b. Deflections: The all -glass partition system shall be capable of withstanding building
movements including lateral load and of performing within the following limitations,
under the required lateral load:
1) Perpendicular Deflection: Deflection of glass components perpendicular to the
plane of the wall shall not exceed 1/175 of the unsupported span (defined as the
distance between anchor center lines) or 3/4 inch, whichever is less.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including the following:
1. Plans, elevations, and sections.
2. Details of fittings.
3. Hardware quantities, locations, and installation requirements.
4. Anchorages and reinforcement.
5. Glazing details.
C. Samples for Verification: Of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated
for Work. Show the full range of color and texture variations expected.
Glass: 6 inches square showing exposed -edge finish.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who
has specialized in installing all -glass partitions similar to those required for this Project and with
a record of successful in-service performance.
r ALL -GLASS PARTITITIONS 08990 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of all -glass partitions one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of all -glass
partitions and are based on the specific system indicated. Other Architect approved
manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify opening dimensions of all -glass partitions by field measurements
before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Provide All -Glass Sidelight System as identified by proprietary product
identification numbers specified hereinafter of Blumcraft of Pittsburgh or, subject to compliance
with requirements and approval of the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. ACI Glass Products.
2. Arch Amarlite.
3. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh.
4. Guardian Industries Corp.
5. Kawneer Company, Inc.; Brite Vue Glass Systems, Inc.
6. Virginia Glass Products Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Clear Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I
(transparent), Class 1 (clear) requirements. Provide products of thickness indicated that have
been tested for surface and edge compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact
strength according to CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1201 for Category H materials.
1. Thickness: 3/4 inch.
2. Exposed Edges: Flat polished.
3. Butt Edges: Flat ground.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use and finish indicated, but
not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5.
r
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. All -Glass Sidelights (Partition System:
1. Concealed Sidelight Channels: Provide C-7501 13/4 inch x 2 inches extruded aluminum,
recessed in ceiling and RB-750 FY4 inch x 1 inch extruded aluminum recessed in floor, both
as manufactured by Blumcraft of Pittsburgh.
2. Joints: Size glass to provide %z inch wide vertical gaps between glass panels.
3. Anchors and Fastenings: As detailed on the drawings.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate all -glass partition components in sizes, profiles, and configurations indicated.
1. Fully temper glass using horizontal roller hearth process.
2. Factory assemble components and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible.
2.5 METAL FINISHES, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
08990 - 2 ALL -GLASS PARTITITIONS
8/3/98 Buddy. Holly Center . City of Lubbock CP #9355
R
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipment.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
t minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXA HNATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of all -glass partitions. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install all -glass partitions and associated components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Set units level and plumb.
C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.
D. Anchor components securely in place in the manner indicated. Shim and allow for movement
resulting from changes in thermal conditions. Provide separators and isolators to prevent
corrosion, electrolytic deterioration, and freeze-up of moving joints.
E. Glazing: Inspect glass and framing for complicance with manufacturing and installation
tolerances, including size, squareness, and offsets at corners; for existence of minimum face or
edge clearance; and for effective sealing of joinery.
1. Avoid point loading glass.
2. Do not proceed with glazing work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3. Do not field cut glass.
4. Comply with the requirements of Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing."
F. Erection Tolerances: Install components plumb, level, accurately aligned, and located in
reference to column lines and floor levels. Adjust work to conform to the tolerances indicated
below. Tolerances indicated below are maximum and are not cumulative.
" 1. Plumb: 1/16 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
( 2. Level: 1/16 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
3. Alignment: Limit offset of glass alignment to 1/16 inch where surfaces are flush.
r.. 4. Location: 3/8-inch maximum deviation from the measured theoretical location of any
component at any location.
G. Set, seal, and grout floor channels as required by hardware and substrate.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure all -glass partitions are without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08990
r., ALL -GLASS PARTITITIONS 08990 - 3
r
�.» 8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMIIZARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Portland cement plaster.
2. Metal lath.
3. Trim and accessories.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 446/A 446M-91 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by
the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality; 1991.
B. ASTM A 527/A 527M-90 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by
the Hot -Dip Process, Lock -Forming Quality; 1990.
C. ASTM C 150-92 -- Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1992.
D. ASTM C 206-84(92) -- Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime; 1984.(Reapproved
1992).
E. ASTM C 207-91(92) -- Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 1991.
F. ASTM C 847-88(92) -- Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 1988 (Reapproved 1992).
G. ASTM C 897-88 -- Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job -Mixed Portland Cement -Based
Plasters; 1988.
H. ASTM C 926-90 -- Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement -Based Plaster;
1990.
1. ASTM C 1063-86 -- Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland
Cement -Based Plaster; 1986.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for systems
specified, demonstrating compliance with requirements.
�— B. Material Certificates: Submit producer's certification that each kind of bulk material complies
with specified requirements.
r
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1
t
V
City of Lubbock CP .#9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
C. Samples:
1. Plaster finish: Submit 12-inch-square samples of each required plaster finish, mounted on
plywood or hardboard.
2. Trim and accessories: Submit 12-inch-long samples of each type of trim and accessory
which will be exposed in the finish work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Provide installation by a company specializing in work similar to that
required on this project and with not less than 5 years of documented experience.
B. Mock-up: Construct mock-up at location designated by the architect. Include typical edge
details, control joints, and similar features. Approved mock-up will establish the acceptable limits
of variation in texture, pattern, color, and workmanship.
1. Mock-up construction may be incorporated into the final work at the contractor's option.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original and unopened packaging, with brand names and manufacturer's
labels intact and legible.
B. Store materials in dry location, fully protected from weather and direct exposure to sunlight.
C. Store and handle trim accessories to prevent bending, sagging, distortion, or other damage. _
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with provisions of ASTM C 926 before, during, and after
application of portland cement plaster.
B. Cold -Weather Requirements:
1. Exterior plaster work: Do not apply plaster when ambient temperature is less than 32
degrees F or when temperature is 40 degrees F or lower and falling.
C. Warm Weather Requirements:
1. Protect plaster against uneven and excessive evaporation of moisture and from strong flows
of dry air, both natural and artificial
2. Apply and cure plaster as required by climatic and job conditions to prevent drying out
during curing period. _
a. Prevent premature drying of plaster, using any of the following: Moist curing, barriers
to deflect sunlight and wind, or proprietary curing compounds.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL LATH
A. General: Comply with ML/SFA "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring" for type _
and style 6f metal lath to suit application and support spacing.
09220 - 2 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
P'tl
i
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
8
t B. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C 847.
1. Self -furring diamond mesh lath: 3.4 pounds per square yard nominal weight.
a. Galvanized.
2. Manufacturers of Expanded Metal Lath:
a. Bostwick Steel Framing Co.
b. Chapman Industries.
c. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
d. Milcor Division; Inryco, Inc.
e. United States Gypsum Co.
f. Western Metal Lath Co.
C. Fasteners/Attachment Devices: Galvanized steel; comply with ML/SFA "Guide Specifications
for Metal Lathing and Furring."
2.2 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS
r A. Base Coat Materials:
1. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III.
} 2. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207; special hydrated lime.
3. Aggregate: Manufactured or natural sand, ASTM C 897.
4. Fiber reinforcing: Alkali -resistant glass fibers, nominally 1/2 inch long, for reinforcing
r portland cement plaster.
5. Water: Potable.
B. Finish Coat Materials:
1. Stucco:
a. California Stucco Products Corp.
b. Florida Stucco Corp.
c. Highland Stucco.
d. IPA Systems, Inc.
e. United States Gypsum Co.
2.3 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Trim: Fabricate from ASTM A 446 or ASTM A 527 galvanized steel, with Class G90 zinc
coating.
1. Corner bead: 1/8-inch-diameter bead with expanded flanges.
2. Casing bead: J-shaped, square -edge style, with 1/4-inch return, leg to match plaster
thickness, and nominal 1-1/4-inch nailing flange with nominal 2-inch expanded extension.
3. Control joint: M-shaped, with diamond mesh expanded flanges.
B. Metal Lath Accessories:
1. Cornerite: Diamond mesh expanded metal; brake -formed to 100 degree angle with 3-inch-
r wide flanges.
r PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 3
4
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2. Manufacturers of Accessories:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum co.
c. Keene Corp.
d. Milcor Division; Inryco, Inc.
e. MM Systems Corp.
f. Plastic Components, Inc.
g. United States Gypsum Co.
h. Western Metal Lath Co.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials as produced or recommended by plaster manufacturer.
2.5 PLASTER MIXES
A. General: Measure proportions accurately by volume. Use of shovels for measuring, is not
allowed. Mix plaster using mechanical mixers unless hand mixing is specifically approved by the
architect. `
B. Mixes and Compositions: Proportion materials for respective base coats in parts by volume.
1. Fiber Content for Base Coats: Not more than 2 lbs. per cu. ft. of cementitious materials.
2. Three -Coat Work Over Metal Lath:
a. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts sand.
b. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts sand.
c. Finish Coat: Factory mixed stucco finish coat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Grounds and Screeds: Install temporary grounds and screeds as necessary to ensure accurate
rodding of plaster to true surfaces; coordinate with scratch -coat work.
B. Flashings: Refer to applicable sections of Division 7 for the installation of flashings indicated
under exterior portland cement plastering.
C. Protection: Coordinate work and provide protective coverings to protect adjacent surfaces from
soiling and damage.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL LATHING
A. Installation Standard: Install lathing in accordance with ASTM C 1063.
B. Provide supplementary blocking, bracing, and framing as required to support edges of lath and
behind fixtures, hardware, and accessories shown to be attached to plaster construction. _
C. Install lath with long edges perpendicular to supports.
09220 - 4 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
D. Isolation: Make provisions for movement of building structure to prevent transfer of structural
load or movement to the lath and plaster work.
1. Do not bridge control joints or expansion joints with framing components or lath.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES AND TRIM
A. General: Comply with referenced installation standards for provision and location of plaster trim
and accessories.
1. Miter or cope trim and accessories at corners.
2. Install trim and accessories in proper alignment and with tight joints between pieces.
B. Install trim and accessories where indicated and as follows:
1. Corner beads: External corners.
2. Comerite: At internal corners where metal lath is not continuous through corner.
3. Casing beads: At terminations of plaster unless plaster terminates in other metal frame,
screed, or trim which serves as bead.
4. Control joints: At locations indicated, as recommended by plaster manufacturer, or as
follows:
a. Changes of substrate construction.
b. Where control or movement joints occur in substrate construction.
c. Where wings of L-, T-, or U-shaped surfaces join.
d. Exterior work at spacing not to exceed 10 feet on center where surface is continuous
plane.
3.4 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with provisions of ASTM C 926.
1. Coordinate plaster application with installation of adjacent work to avoid soiling and damage
of plaster and other work.
B. Tolerances: Deviation from plane not to exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet. as measured with a
straightedge at any location on surface.
C. Frames: Grout hollow metal frames and similar work occurring in plastered areas with base coat
material. Grout 6-inch length at each frame anchor unless full grouting is indicated.
1. Unless plaster terminates in a casing bead, cut away from metal before plaster sets; groove
finish coat.
D. Apply plaster in thickness indicated by referenced application standard for 3-coat work.
E. Curing: Comply with Annex A2 of ASTM C 926 for curing of each coat and for time between
coats of portland cement plaster.
F. Apply and work finish coat to match approved mock-up.
1. Finish texture: Float (sand) finish.
r PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 5
C_ty^of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Corrections: Cut out and replace defective areas so that repairs match acceptable work in all
respects. Defective work includes, but is not limited to, areas showing cracks, dents, crazing,
blisters, and other surface imperfections, as well as areas where bond to substrate has failed.
3.6 CLEANING ^
A. Removal: Remove and discard temporary protection after plaster work in each area has been
completed. Carefully remove plaster from other exposed surfaces, leaving them in undamaged
condition; dispose of packaging materials and plaster debris.
r-,
END OF SECTION 09220
09220 = 6 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of each type of gypsum board assemblies construction required is indicated on Drawings.
B. This Section includes the following types of gypsum board construction:
1. Steel framing members to receive gypsum board.
2. Gypsum board screw -attached to steel framing and furring members.
3. Water resistant gypsum board units to receive ceramic tile.
C. Load -bearing steel studs and "C" shaped steel joists for structural framing are specified in
Division-5 Section "Cold -Formed Metal Framing."
D. Gypsum sheathing for screw -attachment to steel framing is specified in Division-6 Section
"Rough Carpentry."
E. Expansion joint cover assemblies in gypsum board construction are specified in Division 5
Section "Expansion Joint Covers."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA 505 for definitions
of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced
standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data from manufacturers for each type of product specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical
to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a
testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide fire -resistance -rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA File
No's. in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in U.L. "Fire
Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing and agencies acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment
materials from a single manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes.
Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or
otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
r , GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 1
4
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for
application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing,
maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg Q. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum
board maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and
continuously thereafter until drying is complete.
C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials.
Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials form drying too rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Dale/Incor Industries, Inc.
b. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
C. Gold Bond Building Products'Div., National Gypsum Co.
d. Marino Industries Corp. _
e. Unimast Inc.
2. Grid Suspension Systems:
a. Chicago Metallic Corp.
b. National Rolling Mills Co.
3. Gypsum Boards and Related Products:
a. Centex American Gypsum Co.
b. Domtar Gypsum Co.
c. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
d. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. —'
e. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
r
A. General: Provide components which comply with ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. _
C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint.
D. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint.
E. Channels: Cold -rolled steel, 0.0598 inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and'/16
inch wide flanges, protected with rust -inhibitive paint, and as follows:
1. Carrying Channels: 1'/2 inch deep, 475 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated.
F. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges bent back 90 deg and
doubled over to form '/16 inch minimum lip (return), minimum thickness of base (uncoated)
metal and minimum depth as follows: _
1. Thickness: 22 gage, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Depth: As indicated.
09255 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
rr 8/3/98 Buddy' Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
1
G. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat -shaped, depth of 7/s inch, and minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:
1. Thickness: 25 gage, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Grid Suspension System: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard grid suspension system
composed of main beams and cross furring members which interlockto form a modular
supporting network.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and
doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements
for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
r 1. Thickness: 25 gage, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Depth: 2'/2, 3%, 4 inches and 6 inch, except where otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat -shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal as follows:
3
. 1. Depth: 7/s inch.
2. Thickness: 25 gage, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Furring Brackets: Serrated -arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion -resistant steel sheet
complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch,
designed for screw attachment to 'steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring.
D. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard zee -shaped furring members with slotted or
nonslotted web, fabricated from hot -dip galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 525,
Coating Designation G60; with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness of 0.0179 inch, face
flange of 1'/4 inch, wall -attachment flange of r/s inch, and of depth required to fit insulation
thickness indicated.
E. Flat Sheet Bracing: Provide flat sheet metal bracing in sizes, configurations and thickness
indicated to act as reinforcing and/or mounting plates/receptors within drywall construction
where wall hung fixtures, railings and wall mounted items are shown to be secured to drywall
surfaces.
F. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and
other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates
involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers for
applications indicated.
2.4 GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize
end -to -end joints.
1. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in % inch thickness to comply with ASTM C 840 for
application system and support spacing indicated.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, and as follows:
1. Type: Regular, except use type X for fire -resistance -rated assemblies.
2. Edges: Tapered.
3. Thickness: % inch, s 'th o
F
r.• GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 3
d
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
4. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be
incorporated in the Work where Type X gypsum wallboard is indicated include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. "Gyprock Fireguard 'C' Gypsum Board" or "Gyprock Fireguard 'X' Gypsum Board"
as required by the specific fire rating; Domtar Gypsum Co.
b. "Fire -Shield G" or "Fire -Shield" as required by the specific fire rating; Gold Bond
Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
c. "SHEETROCK Brand FIRECODE or FIRECODE 'C' Gypsum Panels" as required by
the specific fire rating; United States Gypsum Co.
C. Gypsum Backing Board for Multi -Layer Applications: ASTM C 442 or, where backing board
is not available from manufacturer, gypsum wallboard, ASTM C 36, and as follows:
1. Type: Regular, except use type X for fire -resistance -rated assemblies.
2. Edges: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Thickness: % inch, unless indicated otherwise.
D. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630, and as follows:
1. Type: Type X, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch, unless indicated otherwise.
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Comerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim and control
joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
1. Material: Formed sheet steel zinc -coated by hot -dip process.
2. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047:
a."Comerbead", unless otherwise indicated.
b. "LC" Bead, unless otherwise indicated.
C. "LK" Bead with square nose for use with kerfed jambs.
d. "L" Bead where indicated.
e. "U" Bead where indicated.
f. Reveal Base: Clear anodized aluminum Reveal Base DRMB-625-600 as manufactured
by Fry Reglet Corporation, or Architect approved equal.
3. One -Piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047, with
slot opening covered with removable strip.
2.6 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and recommendations
of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application indicated.
B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use pressure sensitive or staple -attached open -weave glass fiber reinforcing tape with
compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and
joint treatment materials for application indicated.
C. Setting -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged, job -mixed, chemical -hardening powder
products formulated for uses indicated.
1. Where setting -type joint compounds are indicated for use as taping and topping compounds,
use formulation for each which develops greatest bond strength and crack resistance and
is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it.
2. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base
for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for this
purpose.
09255 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES _
i
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
2.7 TEXTURE FINISH MATERIALS
A. Primer: Of type recommended by manufacturer of texture finish.
B. Texture Finish for Walls and Ceilings: Manufacturer's standard proprietary product formulated
with aggregates for spray application, to achieve a sand texture, with surface burning
characteristics of 25 per ASTM E 84.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, polystyrene aggregated finishes
which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. USG Texture II; United States Gypsum.
2. Wall Spray Texture; Gold Bond.
3. Gyptex Ready Mix Stucco; Domtar Gypsum.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply with
referenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board.
B. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound of type recommended for spot grouting
hollow metal door frames.
C. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002.
D. Asphalt Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15).
E. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, nonbleeding,
gunnable sealant complying with requirement specified in Division-7 section "Joint Sealers."
F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket insulation produced by combining
mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665
for Type I (blankets without membrane facing); and as follows:
Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag.
G. Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral
fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type
III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor -retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25
or less); foil-scrim-kraft vapor -retarder membrane on one face, respectively; at insulation below
roof on wire mesh supports, provide insulation with foil membrane on top and kraft vapor -
retarder on bottom face, and as follows:
1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of
25 and 50, respectively.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXANIINATION
A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow metal frames,
cast -in -anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of
overhead structural systems to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have
been installed to receive ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop their full strength and at
spacing required to support ceiling.
1
t.
�,,, GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 5
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with
ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support
of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar
construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United
States Gypsum Co.
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural
movement, at locations indicated below to comply with details shown on Drawings:
1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at ceiling perimeters
or penetration of structural elements.
2. Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure.
a. Provide slip or cushioned type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid
axial loading.
D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members;
independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members or as indicated.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise
connect to cast -in concrete inserts or other anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated.
1. Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs.
B. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit.
C. Keep hangers and braces 2 inches clear of ducts, pipes and conduits.
D. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than
that required by referenced steel framing installation standard.
1. Wire Hangers: 0.1620 inch diameter (8 gage), 4 ft. on center.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1 % inch, 4 ft. on center.
3. Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches on center.
F. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross
furring members or grid suspension members are level to within 1/a inch in 12 ft. as measured
both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.
G. Wire -tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated.
H. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system
meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross furring members to each other
and butt -cut to fit into wall track.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum
drywall stud system abuts other construction.
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between
studs and wall.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surface
do not vary more than 1/s inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing.
09255 - 6 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
rr
E ,
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
Y C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings.
Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating
r' partitions above ceiling to. provide support for gypsum board.
D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required
by referenced steel framing installation standard.
1. For single and double layer construction: As indicated on the drawings.
E. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum boards can be installed
in the direction opposite to that of the flange.
F. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219 and with applicable
published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with
screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track
section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
1. Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of roof
structure above.
G. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated, or if none indicated,
in same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
3.6 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board to comply
with ASTM C 840.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed
after board has been installed.
C. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger
not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board.
D. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end -butt
joints, and which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least
24 inches.
E. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints or avoids
them entirely where possible. At high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered
over studs.
F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp
boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than '/16 inch
open space between boards. Do not force into place.
G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position
boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill -cut or field -cut ends
against mill -cut or field -cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger
vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.
H. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open
(unsupported) edge of stud flange first.
I. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support
at openings and cutouts.
J. Spot grout hollow metal door frames at each jamb anchor clip just before inserting board into
frame. I
K. Form control joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of boards, prepared to
receive trim accessories. Securely attach boards on each side of control joint.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 7
r
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
L. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls which are braced internally.
1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. area, and may
be limited to not less than 75 percent of full coverage.
2. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
M. Isolate perimeter of non -load -bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide '/a inch
to '/2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant.
N. Where sound -rated drywall construction is indicated, seal construction at perimeters, control and
expansion joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant
including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's
recommendations for location of edge trim, and close off sound -flanking paths around or through
construction, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings.
O. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
P. Where fire -rated gypsum board construction is indicated, assemble in compliance with the UL
assembly requirements using materials listed for the specific UL design assembly.
3.7 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION
A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows:
1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest
extent possible.
2. On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise
indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints.
B. Wall Tile Base: Where drywall is base for thin -set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall
finishes, install backing board.
1. At "wet areas" install water resistant units (WR) and treat joints to comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for type of application indicated.
C. Double -Layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for base layer and gypsum wallboard
for face layer.
1. On partitions/walls apply base layer and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with
joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least 10 inches with base
layer joints.
D. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows-
1 . Fasten with screws.
E. Double -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply base layer of .gypsum board and face layer to base
layer as follows:
1. Fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. --
3.8 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: Use the same screw fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten
gypsum board to the supports.
B. Install corner beads at external corners with screws.
C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi -
exposed. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where "U" bead (semi -
finishing type) is indicated.
09255 - 8 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
r
G
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
1. Install "Reveal Base" at locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Install "Comerbead" at all exposed external corners in drywall construction.
3. Install "LC" bead where drywall construction is tightly abutted to other construction and
back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
4. Install "LK" bead where substrate is kerfed to receive long flange of trim.
5. Install "L" bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board is installed.
6. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant -filled (including
expansion joints).
D. Install control joints at locations indicated, at both sides of doors and windows, or if not
l indicated, at spacings and locations required by referenced gypsum board application and finish
t standard, and approved by the Owner's Representative for visual effect.
E. Finish gypsum board in each area to the level of finish indicated below:
1. All gypsum drywall surfaces scheduled to receive paint:
a. Level 5: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide three
�^ separate coats of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories.
Apply texture finish as specified in Article "Application of Texture Finish" to the
entire gypsum board surface. Provide smooth surfaces free of tool marks and ridges.
+^ 2. All gypsum drywall surfaces scheduled to receive wall covering:
a. Level 4: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide three
separate coats of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories.
I^ Provide smooth surfaces free of tool marks and ridges.
3. Backing board of fire -rated partitions to be covered with another layer of gypsum
wallboard:
a. Level 1: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles; provide
accessories only as detailed. Provide surfaces free of excess joint compound; tool
marks and ridges are acceptable.
4. Above ceiling surfaces of non -fire -rated gypsum drywall partitions:
a. Level 0: No taping, finishing, or accessories are required.
5. Above ceiling surfaces of fire -rated gypsum drywall partitions:
a. Level 3: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide two
separate coats of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories.
Provide smooth surfaces free of tool marks and ridges.
3.9 APPLICATION OF TEXTURE FINISH
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and prime drywall and other surfaces in strict
accordance with texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer to all surfaces to
achieve texture finish.
B. Finish Application: Except where smooth finish texture to match existing is specifically
indicated on the drawings, mix and apply finish to drywall and other surfaces indicated to
receive finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce a uniform "light
orange peel" texture matching Owner Representative's sample without starved spots or other
evidence of thin application, and free of application patterns.
C. Remove texture droppings or overspray from door frames, windows and adjoining construction.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which ensures
gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
i
END OF SECTION 09255
�,,,, GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 9
r
i
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City, of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 09265 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES
{ PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
�. A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
f.
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
f
A. Definition: Gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies include special-purpose assemblies of gypsum
boards and metal components designed for erection entirely from room -side of shaft (except for
application of finish layer on shaft -side, where required) to enclose vertical shafts, and chases.
r' B. Types of gypsum board shaft -wall enclosures include the following:
r
t. 1. Service shaft enclosures (for piping and associated services).
C. Refer to the Division-9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for other drywall work.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES
4 .
A. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where drywall shaft systems with fire resistance ratings are indicated,
7 provide materials and installations including door and other framing, if any, which are identical
with those of applicable assemblies tested per ASTM E 119 by fire testing laboratories
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide fire -resistance rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA File
No.. in GA 600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in UL "Fire
Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Structural Performance Characteristics: Provide drywall shaft systems designed and tested by
manufacturer to withstand the following lateral design loadings (air pressures), applied
transiently and cyclically, for maximum heights of partitions required, within the following
deflection limits.
I. Lateral Loading: 10 psf.
2. Deflection Limit: 1/360 of partition height.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Gypsum Board Terminology Standard: GA-505 by Gypsum Association.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain gypsum shaftwall products from a single manufacturer,
or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum shaftwall systems
indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each
component of drywall shaft systems, including certified test data as may be required to show
compliance with these specifications.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and in manner to keep them dry, protected from the weather,
direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other
causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Protect metal corner
beads, casing beads and trim from being bent or damaged.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 1
p1
G
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environment Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced application
standard and recommendations of gypsum shaftwall manufacturer, for environmental conditions
before, during and after application and finishing of gypsum board.
B. Cold Weather Protection: When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 55° F (13' C) maintain
continuous, uniform, comfortable building working temperatures of not less than 55 F (13' C)
for a minimum period of 48 hours prior to, during and following application of gypsum board
and joint treatment materials or bonding of adhesives.
C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for
drying of joint treatment material immediately after its application. Avoid drafts during dry, hot
weather to prevent too rapid drying.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Flintkote Products, Genstar Building Materials Co.
2. Georgia Pacific Corporation.
3. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
4. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 BASIC SYSTEM MATERIALS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide the
manufacturer's standard materials specified in his published product literature for the system and
application required.
B. Metal Framing: Provide manufacturer's standard shapes for shaftwall construction; size and base
metal thickness designed to comply with AISI "Specification for Design of Cold -Formed Steel
Structural Members" for structural performance characteristics indicated. Fabricate from steel
sheet complying with ASTM A 446, Grade A or B, for structural performance of base metal;
as well as with ASTM A 525, G60, for hot -dip galvanized products; and ASTM A 463 for
aluminized products.
C. Gypsum Shaftwall Board: Provide manufacturer's standard gypsum backing board or coreboard
designed for shaftwall construction and complying with ASTM C 442, Type X; with moisture -
resistant paper facings, in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end -to -end butt
joints, and thickness as indicated.
D. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, Type X, of edge configuration indicated below, in maximum
lengths available to minimize end -to -end butt joints.
1. Edges: Tapered.
E. Gypsum Backing Board for Multi -Layer Applications: ASTM C 442, or, where backing board
is not available from manufacturer, gypsum wall board, ASTM C 36; Type X where required
for fire -resistance ratings, edge configuration as standard with manufacturer; thickness as
indicated.
F. Drywall Trim Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard trim accessories of types indicated
for drywall work, formed of galvanized steel, with either knurled and perforated or expanded
flanges for nailing or stapling, and beaded for concealment of flanges in joint compound.
Provide corner beads, L-type edge trim -beads, U-type edge trim -beads, special L-kerf-type edge
trim -beads, and one-piece control joint beads.
09265 -2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES
F
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
G. Joint Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475; type recommended by the manufacturer for the
application indicated, except as otherwise indicated.
1. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape.
2. Joint Compound: On interior work provide chemical -hardening- type for bedding and
filling, ready -mixed vinyl -type for topping.
H. Water -Resistant Joint Compound: Special water-resistant type for treatment of joints, fastener
heads and cut edges of water-resistant backing board.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sheetrock Brand W/R
Compound; United States Gypsum Co.
I. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall work of the type and
grade recommended by the manufacturer of the system.
1. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound specifically recommended for
laminating gypsum boards.
2. Gypsum Board Fasteners: Comply with GA-216.
J. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, non- skinning, nonstaining,
nonbleeding, gunnable sealant for concealed applications per ASTM C 919.
K. Water -Resistant Adhesive: Type I organic adhesive for ceramic tile complying with ASTM A
136.1.
L. Sound Attenuation Blankets: FS HH-I-251; Type I; semi -rigid mineral fiber blanket without
membrane, Class 25 flame -spread, thicknesses as indicated.
2.3 BASIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements: Descriptions indicate type of manufacturer's standard systems required;
the descriptions are not intended to be comprehensive but to identify a discrete type of system.
Provide a complete system, complying with requirements indicated. Modify and supplement
manufacturer's standard system to comply with performance requirements, including those of
governing regulations. Provide the depth, profile, gage, and anchorage system of metal support
members recommended by manufacturer for heights and structural performance characteristics
indicated; provide runners, stiffeners, braces, and similar framing members required to form a
complete system.
B. Cavity Shaftwall Systems: Provide shaftwall assemblies consisting of gypsum shaftwall boards
inserted between U-shaped metal floor and ceiling tracks; specially -shaped studs engaged in
tracks and fitted between shaftwall boards; and gypsum boards on finished side or sides applied
to studs in number of layers, thicknesses and arrangement indicated.
1. Shaftwall Board Thickness: Not less than 1".
2. Stud Shape: Double E.
3. Stud Thickness: 0.0329" min. thickness of base metal.
4. Stud Depth: As indicated.
5. Room -Side Finish: As indicated.
6. Shaft -Side Finish: One layer of 1/2" gypsum board; provide only where finish is indicated
on shaft -side as well as room -side, otherwise leave exposed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL SHAFT SYSTEMS
A. Preparations and Coordination:
1. Weather Exposure: Do not proceed with the installation of gypsum board unless ambient
conditions are adequately controlled to prevent moisture deterioration of the work.
r,, GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Installation of Basic System Components:
1. General: Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions and with applicable
requirements of the industry standards listed below:
2. Metal Support Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
3. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards. ASTM C 840 and GA 216.
C. Anchor and fasten materials and components to comply with ratings and performance
requirements, and to comply with governing regulations.
D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with drywall shaft system, frame both sides of joints
with furring and other support as indicated.
E. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing to support fixtures, equipment, services,
heavy trim, furnishings and similar work which cannot be adequately supported directly on
gypsum drywall shaft system.
F. Isolate shaft system from transfer of structural loading to system, both horizontally and
vertically. Provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.
Comply with details shown and with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Seal perimeter of each section of drywall shaft work where it abuts other work. Install a second
bead of acoustical sealant in a location and manner which will prevent dislocation by air
pressure differential between shaft and external spaces. Seal joints and penetrations in the work;
comply with manufacturer's instructions.
H. Special Application Requirements:
Work to Receive Drywall Finish: Where room -side of drywall shaft work is indicated to
receive drywall finish, including spaces indicated for paint or wall coverings, provide
exposed boards with tapered edges and recessed fastener heads, ready for drywall finishing.
Otherwise, for unfinished work, edge profile of exposed boards is Installer's option, except
comply with requirements for fire -resistance and STC ratings.
I. Installation of Drywall Trim Accessories:
1. General: Install metal trim accessories where room -side of drywall shaft system is indicated
to receive drywall finish (tape and joint compound treatment), including spaces indicated
for paint or wall coverings. Nail or staple the flanges of accessories in accordance with
manufacturers instructions, and fasten integrally with gypsum board where possible. Apply
trim wherever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed,
including terminations of the work, openings in the work, external corners, expansion and
control joints and similar edges, both exposed and abutting other work. Miter -cut corners
of exposed trim accessories, and spline -reinforce from behind to eliminate offsets and
misalignments.
2. Install L-type trim where board edges abut other work without space or reveal
3. Install U-type trim where board edges are indicated for sealant or gasket application, or
would otherwise be exposed (special kerf-type where kerf is provided to receive trim).
4. Install semi -finishing trim where shown.
5. Install control joint trim (beaded type) where indicated.
3.2 FIMSHING OF GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead,
edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as
required to prepare work for decoration.
B. Prefrll open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting -type joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated.
09265 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES
i
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
D. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats (not
including prefill of openings in base), and sand between coats and after last coat:
f 1. Embedding and First Coat: Setting -Type Joint Compound.
2. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting -type joint compound.
3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready -mix drying -type all-purpose or topping compound.
E. Water Resistant Backer Units as Base for Ceramic Tile: Finish joints between backer units with
E water resistant joint compound to comply with backer unit board manufacturer's
recommendations and installation standards referenced in Division-9 Section "Tile."
F. Finish gypsum board in each area to the level of finish indicated below:
1. All gypsum drywall surfaces scheduled to receive paint:
r• a. Level 5: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide three
separate coats of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories.
Apply texture finish as specified in Article "Application of Texture Finish" herein to
the entire gypsum board surface. Provide smooth surfaces free of tool marks and
ridges.
2. All gypsum drywall surfaces scheduled to receive wall covering:
r� a. Level 4: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide three
separate coats of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories.
Provide smooth surfaces free of tool marks and ridges.
r 3. Backing board of fire -rated partitions to be covered with another layer of gypsum
I wallboard:
a. Level 1: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles; provide
accessories only as detailed. Provide surfaces free of excess joint compound; tool
marks and ridges are acceptable.
4. Above ceiling surfaces of non -fire -rated gypsum drywall partitions:
a. Level 0: No taping, finishing, or accessories are required.
5. Above ceiling surfaces of fire -rated gypsum drywall partitions:
a. Level 3: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide two
separate coats of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories.
Provide smooth surfaces free of tool marks and ridges.
3.3 APPLICATION OF TEXTURE FINISH
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and prime drywall and other surfaces in strict
accordance with texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer to all surfaces to
achieve texture finish.
B. Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to drywall and other surfaces indicated to receive
finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce a uniform "light orange
peel" texture matching Owner Representative's sample without starved spots or other evidence
of thin application, and free of application patterns.
C. Remove any texture droppings or overspray from door frames, windows and other adjoining
construction.
3.4 PROTECTION OF WORK
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, which
ensures drywall shaft system work being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial
completion.
END OF SECTION 09265
FGYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 5
r
r 8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
t SECTION 09420 - TERRAZZO TILE
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUM LALRY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Epoxy -resin, thin -set terrazzo tile.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete substrate or underbed
requirements.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in movement joints or joints
between tile units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of terrazzo tile, component material, and accessory specified.
B. Samples for Verification: Minimum of three 6-inch-square samples of each terrazzo color and
type required, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare
samples of the same thickness and from the same material to be used for the Work. Provide
minimum 6-inch-long samples of each exposed strip item required.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
D. Material Certificates: Certificates signed by suppliers or manufacturers certifying that each
material complies with requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For each terrazzo tile to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed terrazzo
installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in suppliers' original wrappings and containers, labeled with
`r source's or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number, if any.
B. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well -ventilated
area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
r' A. Environmental Limitations: Maintain temperature above 50 deg F for 48 hours before and
during terrazzo tile installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 M[ANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Provide Fritztile terrazzo tile as manufactured by Fritz Industries, Inc. in colors
as selected by the Architect in patterns as follows:
TERRAZZO TILE 09420 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1. Fritztile Resilient Granite GT 3000 Series.
2. Fritztile Traditional Terrazzo T 900 Series.
3. Fritztile Renaissance 8000 Series.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Marble Chips: Sizes conforming to NTMA gradation standards for mix indicated, with Ha 10
minimum abrasive -hardness value when tested according to ASTM C 241, 0.75 percent
maximum 24-hour absorption rate, dust content of less than 1 percent by weight, and containing
no deleterious or foreign matter.
B. Matrix Pigments: Pure mineral or synthetic pigments, alkali resistant, color stable, and
compatible with matrix binder.
C. Epoxy -Resin Matrix: Provide matrix complying with NTMA's "Guide Specification for Epoxy
Terrazzo". in color required for mix indicated.
D. Cleaner: Chemically neutral cleaner with pH factor between 7 and 12 that is biodegradable,
phosphate free, and recommended by cleaner manufacturer for use on terrazzo type indicated.
E. Sealer: Slip- and stain -resistant, penetrating -type sealer that is chemically neutral with pH factor
between 7 and 12, does not affect color or physical properties of terrazzo type indicated, is
recommended by sealer manufacturer for this use, and complies with NTMA Guide Specification
for terrazzo type indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of terrazzo. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions, including levelness tolerances, have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with terrazzo tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing
substrates indicated to receive resilient products.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended
by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with terrazzo tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half of a tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Match tiles for color and pattern by visual inspection and comparison. Cut tiles neatly around
all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures,
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and
nosings.
09420 - 2 TERRAZZO TILE
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City, of Lubbock CP #9355
E. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference ,markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
a nonstaining marking device.
G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply
with file manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive
mixing, and adhesive open and working times.
1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
END OF SECTION 09420
TERRAZZO TILE 09420 - 3
K
r
t.
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center Citv of Lubbock CP #9355
r
SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general :provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
r- A. Extent of each type of acoustical ceiling is shown and scheduled on drawings.
B. Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include the following:
1. Acoustical panel ceilings, exposed suspension.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and
suspension system required.
. B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following:
1. 6" square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern and color.
2. Set of 12" long samples of exposed runners and moldings for each color and system type
required.
3. Set of concealed suspension members.
C. Certificates: Submit certificates from manufacturers of acoustical ceiling units and suspension
systems attesting that their products comply with specification requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed
acoustical ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for Project.
B. Fire -Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested
a for the following fire -performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by
c UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with
ASTM E 1264 for Class A products.
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less.
C. Single -Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from
a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
D. Single -Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system
from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
E. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and
suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported
by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system components (if
any), and partition system (if any).
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in
a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct
t
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
r ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1
1.
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and
weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained
at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products
installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate
labels.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount
installed.
2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed component
equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which shall be incorporated
in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Mineral Base Panels - Water Felted, with Painted Finish and Perforated and Fissured
Pattern, Non -Fire -Resistance Rated.
a. "Auratone Fine Fissured H (SLT), Item No. 4722," USG Interiors, Inc.
2. Non -Fire -Resistance -Rated Wide -Face Double -Web Steel Exposed Suspension Systems:
a. Prelude 15116" Exposed Tee System," Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. "211/219 Snap -Grid System," Chicago Metallic Corporation.
c. Exposed Master Lock ML 6000 System," National Rolling Mills, Inc.
d. "DX 24 System," USG Interiors, Inc.
3. Edge Moldings:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
c. Fry Reglet Corp.
d. National Rolling Mills, Inc.
e. USG Interiors, Inc.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL
A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturer's standard units of configuration
indicated which are prepared for mounting method designated and which comply with FS SS-S-
118 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, form, pattern, grade (NRC or
NIC' as applicable), light reflectance coefficient (LR), edge detail, and joint detail (if any).
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: No. 7 (mechanically mounted on special metal
support), FS SS-S-118; or Type E-400 mounting as per ASTM E 795.
B. Sound Attenuation Performance: Provide acoustical ceiling units with ratings for ceiling sound
transmission class (STC) of range indicated as determined according to AMA 14I "Ceiling
Sound Transmission Test by Two -Room Method" with ceilings continuous at partitions and
supported by a metal suspension system of type appropriate for ceiling unit of configuration
indicated (concealed for tile, exposed for panels).
09511 -2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS _
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center - City of Lubbock CP #9355
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Mineral Composition Panels - Water Felted, with Standard Washable Painted Finish: Provide
Type III, Form 2 units, per FS SS-S-118 and complying with the following requirements:
1. Fissured and Perforated Pattern: Manufacturer's standard design combining fissures with
perforations and other panel characteristics as follows:
a. NRC Range: 0.55 - 0.65.
7b. CAC Range: 35-39.
c. Edge Detail: Shadowline tapered (SLT).
d. Size: 24" x 24" x 3/4".
r- 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension
systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable
ASTM C 635 requirements.
B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied finish for type of system
indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct
Hung unless otherwise indicated.
1. Cast -In -Place and Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below,
fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with holes or loops for attachment of hangers
of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that
imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by
a qualified independent testing laboratory.
a. Chemical anchors.
b. Expansion anchors.
c. Undercut anchors.
D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
1. Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table
1, Direct -Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch
diameter (12 gage).
2. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust -inhibitive paint.
3. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust inhibitive paint.
E. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit type of edge
detail and suspension system indicated.
1. For lay -in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal
of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed
suspension member.
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required
to fit penetration exactly.
3. For mylar faced panels provide suspension system with manufacturer's standard gaskets to
seal panels at bearing with Tee flanges.
F. Hold -Down Clips for Non -Fire -Resistance -Rated Ceilings: For interior ceilings composed of
lay -in panels weighing less than 1 lb per sq: ft. and interior ceilings to receive high humidity
finish, provide hold-down clips spaced 2'-0" o.c. on all cross -tees.
2.5 EXPOSED METAL DIRECT -BUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Non -Fire -Resistance -Rated Double Web Steel Suspension System: Manufacturer's standard
system roll -formed from prefinished cold- rolled steel sheet with 15116" wide exposed faces on
structural members; other characteristics as follows:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -3
Ci��Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -Duty System.
2. Finish: Tainted, match color of acoustical unit.
3. Moisture Resistant Cap Material and Finish for Kitchen Area: Aluminum sheet with high
humidity finish.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, nonbleeding,
gunnable sealant complying with requirement specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXANIINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect
installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose
installation is specified in other sections.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance
of time needed for coordination of other work.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less -than -half -width units at borders, and comply
with reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and to comply
with governing regulations, fire -resistance rating requirements as indicated, and CISCA standards
applicable to work.
B. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally -patterned units (if any) in manner shown by
reflected ceiling plans. .
1. Install panels with pattern running in alternating directions to form "checkerboard" layout.
C. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from
building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6" from each end and spaced 4'-0"
along each carrying channel or direct -hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to
tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0".
1. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye -screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will
not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures.
2. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force by
bracing, countersplaying or other equally effective means.
D. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units.
1. Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant, concealed on back of vertical
leg before installing moldings.
2. Screw -attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from
ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Miter corners
accurately and connect securely.
09511 - 4. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS .-�
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
I E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support
of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations.
1. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, and in areas where required by governing
regulations or for fire -resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer,
unless otherwise indicated or required.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09511
r ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 5
813/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 09640 - WOOD FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUNIIVIARY
A. This Section includes the following types of interior wood flooring:
1. New solid wood strip flooring to infill in an existing solid wood strip flooring.
2. Strip, sand and refinish existing solid wood strip flooring so that new and old match.
3. Prior to submitting a bid, inspect the existing wood flooring to determine construction and
materials to be matched.
B. Wood substrates, including sleepers and subflooring are specified in a Division 6 Section.
1.3 SUBXHTTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data including manufacturer's detailed technical product data and installation instructions
for each type of wood flooring. Include instructions for handling, storage, installation,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, edge detail, finishing, protection, and
maintenance.
C. Samples consisting of sets of range samples for wood flooring.
1. Include unfinished samples of flooring material and finished samples representing site
finishing.
2. Accessories: Include minimum 6-inch (150 mm) long samples of each type of required
accessory item such as wood or metal feature strips, reducer strips, baseboard, trim,
molding, and nosings.
D. Shop drawings showing layout and types of wood flooring, including plans, elevations, sections,
details of anchorage and attachments to other units of Work, and conditions requiring feature
strips, reducer strips, baseboard, trim, molding, nosings, or other accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
r�►, A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in installing types
of wood flooring similar to that required for this Project.
B. Source Quality Control: Obtain flooring from a single manufacturer or source to ensure a match
Imo'* of quality, color, pattern, and texture.
` 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver
r in unopened cartons or bundles and store in a dry place with adequate air circulation. Do not
deliver material to building until concrete, plaster, masonry, ceramic tile, and other wet work
is complete and cured to a condition of equilibrium and temperature and humidity are
maintained at or near. occupancy levels.
! 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditioning: Condition wood for 5 days before start of installation by placing in spaces to
receive flooring and maintaining ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F (18 and 24 deg
C) before, during, and after installation. Open sealed packages of wood flooring to permit
natural adjustment of moisture content and allow flooring to acclimate to the room conditions.
Pi, WOOD FLOORING 09640 - 1
e
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Wood Strip Flooring: --
a. Aged Woods (antiqued).
b. Firebird Industries, Ltd.
c. Memphis Hardwood Flooring Co.
2.2 WOOD STRIP FLOORING
A. Solid Wood Flooring: Provide solid wood strip flooring matching existing in specie, thickness,
strip width and color so that when finished there is no visible difference between the new
flooring and the existing.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Moisture Barrier: Polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM D 4397, not less than 6.0 mils
thick.
B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type I, No. 15, asphalt -saturated felt.
C. Fasteners: Match existing, if possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
i-+
A. The areas to receive new wood strip flooring are approximately 4' x 8' rectangles. Determine
where each new wood strip will terminate in order to match the pattern of the existing strip
wood flooring.
B. Examine substrates where wood flooring will be installed and conditions under which work will
be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
in manner acceptable to Installer. --
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Where direct application of wood flooring to concrete substrate is indicated, test for dryness
before proceeding with installation. Check levelness of concrete substrate to ensure not more
than 1/4-inch (6-mm) deviation in any direction when checked with a 10-foot (3-rn) straight
edge. Grind down high spots or fill in low spots to correct improper conditions.
B. Apply moisture barrier over concrete substrate or subfloor if the existing wood flooring
employed a moisture barrier in its construction.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, but not less
than that recommended in NOFMA "Hardwood Flooring Installation Material," where applicable
to type flooring required.
B. Pattern: Comply with pattern or direction of pattern for laying wood flooring to match existing.
C. Solid Wood Flooring Installation: Blind -nail flooring to substrate to match method used in
existing wood flooring.
1. Selection of nail type is match existing, if possible.
2. Felt Underlayment: If existing flooring has felt underlayment, match existing as closely
as possible. —
09640 - 2 WOOD FLOORING
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center Citv of Lubbock CP #9355 rL, 3.4 SANDING AND FINISHING
A. Schedule floor finishing to be completed just before final inspection, Project acceptance and
Substantial Completion.
B. Strip existing wood flooring, machine -sand all wood flooring to remove offsets and nonlevel
conditions, ridges, cups, and sanding machine marks that would be noticeable after finishing.
Use three grades of sandpaper, ending with 00 grade on new wood flooring; on existing
flooring, use appropriate grades of sandpaper for condition of existing wood flooring. Vacuum
and tack clean and immediately apply finish. Do not permit traffic on floor after sanding and
until finish is completed.
C. Apply stain to match approved sample, if needed.
D. Apply wood filler by brush, then wipe across grain to work into pores and cracks.
E. Apply two coats of floor sealer according to manufacturer's instructions, including machine
buffing with steel wool in -the -wet where recommended by manufacturer.
F. Apply floor finish according to manufacturer's instructions. Apply as many coats as needed to
build a dry film thickness of at least 3.0 mils.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed unfinished and prefinished wood flooring during remainder of construction
period with heavy kraft paper or other suitable covering to prevent damage or deterioration. Do
not use plastic sheet or film that could cause condensation.
B. Do not cover site -finished floors with kraft paper, rugs or any other material until finish reaches
full cure, usually 6 or 7 days.
END OF SECTION 09640
WOOD FLOORING 09640 - 3
r 8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center Citv of Lubbock CP #9355
t SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUNEW&RY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid vinyl floor tile.
2. Vinyl composition floor tile.
B. Resilient wall base, reducer strips, accent strips, and other accessories installed with resilient
floor tiles are specified in Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
1. Certification by tile manufacturer that products supplied for tile installation comply with
local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's).
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual
tiles or sections of tiles showing full range of colors and patterns available for each type of
resilient floor tile indicated.
D. Samples for verification purposes in full-size tiles of each different color and pattern of resilient
floor file specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
E. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by
manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements.
F. Maintenance data for resilient floor tile, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual
specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile from
a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient floor tile with the following fire performance
characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL
or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq cm or more per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver tiles and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened
cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification,
and shipping and handling instructions.
B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures
maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).
C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move tiles and installation accessories into spaces where they will
be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive tiles for at least
48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation.
After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C).
B. Do not install tiles until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during tile installation.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
B. Do not install tiles over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive as determined by tile manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Allstate Rubber Co.
2. Mannington.
3. Amtico Flooring Div., American Biltrite Inc.
4. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
5. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries, Inc.
6. Kentile Floors, Inc.
7. Tarkett Inc.
2.2 RESILIENT TILE
A. Solid Vinyl Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1700 and as follows:
1. Basis of Design (Vinyl 3): Provide Molded Vinyl Tile (MVT) as manufactured by Allstate
Rubber Co.
2. Color and Pattern: Allstate 2370.'
3. Class: Class II, Surface -Decorated Vinyl Tile.
4. Type: Type A, Smooth Surface.
5. Thickness: 0.080 inch (2.0 mm).
6. Size: 12 by 12 inches.
B. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066, Composition 1
(nonasbestos formulated), and as follows:
1. Basis of Design: Provide Essentials Vinyl Composition Tile as manufactured by
Mannington in the following color/patterns:
a. Plan Designation Vinyl 1 (Field): Mannington Night Black 101.
b. Plan Designation Vinyl 2 (Accent): Mannington Wheat 123.
2. Class: Class 2 (through pattern tile).
3. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
4. Thickness: 1/8 inch.
5. Size: 12-by-12 inches.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by tile manufacturer for applications indicated.
09651 -2 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
it
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
u C. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by tile manufacturer to suit resilient
floor tile products and substrate conditions indicated.
D. Metal Edge,.Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edge of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas where installation of tiles will occur, with Installer present, to verify
! that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for tile installation and comply with file
! manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section.
B. Concrete. Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
I. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion
and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by tile
manufacturer.
2. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division
3 Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated
to receive tile.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile manufacturer's directions to fill cracks,
holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete
grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.
D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately before tile installation.
Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying
adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements
indicated that are applicable to each type of file installation included in Project.
B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths at perimeter that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. In rooms where some walls are not perpendicular, lay out pattern as indicated on the
drawings.
C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard
broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles in pattern with respect to location of colors, patterns, and sizes as indicated on
Drawings.
�+ D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture
r including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 3
i
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
E. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals; closets, and similar openings.
F. Install accent strips specified in another Division 9 section in pattern indicated on the drawings.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future
cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent
marking device.
H. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering
at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed
tile installation.
I. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with tile manufacturer's directions
including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.
J. Hand roll tiles where required by tile manufacturer.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing tile installation:
1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by file
manufacturers.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient floor tile manufacturer.
4. Damp -mop tile to remove black marks and soil.
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer.
I. Apply protective floor polish to tile surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and
surface blemishes.
a. Use commercially available, metal, cross -linked acrylic product acceptable to tile
manufacturer.
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
2. Cover tiles with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial
Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard
panels over tiles and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over
panels without moving panels.
C. Clean tiles not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish
date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean tiles using method recommended
by manufacturer.
1. Strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation prior to cleaning.
2. Reapply floor polish after cleaning.
END OF SECTION 09651
09651 4 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
8/3/98 Buddy Holly -Center. City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 09652 - SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS (ALTERNATE NO. 7)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUNEMIARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Sheet vinyl floor coverings with fibrous backing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient floor tile.
2. Division 9 Section "Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and
other accessories installed with sheet vinyl floor coverings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of seams and edges. Indicate location of columns, doorways,
enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutout locations.
C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-
by-230-mm) sections of each different color and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering specified,
showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1. For heat -welding bead, manufacturer's standard -size samples, but not less than 9 inches
(230 mm) long, of each color specified.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of sheet vinyl floor coverings certifying that each
product furnished complies with requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For sheet vinyl floor coverings to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer who is competent in the technique required by
manufacturer for heat -welding seams.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering specified
from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying the Work.
C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire -test -response
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per
ASTM E 662.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories to Project site in manufacturer's
original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer,
Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained
between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
C. Store rolls upright.
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS (ALTERNATE NO. 7) 09652 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
D. Move sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning periods are
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C)
in spaces to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings for at least 48 hours before installation, during
installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written
recommendations specify longer time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a
temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg Q.
B. Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings until they are at the same temperature as the space
where they are to be installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during sheet vinyl floor covering installation and for time period after
installation recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Install sheet vinyl floor coverings and accessories after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed.
E. Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings over concrete slabs until slabs have cured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Provide Classic Corlon Seagate Vinyl Sheet Flooring with heat welded joints
as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. or, subject to compliance with
requirements, Owner's Representative approved equal.
2.2 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS
A. Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings with Backing: Comply with ASTM F 1303, Type II, Grade 1,
Class A backing.
1. Provide in four colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors for
Classic Corlon Seagate.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering
and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Heat -Welding Bead: Solid -strand product of floor covering manufacturer for heat -welding
w
seams.
1. Color: As selected by Owner's Representative from manufacturer's full range of colors to
contrast with field color of sheet vinyl floor covering'.
D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edge of sheet vinyl floor coverings, and in maximum available lengths to
minimize running joints.
09652 - 2 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS (ALTERNATE NO. 7)
r
8/3/98 Buddy .Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
i PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAA'IINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of sheet vinyl floor coverings will
occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that
substrates and conditions are satisfactory for floor covering installation and comply with
requirements specified.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by floor covering
manufacturer as determined by preinstallation testing specified in Division 7 Section "Water
Vapor Emission Control System".
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place
Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring. ,
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's written installation instructions
for preparing substrates indicated to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing sheet vinyl floor
coverings. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting, if
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
C. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Maintain uniformity of sheet vinyl floor covering direction.
2. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low -traffic
areas, and not less than 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3. Match edges of sheet vinyl floor coverings for color shading and pattern at seams according
to manufacturer's written recommendations.
4. Avoid cross seams.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit sheet vinyl floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures, including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames,
thresholds, and nosings.
E. Extend sheet vinyl floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS (ALTERNATE NO. 7) 09652 - 3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
G. Adhere sheet vinyl floor coverings to flooring substrates to comply with floor covering
manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and
adhesive open and working times.
1. Produce completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
H. Heat -Welded Seams: Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead, permanently fusing sections
into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams according to manufacturer's
written instructions and ASTM F 1516 to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering
surfaces.
I. Hand roll sheet vinyl floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings
in adhesive and eliminate trapped air. At walls, door casings, and other locations where access
by roller is impractical, press floor coverings firmly in place with flat -bladed instrument.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing sheet vinyl floor coverings:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by floor covering
manufacturer.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor covering until after time period recommended by floor covering
manufacturer.
4. Damp -mop floor to remove marks and soil.
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer.
l . Cover sheet vinyl floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for
Substantial Completion.
2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over sheet vinyl floor coverings. Place
plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being
moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.
C. Clean sheet vinyl floor coverings as specified in Division 1 Section "Final Cleaning".
END OF SECTION 09652
09652 - 4 . SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS (ALTERNATE NO. 7)
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
71
II
i . SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division l Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Resilient wall base.
2. Resilient flooring accessories.
3. Resilient carpet accessories.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring."
2. Division 9 Section "Carpet."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes of manufacturer's standard sample sets in form of pieces
cut from each type of product specified showing full range of colors and patterns available.
D. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches
(300 mm) long, of each different color and pattern of product specified.
E. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by
manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility for Products: Obtain each type and color of product specified from
a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire performance
characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL
or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq cm or more per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each
bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling
instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained
between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and`90 deg F (32 deg C).
C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of
installation.
,. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 1
I
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive products specified
in this Section for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for, not less than
48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F
(13 deg C).
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as.that of the space where they
are to be installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during installation of products specified in this Section.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence .installing products specified in this Section with other construction to minimize
possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries, Inc.
3. Flexco Div., Textile Rubber Co.
4. Johnson Rubber Co., Inc.
5. Kentile Floors, Inc.
6. Mercer Plastics Co., Inc.
7. Vinyl Plastics Inc.
2.2 RESIL n�T WALL BASE
A. 5inyl--Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type H, and the following
requirements:
1. Style: Cove with top -set toe at VCT and concrete floors. Straight with no toe at carpet.
2. Minimum Thickness: 0.080 inch (2 mm).
3. Height: 4 inches (100 mm).
4. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches (1200 mm) long, or coils in lengths standard with
manufacturer but not less than 96 feet (29 m).
5. Exterior Corners: Premolded.
6. Interior Corners: Premolded.
7. Surface Characteristics: Smooth.
8. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and
patterns produced for vinyl wall base complying with requirements indicated.
2.3 ACCENT STRIPS
A. Accent Strip Material: Yinyl complying with FS SS-W-40, Type II, and the following
requirements:
1. Width: As indicated on the drawings.
2. Thickness: Match tile thickness specified in Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring."
3. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long to match pattern indicated and align with tile.
4. Surface Characteristics: Smooth.
5. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and
patterns.
2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
09653 - 2 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient flooring product
and substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where installation of products specified in this Section will occur, with Installer
present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with
manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications for preparing substrates
indicated to receive products indicated.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per manufacturers directions to fill cracks,
holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete
grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.
D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing products specified
in this Section. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation,
or dust.
E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying
adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated according to
manufacturer's installation directions.
B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures
in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable.
Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
1. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of
resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
2. Install inside and exterior corners before installing straight pieces.
3. Form inside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by cutting
an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave
back of base where necessary to produce snug fit to substrate.
4. Form outside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by shaving
back of base at point where bending will occur. Remove a strip perpendicular to length of
base and only deep enough to produce a snug fit without bends whitening or removal of
more than half the thickness of wall base.
C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of type indicated and bond
to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be
exposed.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation:
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 -3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by
manufacturers of resilient product involved.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
4. Damp -mop resilient accessories to remove black marks and soil.
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods indicated or recommended by manufacturer of resilient product involved.
C. Clean products specified in this Section not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean
products using method recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09653
09653 -4 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES --
r
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
FSECTION 09680 - CARPET
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUIVEVIARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Broadloom carpet.
2. Carpet accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Resilient flooring, Another Division 9 section.
,.. 1.3 REFERENCES
A. 16 CFR, Chapter 11, Part 1630 - Standard for the Surface Flammability of Carpets and Rugs
(FF 1-70); Code of Federal Regulations; 1988.
B. AATCC Test Method 30-1989 -- Antifungal Activity, Assessment on Textile Materials: Mildew
and Rot Resistance of Textile Materials; American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists;
1989.
C. AATCC Test Method 100-1989 -- Antibacterial Finishes on Textile Materials: Assessment of;
American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists; 1989.
D. AATCC Test Method 134-1991 -- Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets; American Association of
Textile Chemists & Colorists; 1991.
E. AATCC Test Method 147-1988 -- Antibacterial Activity Assessment of Textile Materials:
Parallel Streak Method; American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists; 1988.
F. AATCC Test Method 16-1990 -- Colorfastness to Light; American Association of Textile
Chemists & Colorists; 1990.
r., G. ASTM E 84-91a -- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
t Materials; 1991.
H. ASTM E 648-91a -- Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor -Covering Systems
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 1991.
I. ASTM E 662-91 -- Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by
Solid Materials; 1991.
J. NFPA 253-1990 -- Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering
I Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 1990.
K. NFPA 255-1990 -- Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 1990.
L. UL 723 -- Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1983 (with 1987 Revision).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit technical data for each distinct type of carpeting material and accessory
indicated.
1 1. Include information which specifically details physical properties and performance
characteristics.
r,. 2. Include information which details installation methods for substrates indicated.
r
��„ CARPET 09680 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
B. Shop Drawings:
1. For broadloom, show the following:
a. Carpet direction, seaming plan, edge strip placement.
b. Other details as necessary to clearly indicate arrangement of carpeting materials.
2. Include details for the following:
a. Columns.
b. Doorways.
c. Walls/partitions.
d. Installed cabinets.
e. Carpet cutouts.
C. Initial Selection Samples: For each carpet type indicated, submit manufacturer's standard
samples showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
D. Verification Samples: Submit the following to serve as standards for judging the completed
work:
1. For each distinct color, pattern, or type indicated, submit sample 18 inches square which
has been prepared from actual carpet to be installed.
2. Edging accessories: For each distinct edging accessory which will remain exposed after
installation, submit sample 12 inches long.
E. Certification:
L. Submit manufacturer's certification that materials furnished comply with requirements
indicated. Include official results from independent testing agency which establish that
materials meet or exceed test requirements indicated.
F. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's instructions for maintaining appearance and
condition of installed products. Include information on cleaning materials which could damage
carpet.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacture of products specified in
this section, whose products have been in satisfactory use, under similar service conditions, for
not less than 5 years, unless otherwise allowed by the Owner.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in installation of products specified in this
section, with a minimum of 5 years of experience.
C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain all of each different material from a single manufacturer.
1.6 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
A. Fire Performance: Provide carpet capable of meeting the following requirements when tested
in accordance with methods indicated, by UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) or other
independent testing agency acceptable to governing authorities.
1. Methenamine pill test (ASTM D 2859): Passes.
2. Fire hazard classification (ASTM E 84/UL 723/NFPA 255):
a. Class A: Flame spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450.
3. Average critical radiant flux (ASTM E 648/NFPA 253): Minimum 0.45 watt per square
centimeter.
4. Smoke density with flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450.
5. Smoke density without flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450.
09680 - 2 CARPET
F
r 8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
B. Physical Properties: Provide carpet capable of meeting the following requirements when tested
Y P
in accordance with methods indicated.
1. Static electricity generation (AATCC 134): 1.5 kilovolts when tested at 20 percent relative
humidity and 70° F, unless exceptional areas are specifed by Plan and User that 3.5
kilovolts @ 20% RH and 70' F, may be applied.
2. Microbial resistance:
a. Bacterial reduction (AATCC 100): Minimum 90 percent.
b. Fungal growth (AATCC 30): Maximum 20 percent.
c. Diffusion in moisture (AATCC 147): Develops no zone of inhibition.
3. Colorfastness to light (AATCC 16E): Slight fade from 5 to 4 on Gray Scale after 60 hours
exposure.
4. Density: 5000 minimum.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Take measures as required to ensure materials are not damaged or deformed. Store products in
flat position in properly ventilated, dry space. Use suitable means to prevent materials from
lying in direct contact with the ground.
B. Allow carpet to reach room temperature or minimum temperature recommended by manufacturer
before installation.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate work of this section with other work to ensure that installed carpeting materials are
not damaged or soiled.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer, installer, and the contracto, guaranteeing
to correct failures in carpeting which occur within 10 years after substantial completion, without
reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which owne may have under the
contract documents. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship or faulty materials.
Correction may include repair or replacement. Where specifically allowed by the Owner by
exception on plans, carpeting with a written warranty of 5 years with the: above items provided
may be installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Carpet: Provide carpet in colors as selected by the Architect from the colors available in the
following respective carpet patterns:
1. Basis of Design (Carpet 1): Provide Part II as manufactured by Prince Street, Inc.
2. Basis of Design (Carpet 2): Provide Primitive Collection Pterodactyl PD 7020 as
manufactured by Prince Street, Inc.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide accessories recommended by carpet manufacturer.
!^ B. Vinyl or Rubber Edge Guard: Minimum width of anchorage flange 2 inches, size and shape
indicated, colors selected by the architect from manufacturer's standards.
C. Noncombustible Carpet Separator: Extruded aluminum; finish to match other exposed
accessories.
D. Carpet Installation Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended water-resistant adhesive
manufactured for use with type of carpet and substrates indicated, and complying with fire
r performance requirements indicated for carpet.
CARPET 09680 - 3
r
CitXof Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAIVIINATION
A. General: Verifythat substrates are completely dry, free of harmful substances, and in
satisfactory condition to receive carpeting materials.
B. Notify the architect in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin installation until these
conditions have been satisfactorily corrected.
C. Start of installation work constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions and full responsibility
for the completed work.
D. Perform moisture and acidity tests on concrete surfaces where recommended by carpet
manufacturer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Follow carpet manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that each substrate is
properly prepared to receive carpeting. Fill all cracks, gaps, and depressions using carpet
manufacturer's recommended materials and methods.
1. Glue -down installation: Maximum variation in substrate 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B. Level off all high spots or ridges to prevent uneven carpet wear.
C. Determine whether substrates are susceptible to dusting. Apply sealer where required to prevent
formation of dust.
D. Vacuum clean substrate thoroughly, just prior to beginning installation.
E. Maintain temperature of floor and relative humidity of rooms where carpet materials are to be
installed at levels and for periods recommended by carpet manufacturer before, during, and after
installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra
precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work.
B. Stretch carpet tightly over substrate, so that it lies flat, is uniformly smooth and free of bulges.
C. Install materials in a manner which will maximize continuity within carpeted areas. Continue
carpeting into recessed spaces such as closets, and underneath obstacles with open bases.
D. Follow manufacturer's instructions for cutting the carpet, using tools designed to cut type of
carpet being installed.
E. Butt edges together with proper pressure to produce tightest joint possible without distortion,
such as peaking.
F. Provide noncombustible carpet separator wherever carpet is to be installed on both sides of a fire
door.
G. Carpet Glue -down Installation:
1. Maximize consistency of carpet appearance, particularly in terms of lay of pile and carpet
direction. Follow carpet manufacturer's recommendations for placement of seams.
2. Door openings: Orient carpet seam perpendicular to traffic direction. Doorway seam must
be located directly underneath door in closed position.
3. Conform to submitted seaming plan.
4. Cut edges: Securely bind carpet edges not covered by edge guards or similar installation
accessories.
5. Edge guards: Install at exposed carpet edges unless indicated otherwise. Provide secure
attachment to substrate.
09680 - 4 CARPET
1
8/3/98
Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
i
6.
Prefitting: Before applying adhesive to substrate, prefit carpet in areas where it is to be
installed. Where cutting is necessary, provide properly prepared, straight, and unfrayed
edges. Apply seaming cement to edges which will form butted seams.
7.
Installation adhesive: Using trowel of carpet manufacturer's recommended notch size,
apply even layer of adhesive.
8.
Placement: Install prefitted carpet. Butt edges snugly at seams and against vertical
obstructions.
9.
Rolling: Lightly roll carpet as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
10.
Immediately remove adhesive from surface of carpet by method which will not damage
carpet.
11.
Use installation adhesive and application methods that reduce toxic outgassing and other
health hazards during the period the installation is in place.
r"
1
a. Envirotec Healthguard Adhesive #2080.
i
12.
.
Adhesive Removal System:
a. Remove wet adhesive with warn soapy water.
b. Remove dry adhesive with adhesive remover #1; PRO! 909 Heavy Duty adhesive
remover.
c. Spray lightly or blot with a clean terry cloth with a 50-50 mix with water. Rinse with
water.
d. Apply remover directly to adhesive. Brush in. Wait 5 to 30 minutes to scrape up
softened material. Rinse with water. Repeat if necessary.
e. Seaming Tapes: Use 6 inch side tape determined by carpet seaming plan; Envirotec
Grabber #3094 Flat -Wide, 6 inch.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove carpet remnants which are not usable. Comply with owne's instructions for final
disposition of usable remnants. Use commercial -quality vacuum cleaner to thoroughly clean
installed carpeting. Eliminate stains. Contractor shall pay for and replace carpet from which
stains cannot be eliminated using carpet manufacturer's recommended products and methods.
Trim loose yarns where required.
3.5 PROTECTION
T ` A. Do not permit foot traffic or place furniture on glued -down carpet for a minimum of 48 hours
after installation.
B. Ensure that carpet will be clean and without deterioration or damage at date of substantial
completion.
1. Do not wet -clean any glued -down carpet within 60 days of installation.
END OF SECTION 09680
CARPET 09680 - 5
is
F
F
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Painting and finishing of exposed exterior items and surfaces.
2. Painting gnd finishing of exposed interior items and surfaces.
3. Field painting of exposed mechanical and electrical items in finished areas.
B. Section does not include:
1. Factory finishing of manufactured products.
2. Painting of concealed surfaces, unless specifically indicated.
3. Prefinished metal surfaces.
4. Moving parts of equipment.
C. Related Sections:
1. Shop priming of ferrous metal: Division 5.
2. Painting of mechanical work: Division 15.
3. Painting of electrical work: Division 16.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. DIM (dry film mils): Thickness, measured in mils, of a coat of paint in the cured state.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data sheets for each coating.
1. Material analysis including vehicle type and percentage by weight and by volume of vehicle,
resin, and pigment.
2. Application instructions including mixing, surface preparation, compatible primers and
topcoats, recommended wet and dry film thickness, recommended application methods.
B. Color and Texture Samples:
1. Provide for each coating system, color, and texture and applied to representative substrate
samples.
a. Prepare samples to show bare, prepared surface and each successive coat.
b. Label each sample with coating name and color.
PAINTING 09900 - 1
d'
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2. Miscellaneous substrates: 12-by-12-inch hardboard.
3. Concrete masonry: 8-by-16-inch samples; include mortar joint.
4. Wood: 8-inch square samples for surfaces; 8-inch long samples for trim.
5. Metal: 5-by-7-inch samples.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials:
1. All coating materials required by this section shall be provided by a single manufacturer,
unless otherwise required or approved.
B. Applicator: Firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in painting work similar in
scope to work of this project.
1. Maintain throughout duration of the work a crew of painters who are fully qualified to satisfy
requirements of the specifications.
C. Mock-up: Before proceeding with work of this section, finish one complete space or item of each
color scheme required, showing selected colors, finish texture, materials, and workmanship.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers bearing coating name and color,
material composition data, date of manufacture, legal notices if applicable, and mixing, thinning,
and application instructions.
B. Storage:
1. Store materials in an orderly fashion and in clean, well -closed containers with labels intact.
2. Maintain above 40 degrees F. Do not allow materials to freeze.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only under the following environmental conditions:
1. Air and surface temperatures are between 50 and 100 degrees F, unless otherwise
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Surface temperature is at least 5 degrees F above dew point.
3. Relative humidity is less than 85 percent.
B. Do not apply coatings during inclement weather except within enclosed, conditioned spaces.
1. Provide temporary lighting to achieve a well -lit surface with a level of at least 80 footcandles
measured mid -height.
2. Provide continuous ventilation and heating to prevent accumulation of hazardous fumes and
to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before,
during, and for 48 hours after application of finishes, or longer if required to obtain fuel cure
as indicated by manufacturer's instructions.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. General: Perform work in proper sequence with work of other trades to avoid damage to finished
work. _
09900 - 2 PAINTING
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
I B. Coordination: Where special coatings will be applied over shop coatings specified in other
sections, coordinate work of such other sections to ensure that only approved, compatible primers
are applied.
1. Furnish the architec with product data on both coatings demonstrating coating compatibility.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The brand -name products listed in the schedule at the end of this section and made by the
following manufacturer are the basis of the contract documents:
1. Devoe & Raynolds Company.
B. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract
documents, will be among those considered in accordance with standard substitution procedures:
r 1. The Glidden Company.
2. Benjamin Moore & Company.
3. ICI Devoe.
4. PPG Industries, Inc./Pittsburgh Paints.
5. Pratt & Lambert, Inc.
6. Sherwin Williams Company.
2.2 PRODUCTS
A. Colors:
1. For multicoat systems, apply each coat using a successively darker tint or shade, unless
approved otherwise.
2. Top coat colors: As indicated in color schedule.
B. Lead Content:
1. Zero percent lead content by weight (calculated as lead metal).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready for work in accordance with coating manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Prior to commencement of work, examine surfaces scheduled to be finished. .
1. Report any unsatisfactory conditions in writing.
2. Do not apply coatings to unsatisfactory substrates.
3. Beginning painting work on an area will be deemed construed acceptance of surfaces in that
area.
r PAINTTNG 09900 - 3
k
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Apply coatings to surfaces that are clean and properly prepared in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and as herein specified. Remove dirt, dust, grease, oils, and foreign matter. Prepare
surface for proper texture necessary to optimum coating adhesion and intended finished
appearance. Plan cleaning, preparation, and coating operations to avoid contamination of freshly
coated surfaces.
1. Do not apply coatings to labels that identify equipment, fire -resistance ratings, etc.
2. Remove hardware, cover plates, and similar items before applying coatings.
3. Provide protection for non -removable items not scheduled for coating. After application of
coatings, install removed items. Use only skilled workmen for removal and replacement of
such items.
4. Protect surfaces not scheduled for coating. Clean, repair, or replace to the satisfaction of the
architec any surfaces inadvertently spattered or coated.
B. Concrete:
1. Apply coatings to fully cured surfaces that are at least 28 days old.
2. Perform any required surface repairs before applying coatings. Remove any fins or
protrusions from surface. Patch any holes and cracks in an approved manner.
3. Clean surface of all dirt, oil, wax, grease, or other contaminants before preparing surface
profile. Use appropriate detergents and pressurized hot water. Thoroughly flush cleaning
agents from surface.
4. Surface profile, horizontal surfaces: Acid etch or brush-off blast to remove laitance and to
prepare surface profile. New surfaces that have been cured using membrane -forming curing
compounds shall be prepared by brush-off blast method.
5. Acid etching: Prepare surface profile by uniformly etching surface to a texture, to touch, of
100 grit sandpaper; do not over -etch surface. After etching, surface shall be free from
surface glaze, laitance, salts, loosely adhering material, etching solutions, and foreign
material of any kind.
a. After detergent cleaning and while floor is in a saturated but surface dry condition,
apply acid solution (1 part 20 degree Baume muriatic acid to 2 to 4 parts potable water)
using low pressure pray equipment.
b. When bubbling action begins to subside, remove salt formations, loose material, and
spent solution by scrubbing with stiff bristle broom and flushing with water under
moderate pressure. Repeat rinsing operation until pH test papers yield a pH of 7 or
higher on the surface.
6. Brush-off blast cleaning: Prepare surface profile and remove laitance and solid contaminants
from surface by abrasive blast cleaning. After blast cleaning, surface shall be free from
curing compounds, surface glaze,, laitance, salts, loosely adhering material, and foreign
material of any kind.
a. Perform blasting operation so as to open any surface voids, bugholes, etc., and to
remove curing compounds, surface glaze, laitance, salts, loosely adhering material, and
foreign material of any kind, but without exposing underlying aggregate or fracturing
aggregate surfaces.
b. Use only dry, oil -free air and clean media, unless other blast cleaning methods are
approved.
c. After blast cleaning, completely remove dust and loose particles by vacuuming;
brushing or blowing will not be permitted.
09900 - 4 PAINTING
R
8/3/98 Buddy Dolly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
J
d. Patch surface voids, bugholes, etc., in an approved manner, and allow to cure before
applying coatings.
7.. Allow substrate to dry thoroughly. Test for moisture in accordance with coating
manufacturer's recommendations before applying coatings.
C. Masonry:
1. Apply coatings to fully cured surfaces that are at least 28 days old.
2. Perform any required surface repairs before applying coatings. Remove any fins or
protrusions from surface. Patch any holes and cracks in an approved manner. Verify the
joints are struck flush or concave unless otherwise specifically required.
3. Clean surface of all dirt, oil, wax, grease, or other contaminants. Use appropriate detergents
and hot water. Thoroughly flush cleaning agents from surface.
D. Wood: Scrape and remove any sap or pitch deposits from surface and clean with mineral spirits.
Seal any knots and pitch pockets with a suitable product recommended by the coating
manufacturer. Sand rough spots. Remove dust.
1. After first coat has dried, fill holes, cracks, or depressions with a suitable wood filler
recommended by the coating manufacturer. Sand filler when dry.
2. Sand surfaces lightly between successive coats. Remove dust.
E. Ferrous Metal:
1. Clean and prepare surface profile in accordance with the applicable SSPC specifications for
hand tool or power tool cleaning.
2. Intricate fabricated shapes may be pickled in lieu of hand or power tool cleaning.
3. Before hand or power tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residue, and
salts by solvent cleaning. After hand or power tool cleaning, reclean surfaces if necessary.
4. Before touching up coatings damaged by handling or welding, reprepare damaged surfaces.
F. Galvanized Metal: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC specifications.
G. Gypsum Board:
1. Latex -fill minor defects.
2. Spot -prime defects after repair.
H. Plaster:
1. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster.
2. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
3. Wash and neutralize high -alkali surfaces.
I. Mildew:
1. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach.
2. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
r PAINTING 09900 - 5
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
mium ON _ 1 stt�t�tl
A. Remove and discard any skin formed on surface of coatings in containers. Discard any containers
where skin comprises 2 percent or more of the remaining material. Do not add thinner except as
specifically recommended (not merely permitted) by the coating manufacturer for proper coating
application under the circumstances prevailing at the project site when application equipment
recommended by the coating manufacturer is employed. Use only the quantities and the types of
thinner recommended.
B. Mix materials using mechanical mixers in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions.
Agitate mixed materials during application if recommended by manufacturer.
C. Combine multi -component paints in quantities needed for use within the manufacturer's
recommended pot life at the anticipated application temperatures. Discard remaining mixed
material after pot life has expired.
D. Strain pigmented coatings after mixing except where mechanical application equipment is
provided with effective strainers.
E. Tinting: Except where coating materials cannot be tinted, tint each 'successive coat of paint a
sufficiently contrasting color to facilitate identification of complete coating coverage.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and using application
method best suited for obtaining full, uniform coverage of surfaces to be coated.
2. Employ only application equipment that is clean, properly adjusted, in good working order,
and of the type recommended by the coating manufacturer.
3. Apply successive coats after adequate cure of the preceding coat and within the
recommended recoating time.
4. Apply each coat to achieve the dry film thickness per coat recommended by the coating
manufacturer. Application rates in excess of those recommended and fewer numbers of
coats than specified will not be accepted.
5. Completed coatings shall be free of defects such as runs, sags, variations in color, lap or
brush marks, holidays, and skips.
6. Apply coatings according to the schedule at the end of this section and as otherwise
indicated. Coat all similar surfaces not specifically mentioned unless specifically exempted.
a. Ensure that all surfaces receive a dry film thickness equivalent to those of flat surfaces.
7. Coat front and back of miscellaneous items such as covers, access panels, and grilles. Apply
fully finish coats behind movable items of furniture and equipment before installation.
Apply prime coat only behind non -movable items of furniture and equipment before
installation.
8. Sand gloss coats before applying subsequent coatings.
B. Apply coatings to match approved mock-ups.
C. Remove coatings not in compliance with this specification, reclean and re -prepare surfaces as
specified, and apply coatings to comply with the contract documents.
09900 6 PAINTING
0
8/3/98 Buddy Molly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
I
D. Scheduling:
r1. Apply first coat of material to properly prepared surfaces without delay.
is
a. Apply successive coats within the time limits recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Items:
1. Paint electrical items exposed to view in finished spaces (does not include mechanical and
electrical rooms).
2. Paint mechanical items exposed to view in finished spaces (does not include mechanical and
electrical rooms).
3. Color -band and identify each component with the following:
a. Flow arrows.
b. Name.
4. Paint the following mechanical items only in finished areas:
a. Piping and supports.
b. Others as indicated on drawings.
5. Paint the following electrical items only in finished areas:
a. Conduit and fittings.
b. Panel enclosures.
c. Others as indicated on drawings.
3.5 PRIME COATS
A. General:
1. Field apply bottom coats scheduled except where the contract documents require shop
coating of ferrous metals.
2. Where first coat shows signs of suction spots or poorly sealed areas, reapply first coat
material to adequately seal surface before proceding with successive coats.
3. Apply block fillers using manufacturer's recommended application techniques and achieving
a pinhole -free surface.
4. Ferrous metals that have not been shop primed shall be field primed promptly after arrival at
the site or shall be stored away from the effects of weather.
5. Reprepare and retouch damaged prime coats using approved, compatible primer.
6. Do not omit bottom coat on exterior factory -primed hardboard surfaces. A full field -applied
bottom coat is required on exterior hardboard, whether or not factory primed.
B. Primers for Wood and Wood Products:
1.
Apply first coat to wood upon receipt at the site and before wood is exposed to sun or rain.
s
2.
Before installation, prime both concealed and exposed surfaces of interior wood, including
cut ends.
t�
3.
Prime edges and ends, including cut surfaces, of exterior plywood prior to installation.
4.
Prime edges and ends, including cut surfaces, of exterior hardboard prior to installation.
PAINTING
09900 - 7
E:
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
3.6 FINISH COATS
A. Number of Coats and Minimum Coating Thickness:
1. Apply not less than the number of coats indicated.
2. Apply each coat to achieve not less than the dry film thicknesses indicated per coat. —
3. Apply additional coats at no additional cost to the owne when necessary to achieve complete
hiding, uniform texture, or uniform sheen and appearance.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning:
1. Clean work area on a daily basis; dispose of spent materials and empty containers. If
requested, turn over the architec all empty coatings containers used during the course of each
day.
2. Remove all trace of coatings from adjacent surfaces not scheduled to be coated. Remove by
appropriate methods that do not damage surfaces.
B. Protection:
1. Protect work against damage until fully cured. Provide signs identifying wet surfaces until
surfaces are adequately cured.
2. Shortly before final completion of the project, examine surfaces for damage to coatings and
restore coatings to new, undamaged condition.
3. Touch-up of minor damage will be acceptable where result is not visibly different from
surrounding surfaces. Where result is different either in color, sheen, or texture, recoat entire
surface.
3.8 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS FOR INTERIOR NONTRAFFIC SURFACES
A. Gypsum Wallboard:
1. Latex, eggshell.
a. Bottom coat: Wonder -Tones Interior Vinyl Latex Primer -Sealer 50801; 1.2 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as topcoat.
c. Top coat: Wonder -Tones Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel 34XX; 1.5 DFM.
2. Alkyd, semigloss.
a. Bottom coat: Wonder -Tones Interior Vinyl Latex Primer -Sealer 50801; 1.2 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
c. Top coat: Velour Interior Alkyd Semigloss Enamel 26XX; 1.7 DFM.
3. Water -base epoxy, low gloss.
a. Bottom coat: Wonder -Tones Interior Vinyl Latex Primer -Sealer 50801; 1.2 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
c. Top coat: Tru-Glaze-WB Water Based Epoxy Semi -Gloss Coating 128XX/12902; 2.0 - —
3.0 DFM.
09900 - 8 PAINTING
8/3/98 Buddy Holly .Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
B. Concrete Masonry Units - Filled Finish:
1. Alkyd, eggshell
r
a. Bottom coat: Bloxfil Interior -Exterior Acrylic Latex Block Filler 52901.
b. Top coat: Velour Interior Alkyd Eggshell Enamel 23XX; 1.7 DFM.
2. Water -base epoxy, low gloss.
a. Bottom coat: Bloxfil Interior -Exterior Acrylic Latex Block Filler 52901.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
c. Top coat: Tru-Glaze-WB Water Based Epoxy Semi -Gloss Coating 128=12902; 2.0 -
r- 3.0 DFM.
C. Wood:
1. Alkyd, semigloss.
a. Bottom coat: Velour Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat 8801; 2.0 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
c. Top coat: Velour Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel 26XX; 1.7 DFM.
2. Varnish, satin (filled and stained wood).
a. Filler: Wonder Woodstain Interior Paste Wood Filler 4800.
b. Stain: Wonder Woodstain Interior Alkyd Stain 96XX; 0.9 DFM.
c. Bottom and intermediate coats: Mirrothane Interior -Exterior Polyurethane Varnish,
Gloss 6700; 1.0 DFM.
d. Top coat: Mirrothane Interior -Exterior Polyurethane Varnish, Satin 6600; 1.0 DFM.
D. Ferrous Metal:
1. Latex, satin.
a. Bottom coat: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red; 2.0 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
c. Top coat: 564XX DO-Vo-Ko Lo-Luster Alkyd H.P.; 1.2 DFM each coat.
E. Galvanized Metal:
1. Latex, eggshell.
a. Bottom coat: Min olac Galvanized Metal Primer 13201; 1.5 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
c. Top coat: Wonder -Tones Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel 70XX Mirrolac
Interior/Exterior Alkyd -Urethane Gloss Enamel; 1.5 DFM each coat.
3.9 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS FOR INTERIOR TRAFFIC SURFACES
A. Concrete:
1- Alkyd/urethane floor enamel, gloss.
�.. PAINTING 09900 - 9
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98 _
a. Bottom coat: Top coat material thinned with 1/2 pint mineral spirits per gallon.
b. Top coat: Porch & Floor Alkyd Urethane Gloss Enamel 77XX; 1.5 DFM.
3.10 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS FOR EXTERIOR NONTRAFFIC SURFACES
A. Concrete Masonry Units - Filled Finish:
1. Latex, flat.
a. Bottom coat: Bloxfil Interior -Exterior Acrylic Latex Block Filler 52901.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
c. Top coat: Wonder -Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint 15XX; 1.4 DFM.
B. Plaster (Stucco):
1. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: 1502 Wonder -Shield Exterior Latex House Paint Primer; 1.5 DFM.
b. Intermediate Coat: Same as top coat.
c. Top Coat: 17XX Wonder -Shield Acrylic Latex House; 2.4 DFM.
C. Ferrous Metal:
1. Alkyd, semigloss.
a. Bottom coat: Mirrolac Cover Up Rust Penetrating Metal Primer 13101; 2.0 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
c. Top coat: Triple -Cover Exterior Alkyd Semi -Gloss House Paint 502XX; 2.2 DFM.
D. Galvanized Metal:
1. Alkyd, semigloss.
a. Bottom coat: Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer 13201; 1.5 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as'top coat.
c. Top coat: Triple -Cover Exterior Alkyd Semi -Gloss House Paint 502XX; 2.2 DFM.
E. Aluminum:
1. Alkyd, semigloss.
a. Bottom coat: Bar-Ox Zinc Chromate Primer, 41839; 1.5 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. _
c. Top coat: 70XX Mirrorlac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Semigloss Enamel; 2.2 DFM.
PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE FOLLOWS
09900 - 10 PAINTING --
PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE
INTERIOR RM #
PAINT #
LOCATION
Lobby 101
1
Walls, ceiling, doors 6, 7, 35
Tickets 102
1
WaIls, ceiling, door 3
Coats 103
1
Walls, ceiling, shelves, door 3
Corridor 104
1
Walls, ceiling, door 25
Corridor 104a
1
Walls, ceiling, door 25
Corridor 104b
1
Walls, ceiling, doors 4, 36, 37
Corridor 104c
1
Walls, ceiling, doors 22, 23, 24
Theater 105
2
Walls, door 36 Note: color #2 dark gray or black. If black
- - -
Ceiling, cabinet (black) ceiling & cab's will be color #2.
BH Gallery 106
3
Main walls, cove, doors 4, 6, 7
4
Louver screens, trusses
5
Metal deck, purlins
Gallery Two 107
1
Walls
6
Doors 8, 35
7
Ceiling, steel beam
Education 108
1
Walls, ceiling
6
Door 8
8
Door 10
Storage #3 109
1
Walls, doors 10, 11
Archive 110
1
Walls, ceiling, door 11
Mechanical 111
1
Walls, ceiling, door 12
Conference 112
9
Walls, windows, doors 13, 14
1
Ceiling
Mechanical 113
1
Walls, ceiling, door 14
Kitchen 114
1
Walls, ceiling
Media 115
9
Walls, windows
1
Ceiling
Reception 116
9
Walls, windows, doors 13, 16
1
Ceiling
Assistants 117
9
Walls, windows
1
Ceiling
Coordinators 118
9
Walls, windows, doors 17, 18
1
Ceiling
Manager 119
9
Walls, windows, door 18
1
Ceiling
LS Office 120
9
Walls, windows, door 19
1
Ceiling
Storage 121
1
Walls, ceiling, door 20
Lobby Shop 122
1
Walls, ceiling
8
Doors 17, 19, 20
10
Base and casings for doors 17, 19, 20
INTERIOR RM #
PAINT #
LOCATION
Women 123
8
Window, door 22
1
Ceiling
Men 124
8
Window, door 23
1
Ceiling
Janitor 125
1
Walls, ceiling, door 24
Mechanical 126
1
Walls, ceiling, door 28
Gallery One 127
1
Walls, display anels, ceiling
8
Doors
10
Trim, windows, door casings
Storage #1 128
1
Walls, ceiling, doors 30, 31, 32
Loading 129
1
Walls, ceiling, doors 32, 33, 34
Mechanical 130
1
Walls, door 38
Mechanical 131
1
Walls, door 39
Interior Misc Mtls
13
All painted miscellaneous metals
EXTERIOR ITEM
PAINT #
LOCATION
Doors
11
Doors 12, 29, 31, 33, 34, 37
Windows
12
Existing windows
Railings, Misc Mtls
13
Railings supporting handrails, guardrails, all ptd. misc. metals
Courtyard Canopy
14
Columns, steel structure
Note:
1. Paint contractors shall do 2 sample coats per paint color. _
2. Paint colors for any item or surface not specifically called out in the Paint Color Schedule
will be custom selected by the Architect.
END OF SECTION 09900
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
SECTION 09931 - EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUI*IENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood stains to exterior wood
surfaces as scheduled.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for other exterior coatings and for stained and natural -finished
interior woodwork.
1.3 . SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each stain system specified.
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required stain material. Indicate each material and cross-
reference the specific stain system and application. Identify each exterior wood stain
material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis
and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each exterior wood stain material
proposed for use.
3. Certification by stain manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of VOCs.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for each type of finish -coat material indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and stain material to be applied, with texture to
simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of actual substrates.
1. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required
sheen, color and texture are achieved.
2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each
sample for location and application.
3. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture
only:
a. Stained or Natural -Finished Wood: Provide two 6-inch (150-mm) square samples of
each stained wood finish to be used on actual wood surfaces simulating actual
conditions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has successfully completed
exterior wood stain applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for this Project
with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide full -coat benchmark finish samples of each type of
stain and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5.
Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples.
1. The Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of
stain and substrate to be stained.
a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. in) of wall surface.
b. Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area as required.
k
r EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS 09931 - 1
i
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
2. Apply stains to each surface according to the schedule or as specified. Provide required
sheen, color, and texture on each surface.
a. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the surface to evaluate stain systems
of a similar nature.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project site in the manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification).
3. Manufacturer's name and stock number.
4. Date of manufacture.
5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
6. Thinning instructions.
7. Application instructions.
8. Color name and number.
9. Handling instructions and precautions.
10. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean
condition, free from foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from
fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and applying stains.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temperature Conditions: Apply stains only when temperature of surfaces to be stained and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) for oil -based stain or 50 deg F
(10 deg C) for latex -based stain, and 90 deg F (32 deg Q.
B. Weather Conditions: Do not apply stain in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity
exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to
damp or wet surfaces.
1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before
starting or continuing with coating operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, exterior wood stain products that
may be incorporated into this Project include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Stain
Schedule.
B. Manufacturer's Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the Stain Schedule by
use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parenthesis:
1. Samuel Cabot Inc. (Cabot).
2. Devoe & Raynolds Co. (Devoe).
3. Fuller -O'Brien Paints (Fuller).
4. Glidden Co. (The) (Glidden).
5. Moore: Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore).
6. PPG Industries, Inc.; Rez Stains (Rez) & Olympic Stain (Olympic).
7. Pratt & Lambert, Inc. (P & L).
8. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W).
09931 2 EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
2.2 EXTERIOR WOOD STAIN MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality of the various types of exterior wood
stain specified. Stain containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not
acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
r or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's
material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
r- B. Colors: Provide custom colors of the finished stain to match the Architect's samples.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXANIINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which stain will be
applied for compliance with stain application requirements. Surfaces to be stained must be
thoroughly dry before stains are applied.
1. Begin application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Start of application will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which other coatings are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total systems for various substrates.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be stained. If removal is impractical
or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before
surface preparation and staining.
1. After completing staining operations, reinstall items removed, using workers skilled in
trades involved.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be stained according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. Allow unseasoned
or shiny new wood to weather 3 months before staining.
1. Remove surface dirt, oil, or grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly
with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding
lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing.
2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial mildew wash formulated for mildew
removal and as recommended by the stain manufacturer.
3. Previously Stained Work: Renail loose or warped shingles or siding using galvanized or
aluminum nails.
C. Mixing: Mix and prepare stains according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stir
thoroughly before applying stain, and stir frequently during application to maintain color
consistency.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
3.3 APPLICATION
T" A. Minimum Spreading Rate: Apply stain at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to ensure
proper penetration of material Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type
rr of stain material being applied.
G
E
EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS 09931 -3
i
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1. Do not apply stain on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Ensure that each coat is dry
and hard before the succeeding coat is applied.
B. Apply stain evenly with brush, roller, or spray. Thoroughly stain edges and ends of boards.
Brush out excess stain that collects in butts of shingles or boards. Avoid staining in direct
sunlight.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brushes of appropriate
size for surface being stained.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by
the stain manufacturer.
3. Spraying: Use airless or conventional air -atomizing, high-pressure spraying equipment with
orifice size as recommended by the stain manufacturer. Ensure that an adequate amount
of stain is applied to surface. Use a 40- to 60-degree fan angle. Back brush immediately
after each section is coated.
4. Drying Time: Allow 3 to 5 days between coats.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from the Project site.
1. After completing staining work, clean window glass and other surfaces. Remove spattered
stain by proper methods, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether stained or not, against damage from staining. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and restaining as approved by the Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly stained finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing staining work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced stained
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
3.6 STAIN SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Wood Siding: Provide the following stain systems over exterior wood siding, shingles,
shakes, and wood trim including fasciae and soffits:
1. Semitransparent Finish: One or 2 coats.
a. First and Second Coats: Oil- or alkyd -resin -based stain applied at spreading rate
recommended by manufacturer.
1) Cabot: 0300 Series Cabot Semi -Transparent Oil Stains.
2) Devoe: 9000 Series All Weather Semi -Transparent Alkyd Stain.
3) Fuller: Ful-Stain Semi -Transparent Stain 645XX.
4) Glidden: 9721 Endurance Semi -Transparent Oil Stain.
5) Moore: 081 Moorwood Semi -Transparent Stain and Wood Preservative.
6) Olympic: Semi -Transparent Oil Stain.
7) P & L: C30097 Stainshield Penetrating Oil Rustic Stain.
8) Rez: 77-860, 900 Series Rez Semi -Transparent `Wood Preservative and Water
Repellent Stains.
9) S-W: Semi -Transparent Wood Preservative Stain A14 Series.
09931 4 EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
B. Wood Decks: Provide the following stain systems over exterior wood decks, fences, and
screens:
1. Semitransparent Finish: 2 coats.
a. First and Second Coats: Oil- or alkyd -resin -based stain applied at spreading rate
recommended by manufacturer.
1) Devoe: 9000 Series All Weather Semi -Transparent Alkyd Stain and Wood
Preservative.
2) Moore: 081 Moore's Moorwood Semi -Transparent Stain and Wood Preservative.
3) P & L: C30097 Stainshield Penetrating Oil Rustic Stain.
4) Rez: 77-860, 900 Series Rez Semi -Transparent Wood Preservative and Water
Repellent Stains.
END OF SECTION 09931
EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS 09931 - 5
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
'SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERINGS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes vinyl wall covering.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E 84-91a -- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 1991.
B. FS CCC-W-408A -- Wall Covering, Vinyl -Coated; October 7, 1971.
C. FS CCC-W-408C -- Wall Covering, Vinyl -Coated; July 11, 1989.
E D. Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1992.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for wall
coverings and installation materials.
B. Verification Samples: Submit full width samples of each wall covering, illustrating range of
color and pattern variation.
C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's instructions for maintenance of installed work,
including precautions for use of cleaning materials which could damage wall coverings.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: A firm specializing in wall covering work with not less than 5 years of experience in
installing wall coverings similar to those required for this project.
B. Fire Hazard Classification: Provide wall coverings which have been tested in accordance with
ASTM E 84 and certified for not less than the following performance:
1. Class A: Flame spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450.
C. UL Label: Provide materials bearing UL label and marking, indicating compliance with fire
hazard classification requirements.
D. Field Constructed Mock-up: Install 3 full -width panels for each type of wall covering required,
including one corner, in areas designated by the architectt. Satisfactory installation may be
incorporated as part of finished work.
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. The proprietary selections indicated herein are not intended to eliminate other products being
used on the Project; however, the selections contained herein are coordinated with specific
selections in other specification sections and therefore the use of other products can be approved
by the Architect only prior to bid opening by submitting to the Architect all necessary
information and samples necessary for the Architect to evaluate the proposed product. Refer to
Division 1 for additional information concerning procedures for substitutions.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING '
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, labeled clearly to permit identification
without opening.
B. Store materials under cover in original undamaged packages or containers. Do not store rolled
goods in upright position. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40 degrees F and below
90 degrees F.
(,,,, WALL AND PANEL COVERINGS 09950 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temperature: Maintain temperature between 60 degrees F and 90 degrees F at areas of
installation for at least 72 hours before and 72 hours after application of materials.
B. Lighting: Install wall covering materials only after permanent lighting system is installed and
operable in areas of installation.,
C. Ventilation: Where toxic materials and flammable or explosive solvents and adhesives are used,
maintain appropriate precautions and provide adequate and continuous ventilation during
installation and until volatile substances have dispersed.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Materials: After wall covering installation has been completed, deliver to the
owner replacement and patching materials for materials installed. Furnish maintenance materials
which precisely match materials installed, in manufacturer's original, labeled containers, and in
quantities not less than the following:
1. Vinyl wall covering: 2 percent of.the number of rolls installed of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL WALL COVERING
A. General: Provide wall covering treated with mildewcide and germicide, with minimum total
weight and minimum coating weight specified in FS CCC-W-408A for vinyl wall covering type
indicated, and complying with FS CCC-W-408C for other requirements.
B. Vinyl Wall Covering 1:
1. Manufacturer: J. Josephson.
2. Weight: 21 ounce per In. yd.
3. Width: 54 inches.
4. Pattern/type: Overture Suite.
5. Color: As selected by the Architect.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives and Sealers: Provide products recommended specifically by manufacturer of wall
covering for use on scheduled substrates and certified to be mildew resistant and nonstaining to
wall covering.
B. Drywall Sealer: Surface sealer for gypsum wallboard substrates, formulated to permit removal
of wall covering without damage to wallboard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove wall covering materials from packaging and place in area of installation not less than
24 hours before commencing installation. _
B. Temporarily remove electrical cover plates and other surface -mounted fixtures in areas to receive
wall coverings.
C. Gypsum Wallboard Substrates: Patch nicks, scratches, and other surface irregularities in gypsum
wallboard substrates with latex filler.
1. Sand filling material smooth and flush with substrate.
D. Prime and seal substrates in accordance with wall covering manufacturer's recommendations for '—
type of substrate.
1. Apply release coat to gypsum drywall.
09950 - 2 WALL AND PANEL COVERINGS
a
�I
r 8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
l E. Test substrates with electronic moisture meter to verify that moisture content does not exceed
limits recommended by manufacturer of wall coverings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra
precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work.
B. Vinyl Wall Covering Installation:
1. Install sequential lengths of vinyl wall covering consecutively, reversing alternate strips
unless pattern will not permit reversal. Do not skip areas above and below openings for
subsequent installation. Unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings make all
seams plumb.
2. Plan installation so that seams do not occur within 4 inches of corners or major openings.
Install vinyl wall covering by applying adhesive to its back surface and pressing wall
covering into place before adhesive has set. Except where prohibited by pattern design,
overlap edges slightly and cut through both layers to create tightly butted seams. Smooth
with brush, roller, or other device to eliminate wrinkles, air bubbles, and other
imperfections before adhesive has set.
3. Clean away excess adhesive at seams before it has set, using a damp sponge.
4. Trim vinyl wall covering carefully at electrical boxes and other interruptions to avoid gaps
and necessity for patches.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Carefully replace electrical cover plates and other fixtures temporarily removed in preparation
for wall covering installation. Correct any areas where wall covering gaps occur to the
satisfaction of the architectt.
B. Clean areas where wall covering installation has occurred of all resulting debris. Remove scraps,
excess material, traces of adhesive, and other trash, leaving the premises in neat and clean
condition.
END OF SECTION 09950
WALL AND PANEL COVERINGS 09950 - 3
t
6�
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
t SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows:
1. Type: Steel, baked enamel finish.
2. Compartment Style: Floor mounted, overhead braced.
3. Screen Style: Wall hung.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 10 "Toilet Accessories" for toilet tissue holders, grab bars and similar accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract.
B. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include
details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of
anchors, hardware, and fastenings.
C. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment -mounted toilet accessories.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of actual units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment
or screen indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: Of each compartment or screen color and finish required, prepared
on 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units without field measurements.
Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Provide Floor Mounted, Overhead Braced Toilet with Baked Enamel finish
(Black) as manufactured by Global Steel Products Corp. or, subject to compliance with
requirements, Architect approved toilet compartments manufactured by one of the following:
1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.
2. Ampco Southwest.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Capitol Partitions, Inc.
5. Commercial and Architectural Products, Inc.; Marlite.
1 6. Crane Plumbing; Sanymetal.
r TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 1
l:
City,of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
7. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
8. Global Steel Products Corp.
9. Santana Products, Inc.
10. Tex -Lam Manufacturing, Inc.
11. Weis/Robart Partitions, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness.
Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations,
telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable.
B. Steel Sheets for Color -Coated Finish: Provide mill-phosphatized steel sheet that is leveled to
stretcher -leveled flatness complying with the requirements of standards indicated below:
1. Electrolytically Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591 (ASTM A 591M), Class C, of the
following minimum thicknesses:
a. Pilasters: 0.0478 inch.
b. Panels and Screens: 0.0359 inch.
c. Doors: 0.0299 inch.
d. Tapping Reinforcement: 0.0747 inch.
2. Hot -Dip Galvanized or Galvanealed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, in manufacturer's standard
coating designation and of the following minimum thicknesses:
a. Pilasters (Overhead Braced): 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
b. Pilasters (Unbraced): 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
c. Panels and Screens: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
d. Doors: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm).
e. Tapping Reinforcement: 0.079 inch (2.0 mm).
C. Core Material for Metal -Faced Units: Manufacturer's standard sound -deadening honeycomb of
resin -impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25
mm) minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum for pilasters.
D. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or U-brackets for attaching panels and screens
to walls and pilasters of the following material:
1. Material: Stainless steel.
E. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and
accessories of the following material:
1. Material: Stainless steel.
F. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded -aluminum head rail with
antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish.
G. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or
chrome -plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft -resistant -type heads.
Provide sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip
galvanized or other rust -resistant, protective -coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment
system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment -mounted hardware,
accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Metal -Faced Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core
material and provide continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edges. Seal
corners by welding or clips. Grind exposed welds smooth.
10155 - 2 TOILET. COMPARTMENTS _
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r _
` C. Overhead -Braced -and -Floor -Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard
corrosion -resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor
(^ conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster.
l Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
D. Wall -Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and finish as
compartment panels, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide 18" x 48" metal -faced screens with integral full -height flanges for attachment to
wall.
E. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in -swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out -swinging doors with a minimum
32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped
accessible.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self -closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open
at any angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit designed for emergency access and with
combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with
accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to
be handicapped accessible.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized
to prevent door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber -tipped bumpers at out -swinging doors or
entrance screen doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction at out -swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors
at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
2.4 ZINC- OR ZINC -ALLOY -COATED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations relative to applying finishes.
B. Color -Coated Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with coating
manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film
thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) between
pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Secure units
in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and
bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or file
joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Ceiling -Hung Compartments: Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and
tighten. Hang doors and adjust so bottoms of doors are level with bottoms of pilasters when
doors are in closed position.
C. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and to
suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 -3
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold open approximately
30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors and swing
doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 10155
10155 - 4 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
I
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
FSECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on drawings and schedules.
B. Types of toilet accessories required include the following:
1. Toilet tissue dispenser.
2. Paper towel dispenser.
3. Waste receptacle unit.
4. Grab bars.
5. Soap dispensers.
6. Sanitary napkin/tampon disposal units.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete
or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and
to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units.
C. Products: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units
exposed in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each toilet
accessory.
B. Samples: Submit full-size samples of units to Architect for review of design and operation.
Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work.
C. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for
installation of anchorage devices and cut-out requirements in other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet accessories by one of
the following:
! 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
2. Bradley Corporation.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 22 gage (.034") minimum,
�.• unless otherwise indicated.
r B. Sheet Steel: Cold -rolled, commercial quality, ASTM A 366, 20-gage (0.40") minimum, unless
otherwise indicated. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527, G60.
D. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B 456, Type
SC 2.
E. Baked Enamel Finish: Factory -applied, gloss white, baked acrylic enamel coating.
r,. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
F. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication.
G. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of galvanized
steel where concealed.
2.3 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER
A. Jumbo Roll Dispenser: Sized to accommodate two separate jumbo rolls of core type tissue with
10" diameter.
1. Fabrication: Spindleless chrome -plated zinc alloy construction with tension spring delivery
control; designed for surface mounting. Cabinet body made of molded transparent (tinted)
acrylic plastic.
2. Basis of Design: Scott Paper Company model JRT Jr. Twin Dispenser, In -Sight; Model
No. 9550.
2.4 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER
A. Recessed Unit: Stainless steel unit fabricated for nominal 4" wall depth and with continuous
seamless 1" wall flange. Provide towel compartment in upper portion of unit, with mechanism
to dispense universal continuous roll paper towel with a pull -down lever -type dispenser, panel
door with continuous piano hinge and tumbler lock.
1. Basis of Design: Bobrick Model No. B-3860.
2.5 WASTE RECEPTACLE
A. Surface Mounted Unit: Type 304 satin finish stainless steel unit fabricated for wall surface
mounting. 7 gallon capacity, 14 inches wide, 18 inches high, 6 inches deep. Provide with
heavy vinyl liner.
Basis of Design: Bobrick Model No. B-279.
2.6 GRAB BARS
A. Stainless Steel Type: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 18 (.05011) gage and
as follows:
1. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorages.
a. Mounting Anchors: Bobrick Nos. 2562, 2572, 2582 and 2592.
2. Clearance: 1-1/2" clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar.
3. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard non -slip texture.
4. Heavy -Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1'/z".
5. Basis of Design: Bobrick Series B-6106, 36 inch and 42 inch.
2.7 SOAP DISPENSERS
A. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Deck -Mounted: Deck -mounted piston and spout -type unit with
minimum 32-fluid-ounce-capacity polyethylene diposable refill reservoir concealed below deck.
Piston and 4-inch long spout of stainless steel with bright polished finish with chrome -plated
deck escutcheon.
1. Provide unit designed for mounting on vanity deck.
2. Equip unit with valve for dispensing soap in liquid form.
3. Basis of Design: Bobrick Model No. B-822.
2.8 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNITS
A. Surface -Mounted Unit: Fabricate of stainless steel equipped with self -closing door and all -
welded stainless steel receptacle; 7 1/2" wide x 10" high x V/i6" deep.
1. Basis of Design: Bobrick Model No. B-270.
10800 - 2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
fir+
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
2.9 FABRICATION
A. General: Only an unobtrusive stamped logo of manufacturer, as approved by Architect, is
permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On either interior surface not
exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by means of either a printed,
waterproof label or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product model
number.
B. Surface -Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units
with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous
stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all
welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length
stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is fully concealed when unit is closed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners
which are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units
plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly.
Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels and protective coatings.
END OF SECTION 10800
° r TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3
1
F
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
FSECTION 11451 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of miscellaneous equipment required is as follows:
1. Undercounter ovens.
2. Refrigerator/freezer.
r- 3. Dishwasher.
4. Microwave oven.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certification Labels:
1. Energy Ratings: Provide annual operating costs and efficiency information as required by
Federal Trade Commission.
2. UL Standards: Provide miscellaneous equipment with UL labels.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
F
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions.
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's undamaged protective containers.
1.6 SPECIFIED PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Submit manufacturer's standard written warranty for each item of miscellaneous equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
A. Undercounter Oven: Provide General Electric Model JKPI5WW electric oven.
B. Refrigerator/freezer: Provide GE TFX 25 PABWW refrigerator/freezer with ice maker - white.
C. Dishwasher: Provide General Electric Quiet Power H GSD4050ZWW undercounter dishwasher.
D. Microwave: Provide General Electric Model JE1640WW with built-in Kit JX1527MWW.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Built -In Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinetry or countertops with concealed
fasteners.
C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed.
END OF SECTION 11451
r RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 1
l
I
8/3/98 Buddy Holly Center City of Lubbock CP #9355
r
SECTION 12511 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
,. A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies horizontal louver blinds.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Provide window treatment units which are complete assemblies produced by one
manufacturer for each type required, including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets,
and fastenings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
' A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type
of window treatment unit required. Include methods of installation for each type of opening and
supporting structure.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and application conditions of
window treatment units which are not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product
data. Show relationships to adjoining work.
1. Include typical elevation layout indicating proposed division between blind units and
meeting edges at corners. Provide sections and details at head and sill between blind units
and comers including inclined installations.
2. Provide schedule of all units to be furnished, including field measurements at each location.
C. Samples: For verification purposes, submit samples of each component, material and finish
which will be exposed to view, for each type of window treatment required. Prepare samples
from same materials to be used for the work.
1. In addition, submit one complete small -size operating unit for each type of window
treatment required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
�., 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
f A. Basis of Design: Provide Bali Classsic Mini Blinds as manufactured by Springs Window
Fashions Division, Inc. (Bali-Graber) or, subject to compliance with requirements, equal louver
blinds manufactured by one of the following:
t 1. Hunter Douglas, Inc.
2. Kirsch.
.. 3. Levolor Corp.
4. Louverdrape, Inc.
`- 5. Verosol USA, Inc.
�. 2.2 HORIZONTAL BLINDS
A. Headrail: Channel -shaped section complete with tilting mechanism, top and end braces, top
cradles, cord lock, and accessory items required for type of blind and installation indicated.
r` B. Bottom Rail: Tubular steel bottom rail, designed to withstand twisting or sagging.
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 -1
City of Lubbock CP #9355 Buddy Holly Center 8/3/98
C. Slats: Spring -tempered aluminum slats, nominal 0.008" thick, (louver blades), rounded comers
with forming burrs removed, slat width of 1" (25mm) nominal slats. Where light proof blinds
are indicated, provide slats designed and spaced to achieve maximum overlap and closure for
optimum light exclusion.
D. Ladders: Ladder construction designed to support and maintain slats at proper spacing and
Alignment in open and closed positions, braided polyester cord consisting of vertical components
of 0.043"- 0.068" diameter.
E. Tilting Mechanism: Assembly including disengaging worm and gear mechanism to eliminate
overdrive, low friction gear tilter, drum and cradle at each ladder, tilt rod, tape clips, and
grommet guides to prevent wear on ladder and cords; designed to hold slats at any angle and
prevent movement of slats due to vibration, operated with detachable clear plastic wand.
F. Lifting Mechanism: Standard type including crash -proof cord locks with cord separators and
braided polyester or nylon lift cords with tassels at ends. Size cord to suit blind type.
G. Side Channels: Provide side channels identical in appearance to headrail and designed to reduce
light leakage at edges of blinds.
H. Finish: Steel Components - Baked -on synthetic resin enamel finish.
I. Aluminum Slats - Chemical conversion coating followed by baked -on synthetic resin enamel
finish coat in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
J. Available Products: Riviera Blind and made by Levelor Lorentzen, Inc., or equal by Hunter
Douglas, Inc., or LouveDrape, Inc.
2.3 FABRICATION AND OPERATION
A. Non -corrosive, non -staining, non -fading materials which are completely compatible with each
other, and which do not require lubrication during normal expected life.
B. Fabricate blind units to completely fill the openings as shown, from head -to -sill and jamb -to -
jamb.
C. For continuous window wall installations, fabricate blinds so that ends occur only over mullions
or other defined vertical separation.
D. Space slats to provide overlap for light exclusion when in fully closed position.
E. Equip horizontal blind units, for full -tilting operation with slats rotating approximately 180
degrees. Full -height raising, with lifting cord locks for stopping blind at any point of ascending
or descending travel.
PART 3 -°EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install window treatment units in manner indicated to comply with manufacturer's
instructions. Position units level, plumb, secure, at proper height and location relative to
adjoining window units and other related work. Securely anchor units with proper clips,
brackets, anchorages, suited to type of mounting indicated.
B. Provide adequate clearance between sash and blinds to permit unencumbered operation of sash
hardware.
C. Isolate metal parts from concrete and mortar to prevent galvanic action. Use tape or thick
coating or other means recommended by manufacturer to effect separation.
D. Protect installed units to ensure their being in operating condition, without damage, blemishes,
or indication of use at completion of project. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by
Architect.
END OF SECTION 12511
12511 - 2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
8/1/98
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SLZAN4ARY
A. The contractor shall provide complete and operational systems at the completion of the contract. The
contractor shall provide all labor and materials required to comply with the intent of these documents,
whether specifically indicated or not.
I
B. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specification for the general construction. If these documents
show any item requiring work under division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective
"M", "P", or "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no
notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work
as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the Specifications.
I
C. Order of Precedence shall be observed in laying out pipe, ductwork, material and conduit in order to fit
the material into the space above the ceiling and in chases and walls. The following order shall govern:
1. Items affecting visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers,
grilles, outlets, panel boards, etc.
2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewer and storm drain lines.
3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances.
4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not
be impaired by bends and offsets.
D. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention
before the contract is signed. Otherwise the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and
additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material or equipment.
1.3 TERMINOLOGY
A. Whenever the words "provide", "furnish and install" or other similar phrases occur, it is the intent that
the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this division of the
specification, complete for operation unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. The use of the word "shall' conveys a mandatory condition of the contract.
C. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs.
D. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 1
a;
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
1.4 INSPECTION OF THE SITE
A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations.
The bidders for work under these sections shall inspect existing conditions and acquaint themselves with
the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and work to be
accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the
present building and underground serving to and from the structure. Failure to do so shall not constitute
grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing
installation or installing any new work.
1.5 FIRE RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES
A. At penetrations of fire -rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire -rated,
fire-resistant material, the full thickness of the construction element in accordance with applicable U.L.
listed penetrations for rated assemblies.
1.6 ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide access doors in ceilings and walls where required for access to devices not readily accessible
through lift -out or moveable panels. Devices requiring access include but are not limited to electrical
junction and pull boxes, valves, equipments, etc.
B. Unless specified in other sections provide access doors equivalent to Milcor Type DW acess doors for
installation in non -fire rated assemblies or Milcor fire rated doors for either wall or ceiling application
in fire rated assemblies.
1.7 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS WIRING
A. Starters for HVAC and Plumbing systems equipment shall be furnished under the Division 15 contract
and installed under the Division 16 contract.
B. Low voltage temperature control wiring shall be installed under the Division 15 Contract.
C. Temperature control systems requiring installation of conductors carrying voltages above 50 Volts. Line
to ground shall be furnished and installed under the Division 15 contract. Unless noted to be installed
under Division 16 requirements.
D. Low voltage systems wiring except for low voltage temperature control wiring shall be furnished and
installed under the Division 16 contract.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit information for individual sections as indicated in the following schedule.
CODES
CODES
A.
Shop Drawings
M.
Spare Parts List
B.
Catalog Data & Details
N.
Welders
C.
Calculation & Design Data
Certification
D.
Material List/Schedule
P.
Warranty
E.
Samples/Colors
Q.
Record Drawings
F.
Installation Instructions
R.
Mix Design
G.
Maintenance and Operating
S.
Schedules
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 2
r
} ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
r
Manuals T.
Balancing Report
H.
Wiring Diagrams U.
Templates
J.
Certifications/Test Results V.
Material Safety
K.
Manufacturer Certification
Data Sheets
of Installer W.
Performance Curves
L.
Design Data
15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS B,E,N
15100
VALVES
B
15145
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
B,S,N,A
15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
B,E,J
15410
PLUMBING PIPING
B,J
15430
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
B,G
15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES
B,G
15461
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
B,H
15496
NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS
B,G
15575
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
B,A,N,G
15610
FURNACES
B,H,G
15671
CONDENSING UNITS
B,G,H
15853
POWER VENTILATORS
B,H,G
15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
B,G,H
15891
METAL DUCTWORK
B
15910
DUCT ACCESSORIES
B
15975
CONTROL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT
F,G
15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
T
1.9 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance materials specified in
individual sections to be provided to Owner, in addition to that required for completion of Work.
B. Coordinate with Owner: Deliver and unload spare products to Owner at Project site and obtain receipt
prior to final payment. Owner will handle and store products.
C. For portions of Project accepted and occupied by Owner prior to Substantial Completion, deliver a
proportional part of spare products to Owner; obtain receipt.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 15010
r. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 3
f
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 811198
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other
Division 15 Sections.
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
3. Field -fabricated metal and wood equipment supports.
4. Installation requirements common to equipment specification Sections.
5. Mechanical demolition.
6. Cutting and patching.
7. Touchup painting and finishing.
8. Drip condensate piping
B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in piping system Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing.
B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and
duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces,
crawl spaces, and tunnels.
C. Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces
and mechanical equipment rooms.
D. Exposed Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures
and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
E. Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building
occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
F. Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include
installations within unheated shelters.
4
k
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for
mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified
under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS 131.1 "Structural _
Welding Code --Steel."
B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may
be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and
electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. No
additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved. If minimum
energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified, the equipment must meet the design
requirements and commissioning requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end -caps. Maintain end -caps through shipping, storage,
and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. r
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored inside, do
not exceed structural capacity of the floor.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Protect stored plastic pipes from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.
B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow
for mechanical installations.
C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete
and other structural components as they are constructed.
D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient .�
flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in
the building.
E. Coordinate connection of electrical services.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 2 6—
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
811198
F. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and
controlling agencies.
G. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where mechanical items requiring access are
concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section
"Access Doors."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 for special joining materials not
listed below.
B. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32.
1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Tin (approximately 95 percent) and silver . (approximately 5
percent), having 0.10 percent lead content.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1. BCuP Series: Copper -phosphorus alloys.
2. BAgI: Silver alloy.
D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
E. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvents complying with the following:
1. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC): ASTM D 2564.
2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep -pattern type where required to conceal
protruding fittings and sleeves.
1. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation.
2. Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: One-piece, with set -screw.
a. Finish: Rough brass.
b. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and set -screw.
a. Finish: Rough brass.
b. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
5.
Stamped Steel:
One-piece, with set -screw and chrome -plated finish.
6.
Stamped Steel:
One-piece, with spring clips and chrome -plated finish.
7.
Stamped Steel:
Split plate, with concealed hinge, set -screw, and chrome -plated finish.
8.
Stamped Steel:
Split plate, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome -plated finish.
9.
Stamped Steel:
Split plate, with exposed -rivet hinge, set -screw, and chrome -plated finish.
10.
Stamped Steel:
Split plate, with exposed -rivet hinge, spring clips, and chrome -plated finish.
11.
Cast -Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
B. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly, or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to
prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck
end types and matching piping system materials.
2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
3. Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly for 250-psig minimum working pressure
at a 180 deg F temperature.
2.4 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as
referenced in other Division 15 Sections. Where more than one type is specified for listed application,
selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped, permanently
fastened to equipment.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and
power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data.
2. Location: An accessible and visible location.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes conforming to
recommendations of ASME A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 1-1/4-inch -
high letters for ductwork and not less than 3/4-inch -high letters for access door signs and similar
operational instructions.
1. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated;
either brushing grade or pressurized spray -can form and grade.
2. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated for piping systems, comply with ASME A13.1 for colors.
D. Snap-On Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid snap -on, color -coded
pipe markers, conforming to ASME A13.1.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 4
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1198
.p»
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS --COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise.
Individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 specify piping installation requirements
unique to the piping system.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general
location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size
pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping
as indicated, except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
C. Install piping at indicated slope.
D. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs
are prohibited, except where indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow
sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and
suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome -Plated Piping: Cast -brass, one-piece, with set -screw, and polished chrome -plated
finish. Use split -casting escutcheons, where required, for existing piping.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast -brass or stamped -steel, with set -screw.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast -brass or stamped -steel, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome -
plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast -brass or stamped -steel, with set -screw or spring clips.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 5
r
l:
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, concrete
floor and roof slabs, and where indicated.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet
areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor
slab as required to secure clamping ring where specified.
2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.
3. Install large enough sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inches.
b. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inches.
C. Steel Sheet -Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6 inches and larger that penetrate gypsum -board
partitions.
d. Cast -Iron Sleeve Fittings: For floors having membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing
between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2
inches above finished floor level. Flashing is specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing
and Sheet Metal."
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
4. Except for below -grade wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe
insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
O. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material. Firestopping materials are
specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
P. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in.
Q. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing -in requirements.
R. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual
piping system Sections.
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Soldering Manual," Chapter 22 "The
Soldering of Pipe and Tube." W
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Brazing Manual" in the "Pipe and Tube"
chapter.
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 131.20.1. Cut ~.
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full inside diameter. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: -
a. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat
or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads (except where dry
seal threading is specified). y
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 , 6
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
j
C. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being
threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
r
6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12 "Recommended Practices and
Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe" using qualified processes and welding
operators according to the "Quality Assurance" Article.
r� 7. Plastic Pipe and Fitting Solvent -Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with
clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following standards:
a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe handling of solvent -cement and primers.
b. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non -Pressure Application: ASTM D 2855.
8. Plastic Pipe and Fitting Heat -Fusion Joints: Prepare pipe and fittings and join with heat -fusion
equipment according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
a. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Butt joining.
b. Plain -End Pipe and Socket -Type Fittings: Socket joining.
S. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below.
1. Install unions in piping 2 inches and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment having a 2-inch or smaller threaded pipe connection.
2. Dry Piping Systems (Gas, Compressed Air, and Vacuum): Install dielectric unions and flanges
to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.
3. Wet Piping Systems (Water and Steam): Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION —COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not
indicated.
B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in
diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Architect.
C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components
in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated.
D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference
with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.
E. Install equipment giving right -of --way to piping systems installed at a required slope.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 7
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system.. Include arrows showing normal direction of
flow.
1. Stenciled Markers: Complying with ASME A13.1.
2. Locate pipe markers wherever piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, accessible
maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums), and exposed exterior locations as follows:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each
pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious. C. Near locations where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter inaccessible
enclosures. _
d. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
e. Spaced at a maximum of 50-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
congested areas of piping and equipment.
f. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced
markers.
B. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices which .become visually blocked by work of this Division or
other Divisions.
3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING
A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting requirements.
B. Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete equipment bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger than
supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for
anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psi, 28-clay compressive strength concrete and reinforcement
as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." ~
r--
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to
support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code --Steel." ='
3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE _..
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor mechanical
materials and equipment.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 8
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.8 DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove work specified under Division 15 and as indicated.
B. Where pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged
portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality.
C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.
D. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried pipe abandoned in place, 2inches beyond the face of
adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.
E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from the Project site.
F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational equipment
indicated for relocation.
3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for
mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.
B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
3.10 DRIP CONDENSATE PIPING
A. Provide Type M, copper tubing for drip condensate drain lines.
B. Where condensate drain lines are installed on the interior of the building insulate drain lines in
accordance with Division 15 Section "Insulation".
END OF SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050 - 9
r
i
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 811198
SECTION 15100 -VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Special purpose valves are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material,valve design, pressure and temperature
classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and
required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.
C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and
repairing.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Materials
and Equipment," under "Source Limitations" Paragraph.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for
power piping-
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
f-+ A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
r
VALVES 15100 - 1
i
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 811198
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew -point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Gate Valves: +
a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
b. Hammond Valve Corporation.
C. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
d. NIBCO Inc.
e. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
f. Red -White Valve Corp.
2. Ball Valves:
a. Hammond Valve Corporation.
b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
C. NIBCO Inc. —
d. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe.
3. Plug Valves: .r
a. Grinnell Corp. ~
b. Huber: J.M. Huber Corp.; Flow Control Division (Resun Valves).
C. NIBCO Inc.
d. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
e. Victaulic Company of America.
2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.
1. Nonrising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of rising
stems.
B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this Section _
and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.
C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
VALVES 15100 - 2
i
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
D. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special operator
features:
" 1. Lever Handles: For quarter -turn valves 6 inches and smaller, except for plug valves, which
shall have square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves.
E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to
p» receive insulation.
f F. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
ti
is
G. Solder Joint: ASME B16.18.
1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840
deg F for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi cold working pressure (CWP),
or Class 150, 300-psi CWP; ASTM B 62 cast -bronze body and bonnet, solid -bronze wedge, copper -
silicon alloy rising stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end
connections; and with aluminum or malleable -iron handwheel.
B. Gate Valves, 3 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body
and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass -alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated
packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.4 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body
and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome -plated brass ball, standard port for 1/2-inch valves and
smaller and conventional port for 3/4-inch valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem;
teflon seats and seals; threaded or soldered end connections:
1. Operator: Vinyl -covered steel lever handle.
2. Operator: Vinyl -covered steel tee handle.
3. Operator: Lever operators with lock.
4. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
5. Memory Stop: For operator handles.
2.5 PLUG VALVES
A. Plug Valves: MSS SP-78, 175-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, cast-iron plug,
Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections:
1. Operator: Square head with 1 wrench for every 10 valves.
,+e
t
i
VALVES 15100 - 3
1�
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special
packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made accessible by
such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that night cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size,
length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, "
and freedom from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. --
3.2 INSTALLATION _
A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing, ...
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright
finish. Clean valve socket.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.
D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E. Remove the cap -and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
VALVES 15100 - 4
J
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/l/98
0
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube
ff" or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder until it
completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts
a cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to
determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal
threading is specified.
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being
threaded.
3.5 VALVE END SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for
heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3.6 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and butterfly
for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and
arrangements.
B. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final
adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.
END OF SECTION 15100
VALVES 15100 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
SECTION 15145 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical systems piping and equipment.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to
building structure.
2. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control' for vibration -isolation hangers and supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology used in this Section is defined in MSS SP-90.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of hanger and support.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
1. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"
(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15145 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Hangers, Supports, and Components: Factory -fabricated according to MSS SP-58.
1. Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will not
have a field -applied finish.
2. Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Thennal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi average compressive strength, waterproofed calcium silicate,
encased with sheet metal shield. Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe and are of length
indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex -head, track bolts and nuts.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in the Section specifying the equipment and systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping
specification Sections.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as
required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field -fabricated, heavy-
duty trapeze hangers where possible.
C. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69.
D. Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe
size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe
hangers.
E. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and at changes in direction of piping.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15145 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
F
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories.
G. Heavy -Duty Steel Trapezes: Field -fabricate from ASTM A 36 steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit freedom of
movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion
bends, and similar units.
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe
deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 'Building Services Piping" is not exceeded.
K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.
1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through
insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME 1331.9.
2. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields span
an arc of 180 degrees and have dimensions in inches not less than the following:
NPS (Inches) LENGTH THICKNESS
(Inches) (Inches)
1/4 to 3-1/2
12
0.048
4. Insert Material: Length at least as long as the protective shield.
5. Thermal -Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above
floor.
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field -weld connections that cannot be shop -
welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15145 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/ 1/98
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so that
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated
slope of pipe.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas immediately
after erection of hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 nuls.
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair
paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 15145
T
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15145 - 4 "'
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/l/98
Im
r
r
SECTION 15170 - MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory -installed and field -installed motors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements for
motor -driven equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements; size and
location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and coatings.
B. Factory Test Reports: For specified tests.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide motors specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. Terns "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Polyphase.
C. Motors Smaller than 1/2 HP: Single phase.
D. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
MOTORS
15170 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
E. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected.
F. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start, accelerate, and
operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. -
H. Enclosure: Open dripproof, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, medium induction motor.
1. Design Characteristics: NEMA MG 1, Design B, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Energy -Efficient Design: Where indicated.
2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit starting torque and
other requirements of specific motor application.
1. Permanent -split capacitor.
2. Split -phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Shaded -Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors arc smaller than 1/20 lip.
C. Thennal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens power supply
circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of
motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically resets when motor temperature returns to
normal range, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Bearings: Ball -bearing type for belt -connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on
motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other single-phase motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Used
END OF SECTION 15170
r
MOTORS 15170 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
r-•
d
SECTION 15260 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe, duct, and equipment insulation.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors" for pipe insulation shields and protection saddles.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Hot Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures of 100 deg F or higher.
B. Dual -Temperature Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures that vary from hot to cold.
C. Cold Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures less than 75 deg F.
D. Thermal resistivity is designated by an r-value that represents the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-
value). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch
thick. Thermal resistivity (r-value) is expressed by the temperature difference in degrees Fahrenheit
between the two exposed faces required to cause 1 BTU per hour to flow through 1 square foot at mean
temperatures indicated.
E. Thermal Conductivity (k-value): Measure of heat flow through a material at a given temperature
difference; conductivity is expressed in units of Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F.
F. Density: Is expressed in pcf.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
a'
s A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
r
r
B. Product data for each type of mechanical insulation identifying k value, thickness, and accessories.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation including
facings, cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or other testing or
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15250 -1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label insulation with
appropriate markings of testing laboratory.
1. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less.
2. Exterior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating of 150 or
less.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing of piping and duct systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Glass Fiber:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Knauf Fiberglass GmbH.
C. Manville.
d. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.
C. USG Interiors, Inc. - Thermafiber Division.
2. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Halstead Industrial Products.
C. IMCOA.
d. Rubatex Corporation.
2.2 GLASS FIBER
A. Material: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin.
B. Jacket: All-purpose, factory -applied, laminated glass -fiber -reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil having self-sealing lap. _
C. Blanket: ASTM C 553, Type II, Class F-1, jacketed flexible blankets.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F average maximum, at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
2. Density: I lb/cf
D. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, rigid pipe insulation, jacketed.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F average maximum at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
E. Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and Follow-up service.
1. Type: Non-flaminable, solvent -based.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.
F. Vapor Barrier Coating: Waterproof coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for outside
service.
2.3 FLEX[BLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR
A. Material: Flexible expanded closed -cell structure with smooth skin on both sides.
1. Tubular Materials: ASTM C 534, Type I.
B. Thermal Conductivity: 0.30 Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F average maximum at 75 deg F.
C. Coating: Water based latex enamel coating recommended by insulation manufacturer.
2.4 ADHESIVES
A. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation Adhesive: Solvent -based, contact adhesive recommended by
insulation manufacturer.
B. Lagging Adhesive: MIL-A-3316C, non-flammable adhesive in the following Classes and Grades:
1. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass fiber insulation, sealing edges
of glass fiber insulation, and bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass fiber insulation.
2. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
2.5 JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated glass -fiber -reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil.
1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 peen maximum, when tested according to ASTM E 96.
2. Puncture Resistance: 50 beach units minimum, when tested according to ASTM D 781.
C. PVC Fitting Covers: Factory -fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20 mil thick, high -impact,
ultra -violet -resistant PVC.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
2.6 SEALING COMPOUNDS
A. Vapor Barrier Compound: Water -based, fire -resistive composition.
1. Water Vapor Perneance: 0.08 perm maximum.
2. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15250 3
ALLIED. ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
B. Weatherproof Sealant: Flexible-elastomer-based, vapor -barrier sealant designed to seal metal joints.
1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum.
2. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to 250 deg F.
3. Color: Aluminum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and remove foreign materials such as rust, scale, and dirt.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each mechanical system.
B. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that do not
corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.
C. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes, ducts, and equipment having surface operating temperatures
below 60 deg F.
D. Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's printed instructions.
E. Install insulation with smooth, straight, and even surfaces.
F. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier.
G. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation requiring a vapor
barrier.
H. Seal Ends: Except for flexible elastomeric insulation, taper ends at 45 degree angle and seal with
lagging adhesive. Cut ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with adhesive.
I. Apply adhesives and coatings at manufacturer's recommended coverage -per -gallon rate.
J. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
K. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following systems,
materials, and equipment:
1. Factory -insulated flexible ducts.
2. Flexible connectors for ducts and pipes.
3. Testing laboratory labels and stamps.
4. Nameplates and data plates.
5. Access panels and doors in air distribution systems.
G. Sanitary drainage and vent piping.
7. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless indicated otherwise.
8. Chrome -plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for the disabled.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 4
r:
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
P"
p
9. Piping specialties including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow
regulators.
3.3 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond with adhesive.
B. Stagger joints on double layers of insulation.
C. Apply insulation continuously over fittings, valves, and specialties, except as otherwise indicated.
D. Apply insulation with a minimum number of joints.
E. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with butt strips, at least 3 inches wide, and of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of butt
strip and space 4 inches on center.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with
outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches on center.
a. 'Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation applied to piping systems with
surface temperatures at or below 35 deg F.
4. Vapor Barrier Coatings: Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply on seams and joints, over
staples, and at ends butt to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with vapor
barrier coating.
6. Repair damaged insulation jackets, except metal jackets, by applying jacket material around
damaged jacket. Adhere, staple, and seal. Extend patch at least 2 inches in both directions
beyond damaged insulation jacket and around the entire circumference of the pipe.
F. Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions,
except fire -rated walls and partitions. Apply an aluminum jacket with factory -applied moisture barrier
over insulation. Extend 2 inches from both surfaces of wall or partition. Secure aluminum jacket with
metal bands at both ends. Seal ends of jacket with vapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with
joint sealer. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
G. Fire -Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire -rated
walls and partitions. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with
firestopping or fire-resistant joint sealer. Refer to Division 7 for firestopping and fire-resistant joint
sealers.
H. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of floor.
I. Flanges, Fittings, and Valves - Interior Exposed and Concealed: Coat pipe insulation ends with vapor
barrier coating. Apply premolded, precut, or field -fabricated segments of insulation around flanges,
unions, valves, and fittings. Make joints tight. Bond with adhesive.
1. Use same material and thickness as adjacent pipe insulation.
2. Overlap nesting insulation by 2 inches or 1-pipe diameter, which ever is greater.
FMECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
3. Apply materials with adhesive, fill voids with mineral fiber insulating cement. Secure with wire
or tape.
4. Insulate elbows and tees smaller than 3 inches pipe size with premolded insulation.
5. Insulate elbows and tees 3 inches and larger with premolded insulation or insulation material
segments. Use at least 3 segments for each elbow.
6. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with PVC fitting covers and seal
circumferential joints with butt strips.
7. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with 2 layers of lagging adhesive to a
minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. Install glass cloth between layers. Overlap adjacent insulation
by 2 inches in both directions from joint with glass cloth and lagging adhesive.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
Install saddles, shields, and inserts as specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors." For
cold surface piping, extend insulation on anchor legs a minimum of 12 inches and taper and seal
insulation ends.
1. Inserts and Shields: Cover banger inserts and shields with jacket material matclung adjacent
pipe insulation.
3.4 GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Bond insulation to pipe with lagging adhesive.
B. Seal exposed ends with lagging adhesive.
C. Seal seams and joints with vapor barrier compound.
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Slip insulation on the pipe°before making connections wherever possible. Seal joints with adhesive.
Where the slip-on technique is not possible, cut one side longitudinally and apply to the pipe. Seal
seams and joints with adhesive.
B. Valves, Fittings, and Flanges: Cut insulation segments from pipe or sheet insulation. Bond to valve,
fitting, and flange and seal joints with adhesive.
1. Miter cut materials to cover soldered elbows and tees.
2. Fabricate sleeve fitting covers from flexible elastomeric cellular insulation for screwed valves,
fittings, and specialties. Miter cut materials. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation.
3.6 DUCT INSULATION
A. Install block and board insulation as follows:
1. Adhesive and Band Attachment: Secure block and board insulation tight and smooth with at
least .50 percent coverage of adhesive. Install bands spaced 12 inches apart. Protect insulation
under bands and at exterior comers with metal corner angles. Fill joints, seams, and chipped
edges with vapor barrier compound.
2. Speed Washers Attachment: Secure insulation tight and smooth with speed washers and welded
pins. Space anchor pins 18 inches apart each way and 3 inches from insulation joints. Apply
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 6
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
r
vapor barrier coating compound to insulation in contact, open joints, breaks, punctures, and voids
in insulation.
B. Blanket Insulation: Install smooth with 25% maximum compression. Secure to ducts having long sides
or diameters as follows:
1. Smaller Than 24 Inches: Bonding adhesive applied in G inches wide transverse strips on 12
` . inches centers.
2. 24 Inches and Larger: Anchor pins spaced 12 inches apart each way. Apply bonding adhesive to
prevent sagging of the insulation.
3. Overlap joints 3 inches.
4. Seal joints, breaks, and punctures with vapor barrier compound.
3.7 JACKETS
A. Foil and Paper Jackets (FP): Install jackets drawn tight. Install lap or butt strips at joints with material
same as jacket. Secure with adhesive. Install jackets with 1-1/2 inches laps at longitudinal joints and 3
inch wide butt strips at end joints.
1. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor barrier jackets and exposed insulation with vapor
barrier compound.
B. Install the PVC jacket with 1 inch overlap at longitudinal and butt joints and seal with adhesive.
3.8 FINISHES
A. Paint finished insulation as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
} B. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply 2 coats of protective
coating to exposed insulation.
3.9 APPLICATIONS
A. General: Materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Interior, Exposed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping systems:
1. Domestic cold water.
2. Domestic hot water.
3. Sanitary drains for fixtures accessible to the disabled.
4. Low -temperature hydronic (0 to 34 deg F).
5. - Refrigerant suction.
G. Drip condensate drain line.
C. Interior, Concealed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping systems:
1 1. Domestic cold water.
2. Domestic hot water.
3. Drip condensate drain line.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 7
ALLIED'ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/ 1/98
D. Exterior, Exposed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping systems:
1. Refrigerant suction.
E. Exterior, Concealed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping systems:
1. Refrigerant suction.
F. Duct Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following duct systems:
1. Interior concealed supply, return and outside air ductwork.
2. Interior exposed supply, return and outside air ductwork.
3.10 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULES
A. General: Abbreviations used in the following schedules include:
1. Field -Applied Jackets: P - PVC, K - Foil and Paper, A - Aluminum, SS - Stainless Steel.
2. Pipe Sizes: NPS - Nominal Pipe Size.
B. Domestic Cold Water, Drip Condensate, (Interior): 1/2 inch thick glass fiber, cellular glass, or flexible
elastomeric insulation. Field -applied jacket is not required.
INTERIOR DOMESTIC HOT WATER AND RECIRCULATED HOT WATER
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS
THICKNESS
VAPOR
FIELD- APPLIED
(NPS)
IN INCHES
BARRIER
JACKET
REQ'D
1/2 TO 1-1/4 GLASS FIBER
1/2
NO
NONE
1-1/2 TO 4 GLASS FIBER
1/2
NO
NONE
SANITARY DRAINS AND TRAPS EXPOSED AT FIXTURES FOR DISABLED
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD- APPLIED
(NPS) IN INCHES BARRIER JACKET
REQ'D
1 TO 1-1/2 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC 1/2 NO P
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 8
a
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
r'
P!
INTERIOR REFRIGERANT SUCTION EXPOSED AND CONCEALED
(' PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD- APPLIED
(NPS) IN INCHES BARRIER JACKET
,r■ REQ'D
1/2 TO 1-1/4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC 3/4 YES NONE
EXTERIOR REFRIGERANT SUCTION AND DUAL -TEMP HYDRONIC (35 TO 100 DEG F) EXPOSED
AND CONCEALED
PIPE SIZES MATERIALS THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD- APPLIED
(NPS) IN INCHES BARRIER JACKET
REQ'D
1/2 TO 1-1/4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC 3/4 YES NONE
3.11 DUCT SYSTEMS INSULATION SCHEDULE
INTERIOR CONCEALED HVAC SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTS AND PLENUMS
MATERIAL FORM THICKNESS IN VAPOR FIELD- APPLIED
INCHES BARRIER JACKET
REQ'D
GLASS FIBER BLANKET 1-1/2 YES NONE
END OF SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15250 - 9
r
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
SECTION 16410 - PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing piping systems to a point 60 inches outside the building. Systems
include the following:
1. Potable water distribution, including cold- and hot-water supply and hot-water circulation.
2. Drainage and vent systems, including sanitary and storm.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining materials,
joint construction, and installation requirements not specified in this Section.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum
working pressure ratings, except where indicated otherwise:
1. Water Distribution Systems, Below Ground: 150 psig.
2. Water Distribution Systems, Above Ground: 125 psig.
3. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 10-foot head of water.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the provisions of ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and
installation.
B. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
PLUMBING PIPING
15410 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 811/98
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. General: The application of the following pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods
required for plumbing piping systems are indicated in Part 3 Article "Pipe and Fittings Applications."
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K, L, and M, water tube, drawn temper.
C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
D. Copper Drainage Tube: ASTM B 306, Type DWV, drawn temper.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40, seamless, galvanized, plain ends.
1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40,
seamless, galvanized, carbon -steel pipe.
F. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic, DWV Pipe: ASTM D 2665, Schedule 40, plain ends.
2.2 PIPE FITTINGS AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Wrought -Copper, Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.22.
B. Cast -Copper -Alloy, Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18.
C. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast -copper -alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joint,
metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder joint, threaded, or solder joint and threaded ends.
1. Threaded Ends: Threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
D. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic, DWV Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311;
socket -type; drain, waste, and vent pipe patterns.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Solder, brazing, and welding filler metals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
2.4 VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for special -duty valves.
PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 2
r
1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED PIPING
A. Grade trench bottom to provide smooth, firm, stable, and rock -free foundation throughout length of
piping.
B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at surface on which piping is to be laid and backfill
with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level.
C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with tamped -sand backfill Dig bell
holes at each pipe joint to relieve bells of loads and to ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on
foundation.
3.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS APPLICATIONS
A. General: Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following
applications.
B. Water Distribution Piping Below Ground: Use the following:
1. 2 Inches and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type K, cast -copper -alloy solder joint pressure fittings,
and soldered joints with Alloy Sn95 solder.
2. 2 Inches and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type L, cast -copper -alloy solder joint pressure fittings
and soldered joints with Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E solder.
C. Water Distribution Piping Above Ground: Use the following:
1. 3-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; wrought -copper or cast -copper -alloy
pressure fittings;copper unions; bronze flanges; and solder joints with Alloy Sn95 solder.
D. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping Below Ground: Use the following: ,
1. 2 to 4 Inches: Poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic DWV pipe; PVC socket -type drain, waste,
and vent pipe pattern fittings; and solvent -cemented joints.
E. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping Above Ground: Use the following:
1. 2 to 4 Inches: Poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic DWV pipe; PVC socket -type drain, waste,
and vent pipe pattern fittings; and solvent -cemented joints.
2. 1-1/4 and 1-1/2 Inches: Copper drainage tube, wrought -copper or cast -copper -alloy drainage
fittings, and soldered joints with Alloy E solder.
PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following
requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate or ball valves.
3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods."
3.6 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Extend water distribution piping and connect to water service piping of size and in location indicated
for service entrance to building. Water service piping is specified in Division 2.
B. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping of size and in location
indicated for service entrance to building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of
building sanitary drain and building sanitary sewer.
3.7 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping with 1/32-inch-per-foot (1/4 percent) slope downward toward drain.
B. Install piping level without pitch.
C. Fittings Option: Mechanically formed outlets may be used instead of fittings.
3.8 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install cast-iron soil pipe and cast-iron soil pipe fittings according to CISPI 1990 revised and edited
edition of "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook, Volume I," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
B. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate Y branches, Y branches with
1/8 bends, and long -sweep 1/4, 115, 1/6, 1/8, and 1/16 bends. Sanitary tees and short -sweep quarter
bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where change in direction of flow is from
horizontal to vertical. Use long -turn double-Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings where 2 fixtures are
installed back to back or side by side and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may
be used on vent lines. Make no change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees. Where different
sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size standard increasers and reducers.
Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited.
C. Lay buried building drains beginning at low point of each system, true to grades and alignment
indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub or bell ends of piping facing upstream.
Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements,
and other special installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as
completed.
PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 4
r
4
I
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
D. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, except where another slope is
indicated:
1. Sanitary Building Drain: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) for piping 3 inches and smaller; 1/8 inch
per foot (1 percent) for piping 4 inches and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent).
3. Storm Building Drain: 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent).
4. Horizontal Storm Drainage Piping: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent).
5. Vent Piping: 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent).
E. Install underground plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
F. Install PVC drainage pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2665.
3.9 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods."
B. PVC DWV Pipe Join PVC drainage pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2665.
C. Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in ASTM F 402 for
safe handling during joining of plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cements.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF VALVES
A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving 2 or more
plumbing fixtures or equipment connections and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for sectional
valves 2 inches and smaller. Use gate or butterfly valves for sectional valves 2-1/2 inches and larger.
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to
each plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies, and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2
inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for shutoff valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or
butterfly valves.
C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" on each
plumbing equipment item located to drain equipment for service and repair. Install drain valve at base
of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and where required to drain water distribution piping
system.
1. Install hose -end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop and waste drain valves where indicated.
3.11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS INSTALLATION
A. Hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors."
F
EIF PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
B. Install hangers for horizontal piping with following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
Nom. Pipe Size Steel Pipe Max. Copper Tube Max. Min. Rod Diameter (Inches)
(Inches) Span (Feet) Span (Feet)
Up to 3/4
7
5
3/8
1
7
6
3/8
1-1/4
7
7
3/8
1-1/2
9
8
3/8
2
10
8
3/8
2-1/2
11
9
1/2
3
12
10
1/2
3-1/2
13
11
1/2
4
14
12
5/8, 1/2 for copper
1. Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor.
C. Conform to table below for maximum spacing of supports:
Pipe Material Horizontal Vertical
In Feet In Feet
Copper Tubing - 1-1/4 Inches and Smaller 6 10
Copper Tubing - 1-1/2 Inches and Larger 10 10
PVC Plastic Pipe 4 4
Steel Pipe 12 15
D. Pipe Attachments: Install the following:
1. Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8 or Type 42 for vertical runs.
2. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1 for individual straight horizontal runs 100 feet
and less.
E. Support plastic pipe and tubing not included in table according to manufacturer's recommendations.
3.12 CONNECTIONS
A. Supply Runouts to Fixtures: Install hot- and cold -water supply piping runouts of sizes indicated, but
not smaller than required by plumbing code to fixtures.
B. Drainage Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts, with approved trap, of sizes
indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code, to plumbing fixtures and drains.
C. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or
drains.
D. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot- and cold -water supply piping system to mechanical
equipment as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection; provide drain valve on
drain connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections 2-1/2 inches and larger.
PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 6
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect water distribution piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has been
inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. During progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction at least 24
hours prior to time inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of the
plumbing official.
a. Roughing -In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system before concealed or
closed -in after system roughing -in and prior to setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by plumbing official to observe tests
specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements of plumbing code.
3. Reinspections: When a plumbing official finds that piping system will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection by the plumbing official.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports signed by plumbing official.
B. Test water distribution piping as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems
r that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit
t separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of system tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed in new, altered, extended, or replaced water distribution
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed
! before it has been tested and approved for testing.
3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psig above the operating
pressure without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be
repaired.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
F
C. Inspect drainage piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has been
inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. During progress of installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction at least 24 hours
prior to time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of the
plumbing official.
Roughing -In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system after system roughing -
in, before concealing, and prior to setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by plumbing official to observe tests
specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements of plumbing code.
3. Reinspections: Make required corrections and arrange for reinspection by plumbing official
when piping system fails to pass test or inspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports signed by the plumbing official.
PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 7
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/l/98
D. Drainage and Vent Piping System Tests: Test drainage and vent systems according to procedures of
authority having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedure, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new drainage and vent piping systems and parts of existing systems
that have been altered, extended, or repaired. if testing is performed in segments, submit a
separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed in new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose for testing work that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved.
3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed
drain tile, test piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems on completion of roughing -in
piping installation. Tightly close all openings in piping system and fill with water to point of
overflow, but not less than 10 feet head of water. Water level shall not drop during the period
from 15 minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for
leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled
with water, test connections and prove gastight and watertight. Plug stack openings on roof and
building drain where it leaves the building and introduce air into the system equal to pressure of
1 inch water column. Use a U tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to
measure this pressure. Air pressure shall remain constant without introducing additional air
throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.14 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:
Purge new potable water distribution piping systems and parts of existing potable water systems
that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use.
Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction or, if a
method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or as described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.
b. Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per
million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) and allow to stand for 24 hours.
C. Drain system or part thereof of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution
containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3
hours.
d. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in water coming
from system following allowed standing time.
e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authority having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure
if biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 8
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
3.15 COMMISSIONING
A. Fill water systems. Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system
is completely full of water.
B. Before operating systems, perform these steps:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to full open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping systems and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application
where used, clean, and ready for use.
C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate
water heaters before filling with water.
D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.16 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to
prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or when work stops.
C. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of a water -based latex
paint.
END OF SECTION 15410
PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 9
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
r.
l:
SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
r,.., A. This Section includes plumbing specialties for the following:
1. Water distribution systems.
2. Soil, waste, and vent systems.
r
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining materials,
joint construction, basic installation requirements, and labeling and identifying requirements;
and escutcheons, dielectric fittings, sleeves, and sleeve seals that are not in this Section.
2. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general -duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following minimum
working -pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1 Water Distribution Piping: 125 psig.
2. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
3. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.
4. Force -Main Piping: 100 psig.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each plumbing specialty indicated. Include rated capacities of selected equipment
and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required
1 clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the
1 following plumbing specialty products:
1. Water hammer arresters.
2. Trap seal primer valves and systems.
3. Hose bibbs and hydrants.
4. Cleanouts.
5. Floor drains, open receptors, and trench drains.
rB. Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
1
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 1
r
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1198
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of
plumbing specialties and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers'
products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
B. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to specified
standards.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties specified in this Section that
are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.
D. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
E. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Dishwasher Air -Gap Fittings:
a. B & K Industries, Inc.
b. Brass Craft.
C. Brasstech, Inc.
d. Bristol Corp.; J & B Products Div.
e. Moen, Inc.; Dearborn Brass Co. Div.
f. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
2. Outlet Boxes:
a. Acorn Engineering Co.
b. Guy Gray Manufacturing Co., Inc.
C. IPS Corp.
d. LSP-Specialty Products Co.
e. Oatey Co.
f. Plastic Oddities, Inc.
g. Symmons Industries, Inc.
3. Hydrants:
a. Enpoco, Inc.
b. Josam Co.
C. Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
d. Woodford Manufacturing Co.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 2
j
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
e.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
4. Trap Sea] Primer Valves:
a.
Enpoco, Inc.
b.
C.
Josam Co.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
d.
Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
e.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
2.2 DISHWASHER AIR -GAP FITTINGS
A. Description: ASSE 1021, fitting suitable for use with domestic dishwashers and for deck mounting;
with plastic body, chrome -plated brass cover; and capacity of at least 5 gpm; and inlet pressure of at
least 5 psig at temperature of at least 140 deg F. Include 518-inch-ID inlet and 718-inch-ID outlet hose
connections.
2.3 OUTLET BOXES
A. Ice Maker Outlet Boxes: With hose connection and the following:
1. Box and Faceplate: Stainless steel
` 2. Supply Fitting: 1/2-inch NPS gate, globe, or ball valve and 1/2-inch NPS copper, water tubing.
2.4 HYDRANTS
A. Wall Hydrants: ASME At12.21.3M or ASSE 1019, nonfreeze, automatic draining, antibackflow type,
key operation, with 3/4- or 1-inch NPS threaded or solder joint inlet, and ASME B1.20.7 garden -hose
threads on outlet. Include operating key for each hydrant.
1. Type: Projecting.
2. Finish: Nickel bronze.
2.5 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water -supply -fed type, with the following characteristics:
1. 125-psig minimum working pressure.
2. Bronze body with atmospheric -vented drain chamber.
3. Inlet and Outlet Connections: 1/2-inch NPS threaded, union, or solder joint.
4. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: 1/2-inch NPS threaded or solder joint.
5. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome
finished.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASME A112.26.1M, ASSE 1010, or PDI-WH 2O1, bellows or piston type
with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water -supply fixture units,
ASME A112.26.1M sizes A through F and PDI-WH 201 sizes A through F.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 3
�l
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
B. Floor -Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal
primer valve connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLUMBING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and devices according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Install wall hydrants with integral or field -installed vacuum breaker.
C. Install trap seal primer valves with valve outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of
one percent and connect to floor -drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
D. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not indicated,
according to the following:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to 4-inch NPS. Use 4-inch NPS for larger drainage piping
unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping 4-inch NPS and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
E. Install cleanout deck plates, of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts
for piping below floors.
F. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall,
for cleanouts located in concealed piping.
G. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished
floor or as indicated. Size outlets as indicated.
H. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates
depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
1. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total
depression.
2. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to one percent slope.
3. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch total
depression.
I. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
K. Secure supplies to supports or substrate.
L. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe
valve if specific valve is not indicated.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 4
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 811198
M. Install water -supply stop valves in accessible locations.
N. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.
O. Locate drainage piping as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures and drains.
P. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep -pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
Q. Include wood -blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall -mounting plumbing specialties.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
B. Install hoses between plumbing specialties and appliances as required for connections.
C. Arrange for electric -power connections to plumbing specialties and devices that require power. Electric
power is specified in Division 16 Sections.
D. Supply Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install hot- and cold -water -supply piping of sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Drainage Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install drainage and vent piping, with approved trap, of
sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing manufactured from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes
are required.
B. Burn joints of lead sheets where required.
C. Solder joints of copper sheets where required.
D. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs
with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or
flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
E. Set flashing on roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
F. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
G. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing
fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
H. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into
cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of factory -authorized service representative to
supervise the field assembly of components and installation of grease recovery units, including piping
and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
1. Test and adjust plumbing specialty controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and components.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Before startup, perform the following checks:
1. System tests are complete.
2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired.
3. Clear space is provided for servicing specialties.
B. Before operating systems, perform the following steps:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open general -duty valves to fully open position.
3. Verify that drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear.
C. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If no procedures are prescribed by
manufacturer, proceed as follows:
1. Energize circuits for electrically operated units. Start and run units through complete sequence
of operations.
D. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to
prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 6
r-
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
rz
3.7 CLEANOUT SCHEDULE
A. Cleanout CO: Where plumbing specialties of this designation are indicated, provide products
complying with the following:
1. Applicable Standard: ASME Al12.36.2M.
2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Josam Co.
b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
C. Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
d. Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.
e. Zurn Industries, Inc., Hydromechanics Div,
3. Application: Wall cleanout.
4. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron.
5. Clamping Device: Not required.
6. Outlet Connection: Inside calk.
7. CIosure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron. Set screws or other device.
9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel -brass, copper alloy.
10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
11. Top Loading Classification: Light Duty.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15430 - 7
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
3.8 FLOOR -DRAIN SCHEDULE
A. Floor Drain FD: Where plumbing specialties of this designation are indicated, provide products
complying with the following:
1. Applicable Standard: ASME A112.21.1M.
2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Josam Co.
b. Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
C. Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.
d. Zurn Industries, Inc., Hydromechanics Div.
3. Body Material: Cast iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Not required.
5. Clamping Device: Not required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Sediment Bucket: Not required.
8. Top or Strainer Material: Cast iron.
9. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel brass.
10. Top Shape: Round.
11. Top Loading Classification: Light Duty.
12. Inlet Fitting: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal primer
valve connection.
13. Trap Material: Cast iron.
14. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
15. Trap Features: Trap seal primer valve drain connection.
END OF SECTION 15430
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 8
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 811198
F
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this Section:
1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements."
2. "Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment."
3. "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
4. "Basic Piping Materials and Methods."
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, and accessories, appliances, appurtenances,
equipment, and supports associated with plumbing fixtures.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Valves" for valves used as supply stops.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: Describes a plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached,
entered, and used by physically handicapped -people.
B. Accessory: Device that adds effectiveness, convenience, or improved appearance to a fixture but is not
essential to its operation.
C. Appliance: Device or machine designed and intended to perform a specific function.
D. Appurtenance: Device or assembly designed to perform some useful function when attached to or used
with a fixture.
E. Equipment: Device used with plumbing fixtures or plumbing systems to perform a certain function for
plumbing fixtures but that is not part of the fixture.
F. Fitting: Fitting installed on or attached to a fixture to control the flow of water into or out of the
fixture.
G. Fixture: Installed receptor connected to the water distribution system, that receives and makes
available potable water and discharges the used liquid or liquid -borne wastes directly or indirectly into
the drainage system. The term "Fixture" means the actual receptor, except when used in a general
application where terms "Fixture" and "Plumbing Fixture" include associated trim, fittings,
accessories, appliances, appurtenances, support, and equipment.
FPLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
H. Roughing -In: Installation of piping and support for the fixture prior to the actual installation of the
fixture.
I. Support: Device normally concealed in building construction, for supporting and securing plumbing
fixtures to walls and structural members. Supports for urinals, lavatories, and sinks are made in types
suitable for fixture construction and the mounting required. Categories of supports are:
1. Carrier: Floor -mounted support for wall -mounted water closet, and support fixed to wall
construction for wall -hung fixture.
2. Chair Carrier: Support for wall -hung fixture, having steel pipe uprights that transfer weight to
the floor.
3. Chair Carrier, Heavy Duty: Support for wall -hung fixture, having rectangular steel uprights
that transfer weight to the floor.
4. Reinforcement: Wood blocking or steel plate built into wall construction, for securing fixture to
wall.
J. Trim: Hardware and miscellaneous parts, specific to a fixture and normally supplied with it required to
complete fixture assembly and installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of plumbing fixture specified, including fixture and trim, fittings,
accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, supports, construction details, dimensions of
components, and finishes.
C. Wiring diagrams for field -installed wiring of electrically operated units.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard A117.1, "Buildings and
Facilities -- Providing Accessibility and Useability for Physically Handicapped People," and Public
Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act, 1968," with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically
handicapped.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ATBCB (Architectural and Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board) "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) - 1985-494-187" with
respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.
C. Regulatory requirements: Comply with requirements of TAS (Texas Accessibility Standards) 1994
with respect to plumbing futures for the physically handicapped.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
I. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
E. Design Concept: The drawings indicate types of plumbing fixtures and are based on the specific
descriptions, manufacturers, models, and numbers indicated. Plumbing fixtures having equal
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/ 1 /98
performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in
dimensions, operation, color or finish, or other characteristics are minor and do not change the design
concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. Burden of proof for equality of plumbing
fixtures is on the proposer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering.
B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in a dry location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products in each category, by one of
the following listed for that category:
1. Water Closets:
a. American Standard, Inc.
b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products.
C. Etjer; A Household International Co.
d. Kohler Co.
2. Urinals:
a. American Standard, Inc.
b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products.
C. Eljer; A Household International Co.
d. Kohler Co.
3. Lavatories:
a. American Standard, Inc.
b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products.
C. Eljer; A Household International Co.
d. Kohler Co.
4. Sinks:
a. American Standard, Inc.
b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products.
C. Eljer; A Household International Co.
d. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
e. Just Manufacturing Co.
f. Kohler Co.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
5. Service Sinks:
a. American Standard, Inc.
b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products.
C. Mier; A Household International Co.
d. Kohler Co.
6. Water Coolers:
a. EBCO Manufacturing Co.
b. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
C. Halsey Taylor; A Household International Co.
d. Haws Drinking Faucet Co.
e. Sunroc Corp.
f. Western Drinking Fountains; Sunroc Corp.
7. Toilet Seats:
a. Bemis Mfg. Co.
b. Beneke Div.; Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inca
C. Church Seat Co.
d. Kohler Co.
e. Olsonite Corp.
f. Sperzel Industries, Inc.
8. Commercial/Residential Cast -Brass and Cast -Brass Underbody Faucets:
a. American Standard, Inc.
b. Brass Craft Subsidiary; Masco Corp.
C. Chicago Faucet Co.
d. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products
e. Eljer; A Household International Co.
f. Kohler Co.
g. Moen Group; Stanadyne Corp.
h. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
9. Miscellaneous Fittings (Except Faucets):
a. Brass Craft Subsidiary; Masco Co.
b. Central Brass Manufacturing Co.
C. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products.
d. Eljer; A Household International Co.
e. Kohler Co.
f. Sanitary -Dash Manufacturing Co., Inc.
10. Supports:
a. Ancon, Inc.
b. Josam Co.
C. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co.
d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe.
e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 4
r-
�i
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/ 1 /98
2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Provide plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, other components, and supports as specified in the
Drawings.
2.3 FAUCETS
A. Faucets General: Unless otherwise specified, provide faucets that are cast brass with polished chrome -
plated finish.
B. Lavatory Faucets, Type 1: ASME A112.18AM, centerset fitting, with single lever handle, and 1/2
Spin flow control fitting in spout.
C. Sink Faucet, Type 1: ASME Al12.18.1M, centerset fitting, with single lever handle and swing spout.
2.4 FITTINGS, EXCEPT FAUCETS
A. Fittings General: Unless otherwise specified, provide fittings fabricated of brass, with a polished
chrome plated finish.
B.
Lavatory Supplies and Stops, Type 1: Loose -key angle stop, having 1/2 inch NPS inlet with wall
flange and 3/8 inch by 12 inches flexible tubing riser outlet.
C.
Sink Supplies and Stops, Type 1: Loose -key angle stop, having 1/2 inch NPS inlet with wall flange
and 1/2 inch by 12 inches flexible tubing riser outlet.
D.
Sink Traps, Type 1: Cast -brass, 1-1/2 inches NPS adjustable P-trap with cleanout, 0.045-inch wall
thickness, tubular waste to wall, and wall flange.
E.
Water Closet Supplies and Stops, Type 1: Loose -key angle stop, having 1/2 inch NPS inlet with wall
I
I
flange and 1/2 inch by 12 inches flexible tubing riser outlet with collar.
F.
Supply and drain plumbing service fittings not listed above shall be as specified and as scheduled.
G.
Fittings installed concealed inside a plumbing fixture or within wall construction may be without
chrome plate finish.
H.
Escutcheons: Wall flange with set screw.
Escutcheons: Polished chrome -plated, sheet steel wall flange with friction clips.
rI.
J.
Provide fittings specified as part of a fixture description, in lieu of fitting requirements above.
2.5 FLUSHOMETERS
A. Provide flushometers compatible with fixtures, with features and of consumption indicated.
B. Construction: Cast -brass body, brass or copper pipe or tubing inlet with wall flange and tailpiece with
spud, screwdriver check stop, vacuum breaker, and brass lever handle actuation except where other
variations are specified. Type shall be diaphragm operation except where other type is specified.
FPLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1198
C. Finish: Exposed metal parts shall be polished chrome -plated, exceptcomponents installed in a
concealed location may be rough brass or unfinished.
D. Urinal Flushometers, Type 1: Furnish with following features.
1. Furnish flushometers with factory -set or field -adjusted maximum water consumption per cycle:
a.. Consumption: 1.0 gallons per flushing cycle.
2.6 TOILET SEATS
A. General: Provide toilet seats compatible with water closets, and of type, color, and features indicated.
B. Toilet Seats, Type 1: Extra heavy-duty, commercial/industrial type, elongated, open front, solid
plastic, with check hinge.
2.7 PLUMBING FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Supports: ASME At12.6.1M, categories and types as required for wall -hanging fixtures specified, and
wall reinforcement.
B. Support categories are:
L Carriers: Supports for wall -hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall
construction. Water closet carriers shall have an additional faceplate and coupling when used
for wide pipe spaces. Provide tiling frame or setting gage with carriers for wall -hanging water
closets.
2. Chair Carriers: Supports with steel pipe uprights for wall -hanging fixtures. Urinal chair
carriers shall have bearing plates.
3. Chair Carriers, Heavy Duty: Supports with rectangular steel uprights for wall -hanging fixtures.
4. Reinforcement: 2 inches by 4 inches wood blocking between studs or 1/4 inch by 6 inches steel
plates attached to studs, in wall construction, to secure floor -mounted and special fixtures to
wall.
C. Support Types: Provide support of category specified, of type having features required to match
fixture.
D. Provide supports specified as part of fixture description, in lieu of category and type requirements
above.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing -in for potable cold water and hot water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping
systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures.
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 6
FALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
i C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Install plumbing fixtures and specified components, in accordance with designations and locations
l indicated on Drawings.
l B. Install supports for plumbing fixtures in accordance with categories indicated, and of type required:
1. Chair carriers for the following fixtures:
a. Wall -hanging urinals.
rb. Wall -hanging lavatories and sinks.
C. Wall -hanging drinking fountains and electric water coolers.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES
A.
Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers' written installation
instructions, roughing -in drawings, and referenced standards.
B.
Install floor -mounted, floor -outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.
C.
Fasten wall -hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when
supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.
built
D.
Fasten wall -mounted fittings to reinforcement into walls.
r
E.
Fasten counter -mounting -type plumbing fixtures to casework.
F.
Secure supplies behind wall or within wall pipe space, providing rigid installation.
G.
Install stop valve in an accessible location in each water supply to each fixture.
H.
Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap.
I.
Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe
fittings.
t
J.
Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary -type, one -part, mildew -resistant, silicone
sealant in accordance with sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." Match
'
sealant color to fixture color.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
' A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of Division 15. The Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing
equipment specified in other sections of Division 15.
�. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 7
{
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other
sections, direct connected to plumbing piping systems.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water
pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all
units operate properly.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and
controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, and faucets, shower valves, and
flushometers having controls, to provide proper flow and stream.
C. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
D. Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials.
E. Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Project
Closeout. "
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by the Owner.
3.8 FIXTURE SCHEDULE
A. Provide plumbing fixtures as scheduled in the Drawings. Each Data Sheet begins with a new page.
END OF SECTION 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 8
1.
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
r SECTION 15461 - ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
1.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electric water heaters and accessories.
B. Related Section: Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" contains requirements that relate to this
Section.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
n
{
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating),
k
furnished specialties, and accessories. Indicate dimensions, finishes and coatings, required clearances,
methods of assembly of components, and piping and wiring connections.
C.
Wiring diagrams from manufacturers detailing electrical requirements for electrical power supply
wiring to water heaters. Include ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required
for final installation of water heaters and controls. Differentiate between factory -installed and field -
installed wiring.
D.
Field quality -control installation reports.
E.
Maintenance data for water heaters to include in operation and maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include startup instructions.
j
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASHRAE Standard: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed in ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings."
B.
NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical components.
C.
Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated water heaters, controls, and components specified
in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.
L
D.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, dimensional requirements, and
characteristics of water heaters and accessories and are based on specific types and models indicated.
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15461 - 1
i
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
Other manufacturers' water heaters and accessories with equal performance characteristics may be
considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
1.5 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and
run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace
water heaters and accessories that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Failures include, but are not limited to, tanks and elements. This warranty is in addition to, and not a
limitation of, other rights Owner may have against Contractor under Contract Documents.
C. Warranty Period: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Household, Storage, Electric Water Heaters:
a. Rheem Mfg. Co.; Rheem Water Heater Div.
b. Rheem Mfg. Co.; Ruud Water Heater Div.
C. Smith: A.O. Smith Water Products Co.
d. State Industries, Inc.
2. Household, Point -of -Use, Storage, Electric Water Heaters:
a. Lochinvar Corp.
b. Rheem Mfg. Co.; Rheem Water Heater Div.
C. Rheem Mfg. Co.; Ruud Water Heater Div.
d. Smith: A.O. Smith Water Products Co.
e. State Industries, Inc.
3. Household, Point -of -Use, Small -Capacity, Electric Water Heaters:
a. Lochinvar Corp.
b. Rheem Mfg. Co.; Rheem Water Heater Div.
C. Rheem Mfg. Co.; Ruud Water Heater Div.
d. Smith: A.O. Smith Water Products Co.
e. State Industries, Inc.
2.2 WATER HEATERS, GENERAL
A. Specified manufacturer's standard components and features are acceptable where specific product
requirements are not indicated.
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15461 - 2
F
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
r
B. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat, except for units where other arrangement is indicated or
temperature is regulated by flow -control fitting.
C. Safety Control: Automatic, high -temperature -limit cutoff device or system on commercial units and
where indicated. Include automatic low-water cutoff device or system on commercial units where
indicated.
D. Interior Finish: Materials that comply with requirements of applicable NSF, AWWA, or FDA and
EPA regulatory standards for tasteless and odorless, potable -water -tank linings.
E. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Include tappings for piping
connections, relief valves, pressure gage, thermometer, blow down, and controls as required and others
as indicated. Attach tappings to tank before testing and labeling. Include tappings and connections as
follows:
1. 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Threaded ends.
2. 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: Flanged ends.
F. Insulation: Fiberglass, polyurethane foam, or manufacturer's standard that is suitable for operating
temperature and required insulating value. Include insulation material that surrounds entire tank except
connections and controls.
G. Jacket: Steel, with baked -on enamel finish, except where otherwise specified.
H. Anode Rods: Factory installed, magnesium.
I. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped and complying with
ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and pressure setting less
than water heater working -pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into
tank.
1. Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of combination
relief valve.
2. Exception: Omit relief valve for tankless water heater. Include pressure relief valve for
installation in piping.
2.3 HOUSEHOLD, POINT -OF -USE, STORAGE, ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Description: UL 174, household, point -of -use, storage, electric water heater; with capacity not less
than 6 gal., but not more than 40 gal., and input not more than 12 kW.
B. Storage Tank Construction: Steel with 150-psig working -pressure rating.
C. Heating Elements: 2, except when 1 is indicated; electric, screw -in, immersion type.
D. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005, factory or field installed. Omit when water heater is without drain outlet
and include general -duty drain valve in piping.
E. Vacuum Relief Valve: Comply with ASME PTC 25.3. Furnish for installation in piping.
1. Exception: Omit where water heater has integral vacuum relieving device.
7 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15461- 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 811/98
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for water heaters and accessories. Refer to Division 3
Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.2 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage water heater tanks and hot-water
storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet
with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge to closest floor drain.
B. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor drains. Install
hose -end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain valves.
C. Install pressure gages on water heater piping when and as indicated. Pressure gages are specified in
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."
D. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance.
E. Arrange for field -applied insulation on equipment and piping not furnished with factory -applied
insulation.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Connect hot- and cold -water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-water
circulating piping to unit with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.
2. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metals. Dielectric
fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections.
Arrange wiring to allow unit servicing.
C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding
connections, according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to provide startup service and to
demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.
1. Test and adjust operating and safety controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15461 - 4
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1198
3. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
4. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation
and Maintenance Data."
5. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
B. Perform the following final checks before startup:
1. Fill water heaters with water.
2. Check that piping system tests are complete.
3. Check for piping connection leaks.
4. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping.
5. Check operation of pumps and circulators.
6. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices.
C. Perform the following startup procedures:
1. Energize electric circuits.
2. Adjust operating controls.
3. Adjust hot -water -outlet temperature settings.
END OF SECTION 15461
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
15461 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/l/98
SECTION 16496 - NATURAL GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, specialties, and accessories for natural gas systems within building and to
gas meters.
B. This Section includes piping, specialties, and accessories for natural gas systems within building and to
point indicated.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
I. Division 2 Section "Gas Distribution Systems" for natural gas service piping.
2. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages and fittings.
1.3 DEFINMONS
A. Low -Pressure Natural Gas Piping: Operating pressure of 0.5 psig or less.
B. Gas Service: Operating pressure indicated.
C. Gas Service: Pipe from gas main or other source to gas point of delivery for building being served.
Piping includes gas service piping, gas valve, service pressure regulator, meter bar or meter support,
and gas meter.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working -Pressure Ratings: Except where otherwise indicated, minimum pressure
requirements are as follows:
1. Low -Pressure Natural Gas Piping: 8" wg.
B. Approximate values of natural gas supplied for these systems are as follows:
1. Heating Value: 1000 Btu/cu. ft.
2. Specific Gravity: 0.6.
3. Service Line Pressure: 15 to 20 psig.
NATURAL GAS PIPING 15496 -1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Test reports specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3.
C. Maintenance data for natural gas specialties and special -duty valves to include in the operation .and
maintenance manual specified in Division I Section "Contract Closeout."
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code," for gas piping materials and components;
installations; and inspecting, testing, and purging.
B. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between wiring and
electrically operated control devices.
C. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified standards.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.
E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, dimensional requirements, and
characteristics of natural gas piping equipment, specialties, and accessories and are based on specific
types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' equipment and components with equal performance
characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing gas piping.
Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify gas supplier. Handle flammable liquids used
by Installer with proper precautions and do not leave on premises from end of one day to beginning of
next day.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Notification of Interruption of Service: Notify each affected user when gas supply will be turned off.
B. Work Interruptions: Leave gas piping systems in safe condition when interruptions in work occur
during repairs or alterations to existing gas piping systems.
NATURAL GAS PIPING 15496 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Gas Stops, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller:
a. Hammond Valve Corp.
b. Jomar International, Ltd.
C. Maxitrol Co.
d. McDonald: A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.
e. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.
f. Mueller Co.
g. National Meter.
2.2 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E, electric -resistance welded or Type S, seamless; Grade B;
Schedule 40; black.
2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded ends
conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
B. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass -to -iron seat, ground joint, and threaded
ends conforming to ASME B 1.20.1.
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
for joining materials not included in this Section.
B. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
C. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.
2.5 VALVES
A. Manual Valves: Conform to standards listed or, where appropriate, to ANSI Z21.15.
NATURAL GAS PIPING 15496 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
B. Gas Stops, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: AGA-certified, bronze -body, plug type with bronze plug, ball
type with chrome -plated brass ball, or butterfly valve with stainless -steel disc and fluorocarbon
elastomer seal, for 2 psig or less natural gas. Include AGA stamp, flat or square head or lever handle,
and threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
1. Locking Device: Include locking (tamperproof) feature.
C. Gas Valves, 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: MSS SP-78, Class 125 or Class 175 WOG, nonlubricated-
plug type with polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) lining or sleeve, semisteel body, wrench operated, with
flanged ends.
2.6 PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory -applied, corrosion -resistant polyethylene coating for use in
corrosive atmosphere. Coating properties include the following:
1. Applied to pipe and fittings treated with compatible primer before applying tape.
2. Overall Thickness: 20 mils, synthetic adhesive.
3. Water -Vapor Transmission Rate: Maximum 0.10 gal./100 sq. in.
4. Water Absorption: 0.02 percent maximum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to premises or section of piping. Perform
leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all equipment is turned off
in affected piping section.
B. Comply with NFPA 54 Paragraph "Prevention of Accidental Ignition."
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or
higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, except where otherwise
indicated.
B. Low -Pressure, 0.5 psig or Less, Natural Gas Systems: Use the following.,
1. 1-Inch NPS and Smaller: Steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
2. 1-1/4- to 2-Inch NPS: Steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
3. 2-1/2- to 4-Inch NPS: Steel pipe, butt -welding fittings, and welded joints.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Use gas stops for shutoff to appliances with 2-inch NPS or smaller low-pressure gas supply.
B. Use gas valves of sizes indicated for gas service piping, meters, mains, and where indicated.
NATURAL GAS PIPING 15496 - 4
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
8/l/98
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation
requirements.
B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit
constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to outside and
terminate with screened vent cap.
1. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or
trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.
a. Exception: Accessible above -ceiling space specified above.
C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of gas
meters. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where
condensate would be subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use
minimum -length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size as
connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap.
D. Conceal pipe' installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors,
and in floor channels, except where indicated to be exposed to view.
E. Install gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.
F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.
G. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
H. Install unions in pipes 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece
of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
I. Install dielectric fittings (unions and flanges) with ferrous and brass or bronze end connections,
separated by insulating material, where piping of dissimilar metals is joined.
J. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of piping expansion and contraction. Install expansion joints,
expansion loops, and pipe guides as indicated.
K. Install containment conduits for gas piping below slabs, within building, in gastight conduits extending
minimum of 4 inches outside building, and vented to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned -down,
reducing -elbow fittings with corrosion -resistant insect screens in large end. Prepare and paint outside
of conduits with coal -tar epoxy-polyamide paint according to SSPC-Paint 16.
3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Use materials suitable for natural gas service.
P NATURAL GAS PIPING 15496 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from damage. Tag valves with metal tag indicating
piping supplied. Attach tag to valve with metal chain.
1. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for valve tags.
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. 1/2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 318 inch.
2. 3/4- and 1-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 318 inch.
3. 1-1/4-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. 1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. 2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. - Install gas piping next to equipment and appliances using gas to allow service and maintenance.
B. Connect gas piping to equipment and appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install gas
valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance using. gas. Install union or flanged
connection downstream from valve. Include flexible connectors when indicated.
C. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom forming drip, as close as practical to
inlet for appliance using gas.
D. Electrical Connections: Wiring is specified in Division 16 Sections.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to NFPA 54, Part 4 "Gas Piping Inspection, Testing, and
Purging" and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained.
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of gas meters, regulators, valves, and specialties.
E. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.
F. Verify that specified piping tests are complete.
NATURAL GAS PIPING 15496 - 6
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
F
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety devices.
END OF SECTION 15496
NATURAL GAS PIPING
15496 - 7
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
SECTION 15575 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Breechings and stacks.
2. Flue vents.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section for insulation of breechings, chimneys, and stacks.
2. Division 16 Sections for power supply wiring from power source to vent fans.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include materials, dimensions, weights, and
accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing breechings, chimneys, and stacks
similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Comply with NFPA 211 for components and installation.
C. Comply with ASHRAE "Systems and Equipment Handbook," Chapter 31 for "Chimney, Gas Vent,
and Fireplace Systems," for material requirements and design criteria.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 211.
E. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain all Type B vent system components from 1 source and by a
single manufacturer.
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15575 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Type B Gas Vents:
a. General Products Co., Inc.
b. Hart & Cooley, Inc.
C. Leslie -Locke Inc.
d. Masco Corp.; American Metal Products Co.
e. Selkirk Metalbestos.
f. Simpson Dura-Vent.
g. Van -Packer Co.
2.2 TYPE B GAS VENTS
A. Description: Double -wall gas vents, conforming to NFPA 211, Type B. Inner pipe of sheet
aluminum, outer pipe of galvanized -steel sheet, each with the following minimum thicknesses:
1. Round, b-Inch Inside Diameter and Smaller: 0.012-inch inner pipe, 0.0187-inch outer pipe.
B. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier, adjustable
roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners, fabricated of
similar materials and designs as vent pipe straight sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF DOUBLE -WALL CONNECTORS, BREECHINGS, AND VENTS
A. Install gas vents as indicated, according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. Locate to
comply with stipulated minimum clearances from combustibles.
B. Seal between sections of positive -pressure vents according to manufacturer's installation instructions,
using only sealants recommended by manufacturer.
C. Support vents at intervals recommended by the manufacturer to support the weight of the vent and all
accessories, without exceeding loading of appliances.
3.2 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes, including chips, scratches,
and abrasions.
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15575 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
B. Clean breechings internally during installation to remove dust and debris. Clean external surfaces to
remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Closure: Provide at ends of breechings and chimneys that are not completed or connected
to equipment.
END OF SECTION 15575
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15575 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
SECTION 15610 - FURNACES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes furnaces and accessories complete with controls.
B. This Section includes furnaces and accessories with the following additional components:
1. Direct -expansion cooling coils.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for general motor requirements.
2. Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for vents for oil -fired furnaces and
conventional gas -fired furnaces.
3. Division 15 Section "Condensing Units" for condensing units used with cooling coils provided in
furnaces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each furnace including rated capacities of selected models, weights (slipping, installed,
and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories. Include plan and elevation views of units,
minimum clearances, and data on ratings and capacities.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed and
labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
FURNACES 15610 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/l/98
1.5 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Furnaces: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer
agreeing to replace components within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers
failure due to normal conditions of use.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Furnaces:
a. Lennox Industries, Inc.
b. Rheem Mfg. Co.; Air Conditioning Diva
C. Trane Co. (The).
d. United Technologies Corp.; Carrier Corp. Div.
2.2 FURNACES, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested.
B. Configuration: Upflow.
C. Cabinet: Steel with foil -faced, glass -fiber, interior insulation. Lift -out panels expose burners and all
other items requiring access for maintenance.
D. Finish of External Casings and Cabinets: Baked enamel over corrosion -resistant -treated surface.
E. Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted.
F. Fan Motors: Energy -efficient type as specified in Division 15 Section "Motors." Totally enclosed, with
internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.
2.3 GAS -FIRED FURNACES, "STANDARD" EFFICIENCY
A. Comply with AGA Z21.47, "Gas -Fired Central Furnaces"; and NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."
1. AGA Approval: Bear label of American Gas Association.
2. Type of Gas: Natural.
FURNACES 15610 - 2
i!
l
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
F
B. Efficiency: 80 percent AFUE, minimum.
C. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel
D. Burner: Atmospheric type with adjustable combustion air supply.
` 1. Gas Valve: 100 percent safety gas shutoff; 24-V combining pressure regulation, safety pilot,
manual set (ON -OFF), pilot filtration, and automatic electric valve.
C2. Ignition: Electronic pilot ignition, with electric spark or hot surface igniter.
E. Gas Burner Safety Controls: As follows:
1. Thermocouple Sensor: Prevents gas valve from opening until pilot flame is proven; stops gas
flow on ignition'failure.
2. Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box and prevents burner operation.
3. Vent Safety Shutoff Sensor: Temperature sensor installed on draft hood and de -energizes burner
on excessive vent temperature; manual reset.
4. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum penmissible setting; de -energizes burner on excessive
bonnet temperature; automatic resets.
F. Venting: Power venting, using integral centrifugal fan.
G. Automatic Fan Thernial Switch: Delays fan start until discharge air is heated; delays fan shutdown until
air cools to comfort threshold.
2.4 CONTROLS
A. Furnace Controls: Include components required for satisfactory operation of furnaces and auxiliary
equipment in all seasons.
B. Control Transformer: 24 VAC output, factory installed, and wired in furnace.
C. Thermostat: 24 VAC, solid-state, programmable, microprocessor -based wall mounting unit with
automatic switching from heating to cooling, preferential rate control, multiple temperature presets
selectable by day and time, and battery back-up protection of program settings against power failure.
Honeywell T7300 with remote sensor(s).
D. Wire and Cable: Specified in Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables."
2.5 AIR FILTERS AND CLEANERS
A. Filters: 1-inch-thick, disposable, fiberglass type in sheet metal rack.
2.6 COOLING FEATURES
r A. Evaporator Coil: Conform to ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump
+l Equipment." Match size with furnace. Match remote condensing unit specified in Division 15 Section
"Condensing Units" with type, capacity, pressure -drop ratings, restricted distributor, or expansion valve.
Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet.
folk FURNACES 15610 - 3
t
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
B. Evaporator Coil Enclosure: As required to suit furnace and cooling coil. Steel cabinet with access panel
and flanges for integral mounting at or on furnace cabinet.
C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed -copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and
sealed; with insulated suction line and flared fittings at evaporator end; no fitting at condenser end:
length as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install furnaces and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install and connect gas -fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to
NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's published installation instructions.
1. Connect gas piping according to Division 15 Section "Natural Gas Piping Systems."
2. Connect vents according to Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks."
3. Vents, Outside -Air Pipe Connections, and Drains: Where polyvinyl chloride (PVC) piping is
used, install according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
Install vent terminal designed to protect against birds, 'insects, and dirt.
4. Connect condensate drain pans using copper tubing, ASTM B 88, Type M with streamline
drainage fittings and soldered joints or PVC drainage piping: Extend to nearest equipment drain
or floor drain. Construct vented, deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at
changes in direction. Terniinate to suit local code requirements, except where stricter methods
are indicated.
C. , Base -Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. Provide optional bottom closure base where installation
conditions require.
D. Controls: Install thermostats and humidistats at mounting height of 48 inches above floor.
E. Control Wiring: Install control wiring as specified in Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables."
F. Connect ducts according to Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."
G. Identify furnaces and connections according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows:
1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
2. Gas Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section "Natural Gas Piping
Systems." Connect gas piping to boiler, full size of boiler gas train inlet, and provide union with
sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.
3. Refrigerant Tubing: Conforni to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section "Refrigerant
Piping." Connect refrigerant tubing to coils and condensing units.
FURNACES 15610 - 4
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
B. Breeclun : Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section "Breechin s, Chimneys, and
g g eY
Stacks." Connect breeching to vent outlet, full size of outlet.
iy
C. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections.
{... 1. Install electrical devices provided with furnace but not specified to be factory mounted.
D. Connect motors and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instructed by
manufacturer. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according
to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performance and efficiency. Adjust
heat distribution features, including shutters, dampers, and relays, to provide optimum heating
performance and system efficiency.
B. Auer completing system installation, inspect furnaces and associated components. Repair scratches and
mars of finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup Services: Provide startup service, as specified below.
1. Start each furnace and operate controls.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Test functions, operations, control sequences, and protective features. Adjust to ensure operation
is as specified.
B. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.
END OF SECTION 15610
FURNACES 15610 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
SECTION 15671 - CONDENSING UNITS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Air-cooled condensing units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; dimensions;
required clearances; methods for assembling components; furnished specialties; accessories; and
installation and startup instructions for each model indicated.
B. Maintenance Data: For each condensing unit to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1. Include a parts list for each condensing unit, control, and accessory; troubleshooting
maintenance guide; and servicing and preventive maintenance procedures and schedule.
C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section that is listed
and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical
Refrigeration."
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into pad.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place
Concrete."
CONDENSING UNITS
15671 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8I1J98
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by Contractor and signed by manufacturer, agreeing
to replace components that fail in materials and workmanship within the specified warranty period,
provided manufacturer's written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been
followed.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturers standard, but not less than 5 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering condensing
units that may incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Condensing Units, Air Cooled, 1 to 5 Tons:
a. Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div.
b. Lennox International, Inc.; Lennox Industries, Inc. Div.
C. Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group.
d. York International Corp.
2. Condensing Units, Air Cooled, 6 to 120 Tons:
a. Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div.
b. Lennox International, Inc.; Lennox Industries, Inc. Div.
C. Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group.
d. York International Corp.
2.2 CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 1 TO 5 TONS
A. . Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of compressors, condenser coils,
fans, motors, refrigerant reservoirs, and operating controls.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed and isolated for vibration.
1. Motor: Include thermal- and current -sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and
contactor.
C. Condenser: Copper -tube, aluminum -fin coil, with liquid subcooler.
D. Condenser Fan: Direct -drive, aluminum propeller fan; with permanently lubricated fan motor with
thermal -overload protection.
CONDENSING UNITS 15671 - 2
t�
i
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
rE. Accessories include the following:
i 1. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with 7-day
programming. Auto change over, Honeywell T7300 and subbase to control condensing unit and
r evaporator fan.
t 2. Precharged and insulated suction and liquid tubing.
3. Low ambient kit to permit operation down to 45 deg F.
4. Crankcase heater.
5. Automatic reset timer to prevent compressor rapid cycle.
F. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel; with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes
for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Mount service valves, fittings, and gage ports on
exterior of casing. Hail Protection: Factory installed hail guards, or unit casing with louvered panels
for air circulation at condenser coil.
i
' 2.3 CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 6 TO 120 TONS
{r— A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of casing, compressors, condenser
coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls.
B. Compressor: Hermetic or semihermetic compressor designed for service with crankcase sight glass,
j crankcase heater, and backseating service access valves on suction and discharge ports.
1. Capacity Control: Cylinder unloading.
C. Condenser: Seamless copper -tube, aluminum -fin coil, with separate and independent refrigeration
circuit for each compressor. Include liquid accumulator and subcooling circuit and backseating liquid -
line service access valve. Factory test coils at 450 psig, then dehydrate by drawing a vacuum and fill
with a holding charge of nitrogen.
D. Condenser Fans: Propeller -type vertical discharge; either directly or belt driven. Include the
following:
F E.
F
1. Permanently lubricated ball -bearing motors.
2. Separate motor for each fan.
3. Motors with thermal -overload cutouts.
4. Dynamically and statically balanced fan assemblies.
5. Low Ambient Control: Factory -installed damper assembly, fan -speed control, or fan -cycling
control
Operating and safety controls include the following:
1. Manual reset, high-pressure cutout switches.
2. Automatic reset, low-pressure cutout switches.
3. Low oil pressure cutout switch.
4. Compressor -winding thermostat cutout switch.
5. 3-leg, compressor -overload protection.
6. Control transformer.
7. Magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors.
8. Automatic, nonrecycling pump down and a timing device to prevent excessive compressor
cycling.
CONDENSING UNITS 15671 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
F. Unit Casings: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components and controls
and with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and
drives. Additional features include the following:
1. Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated and finished with
manufacturer's standard paint coating.
2. Lifting lugs to facilitate rigging of units.
3. Gasketed control panel door.
4. Unfused disconnect switch, factory mounted and wired, for single external electrical power
connection.
2.4 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory -installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
2.5 , SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 210/240.
B. Test and inspect shell and tube condensers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
C. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound -power -level ratings according to ARI 270.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install condensing units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
C. Install ground -mounted units on 4-inch-thick, reinforced concrete base, 4 inches larger than condensing
unit on each side. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
Coordinate installation of anchoring devices.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to unit's quick -connect fittings. Install tubing so it does not
interfere with access to unit. Install furnished accessories. r
B. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
CONDENSING UNITS 15671 - 4
F
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 811198
F
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and replace lost refrigerant and oil.
B. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation,
product capability, and compliance with requirements.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Clean units to remove dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.5
COMMISSIONING
A.
Verify that uts are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
B.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's. written instructions and do the
following:
1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.
2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.
3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.
4. Check that all bolts and screws are tight.
5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.
6. Verify that controls are connected and operational.
r`
C.
Lubricate bearings on fans.
D.
Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.
E.
Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
F.
Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist.
G.
Measure and record airflow over coils.
H.
Check operation of condenser capacity control device.
I.
Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to
structure.
J.
After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension.
CONDENSING UNITS 15671 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
2. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 15671
CONDENSING UNITS 1 15671 - 6
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
SECTION 15853 - POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
2. In -line centrifugal fans.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 16 Section "Disconnects and Circuit Breakers" for disconnect switches.
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include roof curbs for roof -mounted exhaust
fans.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Fan Unit Schedule: The following information is described in an equipment schedule on the Drawings.
1. Fan performance data including capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power
characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
2. Fan arrangement including wheel configuration, inlet and discharge configurations, and required
accessories.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and operating),
furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound power ratings.
POWER VENTILATORS 15853 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
C. Maintenance data for power ventilators to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1 and in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements."
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed
and labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed to use the
AMCA Seal
D. NEMA Compliance: Provide components required as part of fans that comply with applicable NEMA
standards.
E. UL Standard: Provide power ventilators that comply with UL 705.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and fans have
been commissioned.
1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties
are specified in Division 7 Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators:
a. Cook (Loren) Co.
b. Greenheck Fan Corp.
C. ILG Industries, Inc.
POWER VENTILATORS 15853 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/l/98
2.2 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt -driven or direct -drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting of housing, wheel,
fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
B. Housing: Removable, spun -aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum base
with venturi inlet cone.
C. Housing: Removable, extruded -aluminum, rectangular top; square, one-piece, aluminum base with
venturi inlet cone.
D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward -inclined blades.
E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:
1. Variable -Speed Controller: Solid-state. control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less than 50
percent.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal -overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel -blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set
to close when fan stops.
5. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 2-inch-thick, rigid, fiberglass
insulation adhered to inside walls; and 2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening
and fan base.
a. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.
b. Overall Height: 12 inches.
2.3 IN -LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Description: In -line, centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly,
motor and disconnect switch, mounting brackets, and accessories.
B. Housing: Split, spun -aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes; inlet and outlet flanges;
and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C. Direct -Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory wired to disconnect located on
outside of fan housing.
D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
2.4 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory -installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
POWER VENTILATORS 15853 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked -enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Aluminum Parts: No finish required.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room
Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements of installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the power ventilators. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Support units using the vibration -control devices indicated. Vibration -control devices are specified in
Division 15 Section "Vibration Control."
1. Secure roof -mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium -plated hardware.
a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7 Sections.
2. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods and vibration
isolation springs.
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
POWER VENTILATORS 15853 - 4
r
( ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/l/98
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with
flexible connectors.
B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.
C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding
connections, according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory -authorized service representative to
supervise the field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct and electrical
connections, and to report results in writing.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Lubricate bearings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and
repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan wheel and
cabinet.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for piping,
ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal -overload protection is
installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory -recommended lubricants.
5. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected
ductwork systems are in the fully open position.
6. Disable automatic temperature -control operators.
r POWER VENTILATORS 15853 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to
indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature -control operators.
D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air -handling -
system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown,
troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
B. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
C. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.
D. Demonstrate operation of power ventilators. Conduct walking tour of the Project. Briefly identify
location and describe function, operation, and maintenance of each power ventilator.
END OF SECTION 15853
POWER VENTILATORS 15853 - b
1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/l/98
F
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall -mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume -control
dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
2. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers, and
grilles.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and
comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged
to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a
sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction,
finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type
of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
r, 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and
grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers'
r
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 1
r
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/l/98
products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the
Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LOUVERS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown; of size,
shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as
required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide louvers that have minimum free area, and maximum pressure drop of each type
as listed in manufacturer's current data, complying with louver schedule.
C. Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent
substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and
adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to general construction drawings and
specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type of louver.
D. Materials: Construct of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T52. Weld units or use
stainless steel fasteners.
E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh anodized aluminum wire
bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames.
F. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering louvers
which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Arrow United Industries, Inc.
2.
Dowco Corp.
3.
Industrial Louvers, Inc.
4.
Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
5.
Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.
6.
Ruskin Mfg. Co.
7.
Vent Products Co., Inc.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance
of Air Outlets and Inlets."
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Ceiling -Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and
accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air
volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where
indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center
of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for
a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before
starting air balancing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to
remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 3
T
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
SECTION 16891 - METAL DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section:
1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements."
2. "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat -oval metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating,
and air conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2 inches to plus 10 inches water gage.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for fire-resistant sealants for use around duct penetrations and
fire damper installations in fire rated floors, partitions, and walls.
2. Division 8 Section "Access Panels and Doors" for wall- and ceiling -mounted access panels and
doors for access to concealed ducts.
3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for exterior duct and plenum insulation.
4. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for flexible duct materials, dampers, duct -mounted access
panels and doors, and turning vanes.
5. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Sealing Requirements Definitions: For die purposes of duct systems sealing requirements specified in
this Section, the following definitions apply:
1. Seams: A seam is defined as joining of two longitudinally (in the direction of airflow) oriented
edges of duct surface material occurring between two joints. All other duct surface connections
made on dhe perimeter are deemed to be joints.
2. Joints: Joints include girth joints; branch and subbranch intersections; so-called duct collar tap -
ins; fitting subsections; louver and air terminal connections to ducts; access door and access
panel frames and jambs; duct, plenum, and casing abutments to building structures.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air moving and distribution
equipment and other components of the air system. Changes or alterations to the layout or configuration
of the duct system must be specifically approved in writing. Accompany requests for layout
r
4
�^ METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 1
F
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
modifications with calculations showing that the proposed layout will provide the original design results
without increasing the system total pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual
components, profiles, and finishes for the following items:
1. Sealing Materials.
2. Fire -Stopping Materials.
C. Record drawings including duct systems routing, fittings details, reinforcing, support, and installed
accessories and devices, in accordance with Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements" and
Division 1.
D. Maintenance data for volume control devices, fire dampers, and smoke dampers, in accordance with '-
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements" and Division 1.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," except
as indicated otherwise.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sealant and fire -stopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life,
curing time, and mixing instructions for multi -component materials.
B. Store and handle sealant fire -stopping materials in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes. --
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Sheet Metal, General: Provide sheet metal in thicknesses indicated, packaged and marked as specified
in ASTM A 700.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality, ASTM A 527, Coating Designation G 90. Provide mill
. phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 2
41
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/l/98
l . C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel reinforcing
where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. For aluminum and stainless steel ducts provide
reinforcing of compatible materials.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch minimum
diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.2 DUCT LINER
A. General: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and TIMA Standard AHC-101.
B. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type II, with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass
fibers.
1. Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Density: 1-1/2 pounds.
3. Thermal Performance: "K-Factor" equal to 0.28 or better, at a mean temperature of 75 deg F.
4. Fire Hazard Classification: Flame spread rating of not more than 25 without evidence of
continued progressive combustion and a smoke developed rating of no higher than 50, when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 411.
5. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and ASTM C 916.
6. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical
attachment, or welding attachment to duct. Provide fasteners that do not damage the liner when
applied as recommended by the manufacturer, that do not cause leakage in the duct, and will
indefinitely sustain a 50-pound tensile dead load test perpendicular to the duct wall.
a. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation, and without projecting more
than 1/8 inch into the airstream.
b. Adhesive For Attachment of Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with the "Fire Hazard
Classification" of duct liner system.
2.3 SEALING MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The tern sealant used here is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature, but also includes tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics.
B. Joint and Seam Sealant: One -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying
r.. with FS TT-S-001657, Type I; formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
C. Flanged Joint Mastics: One -part, acid -curing, silicone elastomeric joint sealants, complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
2.4 FIRE -STOPPING
A. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for fire -stopping.
2.5 FIRE -STOPPING
A. Fire -Resistant Sealant: Provide one -part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a through -penetration
fire -stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors, having fire-
r- METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by
Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam"; Dow Corning Corp.
2. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Sealant'; Dow Corning Corp.
3. "3M Fire Barrier Caulk CP-25% Electrical Products Div./3M.
4. "RTV 7403"; General Electric Co.
5. 'Tyre Putty'; Standard Oil Engineered Materials Co.
2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers: Galvanized sheet steel, or round, uncoated steel, threaded rod.
1. Hangers Installed In Corrosive Atmospheres: Electro-galvanized, all -thread rod or hot -dipped -
galvanized rods with threads painted after installation.
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Conform with Table 4-1 in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, 1985 Edition, for sheet steel width and gage and steel rod diameters.
B. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct
materials.
C. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36.
1. Where galvanized steel ducts are installed, provide hot -dipped -galvanized steel shapes and
plates.
2. For stainless steel ducts, provide stainless steel support materials.
3. For aluminum ducts, provide aluminum support materials, except where materials are
electrolytically separated from ductwork.
2.7 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel, in
accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Tables 1-3 through 1-19, including
their associated details. Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness,
reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for
pressure classification.
2. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, and discoloration.
B. Static Pressure Classifications: Except where otherwise indicated, construct duct systems to the
following pressure classifications:
1. Supply Ducts: 2 inches water gage.
2. Return Ducts: 2 inches water gage, negative pressure.
3. Exhaust Ducts: 2 inches water gage, negative pressure.
METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 4
i
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
C. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 19 inches and larger and are 20
gage or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panel area, as indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standard," Figure 14, unless they are lined or are externally insulated.
2.8 RECTANGULAR DUCT FITTINGS
A. Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in accordance
with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard," 1985 Edition, Figures 2-1 through 2-10.
2.9 ROUND DUCT FABRICATION
A. Round Ducts: Fabricate round supply ducts with longitudional, snap lock seam construction, through
18 inch diameter.
B. Round Ducts: Fabricate round supply ducts using seam types identified in SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards," 1985 Edition, Figure 3-1, RL-5, RL-6A &B, RL-7, or RL-8. Comply with
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3-2 for galvanized steel gages.
2.10 ROUND SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTINGS FABRICATION
A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to conform to SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards," 1985 Edition, Figures 3-4 and 3-5 and with metal thicknesses specified for
longitudinal seam straight duct.
B. Diverging -Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material
projecting from the body onto branch tap entrance.
C. Elbows: Fabricate in die -formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate the bend radius of
die -formed, gored, and pleated elbows 1.5 times the elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction type is
indicated, provide elbows meeting the following requirements:
1. Round Elbows - 8 Inches and Smaller Die -formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and
pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle
configurations or 1/2-inch-diameter (e.g. 3-1/2- and 4-1/2-inch) elbows with gored construction.
2. Round Elbows - 9 Through 14 Inches: Gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees,
except where space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle
configurations or 1/2-inch-diameter (e.g. 9-1/2- and 10-1/2-inch) elbows with gored construction.
3. Round Elbows - Larger Than 14 Inches: Gored elbows, except where space restrictions require a
mitered elbow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure
classification indicated.
B. Install ducts with the fewest possible joints.
METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
811/98
C. Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.
D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at connections kept to a minimum.
E. Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to
building lines; avoid diagonal runs. Install duct systems in shortest route that does not obstruct useable
space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.
F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
G. Provide clearance of 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, plus
allowance for insulation thickness, if any.
H. Install insulated ducts with 1-inch clearance outside of insulation.
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall
construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as
specifically shown.
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
L. Non -Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass interior partitions and exterior walls, and are _
exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet
metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. General: Seal duct seams and joints as follows:
B. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation.
3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round and rectangular metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards," Tables 4-1 through 4-3 and Figures 4-1 through 4-8.
B. Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch intersection. _
C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.
D. Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not exceeding 1/4 of the failure (proof test)
load but are not limited to the specific methods indicated.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in accordance with Division 15 _
Section "Duct Accessories."
METAL DUCTWORK 15891 6 "'
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1198
B. Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2-7 and
2-8.
C. Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures
2-16 through 2-18.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner will contract with an independent testing agency to perform, record, and report leakage
tests.
B. Remake leaking joints as required and apply sealants to achieve specified maximum allowable leakage.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust volume control devices as required by the testing and balancing procedures to achieve required
air flow. Refer to Division 15 Section "TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING" for requirements
and procedures for adjusting and balancing air systems.
B. Vacuum ducts systems prior to final acceptance to remove dust and debris.
END OF SECTION 15891
METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 7
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
SECTION 15910 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Manual volume control dampers.
2. Fire and smoke dampers.
3. Actuators.
4. Turning vanes.
5. Duct -mounted access doors and panels.
6. Flexible connectors.
7. Flexible ducts.
8. Accessories hardware.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for ceiling and wall -mounted access panels and doors.
2. Division 15 Section "Air Outlets and Inlets" for diffusers, registers, and grilles.
3. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for duct -mounted fire and smoke detectors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification
Sections.
B. Product data including details for materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and
finishes for the following items:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual volume control dampers.
3. Fire and smoke dampers.
4. Duct -mounted access panels and doors.
5. Duct silencers.
6. Flexible ducts.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15910 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/l/98
2. NFPA 90B, "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUAL VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. General: Provide factory -fabricated volume -control dampers, complete with required hardware and
accessories. Stiffen damper blades to provide stability under operating conditions. Provide locking
device to hold single -blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for
damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. Provide end bearings or other seals for
ducts with pressure classifications of 3 inches or higher. Extend axles full length of damper blades.
Provide bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
B. Standard Volume Control Dampers: Multiple- or single -blade, parallel- or opposed -blade design as
indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside of air stream, and suitable for horizontal or
vertical applications.
C. Low -Leakage Volume Control Dampers: Multiple- or single -blade, parallel- or opposed -blade design
as indicated, low -leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat -shaped, galvanized -steel channels, minimum of 16 gage, and with mitered
and welded corners. Provide frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls.
Provide flangeless frames where indicated for installation in ducts.
2. Roll -Formed Steel Blades: 16-gage galvanized steel.
3. Roll -Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.025-inch-thick roll -formed aluminum.
4. Blade Seals: Vinyl
5. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
D. Jackshaft: 1-inch-diameter, galvanized -steel pipe rotating within a pipe bearing assembly mounted on
supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple damper assemblies. Provide appropriate length
and number of mounting to connect linkage of each damper of a multiple damper assembly.
E. Damper Control Hardware: Zinc -plated, die-cast core with a heavy -gage dial and handle made of 3/32-
inch-thick zinc -plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Provide center hole to suit damper
operating rod size. Provide elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.2 FIRE DAMPERS
A. General: UL labeled according to UL Standard 555 "Standard for Fire Dampers." Refer to Fire
Damper Schedule at the end of this Section.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15910 - 2
F
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/ 1 /98
B.
C.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours, as indicated.
Frame: Type B; fabricated with roll -formed, 21-gage, galvanized -steel; with mitered and interlocking
corners.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory -installed or field -installed galvanized steel.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.056-inch (16-gage) or 0.138-inch (10-gage) thick as indicated, and
length to suit application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter
mounting angles on each side of the wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame meets sleeve
requirements.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
Blades: Roll -formed, interlocking,. 21-gage galvanized steel. In place of interlocking blades, provide
full-length, 21-gage, galvanized -steel blade connectors.
Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless steel negator closure spring.
Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F or 212 deg F rated as indicated.
CEILING FIRE DAMPERS
General: UL listed and labeled; comply with the construction details for the tested floor/roof-ceiling
assemblies as indicated in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.
Frame: 20-gage, rectangular or round, galvanized steel; style to suit ceiling construction.
Blades: 22-gage galvanized steel with nonasbestos refractory insulation.
Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.
2.4 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate turning vanes according to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Figures 2-2
through 2-7.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch-wide, curved blades set at 3/4 inch on center,
support with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2 inches on center, and set into side strips suitable for
mounting in ducts.
2.5 DUCT -MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. General: Refer to the Access Door Materials Schedule at the end of this Section for frame and door
thickness, number of hinges and locks, and location of locks. Provide construction and airtightness
suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel. Provide with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets.
I F
7 DUCT ACCESSORIES 15910 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
811/98
C. Door: Double -wall, galvanized sheet metal constructioll with insulation fill and thickness, number of
hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Provide vision panel where indicated. Provide 1-
inch by 1-inch butt hinge or piano hinge and cam latches.
D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber seals.
E. Insulation: 1-inch-thick fiber glass or polystyrene foam board.
2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Flame -retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL
Standard 181, Class 1, B. Standard Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory -fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide attached
to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 24-gage, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch aluminum sheets. Select
metal compatible with connected duct system. Fold and crimp metal edge strips onto fabric as
illustrated in SMACNA HVAC Duct Standard, 1st Edition, Figure 2-19.
C. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connectors Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with _
polychloroprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. —
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Flexible Ducts - Insulated: Factory -fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-
1/2-inch-thick, glass fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.
1. Reinforcement: Steel -wire helix encapsulated in the inner liner. —
2. Outer Jacket: Polyethylene film.
3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
2.8 ACCESSORIES HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and
gasket and a flat mounting gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments
and provide in length to suit duct insulation thickness. _
B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc -plated damper blade bracket, 1/4-inch, zinc -plated operating rod,
and a duct -mounted, ball joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square -head set screw.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless steel band with cadmium -plated hex screw to tighten band with a
worm -gear action. Provide in sizes from 3 to 18 inches to suit duct size.
D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof and resistant to gasoline and
grease.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15910 - 4
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
8/1/98
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of duct accessories. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to manufacturer's installation instructions and applicable portions of
details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards.
B. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install fire and smoke dampers according to the manufacturer's UL-approved printed instructions.
D. Install fusible links in fire dampers.
E. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification. "
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
C. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing."
END OF SECTION 15910
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15910 - 5
T
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
SECTION 15975 - CONTROL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
8/l/98
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units that are not supplied with factory -wired controls.
B. Related Section: Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operation" contains requirements that relate to this
Section.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment,
other apparatus, and accessories connected to controllers to operate mechanical systems according to
sequences of operation indicated or specified.
B. Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment,
. other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in
multitasking, multiuser environment on token -passing network and programmed to operate mechanical
systems according to sequences of operation indicated or specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical Product Data for
each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical
characteristics, finishes of materials, installation instructions, and startup instructions.
i C. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights,
• loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection. Submit damper leakage and flow characteristics, plus size schedule for controlled
�• dampers.
t
4 .
D. Shop Drawings containing the following information for each control system:
1. Schematic flow diagram showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices.
2. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.
Pir 3. Diagrams for all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between factory -installed and'
field -installed wiring.
r CONTROL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 15975 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
5. Written description of sequence of operation.
c
E. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiating clearly
between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring.
F. Maintenance data for control systems equipment to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Maintenance instructions and spare parts lists for each type of control device and compressed -air
stations.
2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices.
3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. :}
4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration
tolerances.
5. Calibration records and list of set points.
G. Field Test Reports: Procedure and certification of pneumatic control piping system.
H. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control units,
thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer specializing in control system installations.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing control systems similar to
those indicated for .this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Startup Personnel Qualifications: Engage specially trained personnel in direct employ of manufacturer
of primary temperature control system.
D. Comply with NFPA 90A.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Coordinate equipment selection with Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" to achieve
compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.
CONTROL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 15975 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Electric Control Systems and Components:
a. Barber -Coleman Co.; Environmental Controls.
b. Honeywell, Inc.; Commercial Buildings Group.
C. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group.
d. Landis & Gyr Powers, Inc.
e. Robertshaw Controls Co.
2.2 CONTROL PANELS
A. Local Control Panels: Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting, located
adjacent to each system under automatic control. Provide common keying for all panels.
1. Fabricate panels of 0.06-inch-thick, furniture -quality steel, or extruded -aluminum alloy, totally
enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock, with manufacturer's standard shop -painted finish
and color.
2. Panel -Mounted Equipment: Temperature and humidity controllers, relays, and automatic
switches; except safety devices. Mount devices with adjustments accessible through front of
panel.
3. Door -Mounted Equipment: Flush -mount (on hinged door) manual switches, including damper -
positioning switches, changeover switches, thermometers, and gages.
2.3 ACTUATORS
A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or
2-position action.
1. Permanent Split -Capacitor or Shaded -Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and
r► sealed. Equip spring -return motors with integral spiral -spring mechanism in housings designed
I for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback
potentiometer.
2.4 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR
A. Veris Industries, Inc. Model CX-L-SR with (1) C100 Calibration Kit.
B. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and 'Transmitter: Single detectors, using solid-state infrared sensors, suitable
over temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F, calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged
reading, 4 to 20 mA output, wall mounted. LED display, relay output to control mixed air dampers in
return and outside air ducts.
CONTROL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 15975 - 3
E
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
2.5 DAMPERS
A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed blade design; form frames from not less than 0.1084-inch
galvanized steel with mounting holes for duct mounting; damper blades not less than 0.0635-inch
galvanized steel, with maximum blade width of 8 inches.
1. Blades secured to 1/2-inch diameter, zinc -plated axles using zinc -plated hardware, with nylon
blade bearings, blade -linkage hardware of zinc -plated steel and brass. Ends sealed against
spring -stainless -steel blade bearings. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From -40 to 200 deg F.
3. For standard applications as indicated, (as selected by manufacturer's sizing techniques) with
optional closed -cell neoprene edging.
4. For low -leakage applications as indicated, provide parallel or opposed blade design (as selected
by manufacturer's sizing techniques) with inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber
seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm/sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4
inches wg when damper is being held by torque of 50 inch -pounds; test in accordance with
AMCA 500.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation. Verify that
field end devices, wiring, and pneumatic tubing are installed before proceeding with installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment as indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
C.
3.3
A.
B.
Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not where exposed to outdoor temperatures.
Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Sections
specifying mechanical identification.
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTIONS
Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section "Raceways, Boxes, and
Cabinets."
Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables."
C. Connect electrical components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instructed by
manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment
manufacturer's published torque -tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's
torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening
requirements specified in UL 486A.
D. Connect HAND -OFF -AUTO selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is
in HAND position.
CONTROL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 15975 - 4 0
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide the services of a factory -authorized service representative to
start control systems.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Start, test, and adjust control systems.
E. Demonstrate compliance with requirements.
F. Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of operation specified.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide the services of a factory -authorized service representative to
demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
2. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' notice.
3. Provide operator training on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data,
execution of commands, and request of logs. Include a minimum of 40 hours' dedicated
instructor time on -site.
END OF SECTION 15975
CONTROL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 15975 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
SECTION 16990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
8/1/98
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives,
including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains, branches,
and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are included in
the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality -control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and equipment
installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan
speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air
velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a
person's skin than is normally dissipated.
t
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.
4
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
J F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed
system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
r
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.
rr TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 1
i
E.
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
811198
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced
capacities in all or part of a system. '
I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan
when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.
K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the
testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.
P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality -Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2
copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing, adjusting,
and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article
below.
B. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as specified
in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
C. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms.
D. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC or
NEBB.
B. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and
balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
I. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, adjusting,
and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing,
adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 2 v
t�
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 811198
R'`"
j C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from NEBB's "Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards.
F. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation
for NEBB Certification."
G. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if
required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory -authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC
controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist
testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution
systems have been satisfactorily completed.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article shall not
deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC'S "National Standards" forms
stating that AABC will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing,
i adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the
following provisions:
C. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing
the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to
comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:
1. The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 3
r
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions
in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and
equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow -control
devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract
Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and
appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."
D. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to
project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted
conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to
reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from
those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects
for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10;
or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems --Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the
design data and installed conditions.
E. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning,
adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed.
F. Examine system and equipment test reports.
G. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as
test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow -control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and
manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for
effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
H. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.
I. Examine air -handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts
are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J. Examine heat -transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
K. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
L. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
2. Dampers are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open
positions.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 4
d!
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/l/98
4. Thermostats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.
5. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
6. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
7. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to changes in
conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
8. Interlocked systems are operating.
9. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing
procedures.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature -control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air -pattern adjustments are required and access to
balancing devices is provided.
6. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met.
3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in
AABC national standards and this Section.
B. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in
NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and
this Section.
C. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum
extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe
holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and
finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.
D. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including
damper -control positions, valve indicators, fan -speed -control levers, and similar controls and devices,
to show final settings.
3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended
testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" duct layouts.
i
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 5
r
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
D. Check the airflow patterns from the outside -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air
dampers, through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. `
E. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages.
I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
J. Check for proper sealing of air -handling unit components.
3.5 CONSTANT -VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant -volume supply-, return-, and exhaust -air systems.
Additional procedures are required for variable -air -volume, multizone, dual -duct, induction -unit
supply -air systems and process exhaust -air systems. These additional procedures are specified in other
articles .in this Section.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan
manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream
from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
C. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that
houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each air -handling unit component.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must
change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery
equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures
versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect
factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and
actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Architect. Make required
adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan -speed
changes.
6. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan -motor
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 6
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, and
economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows within
specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume
dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total
airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust
submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.
D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct -reading hood or the, outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances of design
values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air
terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design quantities
without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high -efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal -protection -element rating.
3.7 CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering- and leaving -air temperatures. Record compressor
data.
3.8 TEMPERATURE TESTING
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation within
the automatic temperature -control system.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 7
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8-hour
days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure
when the building or zone is occupied. `
C. Measure outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures. f
3.9 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating -Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling -Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
3.10 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "—
"Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing
devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper
performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and --
general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in
progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being
tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems
serving multiple floors.
3.11 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter -quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring
binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing
engineer.
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
1. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers' test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop
Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final
report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 8 -"
!17
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
10. Summary of contents, including the following:
a. Design versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values.
14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust -air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
C. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable -air -volume systems.
g. Settings for supply -air, static -pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air distribution systems. Present with single -line
diagrams and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
F. Air -Handling Unit Test Reports: For air -handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
C. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches.
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 9
r
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
C. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full -load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches.
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
C. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Filter static -pressure differential in inches wg.
f. Preheat coil static -pressure differential in inches wg.
S. Cooling coil static -pressure differential in inches wg.
h. Heating coil static -pressure differential in inches wg.
i. Outside airflow in cfm.
j. Return airflow in cfm.
k. Outside -air damper position.
1. Return -air damper position.
M. Vortex damper position.
G. Apparatus -Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:
1. Coil Data: Include the following:
a.
System identification.
b.
Location.
C.
Coil type.
d.
Number of rows.
e.
Fin spacing in fins per inch.
f.
Make and model number.
g.
Face area in sq. ft.
h.
Tube size in NPS.
i.
Tube and fin materials.
j.
Circuiting arrangement.
2. Test
Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a.
Airflow rate in cfm.
b.
Average face velocity in fpm.
C.
Air pressure drop in inches wg.
d.
Outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
e.
Return -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
f.
Entering -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
g.
Leaving -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
h.
Water flow rate in gpm.
i.
Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
j.
Entering -water temperature in deg F.
k.
Leaving -water temperature in deg F.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 10
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
1. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
In. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.
C n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.
o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.
H. Gas -Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to the manufacturer's factory startup equipment
reports, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
C. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
C. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in Btuh.
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner -control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
1. Motor full -load amperage and service factor.
M. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
n. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Entering -air temperature in deg F.
C. Leaving -air temperature in deg F.
d. Air temperature differential in deg F.
e. Entering -air static pressure in inches wg.
f. Leaving -air static pressure in inches wg.
g. Air static -pressure differential in inches wg.
h. Low -fire fuel input in Btuh.
i. High -fire fuel input in Btuh.
j. Manifold pressure in psig.
k. High -temperature -limit setting in deg F.
1. Operating set point in Btuh.
M. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in Btuh.
I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
'-+ C. Make and type.
I d. Model number and size.
` e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 11
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
h. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
C. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full -load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches.
g. Number of belts, make, and size.
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
C. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
J. Round and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct
cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. System and air -handling unit number.
b. Location and zone.
C. Traverse air temperature in deg F.
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.
e. Duct size in inches. ^
f. Duct area in sq. ft.
g. Design airflow rate in cfm.
h. Design velocity in fpm.
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.
j. Actual average velocity in fpm.
k. Barometric pressure in psig.
3.12 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, ; and balancing, perform additional testing and
balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual
conditions.
r
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during
near -peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during
near -peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 12
t�
t
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
r
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and
Division h Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The contractor shall provide complete and operational systems at the completion of the contract. The
contractor shall provide all labor and mateials required to comply with the intent of these documents,
whether specifically indicated or not.
B. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specification for the general construction. If these documents
show any item requiring work under division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective
"M", "P", or "E" drawings, lie shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no
notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work
as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the Specifications.
C. Order of Precedence shall be observed in laying out pipe, ductwork, material and conduit in order to fit
the material into the space above the ceiling and in chases and walls. The following order shall govern:
1. Items affecting visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers,
grilles, outlets, panel boards, etc.
2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewer and storm drain lines.
3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances.
4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not
be impaired by bends and offsets.
D. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention
before the contract is signed. Otherwise the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and
additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material or equipment.
1.3 TERMINOLOGY
A. Whenever the words "provide", "furnish and install" or other similar pleases occur, it is the intent that
the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this division of the
specification, complete for operation unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition of the contract.
C. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs.
D. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 -1
r
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
1.4 INSPECTION OF THE SITE
A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations.
The bidders for work under these sections shall inspect existing conditions and acquaint themselves with
the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and work to be
accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the
present building and underground serving to and from the structure. Failure to do so shall not constitute
grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing
installation or installing any new work.
1.5 FIRE RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES
A. At penetrations of fire -rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire -rated,
fire-resistant material, the full thickness of the construction element in accordance with applicable U.L.
listed penetrations for rated assemblies.
1.6 ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide access doors in ceilings and walls where required for access to devices not readily accessible
through lift -out or moveable panels. Devices requiring access include but are not limited to electrical
junction and pull boxes, valves, equipments, etc.
B. Unless specified in other sections provide access doors equivalent to Milcor Type DW acess doors for
installation in non -fire rated assemblies or Milcor fire rated doors for either wall or ceiling application
in fire rated assemblies.
1.7 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS WIRING
A. Starters for HVAC and Plumbing systems equipement shall be furnished under the Division 15 contracts
to the Electrical Contractor for installation.
B. Low Voltage temperature control wiring shall be installed under the Division 15 contract.
C. Refer to wires and control/signal transmission wiring sections of Division 16 for equipment
requirements.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit information for individual sections as indicated in the following schedule.
CODES
A.
Shop Drawings
B.
Catalog Data & Details
C.
Calculation & Design Data
D.
Material List/Scliedule
E.
Samples/Colors
F.
Installation Instructions
G.
Maintenance and Operating
Manuals
H.
Wiring Diagrams
J.
Certifications/Test Results
K.
Manufacturer Certification
of Installer
CODES
M.
Spare Parts List
N.
Welders
Certification
P.
Warranty
Q.
Record Drawings
R.
Mix Design
S.
Schedules
T.
Balancing Report
U.
Templates
V.
Material Safety
Data Sheets
W.
Performance Curves
BASIC .ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 2
}` ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
IF
L. Design Data
SPECIFICATION SECTION
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND
SUBMITTAL REQUIRED
METHODS
B,F
16119
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY
STRUCTURES
B,J,Q
16120
WIRES AND CABLES
J
16121
CONTROL/SIGNAL TRANSMISSION
16130
RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND CABINETS
B,F,A
16140
WIRING DEVICES
B
16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES AND HANGERS
B
16452
GROUNDING
B,J
16470
PANELBOARDS
B,A,J,G
16475
FUSES
B,G
16476
DISCONNECTS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
B,J,G
16478
OVER CURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES
B,G
16515
INTERIOR LIGHTING
B,G,J
16721
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
B,H,G,J
16915
LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
B,G
1.9 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance materials specified in
individual sections to be provided to Owner, in addition to that required for completion of Work.
B. Coordinate with Owner: Deliver and unload spare products to Owner at Project site and obtain receipt
prior to final payment. Owner will handle and store products.
C. For portions of Project accepted and occupied by Owner prior to Substantial Completion, deliver a
proportional part of spare products to Owner; obtain receipt.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 3
F�
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
1
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
I PART 1 - GENERAL
8/1/98
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following electrical materials and methods:
1. Electrical identification.
2. Electrical demolition.
3. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
4. Touchup painting.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terns "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate electrical equipment installation with other building components.
B. Coordinate connecting electrical service to components furnished under other Sections.
C. Coordinate installing electrical identification after completion of finishing where identification is
applied to field -finished surfaces.
PART Z - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: Where more than one type is listed for a specified application,
selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors
prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications.
B. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and
letters.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
C. Color -Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
2.2 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Provided by equipment manufacturer and selected to match equipment finish.
B. For Nonequipment Surfaces: Matching type and color of undamaged, existing adjacent finish.
C. For Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc -rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights
or other location criteria are not indicated.
B. Install items level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components,
except where otherwise indicated.
r
C. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect
for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
D. Give right of way to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install identification devices where required.
1. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
2. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification
with corresponding designations indicated on the Contract Documents or required by codes and
standards. Use consistent designations throughout the Project.
3. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films
before applying.
3.3 DEMOLITION
A. Where electrical work to remain is damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged
portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality.
B. Accessible Work Indicated to Be Demolished: Remove exposed electrical installation in its entirety.
C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 --
inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.
D. Removal: Remove demolished material from the Project site. `
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
E. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components
indicated for relocation.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for
electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.
B. Repair disturbed surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces.
3.5 TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Thoroughly clean damaged areas and provide primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of
damage at each Iocation.
B. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for tinung and application
of successive coats.
END OF SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/l/98
72
r-
SECTION 16119 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes underground conduits and ducts, duct banks, pull boxes and handholes,
manholes, and other underground utility structures.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for general requirements for excavation, backfill and related
items for ducts, manholes, and handholes.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete" for cast -in -place concrete requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct: Electrical conduit and other raceway, either metallic or nonmetallic, used underground,
embedded in earth or concrete.
B. Duct Bank: 2 or more conduits or other raceway installed underground in the same trench or concrete
envelope.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for metal accessories for manholes and handholes, conduit and duct, duct bank materials,
and miscellaneous components.
C. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of
Architect and Owner, and other information specified.
D. Record Documents: Show dimensioned locations of underground ducts, handholes, and manholes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing underground precast concrete utility
structures of types and sizes required and similar to those indicated for this Project. Firm must have a
record of successful in-service performance.
r UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 16119 - 1
d
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
B. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" and ANSI C2 "National Electrical Safety Code" for
components and installation. `
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver ducts to site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending,
warping, and deforming.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering the
specified products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Nonmetallic Ducts:
a. Arnco Corp.
b. Breeze -Illinois, Inc.
C. CANTEX, Inc.
d. Carlon; Lamson & Sessions Company.
e. Pipe & Plastic Group; Certainteed Products Corp.
f. Cole -Flex Corp.
g. Electri-Flex Co.
h. Spiraduct.Inc. ..r
2.2 CONDUIT AND DUCT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1, galvanized.
B. Rigid Plastic Underground Conduit: UL 651A, Type A PVC or EB PVC.
C. Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6.
D. Plastic Communication Duct and Fittings: NEMA TC 10.
E. Manufactured Bends: Not less than 36-inch radius.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Duct Supports: Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide minimum duct spacings and concrete cover
depths indicated, while supporting ducts during concreting.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 16119 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Underground Ducts For Electrical Utility Service: Plastic conduit encased in concrete.
B. Underground Ducts For Telephone Utility Service: Plastic utilities.
C. Underground Ducts For Communication Circuits: Plastic underground conduit encased.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine site to receive ducts for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the underground ducts. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.3 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation and Backfill: Conform to Division 2 Section "Earthwork," but do not use heavy-duty,
hydraulic -operated compaction equipment.
B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and reestablish original grades except as
otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore
all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and
include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching. Perform
according to Division 2 Section "Landscape Work."
C. Restore disturbed paving. Refer to "Cutting and Patching" in Division 1.
3.4 CONDUIT AND DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Install nonmetallic conduit and duct as indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Curves and Bends: Use manufactured elbows for stub -ups at equipment and at building entrances. Use
manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 25 feet both horizontally and vertically at
other locations.
C. Make joints in ducts and fittings watertight according to manufacturer's instructions. Stagger couplings
so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in the same plane.
D. Building Entrances: Transition from underground duct to conduit 10 feet minimum outside the
building wall. Use fittings manufactured for the purpose. Follow appropriate installation instructions
below.
1. Concrete -Encased Ducts: Install reinforcing in duct banks passing through disturbed earth near
buildings and other excavations. Coordinate duct bank with structural design to support duct
bank at wall without reducing structural or watertight integrity of building wall.
r UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 16119 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
E. Concrete -Encased Nonmetallic Ducts: Support on plastic separators coordinated with duct size and
required duct spacing, and install according to the following:
1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of
ducts, and secure separators to the earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Do
not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts
or duct groups.
2. Concreting: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits
and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not use power -driven agitating equipment unless
specifically designed for duct bank application. Pour each run of envelope between manholes or
other terminations in 1 continuous operation. When more than one pour is necessary, terminate
each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches into
the concrete on both sides of joint near the comers of the envelope.
3. Reinforcing: Reinforce duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated.
4. Forms: Use the walls of the trench to form the side walls of the duct bank where the soil is self-
supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions, otherwise, use forms.
5. Minimum Clearances Between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2
inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and signal ducts.
6. Depth: Except as otherwise indicated, install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished
grade in nontraffic areas and at least 30 inches below finished grade in vehicular traffic areas.
F. Stub -Ups: Use rigid steel conduit for stub -ups to equipment. For equipment mounted on outdoor
concrete pads, extend steel conduit a minimum of 5 feet from edge of pad. Install insulated grounding
bushings on the terminations. Couple steel conduits to the ducts with adapters designed for the purpose
and then encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
G. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that are wired under this Project. Seal
spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15 psi hydrostatic
pressure.
H. Pulling Cord: Install 100-pound-test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements upon completion of installation of
underground duct and utility structures.
1. Duct Integrity: Rod ducts with a mandrel 1/4 inch smaller in diameter than internal diameter of
ducts. Where rodding indicates obstructions in ducts, remove the obstructions and retest.
2. Water Tightness: Make internal inspection of manholes 3 months after completion of
construction for indications of water ingress. Where leakage is noted, remove water and seal
leak sources. Reinspect after 2 months and reseal remaining leak sources. Repeat process at 2
month intervals until leaks are corrected.
B. Correct installations where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance. Otherwise, remove and
replace defective products and retest.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 161.19 4 --
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8l1198
3.6 CLEANING
A. Pull brush through full length of ducts. Use round bristle brush with a diameter 112 inch greater than
internal diameter of duct.
B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes including sump. Remove foreign material.
END OF SECTION 16119
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 16119 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
ra
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for
wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide wires and cables specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver wires and cables according to NEMA WC 26.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.
B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and as
approved by Architect.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16120 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Wires and Cables:
a. Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div.
b. American Insulated Wire Corp.; Leviton Manufacturing Co.
C. BICC Brand -Rex Company.
d. Carol Cable Co., Inc.
e. Senator Wire & Cable Company.
f. Southwire Company.
2. Connectors for Wires and Cables:
a. AMP Incorporated.
b. General Signal; O-Z/Gedney Unit.
C. Monogram Co.; AFC.
d. Square D Co.; Anderson.
e. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.
2.2 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES
A. UL-listed building wires and cables with conductor material, insulation type, cable construction, and
rating as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article.
B. Rubber Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 3. ....
C. Thermoplastic Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 5.
D. Conductor Material: Copper.
E. Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded conductor for larger than
No. 10 AWG.
2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES _
A. UL-listed, factory -fabricated wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for
application and service indicated. Comply with Project's installation requirements and as specified in
Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 2 "'"
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/ 1 /98
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires and cables. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 WIRE AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
A. Service Entrance: THWN, in raceway.
B. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
C. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
D. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's
"Standard of Installation."
B. Remove existing wires from raceway before pulling in new wires and cables.
C. Pull Conductors: Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary;
compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will not
damage cables or raceway.
E. Install exposed cables, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow
surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
G. Seal around cables penetrating fire -rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
H. Identify wires and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
1. Install #10 conductors for 120 volt, 20 amp circuits longer than 100 feet.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Conductor Splices: Keep to minimum.
B. Install splices and tapes that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than
conductors being spliced.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
C. Use splice and tap connectors compatible with conductor material.
D. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.
E. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: On installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.
B. Correct malfunctioning conductors and cables at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 4
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
SECTION 16121 - CONTROUSIGNAL TRANSMISSION MEDIA
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of control and signal transmission media:
1. Twisted -pair cable.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables" for building wire used for control or signal circuits.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For control/signal transmission media.
B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain all cable of each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Electronic Cables:
a. American Insulated Wire Corp.
b. AT&T Technology, Inc.; Cable and Wire Division.
CONTROUSIGNAL TRANSMISSION MEDIA
16121 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/l /98
C. Berk-Tek, Inc.
d. BICC Brand -Rex Company.
e. Cooper Industries; Belden Division.
f. Guardian Products; General Cable.
g. Mohawk Wire and Cable Corp.
h. Pirelli Cable Corp.; Power Cable Division.
2.2 ELECTRONIC CABLE
A. Multiconductor Cable: Quantity of conductors indicated; No. 18 AWG tinned -copper conductors;
color -coded, low -loss PVC insulation; aluminum/Mylar shield; No. 22 AWG tinned -copper drain wire;
PVC jacket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways and other elements to receive cables for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of transmission media. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION _
A. Install cable as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions.
1. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in same raceway.
2. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate
conductor or insulation.
3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage media or raceway.
C. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow
surface contours where possible.
D. Use splice and tap connectors compatible with cable material.
1. Make no splices except at indicated splice points. _
E. Seal around cables penetrating fire -rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Firestopping. "
F. Identify cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
CONTROL/SIGNAL TRANSMISSION MEDIA 16121 - 2 "'
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace malfunctioning cables at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance.
END OF SECTION 16121
CONTROL/SIGNAL TRANSMISSION MEDIA 16121 - 3
r-.
�r
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
SECTION M30 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
1. Raceways include the following:
a. RMC.
b. EMT.
C. FMC.
d. LFMC.
e. Surface raceways.
2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets include the following:
a. Device boxes.
b. Floor boxes.
C. Outlet boxes.
d. Pull and junction boxes.
e. Cabinets and hinged -cover enclosures.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for raceways and box supports.
3. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor -box service
fittings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
D. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1198
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures, and
cabinets.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide raceways and boxes specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. _
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
B. Comply with NECA's "Standard of Installation."
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements to ensure
adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: r"
1. Metal Conduit and Tubing:
a. Anamet, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
b. Carol Cable Co., Inc.
C. Cole -Flex Corp.
d. Electri-Flex Co.
e. Flexcon, Inc.; Coleman Cable Systems, Inc.
f. Grinnell Co.; Allied Tube and Conduit Div.
g. Monogram Co.; AFC.
h. Spiraduct, Inc.
i. Triangle PWC, Inc.
j. Wheatland Tube Co.
2. Nonmetallic Conduit and Tubing:
a. Anamet, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
b. Breeze -Illinois, Inc.
C. Cantex Industries; Harsco Corp.
d. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
e. Cole -Flex Corp.
f. Condux International; Electrical Products.
g. Electri-Flex Co.
h. George -Ingraham Corp.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
811 /98
i.
Hubbell, Inc.; Raco, Inc.
j.
Lamson & Sessions; Carton Electrical Products.
k.
R&G Sloan Manufacturing Co., Inc.
1.
Spiraduct, Inc.
M.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
3. Conduit Bodies and Fittings:
a.
American Electric; Construction Materials Group.
b.
Crouse -Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries.
C.
Emerson Electric Co.; Appleton Electric Co.
d.
Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
e.
Lamson & Sessions; Carton Electrical Products.
f.
O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
g.
Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM.
h.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
4. Surface Metal Raceways:
a.
Airey-Thompson Co., Inc.; A-T Power Systems.
b.
American Electric; Construction Materials Group.
C.
Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division.
d.
Wiremold Co. (The); Electrical Sales Division.
2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
1. Fittings: Compression type.
C. FMC: Zinc -coated steel.
D. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
E. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit/tubing materials.
2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC.
B. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or conduit/tubing type and material.
2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap -on cover and
mechanically coupled connections using plastic fasteners.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down
straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
C. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with
NFPA 70.
2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap -on covers. Finish with manufacturer's standard
prime coating. _
B. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and
mate with raceways.
2.6 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
B. Cast -Metal Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast box with gasketed cover. _
2.7 FLOOR BOXES
A. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.
2.8 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Small Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with installation r
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 WIRING METHODS
A. Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods:
1. Exposed: Rigid steel.
2. Concealed: Rigid steel.
3. Underground, Single Run: RNC.
4. Underground, Grouped: RNC.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric
Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 4
FALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
ri
B. Indoors: Use the following wiring methods:
1. Exposed: EMT.
2. Concealed: EMT.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric
Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC; except in wet or damp locations, use LFMC.
4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.
6. Underground: RNC.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
C. Conceal conduit and EMT, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
D. Keep raceways at Ieast 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install
horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
E. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom.
F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
G. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
H. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of
bends is not visible above the finished slab.
I. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight legs of
offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Use raceway fittings compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. For intermediate steel
conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Run concealed raceways, with a minimum of bends, in the shortest practical distance considering the
type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
L. Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members, and
follow the surface contours as much as practical.
1. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical.
2. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use factory
elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel
raceways.
M. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight.
1. Make raceway terminations tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to
vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight.
2. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
r" RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 5
f
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/ 1 /98
N. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter
squarely and install locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations are not secure with
1 locknut, use 2 locknuts: 1 inside and 1 outside the box.
O. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into the hub so
the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so the
coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.
P. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc -coated steel or monofilament plastic line
with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire.
Q. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to the above
requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree
bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these
requirements. Provide 3/4" conduit from communication box stub to above ceiling with bushing.
R. Stub -up Connections: Extend rigid conduit elbows through concrete floor for connection to
freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush
with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6
inches above the floor. Install screwdriver -operated, threaded flush plugs flush with floor for future
equipment connections.
S. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 6 feet of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed
lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all
motors. Use liquidtight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor
across flexible connections.
T. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box
supplying the raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.
U. Set floor boxes level and adjust to finished floor surface.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer,
that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
3.5 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove
burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, . scratches, and
abrasions.
END OF SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 6
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
SECTION 16140 - WHUNG DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes various types of receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each product specified.
C. Operation and maintenance data for materials and products specified in this Section to include in the
"Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for devices and installation.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products that are listed and labeled for their applications and installation
conditions and for the environments in which installed.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Wiring Devices for Owner Furnished Equipment: Match devices to plug connectors for Owner -
furnished equipment.
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Wiring Devices:
a. Bryant Electric, Inc.
b. General Electric Co.
C. Hubbell Inc.
d. Leviton Mfg. Co., Inc.
2.2 WIRING DEVICES
A. Comply with NEMA Standard WD 1, "General Purpose Wiring Devices."
B. Enclosures: NEMA 1 equivalent, except as otherwise indicated.
C. Color: White except as otherwise indicated or required by Code.
D. Receptacles, Straight -Blade and Locking Type: Comply with UL Standard 498, "Electrical Attachment _
Plugs and Receptacles," heavy-duty grade except as otherwise indicated.
E. Receptacles, Straight -Blade, Special Features: Comply with the basic requirements specified above for
straight -blade receptacles of the class and type indicted, and with the following additional requirements:
1. Ground -Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: UL Standard 943, "Ground Fault Circuit
Interrupters," non -feed -through type, with integral NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacle. Design _
units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch deep outlet box without an adapter.
2. Isolated Ground Receptacles: Equipment grounding contacts are connected only to the green
grounding screw terminal of the device and have inherent electrical isolation from the mounting
strap.
a. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated ground receptacles.
b. Isolation Method: Integral to the receptacle construction and not dependent on removable
parts.
F. Snap Switches: Quiet -type a.c. switches, NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL Standard 20 _
"General Use Snap Switches," and with Federal Specification W-S-896.
G. Dimmer Switches: Modular full -wave solid-state units with integral, quiet on -off switches, and audible
and electromagnetic noise filters.
1. Wattage rating exceeds connected load by 30 percent minimum, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Control: Continuously adjustable slide. Single -pole or 3-way switch to suit connections. -..
3. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular dimmer switches for incandescent fixtures; switch poles
and wattage as otherwise indicated, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable slide, single -pole
with soft tap or other quiet switch. Equip with electromagnetic filter to eliminate noise, RF and
TV interference, and 5-inch wire connecting leads.
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
H. Wall Plates: Single and combination types that mate and match with corresponding wiring devices.
Features include the following:
1. Color: Matches wiring device except as otherwise indicated.
2. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with heads colored to match plate finish.
2.3 FLOOR SERVICE OUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A. Types: Modular, flush with floor, dual -service units suitable for the wiring method used.
B. Compartmentation: Barrier separates power and signal compartments.
C. Housing Material: Brass, satin finished.
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA configuration 5-20R, gray, except as otherwise indicated.
E. Signal Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening, except as otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure.
B. Install wall plates when painting is complete.
C. Arrangement of Devices: Except as otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical,
and grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall
plates.
D. Protect devices and assemblies during painting.
E. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets and telephone/power service poles are installed to suit
the indicated arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
F. Install GFCI type outlets in all exterior weather-proof outlet boxes.
G. Install 20A Devices on 20A circuits with only one device. Install 15A devices on 20A circuits with
multiple devices.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Isolated Ground Receptacles: Connect to isolated grounding conductor routed to designated isolated
equipment ground terminal of electrical system.
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test ground -fault circuit interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to
manufacturer recommendations.
B. Replace damaged or defective components.
3.4 CLEANING
A. General: Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes,, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly
painted wall plates or devices.
3.5 SCHEDULE OF DEVICES
A. Switches
DEVICE
VOLTAGE MODEL NO MANUFACTURER
Single Pole
120/277
1221
Hubbell
Three Way
120/277
1223
Hubbell
Four Way
120/277
1224
Hubbell
(Provide red face and device plate on
all switches served from emergency electrical service)
B. Receptacles
DEVICE
RATING
VOLTAGE
MODEL NO MANUFACTURER _
Duplex Receptacle
15A
125
5252 Hubbell
Duplex Receptacle
20A
125
5362 Hubbell
Simplex Receptacle
15A
125
5251 Hubbell
Simplex Receptacle
20A
125
5361 Hubbell
Isolated Ground
20A
125
IG-5361 Hubbell
Ground Fault Receptacle
125
GF-5362 Hubbell _..
Range Outlet
50A
250
9367 Hubbell
(Provide red face and device plate on
all outlets served
from emergency electrical service)
3.6 DIMMER CONTROLS
A. Slide Dimmers
WATTS
VOLTAGE
MODEL NO
MANUFACTURER
600W
120V
NT-600
Lutron
1000W
120V
NT-1000
Lutron
1500W
120V
NT-1500
Lutron
END OF SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES 16140 4
7
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 1/31/96
SECTION 16190- SUPPORTING DEVICES AND HANGERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. All work specified in this section shall comply with the provisions of Section 16010.
B. Provide a system of supporting devices and hangers to insure secure support or bracing for conduit,
electrical equipment, including safety switches, fixtures, panclboards, outlet boxes, junction boxes,
cabinets, etc.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16130: Raceways and Condit Systems.
B. Section 16130: Outlet Boxes.
C. Section 16130: Pull and Junction Boxes.
D. Seciton 16470: Panelboards.
E. Section 16476: Safety Switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal for products furnished under this section is not required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Supporting devices an hangers shall be manufactured by Rayco Fasteners. Provided equipment from the
following:
1. Vertical flange clamps (beam clamps).
2. Conduit clips.
3. Universal clamps (Beam Clamps).
4. Beam clamps (set screw type).
S. Combination push -in conduit clips.
6. Combination conduit hanger clamps.
7. Flexible conduit clips.
8. Special combination conduit clips.
9. One hole steel straps.
10. Minerallac conduit hangers.
SUPPORTING DEVICES AND HANGERS
16190 -1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 1/31/96
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Secure conduits to within 3' of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet, fitting, etc., in accordance with
currently effective edition of the National Electric Code.
B. Install clamps secured to structured for feeder and other conduits routed against the structure. Use drop
rods and hangers or racks to support conduits run apart from the structure.
C. Provide and install suitable angle iron, channel iron or steel metal framing with accessories to support or
brace electrical equipment including safety switches, fixtues, panelboards, etc.
D. Paint all supporting metal not otherwise protected, with rust inhibiting primer and then with a finish
coat if appropriate to match the surrounding metal surfaces. (Prepainted or galvanized support material
is not required to be painted or repainted.)
E. Use of chains, preforated iron, baling wire, or tie wire for supporting conduit runs will not be permitted.
END OF SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES AND HANGERS 16190 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
SECTION 16452 - GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment and basic requirements for
grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified
in this Section may be supplemented in other Sections of these Specifications.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 16 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures" for manhole bonding and
grounding requirements.
2. Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables" for requirements for grounding conductors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with UL 467.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Chance: A. B. Chance Co.
2. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.
3. Ideal Industries, Inc.
GROUNDING
16452 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
4. O-Z/Gedney Co.
5. Raco, Inc.
6. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.
2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS
A. Governing Requirements: Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of
National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size,
rating, and quantity indications govern.
2.3 WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS —
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables." Conform to NEC Table 8, except as otherwise
indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding.
B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green color insulation.
C. Grounding -Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
D. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, except as otherwise indicated.
E. Bare Copper Conductors: Conform to the following:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. _
2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
2.4 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes, and quantities of
equipment grounding conductors, except where specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than
required by NEC are indicated. _
1. Install equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the items below in addition to
those required by Code:
a. Feeders.
b. Three-phase motor or appliance branch circuits.
c. Flexible raceway runs.
2. Isolated Grounding -Receptacle Circuits: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding
conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from
GROUNDING 16452 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at the equipment grounding -
conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, except as otherwise indicated.
r- 3. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways
unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.
4. Water Heater, Heat -Tracing, and Antifrost Heater Circuits: Install a separate equipment
�• grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat -tracing assembly,and antifrost heating
E cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
B. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication
systems, provide a No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding -
electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment
location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor
on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus.
2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Ground electrical systems and equipment according to NEC requirements, except where
Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements.
B. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided -type bonding straps.
C. Ufer Ground (Concrete -Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NEC Paragraph 250-
81(c), using a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. Where base
of concrete foundation is less than 20 feet in length, coil excess conductor within base of concrete
foundation.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select
connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will
be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot -tin -coated materials to assure high conductivity and to make contact
points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B. Equipment Grounding -Wire Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure -type grounding
lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure -type
connectors.
C. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: Where metallic raceways terminate at metal housings
r without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding
bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in
housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings
and bare grounding conductors, except as otherwise indicated.
B
GROUNDING 16452 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
D. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where these requirements are not available, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL —
A. Tests: Subject the completed grounding system to a megger test at each location where a maximum
ground -resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground _
test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than 2 full days after the last trace of precipitation, and
without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without
chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests by the
2-point method according to IEEE 81.
B. Maximum grounding to resistance values are as follows:
1. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
C. Excessive Ground Resistance: Where resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Owner
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance and to accomplish recommended
work.
D. Report: Prepare test reports, certified by the testing organization, of ground resistance at each test
location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe
measures taken to improve test results.
END OF SECTION 16452
GROUNDING 16452 - 4
i
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS
T
PART 1 - GENERAL
8/1/98
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes lighting and power panelboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V
and less.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general materials and
installation methods.
2. Division 16 Section "Fuses."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, accessory item, and component specified.
B. Shop Drawings: For panelboards. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Show
tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage rating. Include the following:
1. Enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Bus configuration and current ratings.
3. Short-circuit current rating of panelboard.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.
F. Maintenance Data: For panelboard components to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for testing circuit breakers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PANELBOARDS
16470 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/l/98
C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Circuit Breaker Corp.
2. Eaton Corp.; Westinghouse & Cutler -Hammer Products.
3. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div.
4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
5. Square D Co.
2.2 PANELBOARD FABRICATION
A. Enclosures: Flush- or surface -mounted cabinets as indicated. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, unless otherwise
indicated to meet environmental conditions at installed location.
B. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps, unless otherwise indicated. Front for surface -
mounted panelboards shall be same dimensions as box. Fronts for flush panelboards'shall overlap box,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Directory Frame: Metal, mounted inside each panelboard door.
D. Bus: Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity. —'
E. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit equipment ground conductors.
Bonded to box. _
F. Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the
overcurrent protective device ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices.
G. Special Features: Include the following features for panelboards as indicated:
1. Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch -circuit equipment ground conductors;
insulated from box.
2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box with standard door within hinged trim
cover.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
B. Doors: In panelboard front, with concealed hinges. Secure with flush catch and tumbler lock, all
keyed alike.
PANELBOARDS 16470 - 2 '^
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
` 2.4 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Doors: In panelboard front, except omit in fusible -switch panelboard, unless otherwise indicated.
Secure door with vault -type latch with tumbler lock, all keyed alike.
! 2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
t
A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, handle lockable.
1. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated and
interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application, including Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads and Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating
equipment.
B. Fusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, clips to accommodate specified fuses, handle lockable.
. F
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessory items according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount flush panelboards uniformly flush with
wall finish.
D. Circuit Directory: Type directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads.
Obtain approval before installing.
E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
F. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard
into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch
empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
G. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups, and bundle and wrap with wire ties
after completing load balancing.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field -installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved laminated -plastic or metal nameplates
mounted with corrosion -resistant screws.
PANELBOARDS 16470 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards as indicated.
B. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus as indicated.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to
manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. —
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL —
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Make continuity tests of each circuit. B. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate
product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded -case circuit breakers. _
2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest.
C. Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 2 months after Final Acceptance. —
conduct load -balancing measurements and make circuit changes as follows:
1. Perform measurements during period of normal working load as advised by Owner. —
2. Perform load -balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the
facility. Make special arrangements with Owner to avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services
such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving
equipment.
3. Recheck loads after circuit changes during normal load period. Record all load readings before
and after changes and submit test records.
4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not —
acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as required to meet this minimum requirement.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated.
PANELBOARDS 16470 - 4
r
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
3.7 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 16470
PANELBOARDS
16470 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/l/98
SECTION 16476 - FUSES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fuses.
2. Spare fuse cabinet.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification'Sections.
B. Product Data for each fuse type specified.
C. Product Data for each fuse type specified. Include the following:
1. Descriptive data and time -current curves.
2. Let -through current curves for fuses with current -limiting characteristics.
3. Coordination charts and tables and related data.
4. Fuse size for elevator feeder and disconnect applications.
D. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results.
E. Maintenance data for tripping devices to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from one source and by a single manufacturer.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide fuses specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
FUSES 16475 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Spare Fuses: Furnish quantity equal to 20 percent of each fuse type and size installed, but not
less than 1 set of 3 of each type and size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering fuses that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Cooper Industries, Inc.; Bussmann Div.
2. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.
3. Ferraz Corp.
4. General Electric Co.; Wiring Devices Div.
5. Gould Shawmut.
6. Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class as specified or indicated; current
rating as indicated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.
2.3 SPARE FUSE CABINET
A. Cabinet: Wall -mounted, 0.05-inch-thick steel unit with full-length, recessed piano -hinged door with
key -coded cam lock and pull. _
1. Size: Adequate for orderly storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity
minimum.
2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. --
3. Identification: Stencil legend "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch letters on door.
4. Fuse Pullers: For each size fuse.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions to verify proper fuse locations,
sizes, and characteristics.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FUSES 16475 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Main Service: Class L, fast acting.
B. Main Feeders: Class J, time delay.
C. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.
D. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK5, non -time delay.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices as indicated. Arrange fuses so fuse ratings are readable without
removing fuse.
B. Install spare fuse cabinet where indicated.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install typewritten labels on inside door of each fused switch to indicate fuse replacement information.
END OF SECTION 16475
FUSES
16475 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
r SECTION 16476 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES
t:
PART 1 - GENERAL
8/l/98
1.1 RELATED DQCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted switches used for the following:
1. Service disconnect switches.
2. Motor disconnect switches.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs and receptacles, and snap switches
used for disconnect switches.
2. Division 16 Section "Fuses" for fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for disconnect switches and accessories specified in this Section.
C. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain disconnect switches from one source and by a single manufacturer.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide disconnect switches specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16476 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering disconnect
switches that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Fusible Switches:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler -Hammer Products.
b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division.
C. General Switch Corp.
d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
e. Square D Co.
f. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Distribution & Control Business Unit.
2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 'r
A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.
B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, clips to accommodate
specified fuses, enclosure consistent with environment where located, handle lockable with 2 padlocks,
and interlocked with cover in CLOSED position.
C. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, Type 1, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental
conditions of installed location.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 -- INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches in locations as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install disconnect switches level and plumb.
C. Connect disconnect switches and components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and
instructed by manufacturer.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
D. Identify each disconnect switch according to requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
DISCONNECT SWITCHES 116476 - 2 —
l
17
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
811198
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing disconnect switches and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
B. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise,
remove and replace with new units and retest.
3.3 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, and
abrasions.
END OF SECTION 16476
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
16476 - 3
" ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
SECTION 16478 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section describes the electrical and mechanical requirements for an electrical transient surge
suppression filter system integrating both transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) and electrical
high frequency noise filtering for a variety of exposure locations as defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41-
1991.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Transient voltage suppression for low -voltage distribution systems, with suppressors located at each
major bus, including service entrances, feeders, and branch -circuit distribution equipment.
B. System Exposure: IEEE C62.41, low.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.
B. Equipment Manual: The manufacturer shall furnish with the submittal and with each unit delivered an
equipment manual that details the installation, operation and maintenance instructions for the specified
unit.
P C. Drawings: Electrical and mechanical drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer with the
t submittal and with each unit delivered that show unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions,
connection details and layout diagram of the unit.
r
t D. UL1449 Listing/Clamp Voltages: Manufacturer shall provide data showing UL 1449 product listing.
Manufacturer shall also submit certified documentation of applicable Location Category Testing in full
compliance with NEMA LS 1-1992, paragraphs 2.2.10 and 3.10.
E. Single Pulse Surge Current Capacity Testing: Certified documentation of the unit's Single Pulse
�,. Surge Current Capacity Testing shall be included in the submittal.
F. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity Testing: Certified documentation of the unit's Minimum
►r"
Repetitive Surge Current Capacity Testing shall be included in the submittal.
k
r TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION 16478 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
G. Spare Parts: A list of customer -replaceable spare parts shall be inculded in the submittal and with
each unit delivered. All spare parts shall be quickly and easily field -replaceable.
H. Diagnostic Signature Card: The unit shall include a Diagnostic Signature Card listing factory -
established benchmark suppression voltage values for all modes of protection. The supression voltgage
values shall be established during final production line testing utilizing the DTS-2 Diagnostic Test Set.
This Diagnostic Signature Card shall provide space for subsequent field testing allowing comparison of
the initial factory benchmark testing with subsequent field testing supression voltage values.
I. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
J. Maintenance Data: For transient voltage surge suppressors to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
K. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The suppression filter system shall be designed and manufactured in the USA by a qualified
manufacturer of suppression filter system equipment. The qualified manufacturer shall have been
engaged in the commercial design and manufacture of such products for a minimum of five (5) years.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section that is listed
and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Comply with ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 and C62.45-1992.
E. Comply with ANSI/IEEE C62.1 and C62.11.
F. Comply with NEMA LS1-1992 Guidelines.
G. Comply with UL1449 and UL1283.
H. Comply with UL489 and UL 198.
1. Comply with Federal information processing standard publication 94 (FIPS pub 94).
J. The unit shall be UL1449 listed and CUL approved as a Transient Voltage Ssurge Suppressor and UL
1283 Listed as an Electromagnetic Interference Filter.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Storage temperature range: -40 deg to + 185 deg F.
B. Operating temperature range: -40 deg to + 140 deg F.
C. Reliable operation with 5 % to 95 % non -condensing relative humidity.
D. Capable operation up to 13,000 feet above sea level.
E. The unit shall not generate any audible noise.
F. No appreciable magnetic fields shall be generated. Unit shall be capable of use in computer rooms
without danger to data storage systems or devices.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION 16478 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
7
u to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace
components of transient voltage surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 4 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Current Technology, Inc.
2. Lieboot
2.2 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS
A. Functional Description: Solid-state, 2-stage, transient voltage surge suppressors employing no series -
connected suppression components.
1. Primary Suppression: Employs metal oxide varistor suppression modules.
2. Primary Suppression: Employs silicon avalanched diode suppression modules.
3. Fuses in each suppression -module circuit prevent damage to suppressor during failure of any
module.
B. High Performance Supression System: The unit shall include an engineered solid-state high
performance suppression system utilizing arrays of fused non -linear voltage dependent metal oxide
varistors with similar operating characteristics. The suppression system's components shall optimally
share surge currents in a seamless, low -stress manner assuring maximum performance and proven
reliability. The suppression system shall not utilize gas tubes, spark, gaps, silicon avalanche diodes or
other components which might short or crowbar the line, thus leading to interruption of normal power
flow to or system upset of connected loads. The suppression system shall not incorporate encapsulated
non -field replaceable fusing or any other components which may degrade performamce or long term
reliability of the suppression system. Suppression system shall reduce transient levels and provide
protection for sensitive electronics susceptible to catastrophic or long-term damage. Clamp voltages are
as specified in this Section.
C. High Frequency Extended Range Power Filter: The unit shall include a high frequency extended
range power filter and shall be UL 1283 listed as an Electromagnetic Interference Filter. The filter
shall reduce fast rise -time, high frequency, error -producing transients and electrical line noise to
harmless levels, thus eliminating disturbances which may lead to electronic system upset. The filter
shall provide minimum noise attenuation as specified in this Section.
D. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Greater than 115 percent of nominal system operating
' voltage. MCOV shall be in compliance with test and evaluation procedures contained in NEMA LS 1-
1992, paragraph 2.2.6 and 3.6b
1"
t
r TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION. 16478 - 3
i
f
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
E. Connection Means: Permanently wired.
F. Protection Modes: All protected modes are defined per NEMA LS 1-1992, paragraph 2.2.7.
Following IEEE Standard 1100-1992, section 9.11.2 recommendations, SF units shall provide
protection in all modes. WYE configured systems shall provide Line -to -Neutral, Line -to Ground,
Line -to -Line and Neutral -to -Ground protection. DELTA configured systems shall provide Line -to -
Line protection. Line -to -Line and Line -to -Ground protection shall be provided for all corner grounded
DELTA systems.
G. Rated Single Pulse Surge Current Capacity: The rated single pulse surge current capacity, in amps,
for each mode of protection of the unit shall be no less than as follows:
Rated Single Pulse Surge Current Capacity
Model L-N L-G N-G L-L
SF125 125,000 A 125,000 A 125,000 A 125,000 A
H. Tested Single Pulse Surge Current Capacity: In compliance with NEMA LS 1-1992, paragraphs
2.2.7, 2.2.9 and 3.4.8, suppression filter systems shall be single pulse surge current tested in all modes
at surge currents up to 150% of the product design rating by an industry -recognized independent test
laboratory. Single pulse surge current capacities of 200,000 amps or less are established by single -unit
testing of all components within each mode. Due to present industry test equipment limitations, single
pulse surge current capacities over 200,000 amps are established via testing of individual components
or sub -assemblies within a mode. The test shall include an ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 Category C1
surge defined as a 1.2 X 50 usec, 6000V open circuit voltage waveform and an 8 X 20 usec, 3000A
short circuit current waveform to benchmark the unit's suppression voltage, followed by a single pulse
surge of maximum rated surge current (for units rated over 200,000A per mode, components or sub-
assemblies are tested) magnitude with an approximated 8 X 20 usec waveform. To complete the test,
another Category C1 surge shall be applied to verify the unit's survival. Survival is achieved if the
suppression voltage measured from the two catergory C1 surges does not vary by more tha 10%.
Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity: Per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and ANSI/IEEE C62.45-1992,
all suppression filter systems shall be repetitively surge current capacity tested in every mode utilizing a
1.2 x 50 sec, 20KV open circuit voltage, 8 x 20 sec, 10 KA short circuit current Category C3 bi-wave
at one minute intervals without suffering either performance degradation or more than 10 % deviation of
clamping voltage at a specified surge current.
Repetitive Surge Current Capacity Capacity -Number of Impusles
Models L-L L-N L-G N-G
SF 125 > 4,500 > 4,500 > 4,500 > 4,500
J. NEMA LS 1-1992 Clamping Voltage Data: All suppression filter systems clamping voltages shall be
in compliance with test and evaluation procedures outlines in NEMA LS 1-1992, paragraphs 2.2.10
and 3.10. Maximum clamping voltages for SF units without integral fused disconnect/with integral
fused disconnect are as follows:
System Voltage Mode
A3 Ringwave
B3 Ringwave
B3/C1 Comb Wave
C3 Comb. Wave
120/208 L-N
210/250
260/310
400/430
480/800
L-G
340/360
380/430
370/420
460/800
N-G
240/240
290/290
430/430
580/580
L-L
360/450
480/550
720/780
800/1450
K. UL1449 Ratings: All suppression filter system products are UL1449 rated and listed.
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION 16478 - 4
r`
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
'I
L. High Frequency Extended Range Power Filter: All suppression filter systems EMI-RFI noise rejection
or attenuation values shall be in compliance with test and evaluation procedures outlined in NEMA LS-'
rM 1-1992, paragraphs 2.2.11 and 3.11.
Attenuation Frequency IOOKHz 1MHz IOMHz 100mhz
Insertion Loss (ratio) 50-1 350-1 500-1 250-1
Insertion Loss (dB) 34 51 54 48
M. Overcurrent Protection: The unit shall be installed with coordinated UL 489 or UL 198 listed or
recognized overcurrent protection devices. Suppresion filter systems that utilize fusing as overcurrent
protection shall incorporate not -encapsulated., field -replaceable fuses.
N. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1.
O. Enclosure: Standard unit shall be supplied in a NEMA 4X non-metallic enclosure. Enclosure sizes and
weights are as follows:
1
Model SF Units w/o Fused Disconnect SF Units w/ Fused Disconnect
Enclosure Size/Weight
SF 125 15.69"H x 12.40"W x 7.94 "D/30 lbs. 20.18"H x 16.24 "W x 8.95 "D/49 lbs.
P. Internal Connections: All internal wiring associated with the suppression filter system and subject to
surge currents shall utilize low -impedance copper bus bar. All internal connections associated with the
suppression filter system and subject to surge currents shall be made with compression or mechanical
solderless-type lugs and shall be bolted to the bus bars in order to reduce overall system impedance.
No plug-in component modules, quick -disconnect terminals, non -field replaceable fusing or printed
circuit boards shall be used in surge current -carrying paths.
Q. Unit Status Indicators: The unit shall include long -life, solid state, externally visible status indicators
that monitor the on-line statuss of each phase of the unit.
R. Integral Test Point: The unit shall incorporate an integral test point allowing easy off-line
diagnostic testing verifying the operational integrity of the unit's suppression filter system. Field
testing shall permit proactive testing to ensure performance and long term reliability. Testing shall
include injection of an impulse into the off-line suppression filter system to verify the suppression
performance values established at final factory testing and recorded on the Diagnostic Signature Card.
Indicator lights monitoring fuse condition or power available which inform the user of failure after the
fact do not meet the intent of this specification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power characteristics,
and other conditions affecting performance of transient voltage surge suppressors. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
r TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION 16478 - 5
r
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. The unit shall include mechanical or compression lugs for each phase, neutral and ground.
B. Ground each transient voltage surge suppressor enclosure.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Installation: The unit shall be installed as close as practical to the facility's wiring system in
accordance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's recommended
installation intructions.
END OF SECTION 16478
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION 16478 - 6
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/4/98
fl
SECTION 16515 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
rA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
1 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and
accessories.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Equipment" for modular dimmers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Emergency Lighting Unit: A fixture with integral emergency battery -powered supply and the means
for controlling and charging the battery. It is also known as an emergency light set.
B. Fixture: A complete lighting unit, exit sign, or emergency lighting unit. Fixtures include lamps and
parts required to distribute light, position and protect lamps, and connect lamps to power supply.
Internal battery -powered exit signs and emergency lighting units also include a battery and the means
for controlling and recharging the battery. Emergency lighting units include ones with and without
integral lamp heads.
C. Average Life: The time after which 50 percent fails and 50 percent survives under normal conditions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
i.
Specification Sections.
r B. Product Data describing fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange Product Data
for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories and the following:
1. Outline drawings indicating dimensions and principal features of fixtures.
r" 2. Electrical Ratings and Photometric Data: Certified results of independent laboratory tests for
fixtures and lamps.
3. Battery and charger data for emergency lighting units.
C. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results specified in Part 3 of this Section.
D. Maintenance data for fixtures to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16515 - 1
r
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/4/98
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed
and labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures, emergency lighting units, and accessory components specified
in this Section that are listed and labeled for their indicated use and installation conditions on Project.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
C. Coordinate fixtures, mounting hardware, and trim with ceiling system and other items, including work
of other trades, required to be mounted on ceiling or in ceiling space.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty for Batteries: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to
replace rechargeable system batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period.
1. Special Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of
Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for last
9 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fixtures that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Interior Lighting Fixture
Schedule at end of this Section.
2.2 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL
A. Metal Parts: Free from buns, sharp comers, and edges.
B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Formand support to prevent warping and
sagging.
C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating
conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses,
diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating
position.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16515 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/4/98
F
F
D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, except as otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed
crystal glass, except as otherwise indicated.
1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV
radiation.
2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch minimum; except where greater thickness is indicated.
F. Fixture Support Components: Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
1. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as fixture.
G. Fluorescent Fixtures: Conform to UL 1570.
H. Fluorescent Ballasts: Electronic integrated circuit, solid-state, full -light -output, energy -efficient type
compatible with lamps and lamp combinations to which connected.
1. Certification by Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL).
2. Labeling by Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM).
3. Type: Class P, high power factor, except as otherwise indicated.
4. Sound Rating: "A" rating, except as otherwise indicated.
5. Voltage: Match connected circuits.
6. Lamp Flicker: Less than 5 percent.
7. Minimum Power Factor: 90 percent.
8. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of Ballast Current: Less than 10 percent.
9. Conform to FCC Regulations Part 15, Subpart J for electromagnetic interference.
10. Conform to IEEE C62.41, Category A, for resistance to voltage surges for normal and common
modes.
11. Multilamp Ballasts: Use 2, 3, or 4 lamp ballasts for multilamp fixtures where possible.
12. Lamp -ballast connection method does not reduce normal rated life of lamps.
I. Incandescent Fixtures: Conform to UL 1571.
J. Track -Lighting Systems: Conform to UL 1574. Provide components, including track, fittings, and
fixtures, from same manufacturer and as recommended by manufacturer for intended use.
1. Provide the following track head model numbers and quantities:
Model Number Quantity
a. LSI M2803-00-S (silver) 50
b. LSI 280-00-S (silver) 90
c. LSI Filters A932 (daylight) to fit 280 series fixtures 90
K. Exit Signs: Conform to UL 924 and the following:
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16515 - 3
i
t
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/4/98
1. Sign Colors: Conform to local code.
2. Minimum Height of Letters: Conform to local code.
3. Arrows: Include as indicated.
4. Lamps for AC Operation: Light -emitting diodes (LED), 70,000 hours minimum rated life.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16515 4
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/4/98
L. Self -Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic high/low trickle charger in a self-contained
power pack.
1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, lead -calcium type with special warranty.
M. Emergency Lighting Units: Conform to UL 924. Provide self-contained units with the following
features:
1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, lead -acid type with minimum 10-year nominal life and
special warranty.
2. Charger: Minimum 2-rate, fully automatic, solid-state type, with sealed transfer relay.
3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent
of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage
approaches deep -discharge level. Relay disconnects lamps and battery and automatically
recharges and floats on trickle charger when normal voltage is restored.
4. Time -Delay Relay: Provide time -delay relay in emergency lighting unit control circuit arranged
to hold unit ON for fixed interval after restoration of power after an outage. Provide adequate
time delay to permit HID lamps to restrike and develop adequate output.
2.3 LAMPS
A. Comply with ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp.
B. Noncompact Fluorescent Lamp Life: Rated average is 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start when used on
rapid start circuits.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Manufacturer's standard, except as otherwise indicated, applied over corrosion -resistant treatment or
primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters, and similar defects.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set units plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturer's
written instructions and approved Shop Drawings. Support fixtures according to requirements of
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Support for Recessed and Semirecessed Grid -Type Fluorescent Fixtures: Units may be supported from
suspended ceiling support system. Install ceiling support system rods or wires at a minimum of 4 rods
or wires for each fixture, located not more than 6 inches from fixture comers.
1. Install support clips for recessed fixtures, securely fastened to ceiling grid members, at or near
each fixture corner.
2. Fixtures Smaller than Ceiling Grid: Install a minimum of 4 rods or wires for each fixture and
locate at corner of ceiling grid where fixture is located. Do not support fixtures by ceiling
acoustical panels.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16515 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/4/98
3. Fixtures of Sizes Less than Ceiling Grid: Center in acoustical panel. Support fixtures
independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
C. Support for Suspended Fixtures: For continuous rows, use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and
tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end.
D. Lamping: Where specific lamp designations are not indicated, lamp units according to manufacturer's
instructions.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground lighting units. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections,
according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values
are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replaced damaged fixtures and components.
B. Give advance notice of dates and times for field tests.
C. Provide instruments to make and record test results.
D. Tests: Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits have been
energized with normal power source. Interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper operation of
emergency lighting installation. Include the following information in tests of emergency lighting
equipment:
1. Duration of supply.
2. Low battery voltage shutdown.
3. Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
4. Low supply voltage transfer.
E. Replace or repair malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all units
operate properly.
F. Report results of tests.
G. Replace fixtures that show evidence of corrosion during Project warranty period.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
END OF SECTION 16515
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16515 6
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire alarm systems, including manual stations, detectors, signal equipment,
controls, and devices.
1.3 DEFINITION
A. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Zoned, noncoded fire -detection and alarm system with manual and automatic alarm initiation.
B. Signal Transmission: Hard wired, using separate individual circuits for each zone of alarm initiation
and alarm device operation.
C. Audible Alarm Indication: By sounding of horns and bells.
D. Visual Alarm Indication: By xenon -strobe -type units.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of system component specified including dimensioned plans and elevations
showing minimum clearances and installed features and devices. Include list of materials and
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)-listing data.
C. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer differentiating clearly between factory- and field -installed wiring.
Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified.
Make all diagrams specific to this Project and distinguish between field and factory wiring.
D. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations and routings of raceway connections.
E. System operation description covering this specific Project, including method of operation and
supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for all manually and automatically
r FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/1/98
initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are
unacceptable.
F. Operating instructions for mounting at the FRCP.
G. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of fire alarm system components certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
H. Maintenance data for fire alarm systems to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Division 1. Include data for each type of product, including all features and operating sequences,
both automatic and manual. Include recommendations for spare parts to be stocked at the site. Provide
the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service organizations that carry stock of repair parts
for the system to be furnished.
I. Submission to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to routine submission of the above material,
make an identical submission to the authorities having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated
Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Upon receipt of
comments from the authorities having jurisdiction, submit them for review. Resubmit if required to
make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval.
J. Record of field tests of system.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced factory -authorized Installer to perform work of this _
Section.
B. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain fire alarm components from a single source who assumes
responsibility for compatibility of system components.
C. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with the applicable building code, local ordinances,
and regulations, and the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. _
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Comply with NFPA 72.
F. Listing and Labeling: Provide fire alarm systems and components specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled by Factory Mutual.
G. Listing and Labeling: Provide systems and equipment specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled. _
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 1 16721 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
F
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Edwards Systems Technology; General Signal Unit.
2. Fire Lite Alarms, Inc.
3. Gamewell Co. (The).
4. Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
5. Notifier; Pitway Corp. Div.
2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. Include the following system functions and operating features plus those additional functions and
features required by the authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Priority of Signals: Accomplish automatic response functions by the first zone initiated. Alarm
functions resulting from initiation by the first zone are not altered by subsequent alarms. The
highest priority is an alarm signal. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third -level
priority. Higher -priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even though the
lower -priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all alarm signals regardless of priority or
order received.
2. Noninterfering: Zone, power, wire, and supervise the system so a signal on one zone does not
prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone. All zones are manually resettable from the
FACP after the initiating device or devices are restored to normal. Systems that require
batteries or battery back-up for the programming function are unacceptable.
3. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) Response: The manual or automatic operation of an alarm -
initiating or supervisory -operating device causes the FACP to transmit an appropriate signal
including the following:
a. General alarm.
b. Smoke detector alarm.
C. Door release.
d. System trouble.
e. Fan shutdown.
4. Transmission to Remote Central Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble
signals to a remote central station service.
5. Silencing at the FACP: Switches provide capability for acknowledgment of alarm, supervisory,
trouble, and other specified signals at the FACP; and capability to silence the local audible
signal and light a light -emitting diode (LED). Subsequent zone alarms cause the audible signal
to sound again until silenced by switch operation. Restoring alarm, supervisory, and trouble
conditions to normal extinguishes the associated LED and causes the audible signal to sound
again until restoration is acknowledged by switch operation.
6. Loss of primary power sounds a trouble signal at the FACP. The FACP indicates when the fire
alarm system is operating on an alternate power supply.
7. Loss of primary power at the FACP sounds a trouble signal at the FACP and the annunciator.
An emergency power light is illuminated at both locations when the system is operating on an
alternate power supply.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 -3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/l/98
8. Annunciation: Manual and automatic operation of alarm- and supervisory -initiating devices is
annunciated both on the FACP and on the annunciator, indicating location and type of device.
9. General Alarm: A system general alarm includes the following:
a. Indicating the general alarm condition at the FACP and the annunciator.
b. Identifying the device that is the source of the alarm (or its zone) at the FACP and the
annunciator.
C. Initiating audible and visible alarm signals throughout the building.
d. Closing fire and smoke doors normally held open by magnetic door holders.
e. Stopping supply and return fans serving zone where alarm is initiated.
f. Initiating transmission of alarm signal to remote central station.
10. Manual station alarm operation initiates a general alarm.
11. Smoke detection initiates a general alarm.
2.3 MANUAL PULL STATIONS
A. Description: Double -action type, fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded,
raised -letter operating instructions of contrasting color.
1. Break -Glass Feature: Stations requiring the breaking of a glass panel are unacceptable. Stations
requiring the breaking of a concealed glass rod are acceptable.
2. Station Reset: Key or wrench operated, double pole, double throw, switch rated for the voltage
and current at which it operates. Stations have screw terminals for connections.
2.4 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General: Comply with UL 268. Include the following features:
B. Ionization -Type Smoke Detector: Multiple -chamber type operating on the ionization principle and
actuated by the presence of invisible products of combustion.
C. Duct Smoke Detector: Ionization type.
1. Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific
duct size and installation conditions where applied.
2. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor -control circuit.
2.5 ALARM -INDICATING DEVICES
A. General: Equip alarm -indicating devices for mounting as indicated. Provide terminal blocks for
system connections.
B. Chimes, High -Level Output: Vibrating type, 81 dB, minimum -rated output.
C. Visual Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens. Mount
lenses on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch high letters on the
lens.
1. Devices have a minimum light output of 115 candela.
2. Devices have a minimum light output as indicated on the Drawings.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 - 4
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1l98
3. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
4. Combination devices consist of factory -combined, audible and visual alarm units in a single
!' mounting assembly.
2.6 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with
matching door plate. Electromagnet operates from a 120-V ac source and requires no more than 3 W to
develop 25-lbf holding force.
B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
2.7 CENTRAL FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
A. General: Comply with UL 864.
B. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange panel so all operations required for testing or for normal
care and maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a
single unit is required to form a complete control panel, provide exactly matching modular unit
enclosures. Accommodate all components and allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels
and field wiring. Identify each enclosure by an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic -resin nameplate.
Lettering on the enclosure's nameplate shall not be less than 1 inch high. Identify individual
components and modules within the cabinets with permanent labels.
C. Systems: Alarm and supervisory systems are separate and independent in the FACP. The alarm -
initiating zone boards in the FACP consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal of field
wiring for module replacement is unacceptable.
D. Control Modules: Types and capacities required to perform all functions of the fire alarm systems.
Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Each type of
audible alarm has a different sound.
E. Zones: Provide for all alarm and supervisory zones indicated.
F. Indicating Lights: Provide individual LED devices for each zone. An LED test switch for each FACP
section illuminates all LED devices on that section of the control panel. Manual toggle test switches or
push test -buttons do not require a key to operate. Alarm and supervisory signals light a red LED of the
associated zone. Trouble signals light an amber LED for the associated zone.
G. Resetting: Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble
signal while the alarm or trouble condition still exists.
1. H. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a lexan plastic or glass cover in a
stainless -steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a location observable from the FACP. Include
interpretation and appropriate response for displays and signals, and briefly describe the functional
operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
2.8 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A. General: Components include valve -regulated, recombinant lead acid battery, charger, and an
automatic transfer switch. Battery nominal life expectancy is 10 years, minimum.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 - 5
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
B. Battery capacity is adequate to operate the complete alarm system in normal or supervisory (nonalarm)
mode for a period of 24 hours. At the end of this period, the battery has sufficient capacity to operate
the system, including alarm -indicating devices in either alarm or supervisory mode, for a period of 15
minutes.
1. Magnetic door holders are not served by emergency power. Magnetic door holders are released
when normal power fails.
C. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable -charging -rate type. Provide capacity for 150
percent of the connected system load while maintaining the batteries at full charge. In the event
batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely within 4 hours. Charger output is
supervised as part of system power supply supervision.
D. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals or status
indications when normal power fails.
2.9 WIRE
A. Wire: Solid -copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color -coded insulation.
1. Low -Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.
2. Line -Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install system according to NFPA standards referenced in Parts 1 and 2 of this Section.
B. Fire Alarm Power Supply Disconnect: Paint red and label "FIRE ALARM." Provide with lockable
handle or cover.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Manual Pull Stations: Mount senvflush in recessed back boxes with operating handles 48 inches above
the finished floor or lower as indicated.
B. Audible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install not less than 80 inches above the finished floor nor Iess than
6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush -mounted back boxes with the device -
operating mechanism concealed behind a grille or as indicated. Combine audible and visual alarms at
the same location into a single unit.
C. Visual Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and not more than
80 inches above the finished floor and at least 6 inches below the ceiling.
D. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 - 6
zl ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
811198
r
r
3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and in hollow
gypsum board partitions. Use cable in ceilings. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished
spaces.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of
the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect
conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm
system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all
connections with approved crimp -on terminal spade lugs, pressure -type terminal blocks, or plug
connectors.
C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment
enclosures where circuit connections are made.
D. Color Coding: Color -code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring.
Use one color code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color code for supervisory circuits. Color -
code audible alarm -indicating circuits differently from alarm -initiating circuits. Use different colors for
visual alarm -indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
E. Wiring to Central -Station Transmitter: 1-inch GRC between the FACP and the central -station
transmitter connection as indicated. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for
connecting wiring as needed to suit central -station monitoring function. Final connections to terminals
in central -station transmitter are made under another contract.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section
"Electrical Identification."
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's instructions to eliminate shock
hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise
pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and
equipment grounding.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory -authorized service representative to
supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment
of the system.
�"' FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 - 7
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/ 1198
B. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete pretesting.
Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the Drawings and
Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items
with new ones and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for
systematic recording of acceptance test results.
C. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is
complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests.
D. Final Test Notice: Provide a 10-day minimum notice in writing when the system is ready for final
acceptance testing.
E. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures outlined in NFPA 72. Minimum
required tests are as follows:
1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation -testing device.
3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit resistance
with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on the record drawings.
4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operation
and maintenance manual.
5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit
conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of the initiating
and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring used.
6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the control
unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.
7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and maintenance
manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at each station, including
making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all communications options. For
each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under
all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator
indications. Observe all voice audio for routing, clarity, quality, freedom from noise and
distortion, and proper volume level.
S. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power system is
capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified.
F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such
deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with
applicable standards.
G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results
in the form of a test log. Submit log upon the satisfactory completion of tests.
H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily completed.
3.7 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marred
finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 - 8
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8/ 1 /98
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to provide startup service and to
demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.
1. . Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and preventive maintenance. Provide a
minimum of 8 hours' training.
2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual as a
training aid.
3. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
3.9 ON -SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide
on -site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to 3 requested adjustment visits to the site for this purpose.
END OF SECTION 16721
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 - 9
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
SECTION 16915 - LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of lighting controls:
1. Time switches.
2. Photoelectric relays.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general component
identification and support requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for lighting control equipment and systems components, including dimensions and data
on features and components. Include wiring diagrams and elevation views of front panels of control
and indicating devices. Include data on ratings
C. Maintenance data for lighting control equipment and systems components to include in the operation
and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed
and labeled by UL where available.
B. Comply with FCC Regulations of Part 15, Subpart J for Class A.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100.
LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 16915 - 1
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/l/98
1.5 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the -.
Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer and Installer agreeing to replace _
programmable lighting control system components that fail in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period.
C. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Time Switches:
a. Grasslin Controls Corp.
b. Intermatic, Inc.
C. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Paragon Electric Co., Inc.
e. Tork, Inc.
f. Zenith Controls, Inc.
2. Photoelectric Relays: _
a. Allen-Bradley Co, Inc.; Industrial Control Group Div.
b. Area Lighting Research, Inc.
C. Control Systems Engineering, Inc.
d. Fisher Pierce.
e. Intermatic, Inc.
f. Paragon Electric Co, Inc.
g. Rhodes: MH Rhodes, Inc. (Ripley Photocontrols).
h. SSAC, Inc.
i. Tork, Inc. _
2.2 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT, GENERAL
A. Include line -voltage surge protection in all solid-state equipment. Comply with UL 1449 and
ANSI C62.41.
B. Load Compatibility: Components compatible with each other and with controlled loads.
LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 16915 - 2
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS `
8/l/98
C. Dimmers and Dimmer Modules: Comply with UL 508.
1. Noise and Radio Frequency Interface (RFI) Suppression: Solid-state dimmers operate smoothly
over their operating ranges without audible lamp noise or RFI at any setting. Modules include
integral or external filters that provide audible noise and RFI suppression.
2. Dimmer or Dimmer Module Rating: As indicated, but not less than 125 percent of connected
load.
2.3 TIME SWITCHES
A. Time Switches: Electromechanical -dial type conforming to UL 917. Include the following features:
1. Astronomic dial.
2. Contacts: 2, rated 30 A at 277 VAC, except as otherwise indicated.
3. Pilot -Duty Contacts: 2. rated 2 A at 240 V, except as otherwise indicated.
4. Eight -Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each day of the week and holidays.
5. Skip -day mode.
2.4 PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
A. Conform to UL 773A.
B. Type: Solid-state, with SPDT dry contacts rated to operate relay or contactor coils to which connected.
C. Time delay prevents false operation.
D. Outdoor Sealed Units: Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped with sun -
glare shield and ice preventer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Mount control equipment according to manufacturers' instructions and Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall -
mounted ones.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods."
LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
16915 - 3
ALLIED ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 8/1/98
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least 7 days' advance notice.
B. Visual and Operational Inspections: Include the following inspections:
1. Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, NRTL labeling, and nameplate
compliance with current Project Drawings.
2. Check tightness of electrical connections with torque wrench calibrated within previous 6
months. Use manufacturer's recommended torque values.'
3. Verify settings of photoelectric devices with photometer calibrated to National Institute for
Science and Technology (NIST) standards within past 6 months.
4. Exercise and perform operational tests on mechanical parts and operable devices according to
manufacturer's instructions for routine functional operation.
C. Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state components.
Perform the following tests according to manufacturer's instructions:
1. Continuity tests of circuits.
2. Operational Tests: Set and operate controls to demonstrate controls in a methodical sequence
that cues and reproduces actual operating functions. Include testing of dimming equipment and
ambient -light, programmable, and occupancy controls under conditions that simulate actual
operational conditions. Record control settings, operations, cues, and functional observations.
D. Correct deficiencies disclosed by inspections and tests, make necessary adjustments, and retest deficient
items. Verify that specified requirements are met.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training: Provide services of a factory -authorized service representative to demonstrate programmable
lighting control system and to train Owner's maintenance personnel.
END OF SECTION 16915
LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 16915 - 4